Spiritual Center- Eisenhower Chapel 11-19-10Spiritual Center- Eisenhower Chapel 11-19-10 PART 1 GENERAL. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES (Delete items below not required for project.) A. Adjustable

Spiritual Center- Eisenhower Chapel 11-19-10

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

(Delete items below not required for project.) A. Adjustable Reinforcement System. B. Masonry Veneer Reinforcement System. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS (Delete any sections below not relevant to this project; add others as required.) A. Section 04210 - Brick Unit Masonry. B. Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry. C. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing. 1.3 REFERENCES (Delete references from the list below that are not actually required by the text of the edited section.) A. ASCE/ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. E. ASTM A 366 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. G. ASTM A 569 - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip


Commercial Quality H. ASTM A 80 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire. I. ASTM A 641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. J. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. K. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System tested and evaluated for Seismic Zones 3 and 4 in accordance with ICBO guidelines and ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. Evaluation Report No. 4882. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements-Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard descriptive literature and printed installation instructions for each specified component. C. Verification Samples: Three samples of each specified component; for linear components, submit three samples, each one foot long. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturer: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; 30 Rasons Court, P.O. Box 5270, Hauppauge, NY 11788-0270; Telephone: (516) 234-0600, FAX: (516) 234-0683. (Delete one of the two paragraphs below; coordinate with Division 01 requirements.) B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. C. Substitutions: Not permitted.


(Article below specifies reinforcement systems for multi-wythe walls having horizontal mortar joints maximum 2-1/4 inches out of alignment.) 2.2 ADJUSTABLE REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM (Delete one of two paragraphs below.)

A. Acceptable product: #180 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-Lok Truss Seismiclip® Interlock System.

B. Acceptable product: #280 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-Lok Ladder Seismiclip® Interlock System. C. Components: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) 1. Truss-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #180 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-Lok Truss. 2. Ladder-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #280 S.I.S. Dub'l Loop-Lok Ladder. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) b. Side rods: 9 gage. c. Side rods: 3/16 inch diameter. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) d. Cross rods: 9 gage. e. Cross rods: 3/16 inch diameter. f. Side rod spacing: 2 inches less than nominal concrete masonry unit width.


(First of following two paragraphs specifies truss-type reinforcement; second paragraph specifies ladder-type. Delete one of the two paragraphs below.) g. Cross rod spacing: Truss type full width of side rod spacing, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. h. Cross rod spacing: 16 inches on center, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. i. Double 3/16 inch diameter welded wire loops, spaced at 16 inches on center; inside loop dimension to provide 1-1/4 inches vertical adjustment of masonry anchor. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) j. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. k. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. (Delete one of two types of masonry ties below.) 3. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Box Byna-tie. b. Rectangular-shape brick anchor, 3/16 inch diameter wire, fitting into wire loops of horizontal joint reinforcement. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 316. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2 f. Length: Required for indicated wall cavity dimension. (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) g. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip at center of tie length.


4. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Bent-Box Byna-tie. b. Rectangular-shape brick anchor, 3/16 inch diameter wire, fitting into wire loops of horizontal joint reinforcement, bent to form 1 inch offset, providing additional 1 inch of vertical coursing adjustment. c. Projection: Required for indicated wall cavity dimension. (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) d. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) e. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. f. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. 5. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #187-A Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage wire and three retaining ridges to secure 3/16 inch diameter wire, grooved base for improved mortar bond. 6. Joint reinforcement wire: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) a. Wire size: 9 gage. b. Wire size: 3/16 inch diameter.


(Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. f. Length 10 feet minimum continuous piece length. (Delete paragraph below if no rigid cavity insulation.) 7. Rigid insulation retainer: a. Acceptable product: Loop-Lok Washer. b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) clip-type retainer for rigid board insulation; attaches to loop wires on horizontal joint reinforcement. (Article below specifies reinforcement systems for multi-wythe walls having aligning horizontal mortar joints, where restriction of vertical movement is required.) 2.3 ADJUSTABLE REINFORCEMENTS SYTEMS (Delete one of two paragraphs below.)

A. Acceptable product: #175 S.I.S. Dub'l Eye Lok Truss Seismiclip® Interlock System.

B. Acceptable product: #275 S.I.S. Dub'l Eye Lok Ladder Seismiclip® Interlock System. C. Components: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) 1. Truss-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #175 Dub'l Eye-Lok Truss.


2. Ladder-type horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete masonry unit walls: a. Acceptable product: #275 Dub'l Eye-Lok Ladder. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) b. Side rods: 9 gage. c. Side rods: 3/16 inch diameter. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) d. Cross rods: 9 gage. e. Cross rods: 3/16 inch diameter. f. Side rod spacing: 2 inches less than nominal concrete masonry unit width. (First of following two paragraphs specifies truss-type reinforcement; second paragraph specifies ladder-type. Delete one of the two paragraphs below.) g. Cross rod spacing: Truss type full width of side rod spacing, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. h. Cross rod spacing: 16 inches on center, butt-welded to side rods at each contact point. i. Double 3/16 inch diameter welded wire eyes, spaced at 16 inches on center. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) j. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. k. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. 3. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Box Byna-tie. b. Rectangular-shape brick anchor, 3/16 inch diameter wire, fitting into wire eyes of horizontal joint reinforcement.


(Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Length: Required for indication wall cavity dimension. (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) f. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip. 4. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #187-A Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage wire and three retaining ridges to secure 3/16 inch diameter wire, grooved base for improved mortar bond. 5. Joint reinforcement wire: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) a. Wire size: 9 gage. b. Wire size: 3/16 inch diameter. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. f. Length: 10 feet minimum continuous piece length.


(Delete paragraph below if no rigid cavity insulation.) 6. Rigid insulation retainer: a. Acceptable product: Loop-Lok Washer. b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) clip-type retainer for rigid board insulation; attaches to eye wires on horizontal joint reinforcement. (Article below specifies anchoring system for metal stud and sheathing substrate, with or without cavity insulation.) 2.4 MASONRY VENEER REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM

A. Acceptable product: DW-10-X Seismiclip Interlock System. B. Components: 1. Formed metal veneer anchor having double-pointed legs to penetrate rigid insulation and sheathing for direct contact with steel stud framing, formed vertical slot for adjustable masonry wire ties, screw attachment to framing. a. Acceptable product: DW-10-X Veneer Anchor. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) b. Metal: stainless steel sheet, ASTM A 167, Type 304, finish 2B. c. Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. d. Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Class G60. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.)


e. Metal thickness: 14 gage. f. Metal thickness: 12 gage. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) g. Screw hole size: 1/4 inch diameter. h. Screw hole size: 5/16 inch diameter. i. Leg lengths: Sizes for indicated sheathing and insulation thicknesses. 2. Masonry wall tie: a. Acceptable product: Byna-tie. b. Trapezoid-shape brick tie, fitting into vertical slot of veneer anchor. (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) c. Wire size: 3/16 inch diameter. d. Wire size: 1/4 inch diameter. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) e. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. f. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. g. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641. h. Length: Required for indicated wall cavity dimension. (Delete paragraph below if cavity drip not required.) i. Deform wall tie to provide cavity drip.


(Delete one of two paragraphs below.) 3. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #187 Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage continuous wire and three retaining ridges to secure alternate 3/16 inch diameter continuous wire and 3/16 inch diameter Byna-tie, grooved base for improved mortar bond. 4. Reinforcement retaining clip: a. Acceptable product: #250 Seismiclip. b. Extruded rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with one retaining ridge to secure 9 gage continuous wire, one retaining ridge to secure alternate 3/16 inch continuous wire and two retaining ridges to secure 1/4 inch diameter Byna-tie, grooved base for improved mortar bond. 5. Joint reinforcement wire: (Delete one of two paragraphs below.) a. Wire size: 9 gage. b. Wire size: 3/16 diameter. (Delete wire types below not required for project. Hot-dip galvanizing is minimum for ASCE/ACI 530.1 requirements.) c. Wire: Stainless steel, ASTM A 580, Type 304. d. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B2. e. Wire: Steel, ASTM A 82, mill galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. f. Length: 10 feet minimum continuous piece length.


(Delete paragraph below if not required for project.) 6. Sealing tape: a. Acceptable product: Textroseal. b. Meet requirements of ASTM D 412 and ASTM E 96. c. 40 mil thick multi-ply polyethylene/polymer modified asphalt, self-sealing; adhesive backed, 2-1/2 inches wide, 50 feel roll length. (Delete one of two fastener types below.) 7. Fasteners: a. Self-drilling self-tapping screws; hex washer head, size #10 - 16, lengths required for indicated insulation and sheathing thicknesses. b. Metal: Zinc-coated steel. c. Metal: Polymer-coated steel. d. Metal: Stainless steel, Type 410. 8. Fasteners: a. Self-drilling self-tapping screws; hex washer head, size #12, lengths required for indicated insulation and sheathing thicknesses. b. Acceptable product: SX Fastener stainless steel Type 300, manufactured by SFS Stadler. c. Metal: Stainless steel shank, carbon steel point. (Delete paragraph below if not required for project.) d. Provide neoprene sealing washers.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine project conditions before beginning installation of masonry reinforcement systems components. B. Do not proceed with installation of vinyl products until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Concrete unit masonry installation is specified in Section 04240. B. Brick masonry installation is specified in Section 04220. C. Install masonry reinforcement system components in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. D. Adjustable Reinforcement System: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement for concrete unit masonry walls at 16 inches OC vertically and at masonry course above headers of openings, extending reinforcement minimum 8 inches past opening at each jamb. (Delete paragraph below if no rigid board insulation.) 2. Secure rigid insulation in place with rigid insulation retainer at each masonry wall tie connector location on horizontal joint reinforcement. 3. Install masonry wall tie at each masonry wall tie connector location on horizontal joint reinforcement; install ties as exterior wythe of masonry construction progresses. 4. Set reinforcement retaining clip in full mortar bed at each masonry wall tie location; secure tie wires in correct size ridges. 5. Secure continuous masonry joint reinforcement wire in correct size ridge in reinforcement retaining clip. E. Masonry Veneer Reinforcement System: (Delete paragraph below if sealing tape not specified in Part 2.)


1. Install sealing tape at stud locations to receive veneer anchors; install tape vertically, continuous full stud length. 2. Install veneer anchors at stud locations; 16 inches OC vertically, 16 inches OC horizontally. 3. Screw-attach veneer anchor to stud face; ensure full contact of veneer anchor legs with stud face. 4. Install masonry wall tie at each veneer anchor location; install ties as exterior wythe of masonry construction progresses. 5. Set reinforcement retaining clip in full mortar bed at each masonry wall tie location; secure tie wires in correct size ridges. 6. Secure continuous masonry joint reinforcement wire in correct size ridge in reinforcement retaining clip. END OF SECTION

PSU FOOD SCIENCE/ 11-19-10 03 93 00 CONCRETE REHABILITATION

SECTION 03930 CONCRETE REHABILITATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Concrete restoration and maintenance; structural crack-injection systems.

Specifier Note: Revise paragraph below to suit project requirements. Add section numbers and titles per CSI MasterFormat and specifier's practice.

B. Related Sections:

Specifier Note: Article below may be omitted when specifying manufacturer's proprietary products and recommended installation. Retain Reference Article when specifying products and installation by an industry reference standard. If retained, list standard(s) referenced in this section. Indicate issuing authority name, acronym, standard designation and title. Establish policy for indicating edition date of standard referenced. Conditions of the Contract or Division 1 References Section may establish the edition date of standards. This article does not require compliance with standard, but is merely a listing of references used. Article below should list only those industry standards referenced in this section. Retain only those reference standards to be used within the text of this Section. Add and delete as required for specific project.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C881/C881M Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 503.1 Standard Specification for Bonding Hardened Concrete Steel, Wood, Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive.

2. ACI 503.2 Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive.

3. ACI 503.3 Standard Specification for Producing a Skid-Resistant Surface on Concrete by the Use of a Multi-Component Epoxy System.

4. ACI 503.4 Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars.

C. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1. ISO 9001 Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance.

Specifier Note: Article below should be restricted to statements describing design or performance requirements and functional (not dimensional) tolerances of a complete system. Limit descriptions to composite and operational properties required to link components of a system together and to interface with other systems.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Provide products and systems that have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to the following criteria:

1. Comply with ASTM C881.

2. Comply with ACI 503. [1] [2] [3] [4].

Specifier Note: Article below includes submittal of relevant data to be furnished by Contractor before, during, or after construction. Coordinate this article with Architect's and Contractor's duties and responsibilities in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product data for specified products.

C. Quality Assurance:

1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.


3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with Part 3 Field Quality Requirements Article. Retain or delete as applicable.

D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Manufacturer's field reports specified herein.

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to

that required for this project. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction

and approving application method.

Specifier Note: Paragraph below should list obligations for compliance with specific code requirements particular to this section. General statements to comply with a particular code are typically addressed in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Regulatory Requirements Section. Repetitive statements should be avoided. Current data on building code requirements and product compliance may be obtained from Abatron technical support specialists.

B. Provide concrete restoration and maintenance system and/or structural crack-injection system that complies with the following requirements:

1. ASTM C881. 2. A C I 5 0 3 . [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] .

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below for erected assemblies (either onsite or offsite) required for review of construction, coordination of work of several sections, testing or observation of operation. Mock-ups, when accepted or approved, establish standards by which work will be judged. Coordinate below with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section.

C. Mock-Ups: Install at project site job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner's and Architect's acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standard. Comply with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section.

Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below to specifying mock-up size.

1. Mock-Up Size: [Specify mock-up size.] sample panel at jobsite at location as directed.

2. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required.

3. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner's approval.

D. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings).

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Safety Material Data Sheets: Comply with requirements.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Conditions of the Contract and with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Warranty).

1.08 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty. Manufacturer's warranty


is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with manufacturer's warranty requirements.

C. Warranty Period: [Specify term.] years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Specifier Note: Retain article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance characteristics, material standards and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as "or equal" or "or approved equal" or similar phrases may cause ambiguity in specifications. Such phrases require verification (procedural, legal and regulatory) and assignment of responsibility for determining "or equal" products.

2.01 CONCRETE RESTORATION AND MAINTENANCE EPOXY COMPOUND

A. Manufacturer: Abatron, Inc.

1. Contact: 5501 95th Ave., Kenosha, WI 53144; Telephone: (800) 445-1754, (262) 653-2000; Fax: (262) 653-2019; E-mail: info(@,abatron.com; website: www.abatron.com.

B. Proprietary Products/Systems:

1. Epoxy Patching and Resurfacing Compound: ABOCRETE.

a. Compliance: ACI 503.1; ASTM C881, Types 1 and 3, Grade 3, Class 3. b. Tensile Strength: 9,000 psi (62 MPa) (633 kg/cm²). c. Flexural Strength: 10,500 psi (72 MPa) (738 kg/cm²) d. Compressive Strength: 12,000 psi (83 MPa) (847 kg/cm²).

e. Components: Epoxy resin, liquid hardener, sand.

f. Ratio by Volume: 4/1.

g. Color: [Neutral] [Light gray] [Dark gray] [Custom] [ ].

Specifier Note: Hardening time varies depending on the temperature, thickness, amount of aggregate and other variables. Consult manufacturer for specific installation hardening times.

h. Hardening Time: 1 - 6 hours.

Specifier Note: As a finish option, before ABOCRETE hardens, clear silica sand or opaque quartz sand particles (Decorative ColorGrit) may be broadcast onto the surface providing additional color, texture and slip resistance.

i. Finish: [Silica sand] [Decorative ColorGrit; color: {As selected} {Custom} {gm-_____}].

Specifier Note: For cold/subfreezing weather or wet surfaces, ABOCRETE can be blended with AboCure 7912-1. Consult manufacturer for mixing ratios.

j. Cold Weather Hardener: AboCure 7912-1.

k. Sand: [As provided by Abatron] [_____].

l. Aggregates: Type [Grit] [Chips] [Pebbles] [Gravel] [Rocks] [Fiberglass] [Fabrics].

Specifier Note: Select AboWeld 55-1 for building up on vertical surfaces without forms or molds.

2. Epoxy Adhesive Paste: AboWeld 55-1.

a. Compliance: ASTM C881, Type 1 and 3, Grade 3, Class C.

b. Features: No slump, thixotropic.

c. Composition: 100% solids.

d. Ratio by Volume: 1/1.

e. Pot Life: 1 hour. f. Hardening Time: 1 - 6 hours at room temperature.

g. Color: [Gray] [Custom] [ ----------- ]

Specifier Note: For cold/subfreezing weather or wet surfaces, 2 parts by volume AboWeld 55-1 can be mixed with 1 volume of AboCure

55-1 CLD.

h. Cold Weather Hardener: AboCure 55-1 CLD,

Specifier Note: Select AboWeld 8708-2 for fast hardening, filling or sealing of nonmoving cracks and holes prior to injection.


3. Adhesive Patching Paste: AboWeld 8708-2.

a. Compliance: ASTM C881, Type 1, Grade 3, Class B and C.

b. Features: Fast hardening, no slump.

c. Composition: 100% solids.

d. Ratio by Volume: 1/1.

e. Pot Life: 10 - 15 minutes. f. Hardening Time: 10 - 20 minutes.

g. Finished Blended Color: Gray.

Specifier Note: Select AboCast 8005-6 for bonding between wet-poured concrete and old concrete. Product is extendable with fillers like sand, gravel or chips.

4. Bonding Agent: AboCast 8005-6.

a. Compliance: ASTM C881, Type 1, 2 and 3, Grade 2, Class B and C.

b. Features: Ease of application; chemical resistant.

c. Filler: [Sand] [Gravel] [Chips].

d. Composition: 100% epoxy solids.

e. Ratio by Volume: 7/3.

f. Working Life: 30 - 40 minutes.

g. Hardening Time: 30 minutes - 3 hours.

Specifier Note: Select AboCast 8007-2 for filling joints and cracks in exposed structures, repairing cracks between concrete and steel, sealing framed openings.

5. Sealant/Joint Filler: AboCast 8007-2.

a. Compliance: ASTM C881, Type 1, 2 and 3, Grade 3, Class B and C.

b. Features: Acid, alkali, fuel resistant; weather and waterproof; wet surface friendly.

c. Characteristics: Heavy duty, high adhesion.

Specifier Note: Resin and hardener can be mixed in varying ratios to increase flexibility.

d. Flexibility: Medium; elongation 40%.

e. Composition: 2-part, polysulfide-epoxy; 100% solids.

f. Ratio by Volume: 1/1.

g. Pot Life: 30 - 40 minutes.

Specifier Note: Hardening time varies depending on mass and temperature. Consult manufacturer for specific installation hardening times.

h. H a r d e n i n g T im e : 1 - 2 4 ho u r s .

i. Hardening Temperature: Above 32 degrees F (1 degree C).

j. Thixotropic Cured Hardness: Shore D < 55.

k. Tensile Strength: 1900 psi (13,098 kPa).

Specifier Note: Select the Abatron AboJet crack injection system to restore monolithic integrity to a cracked structural element.

2.02 STRUCTURAL CRACK REPAIR

A. Structural Crack Injection System: AboJet:

1. Compliance: ASTM C881.

2. Tensile Strength: 5000 - 11,000 psi (35 - 76 MPa).

3. Flexural Strength: 5000 - 13,000 psi (35 - 90 MPa).

4. Compressive Strength: 8000 - 16,000 psi (55 - 110 MPa).

B. Crack Injection Resins:

Specifier Note: Select AboJet-1 for general purpose, dry and wet surfaces.

1. AboJet-1:


a. Compliance: ASTM C881, Type 1, Grade 2, Class C.

b. Viscosity: Medium, 20 poises.

c. Resin/Hardener Ratio: 2/1.

Specifier Note: Select AboJet-2 for freezing weather and underwater or wet surfaces.

2. AboJet-2:

a. Compliance: ACI 503; ASTM C881.

b. Viscosity: Low, < 5 poises.

c. Resin/Hardener Ratio: 2/1.

d. Limitations: Toxic, exterior use only.

Specifier Note: Select AboJet 8610-1 for very thin cracks.

3. AboJet 8610-1:

a. Viscosity: Very low, < 2 poises.

b. Resin/Hardener Ratio: 5/1.

Specifier Note: Select AboJet 8610-2 for thin cracks < 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

4. AboJet 8610-2:

a. Viscosity: Low, < 5 poises.


Specifier Note: Select AboJet 8610-3 for average cracks < 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

5. AboJet 8610-3:

a. Viscosity: Medium, < 15 poises.


Specifier Note: Select AboJet 8702-3 for wider cracks > 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

6. AboJet 8702-3:

a. Viscosity: Higher, < 60 poises.


Specifier Note: Edit article below to suit project requirements. If substitutions are permitted, edit text below. Add text to refer to Division 1 Project Requirements (Product Substitutions Procedures) Section.

2.03 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

Specifier Note: Article below is an addition to the CSI SectionFormat . Revise article below to suit project requirements and specifier's practice.

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions.

3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions, which have either been previously installed under other

sections, or that existing site conditions, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 PROTECTION A. Other Trades: Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.04 PREPARATION

Specifier Note: Areas exhibiting "laitance" (deceptively sound-looking surface of new concrete) must be removed with sandblasting or 10 - 15% muriatic acid etch. Some contamination or tough coating can be removed with flame. Sandblasting is preferred whenever practical. Consult manufacturer's technical literature or contact manufacturer for comprehensive preparation instructions.


A. Surface Preparation: Concrete Restoration:

1. [ABOCRETE] [AboWeld 55-1] [AboWeld 8708-2] [AboCast 8005-6] [AboCast 8007-2].

a. Remove oil, grease, wax, old paint [Areas exhibiting laitance] with [Detergents, solvents or strippers] [Sandblasting] [Flame] [10 - 15% muriatic acid etch].

b. Rinse, dry and vacuum affected area.

c. Deepen and widen thin cracks to allow filling with grout.

Specifier Note: Use the following article if muriatic acid etch is specified as a cleaner.

d. Rinse well; neutralize with soda-ash solution and rinse well.

B. Surface Preparation: Structural Crack Repair:

1. [AboJet-1] [AboJet-2] [AboJet 8610-1] [AboJet 8610-2] [AboJet 8610-3] [AboJet 8702-3].

a. Clean crack with [Water jet] [Compressed air] [______] to render crack free and accessible.

b. Remove oil, grease, wax, old paint with [Detergents, solvents or strippers] [Flame] from crack.

3.05 MIXING

Specifier Note: In warm conditions, if all of the resin and hardener (provided in kit by Abatron) are mixed at one time, they may harden too quickly. In such conditions, or when smaller quantities are required, small amounts of resin and hardener should be mixed in the ratio indicated on the can label in a small container to avoid too fast hardening. Consult manufacturer's technical literature or contact manufacturer for comprehensive mixing instructions.

A. Mixture: Concrete Restoration:


a. Pour resin and hardener in pail in accordance with manufacturer's recommended ratio.

b. Mix thoroughly.

Specifier Note: The sand provided with the product is the grade used most often, but finer or coarser sand, grit, chips, pebbles or gravel can be chosen to suit particular requirements. The addition of sand and aggregates is recommended, especially in thicker sections, to reduce the coefficient of thermal expansion differences between resin and substratum. Thicker layers of unfilled resin may separate or crack due to higher contraction/expansion in cold and warm weather. Excess of sand can proportionately reduce tensile and flexural strength.

c. Add [Provided] [Specified] sand to quantities [As recommended by manufacturer] [As directed by Architect { ----------------- }] [Specified] after 2 - 3 minutes of mixing.

Specifier Note: Fibrous fillers such as fiberglass or fabrics improve tensile and flexural properties. Rocks can be used as fillers, preferably graded with gravel and sand, in larger cavities and cracks.

d. Add [Fiberglass] [Fabric] [Rock] fillers in quantities as [Recommended by manufacturer] [Directed by Architect { ----------------- }] [Specified], mix thoroughly.

e. Add [Dry concrete powder] [Color pigments] while stirring.

Specifier Note: Special handling or special formulations are available for very high or very low (even subfreezing) temperatures. Consult the manufacturer for specific installations outside of the normal temperatures of application.

f. Blend in [AboCure 7912-1] [Manufacturer recommended additive] in ratios as recommended by manufacturer.

Specifier Note: For thin layer applications, an induction period (the blend must rest in the mixing container for a period of time before use) is recommended. This allows the resin/hardener reaction to progress to the point that the ambient moisture or CO 2 cannot affect it and cause incomplete "oily" hardening. When the atmosphere is dry, or when heat is used for curing, or where ABOCRETE blend is applied thick, the induction period is not necessary.

g. Induction Period: 5 - 10 minutes.

B. Mixture: Structural Crack Control:


Specifier Note: AboJet resins are sold in cans, pails or drums. AboJet 8610-1, 8610-2, 8610-3 and 8702-3 are also sold in compartmented 10 fl oz cartridges. The cartridges are syringe-type containers that hold the resin and the hardener separated by a diaphragm connected with a plunger that is pressed to break the diaphragm and mix the resin and hardener without opening the cartridge. Select the dispensing method appropriate to the task.

a. Measure and mix by hand resin and hardener in pail in accordance with manufacturer's recommended ratio.

b. Mix and dispense prepackaged and pre-proportioned resin and hardener with specialized pump.

c. Mix manufacturer premeasured containers of resin and hardener.


d. Mix resin and hardener in premeasured compartmented cartridge with mixing plunger.

3.06 APPLICATION

Specifier Note: AboSolv can be added in any concentration to the ABOCRETE blend for use as a thin primer coating. The unfilled resin/hardener blend can be diluted 2/1,1/1 or 1/2 with AboSolv and so rolled, brushed or sprayed as a primer for solventless (filled or unfilled) resin/hardener blend. For thick coating or patches, no more than 5 - 6% solvent is recommended. Consult manufacturer's technical literature or contact manufacturer for comprehensive application instructions.

A. Primer Coating:


Specifier Note: Refer to manufacturer's recommendations for prime coat requirements specific to each product.

a. Dilute ABOCRETE blend with AboSolv [2/1] [1/1] [1/2] [As recommended by manufacturer] [As directed by Architect { ----------------- }] [No greater than 5 - 6%].

Specifier. Note: A primer is not necessary with AboWeld 55-1. However, on surfaces that are too porous or difficult to wet, PrimKote 8006-1 can be used to ensure best adhesion.

b. Prime with PrimKote 8006-1. 2. [Roll] [Brush] [Spray] primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Application: Concrete Restoration:


Specifier Note: In general, the larger the bulk, the faster the hardening. The thinner the layer, the slower the hardening. The higher the temperature, the faster the hardening. The lower the temperature, the slower the hardening. Normal temperatures of application are between 60 degrees F - 85 degrees F (15 - 29 degrees C).

a. Ensure temperature of application is [> 60 degrees F (15 degrees C) and < 85 degrees F (29 degrees C)] [ ---------------

degrees F ( -------------- degrees C)].

Specifier Note: A blend with sand, gravel or aggregate can be spread, troweled, poured or cast into forms. A blend without sand can be poured, spread, brushed or sprayed.

b. [Spread] [Trowel] [Pour] [Cast into forms] [Brush] [Spray] blend in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Specifier Note: Use the following article for a non-slip floor application.

c. Broadcast sand onto surface to cover resin completely; sweep off excess sand after resin hardens.

d. Allow application to harden.

Specifier Note: Curing is called the completed reaction, or the progression toward the point at which the optimum properties (rigidity, physical strength, chemical and heat resistance) have been reached. After hardening, the curing reaction continues for days or weeks, by itself, at room temperature, or it can be accelerated to a few hours or a few minutes depending on the product and application with heating.

C. Application: Structural Crack Repair:


Specifier Note: Vertical surfaces will require injection ports; for horizontal surfaces the process may be a filling procedure by pouring or troweling, so that ports and caulking guns may not be needed.

a. If backside of wall is exposed, seal cracked surface along backside of [Wall] [ -------------- ] with [AboWeld 55-1] [ ------------- ]

to contain AboJet injected from front side.

b. Predrill holes for insertion of injection ports.

c. Insert 2 inch - 3 inch (51 - 76 mm) long x 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter copper tubing sections or plastic ports (injection ports) into crack on front side of wall starting from bottom of crack every 8 inches - 12 inches (203 - 305 mm).

d. Seal crack around ports and between them with [AboWeld 55-1] [AboWeld 8708-2].

Specifier Note: Blending fillers such as sand with the resin/hardener mix before injecting is useful for larger cracks (wider than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)) to compensate for the different coefficients of thermal expansion between the resin and surrounding material.

e. Mix in fillers to resin/hardener blend.

f. Inject blend through lowest port, until resin starts oozing from port above that.


g. Crimp lowest port shut to prevent resin backflow, and inject resin through next port above, until resin starts oozing from port above that.

h. Crimp second port, inject resin through port above it, repeat process until no resin can be injected.

i. [Sand] [Finish] crack surface when surface hardens.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Specifier Note: Use the following Articles only when manufacturer's field services are desired to verify the quality of the installed components. Establish the number and duration of periodic site visits required by Manufacturer and specify below. Consult Manufacturer for services required. Delete if field services are not required.

A. Written Reports: Have manufacturer of products supplied under this Section review Work involved in handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning of its product[s], and submit written reports in acceptable format to verify compliance of Work with Contract.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Schedule site visits to review Work at stages listed:

1. After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work on which Work of this Section depends is complete, but before installation begins.

2. [Twice] during progress of Work at [25%] and [60%] complete.

3. Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.

D. Obtain reports within [Three] days of review and submit. 3.08 TESTING & VERIFICATION

A. Perform tests recommended and required by manufacturer to verify required performance of products. 3.09 COMPLETION & CLEANUP

A. Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION REV. 062609

Project Name / 92-07 / 10-6-92 04 05 13 - 1 Masonry Mortar

SECTION 04 05 13

MASONRY MORTAR

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Mortar for unit masonry and stone veneer.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry: Mortar for concrete unit masonry.

B. Section 04 43 00 – Stone Veneer: Mortar for natural stone veneer.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C150 – Portland Cement.

B. ASTM C144 – Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

C. ASTM C207 – Hydrated Lime for Masonry Mortar

D. ASTM C270 – Mortar for Unit Masonry

E. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 65 00.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 66 00.

C. Protect cement from moisture and humidity

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC requirements.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 10 degrees C (40 degrees F) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

Masonry Mortar 04 05 13 - 2 Project Name / 92-07 / 10-6-92

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Normal – Type I, white color for facebrick and grey color for common brick

B. Mortar aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean dry; protected from dampness, freezing, or foreign matter.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

D. Water: Clean and potable.

E. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; chocolate brown color; “Great Stuff” manufactured by Acme Manufacturing Co. Ltd.

2.02 MIXES

A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S, using proportion method.

B. Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N, using proportion method.

2.03 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270.

B. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar in conjunction with Sections 04 20 00 and 04 43 00.


A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00.

END OF SECTION

FOOD SCIENCE 11/19/10 04 05 19 SMOOTH FACE CMU

SECTION 04 05 19

SMOOTH FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUBMITTAL Submit color samples for selection from manufacturer's standard series or for colors indicated on construction drawings. Submit product literature, certifications, test reports and full-size samples of each color specified.

QUALITY ASSURANCE Certifications: Split Face blocks shall conform to ASTM C90, Type 1. Field Constructed Mock-ups: Construct a sample panel, approximately 4'x 4' or per instruction from architect, of each color and size to be used in the project.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PREMIER LINE™ units shall be delivered to the job-site on heavy-duty wooden pallets and with shrink or stretch-wrapped covering over the entire package. Store pallets (single stacked) on level ground and cover with waterproof tarpaulins to protect pallets of block from the weather. Handle the units with ordinary care to prevent chips and breakage to the faces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Split Face or Smooth Face Units as indicated on plans are to be PREMIER LINE™ units by:

E. Dillon & Company P.O. Box 160 Swords Creek, VA 24649 Toll-Free: (800) 234-8970 Fax: (276) 873-5688 Web site: http://www.edillon.com

WATER REPELLENCY All split face or smooth face units shall be manufactured using an integral liquid polymeric water-repellent admixture. This admixture shall be introduced into the concrete mix in doses proven to render the units permanently water-repellent.

On all exterior walls the use of a matching integral liquid polymeric water-repellent admixture for the mortar shall be used.

When both admixtures are used properly, non-dispersible films formed in the units and within the mortar provide controlled absorption to render the masonry: 1) permanently water-repellent 2) assure adequate and more consistent bond strength 3) minimize both primary and secondary efflorescence.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

LAYING MASONRY WALLS Lay units with care to use the best masonry practices. Install only quality units; reject any defective units...call manufacturer at once if units are suspected to be defective. Align units level, plumb and true with uniform carefully tooled 3/8" mortar joints.

FOOD SCIENCE 11/19/10 04 05 19 SMOOTH FACE CMU

INSTALLATION Lighting: Install masonry with lighting adequate to simulate the lighting that will exist after the project is completed. Cutting: Cut units carefully and neatly where required for bonding, junction boxes, jambs, etc.

INSPECTION The split or smooth faces of the units shall be free from chips, cracks, crazes or any other imperfection that would detract from the overall appearance of the finished wall when viewed from a distance of twenty (20) feet at right angles to the wall with normal lighting.

FLASHING OF MASONRY Install flashing as indicated by construction drawings and details and in accordance with the best masonry practices.

WEEP HOLES AND VENTS Install weep holes and vents at proper intervals (above head joints 32" O.C. and 2" long typical) at courses above grade, above flashing, and over doors, windows and beams.

POINTING Tuckpoint the false joints (scores) of PREMIER LINE™ scored split face or smooth face concrete masonry units to make the scores more closely match the head joints.

CLEANING (IN PROGRESS AND FINAL) Keep walls as clean as possible during work in progress. Avoid using brushes, rags, etc. on mortar that is not fully dry. Contact the manufacturer (E. Dillon & Company) for final clean-down instruction which include the use of Sure Klean custom masonry cleaner, water pressure and numerous precautions to avoid damage to the wall during clean-down.

MAINTENANCE PREMIER LINE™ Split Face Units when properly installed and cleaned need very little or no maintenance. Cleaning when required, should first be done with appropriately diluted standard commercial or household cleaning agents.

Penn Stater 11-19-2010 04 05 23 Thru-Wall Flashing

SECTION 04 05 23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES

DuPontTM Thru-Wall Flashing

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. High Performance Flashing Membrane

1. DuPont™ Thru-Wall Surface Adhered Membrane with Integrated Drip Edge

B. Preformed Inside Corners, Outside Corners, and End Dams

C. Accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International

1. ASTM C 920: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM D 146: Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing

Bitumen-Saturated Felts and Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing.

3. ASTM D 412: Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.

4. ASTM D 471: Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Effect of Liquids.

5. ASTM D 624: Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section [01 33 00 Submittal Procedures] [Insert section number and title].

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each type of product.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item and large-scale details.

D. Samples: Each type of product specified. [4 inches by 4 inches] [Insert size].

E. Quality Assurance Submittals


(Specifier Note: DELETE Design Data, Test Report submittal requirements when propriety specification is used and can be held. MAINTAIN Design Data, Test Report submittal requirement when other products may be submitted as substitutions.)

1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements.

2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.


A. Qualifications

1. Installer shall have documented successful experience with installation of DuPont TM flashing system under similar conditions.

2. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3. Preinstallation conference: Conduct conference at project site.

(Specifier Note: Mock-ups are recommended for all projects using DuPont TM flexible flashings. Mock-up requirement will likely be included in the specification section for the wall cladding and/or windows. Include flashing as part of the required mock-up.)

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Section [01 60 00 Product Requirements] [Insert section number and title].

B. Deliver flexible flashing materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store flexible flashing materials as recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS


B. Do not apply flexible flashing on wet or damp surfaces.

C. Apply to surfaces free of dirt, oils, lubricants and other debris.

D. Install flexible flashing materials at temperatures above 32 degrees F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


(Specifier Note: Product information is proprietary to DuPont. If additional products are required for competitive procurement, contact DuPont for assistance.)

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. DuPont; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1-800-44-TYVEK (8-9835); http://construction.tyvek.com

2.2 HIGH PERFORMANCE FLASHING MEMBRANE

A. Thru-Wall Surface Adhered Membrane with Integrated Drip Edge.

1. Basis of Design: Self-adhering flexible flashing membrane is based on DuPont Thru-Wall Flashing.

2. Description: 40-mil composite flashing membrane. 25-mil top surface is comprised of DuPont’s Elvaloy KEE polymer and elastomeric ingredients, reinforced with polyester fibers. 15-mils of butyl adhesive is applied to the bottom surface with a disposable silicone release sheet. 1½-inch of 25-mil top surface is without butyl adhesive to provide a sealant compatible drip edge.

a. Color: gray b. Dimensions

1) Width: [12 inches] [18 inches] [24 inches] [36 inches] [Insert custom width]

2) Length: 75 feet

3. Performance Characteristics

a. Elongation: 175% (ASTM D412) b. Tensile Strength: 600 lbs/in min (ASTM D412) c. Tear Strength: 50 lbs/in min (ASTM D624) d. Low Temperature Flexibility: 0° F Pass (ASTM D146) e. Water Absorption: Less than 0.1% (ASTM D471) f. Compatible with Urethane and Silicone sealant. g. UV stable

2.3 PREFORMED CORNERS AND END DAMS

(Specifier Note: DELETE products not required for project.)

A. Pre-formed Corners and End Dams: Standard three dimensional shapes as indicated on the Drawings to form a complete flashing system with preformed corners and end dams, provided by flashing sheet manufacturer.

http://construction.tyvek.com/


1. Surface Adhered: [External corners] [Internals corners] [End dams]

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer:

1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing

(Specifier Note: Products listed below are only recommendations for inclusion when required and should be EDITED for specific project.)

2. Products:

a. 3M High Strength 90 b. Denso Butyl Spray

(Specifier Note: SIA product meets California VOC requirements as of this printing.)

c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 e. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer

B. Sealants

(Specifier Note: Sealants compatible with flexible flashing may be specified in this section or in Division 07 sealants section. MAINTAIN first paragraph and DELETE remaining paragraphs when sealants are specified in Division 07.)

1. Refer to Section [07 92 00 Joint Sealants] [Insert section number and title]. OR

2. Provide sealant that complies with ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions.

(Specifier Note: Sealant products listed below have been tested for compatibility and intermittent contact with DuPont™ flexible flashing. EDIT for specific project as appropriate when sealants are specified within this section.)

3. Urethane Modified Acrylic Products: a. DuPont™ Commercial Sealant

4. Silicone Products:

a. Dow Corning® - [790; 1200 Prime Coat] [791; 1200 Prime Coat] [795; 1205 Prime Coat]

b. GE Silicones - Silpruf; SS4179 c. Pecora – [890] [895] d. Tremco – Spectrum 2; #20


e. Sealants recommended by the flashing manufacturer.

5. Urethane Products:

a. SIKA – Sikaflex-la; #449 b. Sonneborn – Sonolastic NP1; #733 c. Tremco – [Dymonic; #6 or #17] [Dymeric 511; #17]

(Specifier Note: COORDINATE fasteners and seam tape listed below with weather barrier sections and installations below. DELETE when not used in PART 3 or when specified in weather barrier section.)

C. Fasteners:

(Specifier Note: Fasteners are dependent upon substrate construction. More than one type of fastener may be required on a single project, REVIEW construction conditions and DELETE fasteners that are unnecessary.)

1. (Specifier Note: Steel Frame Construction) Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws, as manufactured by DuPont: 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap fasteners.

AND/OR 2. (Specifier Note: Wood Frame Construction) Tyvek® Wrap Caps, as

manufactured by DuPont: [#4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners] [1-inch minimum plastic cap staple with a 7/8” minimum staple length].

AND/OR 3. (Specifier Note: Masonry Construction) Masonry tap-con fasteners with

Tyvek® Wrap Caps as manufactured by DuPont: 2-inch diameter plastic cap fasteners.

D. Seam Tape: DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape as manufactured by DuPont™.

(Specifier Note: DELETE Description when propriety specification for seam tape is used and can be held.)

1. Description: Pressure sensitive, polypropylene substrate with acrylic based adhesive.

E. Sealing Membrane: DuPont™ StraightFlash™ as manufactured by DuPont for sealing at terminations and penetrations.

(Specifier Note: DELETE Description when propriety specification for sealing membrane is used and can be held.)

1. Description: Textured polyethylene laminate with butyl based adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with flexible flashing manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation.

B. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of flexible flashing assembly. Verify flexible flashing will be continuously supported by substrate, and not span any gaps or voids in excess of ½-inch.

3.2 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply primer per manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install preformed corners and end dams bedded in sealant in appropriate locations along wall.

C. Starting at a corner, remove release sheet and apply membrane to primed surfaces in lengths of 8 to 10 feet.

D. Extend membrane through wall and leave ¼ inch minimum exposed to form drip edge.

E. Roll flashing into place. Ensure continuous and direct contact with substrate.

F. Lap ends and overlap preformed corners 4 inches minimum. Seal all laps with sealant.

(Specifier Note: DELETE paragraph below if a metal drip edge is not required.)

G. Trim exterior edge of membrane 1-inch and secure metal drip edge per manufacturer’s written instructions.

(Specifier Note: DELETE option below when not required for project.)

H. Terminate membrane on vertical wall. [Terminate into reglet, counterflashing or with termination bar.]

I. Apply sealant bead at each termination.

(Specifier Note: DELETE remaining installation paragraphs below not required for project. Coordinate with accessories named in Part 2 above.)

3.3 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT BASE OF WALL

A. Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6-inches.

B. Mechanically fasten bottom of weather barrier through top of thru-wall flashing.


C. Seal vertical and horizontal seams with tape or sealing membrane.

3.4 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT SHELF ANGLE

A. Seal weather barrier to bottom of shelf angle with sealing membrane.

B. Apply thru-wall flashing to top of shelf angle. Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6-inches.

C. Seal bottom of weather barrier to thru-wall flashing with tape or sealing membrane.

3.5 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT WINDOW HEAD

A. Cut flap in weather barrier at window head.

B. Prime exposed sheathing.

C. Install lintel as required. Verify end dams extend 4 inches minimum beyond opening.

D. Install end dams bedded in sealant.

E. Adhere 2 inches minimum thru-wall flashing to wall sheathing. Overlap lintel with thru-wall flashing and extend ¼ inch minimum beyond outside edge of lintel to form drip edge.

F. Apply sealant along thru-wall flashing edges.

G. Fold weather barrier flap back into place and tape bottom edge to thru-wall flashing.

H. Tape diagonal cuts of weather barrier.

I. Secure weather barrier flap with fasteners.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed flexible flashing from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

Katz Law Building 11-19-10 04 20 00 Mortar Net

The Mortar Net™

Guide Specifications Section 04200 - Unit Masonry PART 1 General 1.1 Related Work Sections: 03200 Wall Ties, 04100 Mortar & Grouts & Cement, 04150 Masonry Reinforcing & Accessories, 04210 Brick, 04220 Concrete Masonry Units, 06118 Sheathing Board, 07100 Waterproofing & Dampproofing, 07200 Perimeter Insulation, 07212 Rigid Insulation, 07620 Wall Flashing - Sheet Metal, 07645 Flashing - Preformed Metal & Plastic, 07650 Flashing - Flexible & Laminated Sheet, 09110 Steel Stud Systems,10235 Brick & Block Vents 1.2 System Description

Use The Mortar Net™ as part of standard masonry cavity wall flashing/weep hole wall drainage systems. The Mortar Net™ keeps weep hole open and flashing free of mortar droppings and debris by catching and permanently suspending droppings above the level of the top of the weep hole. It prevents mortar from forming a continuous barrier against proper water flow to the weeps, and by providing routes through the body of the product itself for water to flow to the flashing and weeps. Mortar Net Weep Vents keep weep holes free of insects and debris, allowing moisture to flow from the cavity to the building exterior. They add to the beauty of the wall by duplicating the texture color of mortar, thus eliminating open holes and dark shadows. 1.3 Quality Assurance

Mortar Net and Mortar Net Weep Vents will not oxidize, rot, support mold or fungus, nor react with common building materials including mortar, cement, asphalt, modified bitumen, PVC, copper, steel, or galvanized metal. Neither material is edible by insects. The material retains its shape and rigidity in and is undamaged by extended exposure to normal field temperatures, and is highly resistant to UV degradation. 1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling

0.4" materials are shipped 250 lineal feet per cardboard box, fifty 5' sections per box. 1.0" & 2.0" material is shipped 100 lineal feet per cardboard box, twenty 5' sections per box. Weep Vents are shipped 125 pieces per cardboard box. Product requires no special handling, is very lightweight, and boxes and loose material are easily handled by one person. Secure loose and boxed material during strong winds. Do not expose material to direct sunlight for more than two weeks. If material is protected from exposure to direct sunlight it may be stored indefinitely. 1.5 Sequencing/Scheduling Install Mortar Net after flashing has been installed, first one or two courses of brick have been laid, and weep holes have been created. Install product before third or higher courses of brick have been laid. Install Mortar Net Weep Vents in weep holes every 24 inches as bricks are being laid. 1.6 Unit Prices

Unit price is per lineal foot (304.8 mm). 1.7 Warranty


Mortar Net USA, Ltd. warranties our products to be of quality and composition stated and free of manufacturer's defects. We will replace or refund the purchase price of any product proved defective. This limited warranty is the only warranty extended by Mortar Net USA, Ltd. in regard to its product. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. is not liable for installation and for any incidental, consequential or other damages. Mortar Net USA, Ltd's liability shall not exceed the purchase price of the material in question. PART 2 Products 2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 541 S. Lake Street Gary, IN 46403 Tel: (219) 939-3870 Toll-Free: (800) 664-6638 Fax: (219) 939-3877 Web site: http://www.mortarnet.com/sww 2.2 Materials All dimensions are nominal. Measurements are inclusive of the continuous bottom strip and the dovetail shape. Five available sizes: 1.0" (25.4 mm), 0.4" (10.16 mm) thicknesses by 10" (254 mm) height by 5' (1524 mm) long. 2.0" (50.8 mm) thick by 10" (154 mm) height by 5' (1524 mm) long and 1.0" (25.4 mm) thick by 16" (406.4 mm) height by 5' (1524 mm) long. Continuous bottom strip on all sizes of material is 3" (76.2 mm) high, regardless of material thickness or overall material height. Mortar Net™ is manufactured of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) in one inch (25.4mm) and from Nylon in 0.4" (10.16mm), (nominal). And 2" (50.8mm) thick (nominal) of 200 denier 100% recycled polyester. Product is 90% open weave green mesh in a dovetail configuration connected by a continuous bottom strip. Weep Vents 2.5" x 4.0" x 0.5" are also of 200 denier 100% recycled polyester in 6 colors. Manufacturer's Product Codes: 10 " (254 mm) high by 1.0" (25.4 mm) thick material: MN 10-1 10 " (254 mm) high by 0.4" (10.16 mm) thick material: MN 10-04 10" (254 mm) high by 2.0" (50.8 mm) thick material: MN 10-2 16 " (406.4 mm) high by 1.0" (25.4 mm) thick material: MN 16-1 PART 3 Installation 3.1 Inspection


Match product size to cavity size. Cavity should be no more than 1/4" (6.35 mm) wider than 1.0" (25.4 mm) thick material and 0.4" (10.16 mm) thick material should touch both the other wythe and the inner wall, insulation or filler used to adjust the cavity size (see 3.3). Inspect for and repair holes in flashing immediately prior to installing Mortar Net™. 3.2 Preparation Clean flashing and weep holes so they are free of mortar droppings and debris immediately prior to installing Mortar Net™. If wicks are used (not recommended), prevent mortar from coating or covering wicks inside the cavity. Washing flashing with water or chemicals prior to installation is not necessary. 3.3 Installation For most walls, install one continuous row of The Mortar Net™ at base of wall and over all wall openings directly on flashing. To prevent mortar bridging between the outer wythe and inner wall, install flashing and any material used as filler to match cavity width to product size (see 3.1) extending from the bottom of The Mortar Net™ to at least 6.0" (152.4 mm) above the top of The Mortar Net™. Multiple thicknesses of The Mortar Net™ may be installed to match cavity widths and if excessive droppings are expected. Inspection, preparation, and installation procedure for multiple thicknesses is the same as for single thickness. When installing multiple thicknesses, align the dovetail sections with each other. To match cavity width to product thickness (see 3.1) without using multiple thicknesses of The Mortar Net™, place rigid insulation of appropriate thickness against the outside face of the inner wall extending from the bottom of The Mortar Net™ to at least 6.0" (152.4 mm) above the top of The Mortar Net™. Lay the first one or two courses of brick at flashing level, then install The Mortar Net™ continuously by placing it against the inside of the outer wythe, dovetail shaped section of the material facing up, directly on the flashing at the base of the wall and over all wall openings. No fasteners or adhesives are required, and mortar need not have set. (See Caution - below.) The Mortar Net™ will not come in contact with wall ties in most standard wall tie installations, but if it does, it may be cut or torn to accommodate wall ties, conduit, plumbing, or other materials that bridge or intrude into the cavity between the inner and outer walls. The Mortar Net™ is compressible horizontally so it may be forced into cavities slightly smaller than its nominal thickness without affecting its or the wall's performance. Caution: When forcing The Mortar Net™ into a cavity, be sure mortar has set sufficiently to resist outward pressure from product. Mortar Net Weep Vents are installed in debris free weep holes every 24" as bricks are being laid.

Eastview Terrace 11-19-10

SECTION 04 21 00

CLAY UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Clay masonry units and accessories including: 1. Brick units. 2. Anchors and ties. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Flashing. 5. Reinforcement. 6. Mortar. 7. Cleaning.

1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 03300 - Concrete for grout.

B. Section 04200 - Concrete Unit Masonry for concrete masonry units.

C. Section 05500 - Metal fabrications for lintels and shelf angles.

D. Section 07200 - Insulation for cavity insulation.

E. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal for flashing.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Section 03450 - Grout.

C. Section 04200 - Concrete Unit Masonry.

D. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

E. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing.

F. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.

G. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

H. Section 07100 - Waterproofing.

I. Section 07200 - Insulation.


1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

B. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

D. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

E. ASTM A 616 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

F. ASTM A 617 - Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

G. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

H. ASTM A 775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.

I. ASTM A996 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

J. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.

K. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.

L. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale).

M. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

N. ASTM C 652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).

O. ASTM C 1088 - Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale.

P. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular MaterialsSponge or Expanded Rubber.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Samples: Furnish not less than five individual brick as samples, showing extreme variations in color and texture.

D. Sample Panel: Mock-up or sample panels shall be used to review brick and mortar color and serve as the standard of workmanship for the Project. 1. Approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) long by 3 feet (1 m) high, showing the

proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and workmanship. All brick shipped for the sample shall be included in the panel.

2. When required, provide a separate panel for each type of brick or mortar.

3. Do not start work until Architect/Engineer has accepted sample panel. 4. Use panel as standard of comparison for all masonry work built of

same material. 5. Do not destroy or move panel until work is completed and accepted by

Architect.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

B. Installer Qualifications:

C. Brick Tests: Sample and test shall be in accordance with ASTM C 67.

D. Test Reports: 1. Testing and reports shall be completed by an independent laboratory. 2. Test reports for each type of building and facing brick shall be

submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 3. Test reports shall indicate:

a. Compressive strength. b. 24 hour cold water absorption. c. 5-hour boil absorption. d. Saturation coefficient. e. Initial rate of absorption. f. Efflorescence.

E. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit to Architect/Engineer certificates attesting compliance with the applicable specifications for grades, types or classes included in these specifications.

F. Costs of Tests: Cost of tests shall be borne by the purchaser, unless tests indicate that units do not conform to the requirements of the specifications, in which case cost shall be borne by the seller.


G. Prism Tests: Prism Tests shall be required when using engineered masonry ( (p'm) =________psi).


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store brick off the ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or other materials likely to cause staining or other defects.

C. Cover all materials with a nonstaining waterproof membrane material when necessary to protect from elements.

D. Store different types of materials separately.

1.8 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance includes purchase of brick, taxes, delivery and any special handling charges.

B. Special shaped brick units shall have a separate allowance.


A. Protection of Work: 1. Wall Covering:

a. During erection, cover top of wall with strong nonstaining waterproof membrane at end of each day or shutdown.

b. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress. c. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) down both sides. d. Hold cover securely in place.

2. Load Applications: a. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours

after building masonry columns or wall. b. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building

masonry columns or walls. 3. Stain Prevention:

a. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry. b. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such

masonry. c. Protect all sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. d. Protect base of wall from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter. e. Scaffold boards shall be turned on edge when work is not in

progress.

B. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Preparation:

a. When ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by


carefully applying heat not to exceed 120 degrees F (49 degrees C) until surface is dry to the touch.

b. Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged. 2. Products:

a. When brick suction exceeds BIA reference standard, sprinkle with heated water: 1) When units are above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat

water above 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 2) When units are below 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat

water above 130 degrees F (54 degrees C). b. Use dry masonry units. c. Do not use wet or frozen units.

3. Construction Requirements While Work is Progressing: a. Air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0

degrees C): 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures

between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C).

b. Air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce temperatures

between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C).

2) Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. c. Air temperatures 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7

degrees C). 1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar

temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F. (49 degrees C).

2) Maintain mortar temperatures on boards above freezing. 3) Use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of

walls under construction. 4) Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph (24

kms/h). d. Air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below:

1) Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C.).

2) Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C).

3) Minimum temperature of units when laid: 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C).

4. Protection requirements for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. Mean daily air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32

degrees F (0 degrees C):


1) Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane.

b. Mean daily air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive

membrane for 24 hrs. c. Mean daily temperature 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20

degrees F (-7 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or

equal protection for 24 hours. d. Mean daily air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and

below: 1) Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F (0

degrees C) for 24 hours by: a) Method: Enclosure and supplementary heat. b) Method: Electric heating blankets. c) Method: Infrared lamps. d) Method: Other approved methods.

C. Hot Weather Protection: 1. When temperature exceeds 100 degrees F or 90 degrees F with 8 mph

wind (above 38 degrees C or 32 degrees C with 13 kms/h wind). a. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70 degrees F

and 120 degrees F (21 degrees C and 49 degrees C). 1) Limit spread of mortar bed to 4 feet (1.2 m). Place units

within 1 minute of spreading mortar. b. Partially or recently completed walls may be fog sprayed and/or

covered with opaque plastic or canvas or both to control moisture evaporation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Belden Brick Company (The), which is located at: 700 W. Tuscarawas St. P. O. Box 20910 ; Canton, OH 44702; Tel: 330-456-0031; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.beldenbrick.com

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 CLAY MASONRY UNITS

A. All brick specified and shown on drawing shall be ______________________ as Manufactured by The Belden Brick Company. 1. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW,

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Belden%20Brick%20Company%20(The)&coid=30877&rep=&fax=&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(04210bbc):%20%20&mf=

http://www.beldenbrick.com/


a. Type FBS. b. Type FBX. c. Type FBA. d. Size: _____ by _____ by _____ (t by h by l)

2. Hollow Brick: ASTM C 652, Grade SW. a. Type HBS. b. Type HBX. c. Type HBA. d. Size: _____ by _____ by _____(t by h by l)

3. Thin Veneer Brick: ASTM C 1088. a. Grade Exterior. b. Grade Interior. c. Type FBS. d. Type FBX. e. Type FBA. f. Size: _____ by _____ by _____ (t by h by l).

B. Minimum Compressive Strength: ______.

C. Maximum Initial Rate of Absorption (IRA): _______.

D. Provide brick similar in texture, color and physical properties to those available for inspection at the Architect/Engineer's office and/or as supplied on the approved sample panel.

E. Shapes: Special shapes are required to be used per architectural detail(s).

F. All brick supplied shall be pre-blended by the manufacturer.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. Billet Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 615. 2. Rail Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 616 or A996. 3. Axle Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 617 or A996. 4. Epoxy Coated Billet Steel: ASTM A 615 and ASTM A 775.

2.4 ANCHORS AND TIES

A. Corrugated Ties: ASTM A 1008, 20 Gage, Width: __________ inch, length: ___________ inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2.

B. Truss Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 82 (ASTM A 666), Size________, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2.

C. Ladder Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 82 (ASTM A 666), Size________, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2.

D. Wire Wall Ties: ASTM A 82, Wire Size: ________, Shape: ________, Length: ________ inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2.


E. Dovetail Anchors: ASTM A 1008, Gage: ______, Length: _______ inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2.

F. Anchors: 1. Plate Bent Bar Anchors: ASTM A 36, Diameter: ________inch,

Length: ________ inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2. 2. Plate Header Bar Anchors: ASTM A 36, Diameter: ________ inch,

Length: ________ inches, Galvanized: ASTM A 153, Class B-2.

2.5 FLASHING

A. Copper: ASTM B 370, 5 oz.

B. Copper: ASTM B 370, 7 oz.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Grade_______, Type 304.

D. Plastic: PVC, 30 mil (0.75 mm) thick. 1. Thin PVC flashings are not generally recommended as a through wall. 2. Flashing because of their life expectancy.

E. Combinations 1. Plastic/Copper: 5 oz. 2. Cooper/Fabric: 5 oz. 3. Asphalt-Coated Copper: 5 oz. 4. Plastic/Copper: 7 oz. 5. Cooper/Fabric: 7 oz. 6. Asphalt-Coated Copper: 7 oz.

2.6 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Premolded Foam: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1.

B. Neoprene: ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1.

C. Backer Rod: Extruded, Closed Cell Polyethylene.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Weepholes: 1. Rope Wicks: Cotton Sash Cord, 12 inches long with end laid in cavity. 2. Plastic Tubes: 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum inside diameter by 4 inches

(102 mm) long. 3. Aluminum Weep/Vents. 4. Plastic Weep/Vents.

2.8 MORTAR

A. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 under the guidelines provided in BIA Technical Notes #8 Series.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Cleaning Reinforcement: 1. Remove mud, loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcement

which would interfere with bond.

C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 BONDING

A. Lay masonry in bond pattern as indicated on drawings or general notes. 1. Reference BIA Technical Note #30 for additional requirements.

3.5 LAYING MASONRY

A. Lay masonry with full head and bed joints.

B. Lay all brick plumb and true to lines.

C. Where fresh mortar joins partially set mortar, remove loose brick and mortar, and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry.

D. Toothing shall be subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer.

E. When adjustment is necessary to be made after mortar begins to harden, remove hardened mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

3.6 TOOLING AND POINTING

A. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave appearance.

B. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave V-shaped appearance.

C. Joint Profile: Tool mortar joints to a concave grapevine appearance.

D. Tool exposed joints when "thumb-print" hard.


E. Flush cut all joints not tooled.

F. When pointing, rake mortar joints to a depth of not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm). Fill solidly with pointing mortar. Tool joints.

3.7 FLASHING

A. Clean surface of masonry from projections which might puncture flashing.

B. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar.

C. Cover flashing with mortar.

D. Lap flashing a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm).

E. Leave flashing project from face of wall approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a drip. Flashing shall be cut back to the face of the wall after inspection, if the drip is deemed objectionable by Architect.

3.8 WEEPHOLES

A. Provide weep holes in head joints of the first brick course immediately above flashing by placing weeps no more than 24 inches (610 mm) on center horizontally.

B. Keep cavity free from mortar.

3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Keep clean from all mortar and debris.

B. Locate as shown on drawing.

C. Install neoprene pre-molded foam pad.

D. Install backer rod.

E. Install sealant. Prime surfaces if necessary.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Cut out all defective mortar joints and holes in exposed masonry and provide new mortar.

B. Clean pre-selected sample wall area. Do not proceed with cleaning until approved by Architect.

C. Clean brick as outlined in BIA Technical Notes 20 Revised II.

D. All cleaning practices and product used shall be in accordance with cleaning products manufacturer's printed instructions.


END OF SECTION

Stuckeman Family Building/11-19-10 04 43 13 Stone Masonry Veneer

SECTION 04 43 13

Stone Masonry Veneer PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Quarried cut limestone veneer at exterior wall. B. Quarried splitface stone at exterior walls.

C. Continuation of exterior wall stonework into entry foyer or vestibule.


A. Section [01400 - Quality Control] [01410 - Testing Laboratory Services]: Testing laboratory services.

B. Section 02782 - Stone Pavers.

C. Section [______-____________]: Concrete supporting wall.

D. Section 04100 - Mortar: Setting and pointing mortar. E. Section 04150 - Masonry Accessories.

F. Section [______-____________]: Masonry supporting wall.

G. Section 04415 – Limestone. H. Section 04430 - Quarried Stone.

J. Section [05120 - Structural Steel] [05500 - Metal Fabrications]: Masonry anchors from

structural steel framing members.

J. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shelf [angles] [________] and supports.

K. Section [______-____________]: [Formed steel] [Wood] framed supporting wall.

L. Section 07180 - Water Repellant.

M. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: [Coping,] [lintel,] [and] [sill] flashings.

N. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for [panel unit,] [perimeter,] [control,] [and] [expansion] joints.

O. Section 09751 - Interior Stone Facing and Flooring.

1.03 REFERENCES


A. ASTM C 568 - Limestone Building Stone.

B. ASTM C 503 – Marble.

C. ASTM C 6750 - Efflorescence test.

D. ILI (Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc). 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section [01300.] [________.]

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorages, [reinforcement,] head, jamb, and sill opening details, [control] [expansion] jointing methods and cutting and setting. Provide shop drawing approval to stone supplier within lead time required prior to date first shipment of stone is needed at site.

C. Product Data: Provide data on stone units including chemical analysis.

D. Submit [_____] samples [___] inches by [___] inches showing, color range, vein direction,

markings, surface finish [and filling]. E. Submit stone fabricator's installation instructions and field erection or setting drawings.

Indicate on setting drawings, panel identifying marks and locations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with ILI.

B. Maintain [one copy] [[____] copies] of [each] document on site.

C. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section [with minimum [__________] years experience.

1.06 MOCKUP

A. Provide mockup of cut stone wall under provisions of Section [01400.] [________.]

B. Construct stone wall mockup, [____] feet ([____] m) long by [____] feet ([____] m) wide, including stone anchor accessories, sill and head flashings, [window frame,] [corner condition,] [typical control joint,] [filling] [and] [________].

C. Locate [where directed.] [________.]

D. Mockup may [not] remain as part of the Work.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section [01600] [________] and in accordance with ILI storage and handling recommendations to prevent staining and breaking due to improper handling.


B. Lift using wide-belt type slings. Do not use wire rope or ropes containing tar or other

substances which may cause staining. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars on stone.

C. If stone panels are shipped as individual pieces due to size and not shipped pre-stacked on appropriate wood pallets, store stone panels vertically on edge, resting weight on panel edge using non-staining wood skids on ground and between stone panels. Follow ILI stacking recommendation for location and spacing of skids. Stone surfaces or edges should not be in direct contact with ground but always on non-staining skids.

D. Stone must be marked to correspond to shop drawings setting sequence.

D. Protect stone from discoloration by covering with non-staining waterproof membrane. [If

stone is packaged in opaque sealed plastic, protect wrapping from damage and do not open until ready to use.]


A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

B. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, or during rainy weather, cover

stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. Extend covering 2 feet minimum below top of wall.

1.09 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence Work to coordinate the installation of stone with installation of adjacent construction that must project through stone.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE SUPPLIER

A. Mankato Kasota Stone, Inc. 818 North Willow Street, Mankato MN 56001, (507) 625-2746 Fax (507) 625-2748.

2.02 STONE

A. Limestone: ASTM C 119 limestone, single source supplied, natural, deep-ledge quarried, free of efflorescence per ASTM C 6750, [also meeting ASTM C 503 Class II dolomite].

1. Medium Density Limestone: ASTM C 568 Class II. 2. High Density Limestone: ASTM C 568 Class III.

B. Color: [Cream] [Golden Buff] [Grey][Kasota Rose][Golden Amber][Kasota Sunset][Kasota

Sunrise]. 2.03 STONE FABRICATION


A. Thickness: [____] inch ([____] mm) [minimum] [nominal].

C. Face Size: [[____x____] inch ([____x____] mm) nominal,] [As indicated on drawings,] cut square.

C. Cut Stone Fabrication Tolerances

1. Maximum Variation From Thickness: +/- 1/8 inch for non finished ends, +/- 1/16 inch for finished end corner pieces.

2. Maximum Variation From Face Size: +/- 1/16 inch. 3. Maximum Variation From Flat: +/- 1/16 inch. 4. Maximum Variation From Square: +/- 1/16 inch.

D. Split Stone Fabrication Tolerances

1. Maximum Variation For Splitfaces: +/- 1 inch. 2. Maximum Variation From Face Size: +/- 1/8 inch. 3. Maximum Variation From Flat: +/- 1/8 inch.

E. Fabricate units for coloration consistent with approved range sample and mockup. Adjacent

unit should have a similar appearance over the full area of the installation.

F. Form external corners to [quirk] [square] [________] joint profile. [Provide for cramp anchorage top and bottom bed joints of corner pieces.]

G. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for natural wash.

H. Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings and similar features as required to accommodate

contiguous work. I. Provide drip slots one inch minimum over [window frame.] [________.] Size slot 1/4 inch

wide by 1/4 inch deep; full width of projection unless otherwise shown. J. Fabricate shapes with a uniform profile throughout entire unit length, with precisely formed

arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and with matching profile at joints between units.

K. Carve, cut or etch inscriptions and decorative surface features according to approved shop drawings. Use skilled stone carvers experienced in similar work.

L. Anchor Slots

1. Standard Continuous Slot: Cut 3/8 inch wide by 1¼ inch deep (+/- 1/8 inch for depth) located at center line measured from front face +/- 1/16 inch.

2. Plunge Slot: [4] [__] inch long half moon shaped. 3. Stop Slots: 4. Rod Check Slots: 1 inch by 1 inch located on bottom of stone.

M. Carefully inspect stone at fabrication site for compliance with requirements for appearance,

material and fabrication. Replace defective units. 2.04 CUT STONE

A. Cut stone from one block or from contiguous matched blocks in which natural markings consistent with approved range samples and mockup.


B. Cut stone accurately to shape and dimensions with jointing as shown on approved shop

drawings. Cut exposed faces true with joints and beds dressed straight and square within Fabrication Tolerances specified herein. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match approved range samples and mock-up for color and other characteristics.

C. Cut Type: [Veine] [Fleuri]. D. Veine Direction: [Vertical] [Horizontal] [Blend pattern] [Veining as indicted on Drawings].

E. Surface Finish: [Sawn] [Sawn Ashlar] [24 Grit Finish] [Machine Smooth] [Honed] [High

Honed] [Polished] [Tapestry] [Rock Face] [Splitface].

F. Surface 1. [Unfilled]. 2. [Filled using hydraulic cement custom mixed to match stone color according to approved

samples and mock-ups]. 3. [Filled using resin based epoxy custom mixed to match stone color according to approved

samples and mock-ups]. 2.05 SPLIT STONE

A. Random Ashlar Splitface.

1. Regular Mix: Course heights of 15% 2-1/8 inch, 50% 4-7/8 inch, 35% 7-1/2 inch. 2. Church Mix: Course heights of 15% 2-1/8 inch, 40% 4-7/8 inch, 35% 7-1/2 inch, 10% 10-1/8

inch. 3. Premium Mix: Course heights of 40% 2-1/8 inch, 60% 4-7/8 inch. 4. Elite Mix: Course heights of 10% 7/8 inch, 35% 2-1/8 inch, 35% 3-1/2 inch, 20% 4-7/8 inch. 5. Standard Course Heights: Course heights [7/8 inch] [2-1/8 inch] [4-7/8 inch] [7-1/2 inch] [10-

1/8 inch] [11-½ inch]. 6. Custom Mix: [__________].

B. Rustic Rubble: Nominal Course heights 20% 1 inch to 3 inch, 50% 3 inch to 6 inch, 30% 6

inch to 8 inch.

C. Sawn Back Splitface: [_____ inches]. 2.06 MORTAR

A. Provide setting and pointing mortar in accordance with Section [04100] [_____]. 2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide the following in accordance with Section 04150 [05500] [______] . 1. Anchors, Dowels, Ties, Bolts, Washers, Nuts and [________] . 2. Relieving Angles, steel lintels, shelf angles.

3. Setting [Buttons] [Shims]: [Lead] [Plastic] type.


4. Spacers: Non-staining type. 5. Cavity Vents: Non-metallic, non staining type. 6. Weeps: Mildew and fungus proof.

B. Supports: Section [________].

C. Flashings and Bond Breaker: Non-rusting or non-staining type specified in Section 07620.

D. Joint Filler: [Closed cell foam] Section 07900. E. Expansion Joint Filler: Non-bituminous, non-staining expansion joint filler strips with

removable top strip flush with finished surface in accordance with Section 07900.

F. Sealant: Section 07900. G. Cleaning Solution: Commercial, neutral, liquid-type especially prepared for stone with pH

between 7 and 10, free from crystallizing salts or water soluble alkaline salts, biodegradable and phosphate free recommended by cleaning solution manufacturer for specific project conditions.


A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. B. Verify stone assembly pattern and start point. Check stone for surface characteristics that

would be best placed in remote locations away from central view. C. Verify that items built-in under other sections are properly located and sized.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect stone from exposure to rain, snow, ice and staining from mortar droppings, sealant and other substances or sources that may cause staining.

B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.

C. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements which will mark or

damage exposed surfaces. D. Cold Weather Preparation: Carefully apply heat to stone surface until dry to touch to remove

ice or snow formed on stone or assembled stonework beds. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install flashings in accordance with Section [07620] [_______].

B. Erect stone in accordance with stone supplier's instructions, approved shop drawings and erection drawings. Moisten surface of stone to assist surface adhesion of mortar or apply primer as directed by sealant manufacturer if sealant joint are used.


C. Arrange stone coursing to [running] [stack] [random ashlar] [________] bond with a

consistent joint width of [3/8] [____] inch.

D. Install setting bed [and pointing] mortar in accordance with Section [04100.] [________.]

E. Place setting buttons and set stone in full mortar setting bed to support stone over full bearing surface and to establish joint dimensions.

F. Shore up units [until setting bed will maintain panel in position without movement] [for [7]

[____] days after setting].

G. Fill dowel and lifting holes with mortar.

H. Install sealant and [backing rod] [bond breaker] at joints where indicated in accordance with Section 07900.

I. Install cavity vents at [top of each cavity space,] [below shelf angles,] [and]

[________________] at spacing of [____] inches ([____] mm) on center, horizontally.

J. Install weeps in vertical stone joints at [____] inches ([____] mm) on center, horizontally; immediately above horizontal flashings, [above shelf angles and supports,] [at bottom of walls,] [and] [________]. Do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Positioning of Elements: Maximum [1/4] [____] inch ([6] [____] mm) from true position.

B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: [1/4] [____] inch in 10 feet ([6] [____] mm in 3 m); [1/2] [____] inch in 50 feet ([13] [____] mm in 15 m).

C. Maximum Variation Between Face Plane of Adjacent Panels: [1/16] [____] inch ([1.5] [____]

mm).

D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: [1/4] [____] inch ([6] [____] mm) per story non-cumulative; [1/2] [____] inch ([13] [____] mm) in any two stories.

E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: [1/8] inch in 3 feet ([3] [____] mm/m); [1/4]

[____] inch in 10 feet ([6] [____] mm in 3 m); [1/2] [____] inch ([13] [____] mm) maximum.

F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: [1/8] [____] inch in 3 feet ([3] [____] mm/m). 3.05 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any item not so indicated on Drawings. B. Do not impair appearance or strength of stone work by cutting. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar [and sealant] upon completion of work.


B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non-metallic tools and brushes in cleaning operations. 3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect stone, sills, ledges and other projections from staining from mortar, grout, sealant or other sources. Immediately remove without damage to stone.

B. Protect stone at base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using non-staining

coverings spread on adjacent ground and lower wall surfaces. 3.08 SCHEDULE OF CUT STONE SIZES

A. Cream-Fleuri 1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 3 ft.-0 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater.

B. Cream-Veine

1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 2 ft.-3 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-0 in. width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater.

C. Golden Buff -Fleuri

1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 3 ft.-0 in. height by 3 ft.-6 in. maximum width, thickness 2½ in. recommended. 3. 3 ft.-6 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-6 in. maximum width, thickness 3 in. recommended.

D. Golden Buff-Veine

1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum; 2 in. preferred. 2. 2 ft.-3 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-0 in. width, thickness 2½ in. recommended. 3. 2 ft.-3 in. maximum height by 4 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 3 in. recommended.

E. Grey-Fleuri

1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 3 ft.-0 in. height by 4 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 2½ in. recommended. 3. 4 ft.-0 in. maximum height by 4 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 3 in. recommended.

F. Grey-Veine

1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 2 ft.-3 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-0 in. width, thickness 2½ in. recommended. 3. 2 ft.-3 in. maximum height by 4 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 3 in. recommended.

G. Kasota Rose-Fleuri 1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred.

2. 2 ft.-6 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater. H. Kasota Rose-Veine 1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred.

2. 2 ft.-3 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater.


I. Golden Amber-Fleuri 1. 2 ft.-0 in. by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 2 ft.-6 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-6 in. maximum width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater.

J. Golden Amber-Veine

1. 3 ft.-0 in. height by 3 ft.-0 in. width, thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 3 ft.-6 in. maximum height by 3 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater.

K. Kasota Sunset-Fleuri

1. 1 ft.-0 in. maximum height by 2 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 1¼ in. minimum or greater. L. Kasota Sunset-Veine

1. 2 ft.-0 in. maximum height by 1 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 1¼ in. minimum or greater. M. Kasota Sunrise-Fleuri

1. 1 ft.-0 in. height by 2 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 1¼ in. minimum or greater. 2. 2 ft.-0 in maximum height by 2 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater.

N. Kasota Sunrise-Veine

1. 1 ft.-6 in. height by 2 ft.-0 in. thickness 1¼ in. minimum, 2 in. preferred. 2. 2 ft.-0 in. maximum height by 2 ft.-0 in. maximum width, thickness 2 in. minimum or greater.

END OF SECTION

PSU Katz Building 11-19-10 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry

SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONERY

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PRODUCE NAME:

A. Centurion Stone Type: Color: Pattern:

1.2 MANUFACTURER:

Centurion Products, Inc. 1325 6th Ave. N. Nashville, TN 37208 (615) 256-6694 (888) 877-8663

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Provide Centurion Stone veneer as specified on drawings and as needed for complete, proper installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Submit sufficient samples of stone veneer (sizes, colors, textures). Stone (delivered or installed) not falling within accepted range will be removed and replaced promptly with acceptable material. 1.5 COMPOSITION OF MATERIAL: Stone veneer produced from expanded aggregate, Portland Type I Cement with silicone coated perlite and additives which will meet or exceed the following: Absorption – 12.6% ASTM C140-70 as a standard Compressive Strength – P.S.I. 3,540 ASTM C67 Thermal Conductivity – K-Factor 4.033 ASTM C177071, R-Factor, .44 1.6 PACKAGING/HANDLING: Stone veneer packaged in corrugated containers with set amount of sq. ft. per container, not to exceed 95 lbs. Containers are palletized with varying pallet weight up to 800 lbs. A wrapper box or waterproof cover is required to protect containers from weather deterioration. Handling can be by pallet or individual box. PART 2 - INSTALLATION


2.1 MATERIALS: All stone veneer setting materials and equipment will be clean and free of salts or chemicals which may cause efflorescence. Materials should conform to: ASTM C150 Portland Type I Cement, ASTM C144 Sand, clean potable water, reinforcement wire mesh per local codes and joint color of pure Iron Oxide in pigment concentration recommended by color manufacturer. 2.2 BONDING MORTARS:

A. Portland Cement of Type S Mortar. Provide a commercially prepared mix of Portland Cement and clean brick sand (2 parts sand to 1 part Portland) mixed evenly to a heavy, creamy texture. B. Other mixtures are acceptable with the approval of stone veneer manufacturer and site management.

2.3. GROUTING MORTARS:

A. Color. Provide grout in colors selected by the architect from standard colors of approved manufacturers. B. Material. Provide a job mix consisting of 1 part masonry mix to 2 parts clean brick sand. Mix texture should be thin enough to be easily squeezed from a grouting bag. C. All joints are to be installed using a grouting bag, tooled and brushed daily, shaped to shed water and raked to depth acceptable to the architect.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the contractor subject to the approval of the architect and local codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Coordinate with other trades as needed to assure proper substrata are provided. C. Verify that grounds, anchors, plugs, recess frames, bucks, electrical work, mechanical work and similar items in or behind the stone have been installed prior to installation of stone veneer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STONE VENEER:

A. Maintain minimum temperature limits on job site and follow installation practices


recommended by materials manufacturers. B. Prepare surfaces, set, fit, grout and clean stone veneer in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Spread mortar on back of stone a minimum of 1/2" thick. D. Press and set stone in place using a "wiggling" motion to obtain 100% coverage mortar on the back of each stone. Remove excess mortar from around stone.

3.3 GROUTING:

A. Do not begin grouting until stones are firmly set. B. Using a grouting bag, force the maximum amount of grout into joints, filling all gaps and skips. Do not permit grout on stone’s face. C. Provide grout which is uniform in color, smooth and without voids, pin-holes, or low spots. D. Remove surplus grout from joints by raking and tooling. Brush all joints to remove excess or loose sand. E. Remove mortar and haze from stone’s face within 3 hours, leaving the surface of all units clean.

3.4 CLEANING: After setting and grouting are complete, thoroughly clean stone face by brushing and lightly washing with a clean, wet sponge. Do not use acid or acid base cleaners. TECHNICAL SERVICES: a highly trained staff is available at all times to provide you with any assistance on specific applications.

END OF SECTION

Visitor Center 11-16-10 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing

Varco Pruden Buildings

A Division of BlueScope Buildings North America, Inc.

SECTION 13120

STEEL BUILDING SYSTEMS

Display hidden notes to specifier by using "Tools"/"Options"/"View"/"Hidden Text".

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pre-engineered building and components including the following: 1. Structural steel frame. 2. Roof covering system including exterior roof panels, panel attachments,

sealants, mastics, trim and flashings. 3. Exterior wall system including wall panels, panel attachments, sealants,

mastics, trim and flashings.

B. Wall accessories including the following: 1. Service doors 2. Windows. 3. Louvers.

C. Roof accessories including the following: 1. Facade systems. 2. Translucent roof panels. 3. Gravity ventilators. 4. Ridge ventilators. 5. Roof curbs. 6. Roof walkways.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Foundations and anchor bolts.

B. Section 08810 - Glass: Glass and glazing requirements for glazed openings.

C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Finish painting of structural members, doors, roof curbs, and factory prime painted miscellaneous items.


1.3 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 101 - Voluntary Specification for Aluminum and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Prime Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

B. ASTM A 36/ASTM A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

C. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

D. ASTM A 500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

E. ASTM A 529/A 529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality.

F. ASTM A 563 – Standard specification for carbon and allow steel nuts

G. ASTM A 572/A 572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel.

H. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

I. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

J. ASTM A 1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability.

K. ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.

L. ASTM D 1929 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.

M. ASTM D 2843 - Standard Test Method for Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics.

N. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

O. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

P. ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

Q. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code; American Welding Society.

R. IAS AC172 International Accreditation Services

S. NAIMA 202 - Standard for Flexible Fiber Glass Insulation Used in Metal Buildings; North American Insulation Manufacturers Association.

T. SDI 100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door Institute.


U. UL 580 - Tests for Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

V. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Building Width: Measured from outside to outside of sidewall girts. Typically edge to edge of concrete.

B. Building Length: Measured from outside to outside of end wall girts. Typically edge to edge of concrete

C. Building Line: Outside face of steel/girt.

D. Building Eave Height: Measured from the top of the eave member at the outside of the sidewall girt line to the bottom of the sidewall column base plate or to finished floor if columns are on grout or recessed below finished floor.

E. Bay Spacing: Measured from centerline to centerline of primary frames for interior bays and from centerline of the first interior frame to outside of end wall girts for end bays.

F. Roof Pitch: The ratio of the vertical rise to the horizontal run (i.e. 1:12 = 1” of rise for every foot of horizontal dimension).


A. General: 1. Provide metal building frame, metal wall panels, metal roof panels,

accessories and miscellaneous materials for a complete enclosure including supports for building components specified in other sections.

2. Design structural systems according to professionally recognized methods and standards and legally adopted building codes.

3. Design under supervision of professional engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the Project.

B. Design Requirements: 1. Bay size: _____. 2. Roof pitch: _____. 3. Building location zip code: _________ 4. Roof Live Load: _____ psf (____ MPa), reducible. 5. Roof Live Load: _____ psf (____ MPa), non-reducible. 6. Ground Snow Load: _____ psf (____ MPa). 7. Collateral Loads: ____ psf (____ MPa). (specify how much Collateral load

will resist uplift _____ psf) 8. Rainfall intensity per hour _______ 9. Reliability/redundancy factor: Frames _______ bracing________


10. Seismic Loads: Calculate in accordance with applicable code

Building use/importance category ____, Soil Profile _________, Effective Peak Velocity Related Acceleration Coefficient (Ss/Sa) ____, Effective Peak Acceleration Coefficient (S1/Sa) ____, include ____ percent of the roof snow load in seismic load calculations.

11. Floor Load: a. Live Load: ____ psf (____ MPa). b. Dead Load: ____ psf (____ MPa). c. Collateral Loads: ____ psf (____ MPa). d. Partition Load: ____ psf (____ MPa). e. Beam max deflection L/_____ Joist max deflection L/______

12. Dead loads, including the weight of all indicated permanent construction: a. Elements required for support of lights and light battens, hanging

fixtures, mechanical equipment, piping, ceiling hanger wires, and all other items required to provide a complete building and not specifically indicated on the drawings.

13. Wind loads:

a. Roof Wind Load: Calculate in accordance with applicable code, using ____ mph (____ km/h) Basic Wind Speed or pressure______, Exposure Category ___, and Importance Factor of ____. Wind Enclosure (enclosed, partially enclosed, open)___________________

b. SLR Roof System tested and certified to meet Underwriters Laboratories UL 90 wind uplift rating with supports 5 feet (1524 mm) on center and in the 24 gage panel, meets FM1-90 & FM1-120.

c. SLR Roof System approved by US Army Corps of Engineers for wind uplift resistance ASTM E-1592.

d. SSR Roof System tested and certified to meet Factory Mutual FM wind classification rating: 1) FM 1-60. 2) FM 1-75 3) FM 1-90. 4) FM 1-120.

e. SSR Roof System tested and certified to meet Underwriters Laboratories UL 90 wind uplift rating. 1) Panels tested in accordance with U.S. Corp of Engineers ASTM

E-1592. 2) Panel fastening meeting uplift requirements based on tested

fastener values with appropriate Safety Factors. 3) Purlin strength with SSR roof panel determined and tested in

accordance with AISI procedures. f. Panel Rib panel accepted for use by the Dade County Building

Commission and are UL-60 & UL-90 certified. g. Standing Seam Roof panels are accepted for use by Dade County

Building Commission and are UL-90 certified. h. (Reference the most recent version of the MBMA manual, section

“Climatological Data by County” for general loading information by county, including wind loads, rainfall intensity, seismic requirements and snow loads).

C. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide frame with design roof profile after vertical dead load deflection has

occurred. 2. System to withstand gravity and lateral loads in compliance with contract

documents.


3. Refer to contract drawings for additional concentrated loads to pre-engineered building hanger beams and support jacks. a. Steam pipes: 1.5 times energized pipe weight. b. Vertical unit heaters: 300# (136 kg) each. c. Exhaust fans and louvers: 1000# (454 kg) vertical and 250# (113 kg)

horizontal each unit. d. Rigging and hoist assembly.

4. Allowable Deflections a. Vertical: Clear span/240 for total load; clear span/360 for live load. b. Lateral frame movement: Height/200 for a 25 year mean recurrence

wind load. c. Design wall and roof panel system to withstand specified loads with

deflection of _____ of span, maximum. d. Specify girt deflection for support of panels by VP, panels by others or

other material to be supported by the girts L/_______ 5. Metal wall panels (interior and exterior) shall not to be used as shear

elements. Specify if metal wall and girt assembly require specific deflection constraints

6. Construct assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 100 degrees F (37 degrees C) in a 24 hour period.

7. Design and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Some oil canning in rolled panels especially in the flats of the panel is normal and is not cause for rejection.

D. Serviceability Criteria: Deflection limits for major components based on VP Buildings standards unless otherwise noted. Deflection requirements on hangars with sliding or fabric doors need to be included for the door support frames both from dead load deflection in inches and uplift deflection in inches. This may differ from the building due to the specific door requirements and should be supplied to eliminate future deflection issues.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Design Data: Provide detailed design criteria and calculations prepared by a licensed structural engineer.

C. Certification: Manufacturer certification that the building conforms to the contract documents and manufacturer's standard design procedures.

D. Shop Drawings: Show building layout, primary and secondary framing member sizes and locations, cross-sections, and product and connection details. 1. Anchor Bolt Installation Drawings: Layouts with minimum bolt diameters

(anchors are typically by others in the metal building industry).

E. [ Product Data ]: Information on manufactured products to be incorporated into the project.

F. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

http://www.arcat.com/arcatcos/cos36/arc36391.cfm


G. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

H. Certificates: Welder certifications


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products. 1. Member of the Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA). 2. Primary manufacturer of frames, secondary steel, roof and wall sheeting, and

trim. 3. IAS certified as set forth in the international building code section 1704.2.2

and section 1701.7 of the Uniform Building Code.

B. Installer Qualifications - Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, plus the following: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. 2. 3 years experience with systems. 3. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this

system.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are

approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.



B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warranty installed system for the periods described herein, starting from Date of Substantial Completion or ninety days from delivery, whichever comes first, against all the conditions indicated below. When notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer/installer shall, promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner, correct said deficiencies. 1. Materials and Workmanship Warranty: 3 years at no charge, 5 years at a

minimum charge. 2. Finish Warranty:

a. Finish coating shall not peel, blister, chip, crack or check in finish, and shall not chalk in excess of 8 numerical ratings when measured in accordance with ASTM D659.


b. Finish coating shall not change color or fade in excess of 5 NBS units as determined by ASTM D2244. 1) Panel finish: 10 years. 2) Panel finish: 20 years.

3. Performance Warranty: Furnish written warranty, stating sheet metal roofing system and flashing (flashing under premium warranty only) under this Section will be maintained in watertight condition and defects resulting from the following items will be corrected without cost to Owner for a period of 10 or 20 years. a. Faulty workmanship. b. Defective materials including sealants and fasteners. c. Water infiltration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Varco Pruden Buildings A Division of BlueScope Buildings North America Inc. which is located at: 3200 Players Club Circle ; Memphis, TN 38125; Toll Free Tel: 800-238-3246; Tel: 901-748-8000; Fax: 901-748-9323; Email: request info; Web: www.vp.com


C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing: Rigid Frame (RF Series) solid web framing consisting of tapered or uniform depth rafters rigidly connected to tapered or uniform depth columns. Provide a clear span that supports the loads at bay spacing indicated. Frames can have a roof pitch as low as ¼:12 and span can typically range from 30’ to 300’ in increments of 1/16” spacing, with the steel yield of 55 ksi.

B. Primary Framing: Continuous Beam (CB Series) solid web framing utilizing tapered or uniform depth beams or girders supported on tapered or uniform depth columns. Locate interior columns where indicated and designed to support loads at bay spacing indicated. With the CB frame, vertically any width building is possible with a minimum roof slope of ¼:12 and the ridge at any desired location. Steel is 55 ksi.

C. Primary Framing: Truss Beam (TB Series) open web framing utilizing roof trusses supported on uniform depth columns. Truss beams provide a clear span that supports the loads at bay spacing indicated. Minimum slope of ¼:12. With Truss beams, virtually any width or eave height can be achieved. Columns & top and bottom chords are 55 ksi, web lattice members are 50 ksi.

D. Primary Framing: Continuous Truss (CT Series) open web framing utilizing continuous trusses supported by exterior and interior uniform depth columns that supports the loads at bay spacing indicated. Minimum slope of ¼:12. With Continuous Truss, virtually any width or eave height can be achieved. Columns & top and bottom chords are 55 ksi, web lattice members are 50 ksi.

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=VP%20Buildings,%20Inc.;%20Varco%20Pruden%20Buildings,%20Inc.&coid=36391&rep=146&fax=901-748-9323&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(13120vpi):%20%20&mf=

http://www.vp.com/


E. Primary Framing: Unibeam (UB and UBL Series) solid web framing consisting of a tapered beams supported by uniform depth columns. Provide a clear span that supports the loads at bay spacing indicated. All material is 55 ksi

F. End Wall Framing: Corner posts, end posts and rake beams.

G. End Wall Framing: Half-loaded full frames.

H. End Wall Framing: Full frames with end posts, for future expansion.

2.3 SECONDARY FRAMING

A. Purlins: Zee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410 MPa); simple span or continuous span as required for design. G-30 galvanized standard material with G-90 availability. Welded members are manufacturer’s standard primer.

B. Girts: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required, with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410 MPa); simple span or continuous span as required for design. G-30 galvanized standard material with G-90 availability. Welded members are manufacturer’s standard primer.

C. Widebay Trussed Purlin:

a. Can be used with either solid or open-web framing. b. Roofing options include standing seam metal roof panels or EPDM with VP’s

Deck c. Frame system. d. WideBay’s erectability helps reduce construction costs while providing a

quality finished building e. Easily spans up to 60’ for “column free” open space design floor plans.

f. Length 30 foot to 60 foot. Depth 16 to 60 inches

g. The WideBay Trussed Purlin design can accommodate roof snow loads up to 40 pounds per square foot at a 5’-0” on-center spacing for a 60 foot span.

D. Transbay Members: Open web, bar joist, parallel chord, secondary joists; simple span, utilizing materials, sizes and yield strength as required.

E. Wind Bracing: Portal, torsional, diagonal bracing or diaphragm in accordance with manufacturer's standard design practices; utilizing rods, angles, and other members, with minimum yield strengths as required for design but in most cases, 50 ksi.

F. Primary Frame Flange Bracing: Attached from purlins or girts to the primary framing, minimum yield strength as required for design but in most cases 60 ksi.


2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING

A. Base Angles: 2 inch by 3 inch by 0.059 inch (50 mm by 75 mm by 1.5 mm) galvanized steel angles, with minimum yield strength of 55 ksi (380 MPa), anchored to the floor slab or grade beam with power driven fasteners or equivalent at a maximum spacing of 4 feet (1220 mm) on center and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from the end of any angle member. Anchors are not provided by the metal building manufacturer.

B. Door Headers and Jambs: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 60 ksi (410 MPa).

2.5 ROOF COVERING SYSTEM

A. Roof Panels: Panel Rib; 36 inch (915 mm) wide net coverage, with 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) high major ribs at 12 inches (305 mm) on center with minor ribs spaced between the major ribs. 1. Material: Galvalume steel painted. 2. Material: Galvalume steel unpainted. 3. Material: Galvanized steel, with G90/Z275 coating. 4. Thickness: 26 gage (0.45 mm). 5. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 6. Thickness: 22 gage (0.77 mm). 7. Side laps: At least one full major rib, with a supporting member bearing edge

on the lower panel and an anti-capillary groove on the upper panel. 8. Length: Continuous from eave to ridge up to 43 feet in length. 9. End laps, where required: 4 inches (102 mm) wide, located at a support

member. The KXL paint system is a PVDF finish applied to the galvalume surface to give a long life color that resists fading and chalking. KXL is a 1 mil nom. PVDF finish with 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 standard.

10. Panel rib roof will meet the requirements for UL Class 60 or 90 wind uplift. Certification includes IAS and Miami-Dade County Florida product approval.

B. Roof Panels: SSR Standing Seam Roof Panels; 24 inches (610 mm) wide net coverage, with 3 inches (75 mm) high major ribs formed at the panel side laps, formed for field seaming using electrically operated seaming machine. 1. Side joints: Factory applied sealant for field seaming. 2. Material: Galvalume steel. 3. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 4. Thickness: 22 gage (0.76 mm). 5. Side laps: Two factory-formed interlocking ribs, with one weather sealed

joint, field-seamed into place to form a double-fold 360 degree seam. 6. Length: Continuous from eave to ridge up to 52 feet in length. 7. End laps, where required: 4 inches (102 mm) wide, located at a support

member. 8. Panel-to-roof purlin structural attachments: SSR clips with movable tabs

which interlock with seamed SSR panel ribs and provide for 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) of panel movement in either direction from center of clip to compensate for thermal effects.

9. Ridge assembly for high end of slopes: SSR Ridge; draw-formed aluminum seam caps factory-attached to SSR ridge panels that are seamed together along the center of the ridge, utilizing only one weather sealed joint and providing a true expansion joint for panel movement.

10. Rake edge of roof shall be attached to the building structure in a manner which will allow thermal expansion of the SSR roof panels along the gables and will provide the uplift resistance required by code.


11. SSR roof will meet the requirements for UL Class 90 wind uplift and FM Class 1-60, 1-75, 1-90 & 1-120. Certification includes IAS and Miami-Dade County Florida product approval.

12. The KXL paint system is a PVDF finish applied to the galvalume surface to give a long life color that resists fading and chalking. KXL is a 1 mil nom. PVDF finish with 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 standard.

13. Exposed fasteners are stainless steel capped painted to match the selected color from the VP color chart or special ordered if a special color roof is provided.

C. Roof Panels: SLR Architectural Standing Seam Roof Panels; 16 inches (406 mm) wide net coverage with major ribs formed at the panel side laps, for field seaming using electrically operated seaming machine. 1. Material: Galvalume steel. 2. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm), with 2 inch (50 mm) standing seam. 3. Thickness: 22 gage (0.76 mm), with 3 inch (75 mm) standing seam. 4. Side joints: Factory applied sealant for field seaming 5. Length: Continuous from eave to ridge up to 41 feet (12500 mm) in length. 6. End laps, where required: 5 inches (127 mm) wide, located at a support

member. 7. Panel-to-roof purlin structural attachments: SLR clips, with movable tabs that

interlock with seamed SLR panel ribs and provide 1 inch (25 mm) of panel movement in either direction from center of clip to compensate for thermal effects.

8. The KXL paint system is a PVDF finish applied to the galvalume surface to give a long life color that resists fading and chalking. KXL is a 1 mil nom. PVDF finish with 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 standard.

9. UL-90 wind uplift rating is available with support at 5’-0 on center. SLR is also US Army Corps of Engineers approved for wind uplift resistance. Thermalblock is included.

2.6 WALL COVERING SYSTEM

A. Wall Panels: Panel Rib; 36 inch (915 mm) wide net coverage, with 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) high major ribs at 12 inches (305 mm) on center with minor ribs spaced between the major ribs. 1. Material: Galvalume steel, unpainted. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, with G90/Z275 coating. 3. Thickness: 26 gage (0.45 mm). 4. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 5. Thickness: 22 gage (0.76 mm). 6. Side laps: Two fully overlapping major ribs secured together with 1/4 inch (6

mm) diameter color-matched carbon steel fasteners. 7. Length: Continuous from sill to eave up to 41 feet (12.5 m) in length. 8. End laps, where required: 4 inches (100 mm) wide, located at a support

member. 9. Crimp panels at the base to achieve no gaps against the foundation greater

than 1/16 inch and notch to match roof panel configuration at the eave. 10. Cut panels square at each end. 11. Cut panels square at each end; provide base trim at sill and closure plugs. 12. The KXL paint system is a PVDF finish applied to the zinc or zinc aluminum

coated steel to give a long life color that resists fading and chalking. KXL is a 1 mil nom. PVDF finish with 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000standard.

13. Certification includes IAS Miami-Dade County Florida product approval.


B. Wall Panel: RPR (reverse panel rib) 36 inch (915 mm) wide net coverage, with 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) high major ribs at 12 inches (305 mm) on center with minor ribs spaced between the major ribs. 1. Material: Galvalume steel, unpainted. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, with G90/Z275 coating. 3. Thickness: 26 gage (0.45 mm). 4. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 5. Thickness: 22 gage (0.76 mm). 6. Side laps: Two fully overlapping major ribs secured together with 1/4 inch (6

mm) diameter color-matched carbon steel fasteners. 7. Length: Continuous from sill to eave up to 41 feet (12.5 m) in length. 8. End laps, where required: 4 inches (100 mm) wide, located at a support

member. 9. Crimp panels at the base and notch to match roof panel configuration at the

eave. 10. Cut panels square at each end. 11. Cut panels square at each end; provide base trim at sill. 12. The KXL paint system is a PVDF finish applied to the zinc or zinc aluminum

coated steel to give a long life color that resists fading and chalking. KXL is a 1 mil nom. PVDF finish with 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 standard.

13. Certification includes IAS and Miami-Dade County Florida product approval.

C. Wall Panels: Vee Rib; 36 inch (915 mm) wide net coverage, with reverse ribs 12 inches (305 mm) on center 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) deep, sculptured profile with textured finish. 1. Material: Galvalume steel, unpainted. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, with G90/Z275 coating. 3. Thickness: 26 gage (0.45 mm). 4. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 5. Thickness: 22 gage (0.76 mm). 6. Side laps: At least one full major rib, with a supporting member bearing edge

on the lower panel and an anti-capillary groove on the upper panel. 7. Length: Continuous from sill to eave up to 41 feet (12500 mm) in length. 8. End laps, where required: Located at a support member. 9. Cut panels square at ends; provide base trim at sill. 10. The KXL paint system is a PVDF finish applied to the galvalume surface to

give a long life color that resists fading and chalking. KXL is a 1 mil nom. PVDF finish with 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 standard.

D. Wall Panels: Stran-Lok Wall Panels; deep fluted panels, with 16 inch (406 mm) wide net coverage, 3 inch (75 mm) deep interlocking ribs for concealed fasteners. 1. Material: Galvalume steel. 2. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 3. Thickness: 22 gage (0.76 mm). 4. Side laps: At least one full major rib, with interlocking ribs for concealed

fasteners. 5. Length: Continuous from sill to eave up to 39 feet (11890 mm) in length. 6. End laps, where required: Located at a support member. 7. Panels and trim are designed to allow flexible placement of framed openings,

eliminating the need to maintain modules. 8. Standard colors include: Ash Gray, Classic Beige & Egyptian White. All other

colors will require a minimum 10,000# coil be purchased.


E. Wall Panel: TextureClad wall panel has the rich texture of stucco with the convenience of a metal wall panel. 1. Each TextureClad panel is manufactured from 20 gage galvanized steel. 2. Installed panel width is 16” and can be ordered from 14” to 26’ long. 3. Top and bottom of every panel has a 5/8” fold back. Formed ends allow the

panel to nest end to end for stacking up a vertical wall. 4. This is a concealed fattener system that works best with the available hat

channel sections from VP. 5. TextureClad is available with a 20 year finish warranty. 6. Trim colors only include VP standard colors and not panel match colors.

Color match trim can be supplied for additional fees.

F. Wall Panel: ImpressaClad. ImpressaClad is the same panel as Textureclad but does not come with the stucco finish. ImpressaClad can be ordered smooth or embossed to reduce the oil canning that accompanies smooth width panels. 1. ImpressaClad finishes meet Kynar 500 specifications. 2. ImpressaClad meets the following test methods- ASTM D2794, ASTM D1737,

ASTM G26, ASTM E1592, ASTM E72-80, ASTM D870, ASTM B-117, ASTM G23, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996 & Dade County, Florida approval.

G. Wall Panel: ThermalClad Reveal panel; 42” wide sturdy insulated sandwich panel

ideal for most commercial & industrial applications. 1. 26 gage interior and exterior faces. The exterior panel is factory-formed with

bold vertical lines to present and attractive and durable finish wall. 2. The embossed G-90 steel exterior panels are coated in 70% fluoropolymer

finish to provide long term low maintenance performance. 3. Interior panels are planked design 26 gage steel, factory coated with white

polyester finish. 4. USDA approved finishes available 5. Offset double tongue and groove side joints 6. R-value up to R-34.9 7. Clips and fasteners concealed in side joints 8. Standard lengths from 8’ to 40’ 9. Non-CFC polyurethane core 10. Available thicknesses are 2”, 2.5”, 3” & 4” 11. Exterior panels meet Kynar 500 & Hylar 5000 specifications 12. Tests and approvals include; FM 4880, FM 4881, Dade County Florida air

and water infiltration tests AAMA 501, ASTM E283 and E 331.

H. Wall Panel: ThermalClad Planked panel; 42” wide sturdy insulated sandwich panel ideal for exterior walls or interior partition applications. 1. 26 gage interior and exterior faces. Matching profile design on exterior and

interior panel factory formed with vertical lines to present an attractive durable finish.

2. The embossed G-90 steel exterior panels are coated in 70% fluoropolymer finish to provide long term low maintenance performance.

3. USDA approved finishes available 4. Offset double tongue and groove side joints 5. R-value up to R-34.9 6. Clips and fasteners concealed in side joints 7. Standard lengths from 8’ to 40’ 8. Available thicknesses are 2”, 2.5”, 3” & 4” 9. Exterior panels meet Kynar 500 & Hylar 5000 specifications 10. Tests and approvals include; FM 4880, FM 4881, Dade County Florida air and

water infiltration tests AAMA 501, ASTM E283 and E 331.


I. Wall Panel: ThermalClad Architectural panel; 36” wide high performance, flat insulated panel, ideal for architectural projects requiring thermal protection. 1. 22 gage exterior and 26 gage interior panel. This panel is designed for high

profile applications that require a flush exterior wall finish 2. The G-90 steel exterior panels are coated in 70% fluoropolymer finish to

provide long term low maintenance performance. 3. The interior panel are planked style 26 gage steel, factory coated with a white

polyester finish 4. USDA approved finishes available 5. Offset double tongue and groove side joints 6. R-value up to R-34.9 7. Clips and fasteners concealed in side joints 8. Non-CFC polyurethane core 9. Standard lengths from 8’ to 32’ 10. Available thicknesses are 2”, 2.5”, 3” & 4” 11. Exterior panels meet Kynar 500 & Hylar 5000 specifications 12. Tests and approvals include; FM 4880, FM 4881, Dade County Florida air and

water infiltration tests AAMA 501, ASTM E283 and E 331.

J. Tuff-Wall insulated panel: a 42” wide, double walled foam insulated panel with an attractive and durable textured finish. 1. The masonry look of stucco with the efficiency of an insulated metal panel. 2. 10 year limited warranty 3. Lengths up to 40’ 4. The panel’s textured surface has a hard aggregated fiber reinforced polymer

coating created with factory applied Tuff-Cote finish system 5. Interior and exterior panel is 26 gage metal. Interior panel can function as the

finish interior wall. 6. Exterior metal walls are a sturdy 26 gage steel, surrounding an insulated core

of foamed in place; blister free, non-CFC polyurethane. 7. Tests and approvals include; FM 4880, FM 4881, Dade County Florida air and

water infiltration tests AAMA 501, ASTM E283 and E 331. 8. Available thicknesses are 2”, 2.5”, 3” & 4”

K. Liner Panels: LPR-36; 36 inch (915 mm) wide net coverage, with 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) high major ribs with minor ribs spaced between the major ribs. 1. Material: Galvanized steel with G90/Z275 coating. 2. Thickness: 28 gage (0.30 mm). 3. Length: Continuous from sill to eave up to 41 feet (12500 mm) in length. 4. Provide partial height wall liner panels, refer to drawings. 5. Provide eave height liner panels. 6. Provide full height liner panels. 7. Provide liner panel wainscot to 7 feet 5-1/4 inches (2266 mm).

L. Liner Panels: Panel Rib Liner Panels; 36 inch (915 mm) wide net coverage, with 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) high major ribs with minor ribs spaced between the major ribs. 1. Material: Galvalume steel, unpainted. 2. Material: Galvanized steel with G90/Z275 coating. 3. Thickness: 26 gage (0.45 mm). 4. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 5. Length: Continuous from sill to eave up to 41 feet (12.5 m) in length. 6. Provide partial height wall liner panels, refer to drawings. 7. Provide eave height liner panels. 8. Provide full height liner panels. 9. Provide liner panel wainscot to 7 feet 5-1/4 inches (2266 mm).


M. Soffit Panels: Match Panel Rib wall panels.

N. Soffit Panels: Match Vee Rib wall panels.

O. Soffit Panels: FP-12 Architectural Soffit Panels; 12 inch (305 mm) wide net coverage, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep profile. Include center stiffening bead on panels over 15 feet (4570 mm). 1. Material: Prefinished Galvalume. 2. Thickness: 24 gage (0.61 mm). 3. Thickness: 22 gage (0.76 mm). 4. Side joints: Continuous interlocking side joints with concealed fasteners. 5. Panel length: 2’-0 minimum to 30 feet (9100 mm), maximum.

2.7 INSULATION

A. Schedule: 1. Roof insulation: Nominal values:

a. Blanket insulation - 3 inches (76 mm); R-value: 10 b. Blanket insulation - 4 inches (100 mm); R-value: 13 c. Blanket insulation - 6 inches (150 mm); R-value: 19 d. Blanket insulation thermal blocks. e. Blanket insulation super thermal blocks. f. Rigid board insulation - 1-1/4 inches (32 mm); R-value: 8.1 g. Rigid board insulation - 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); R-value: 10.1 h. Rigid board insulation - 1-3/4 inches (44 mm); R-value: 11.4 i. Rigid board insulation - 2 inches (50 mm); R-value: 13 j. Rigid board insulation - 2-1/4 inches (57 mm); R-value: 14.4 k. Rigid board insulation - 2-1/2 inches (63 mm); R-value: 15.8

2. Wall Insulation: Nominal values: a. Blanket insulation - 3 inches (75 mm); R-value: 10 b. Blanket insulation - 4 inches (100 mm); R-value: 13 c. Blanket insulation - 6 inches (150 mm); R-value: 19 d. Rigid board insulation - 1-1/4 inches (32 mm); R-value: 8.1 e. Rigid board insulation - 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); R-value: 10.1 f. Rigid board insulation - 1-3/4 inches (44 mm); R-value: 11.4 g. Rigid board insulation - 2 inches (50 mm); R-value: 13 h. Rigid board insulation - 2-1/4 inches (57 mm); R-value: 14.4 i. Rigid board insulation - 2-1/2 inches (63 mm); R-value: 15.8

B. Blanket Insulation: Glass fiber, with factory laminated facing material 1. Glass fiber: Odorless, neutral colored, long filament, flexible resilient,

produced in compliance with NAIMA 202-96. 2. Flame spread Index: The composite of fiberglass and facing shall have

surface burning characteristics not to exceed 25 flame spread when tested in accordance with UL 723 or ASTM E84 test methods.

3. Smoke Developed Index: not to exceed 50 smoke development when tested in accordance with UL 723 or ASTM E84 test methods.

4. UL Classified. 5. Facing: White vinyl; embossed, 0.0032 inch (0.09 mm) thick plus or minus 10

percent; permeance in compliance with ASTM E 96 1.00 perm (5.17 ng/Ns). fiberglass and facing meeting Flame Spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723.


6. WMP-VR (PSK-LD) Facing: White polypropylene film fiberglass and polyester scrim; reinforced 11# natural kraft, 0.0015 inch (thick plus or minus 10 percent; permeance in compliance with ASTM E 96 1.00 perm (5.17 ng/Ns). Tri-directional fiberglass and facing meeting Flame Spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723. #11 natural kraft.

7. WMP-10 (PSK-SD) Facing: White polypropylene film metallization fiberglass & polyester scrim 14# white craft. 0.0015 inch (thick plus or minus 10 percent; permeance in compliance with ASTM E 96 0.02 perm (1.15 ng/Ns). Tri-directional fiberglass/polyester. Facing meeting Flame spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723.

8. WMP-30 (PSK-HD) Facing: White polypropylene film metallization fiberglass & polyester scrim, .0015 thick, 0.02 perms (1.15 ng/Ns). Kraft= natural 30#. Tri-directional fiberglass/polyester and facing meeting Flame Spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723.

9. WMP-50 (PSKP) Facing: White polypropylene film fiberglass & polyester scrim core metalized polyester, .0015 thick, 0.02 perms (1.15 ng/Ns). Film is metalized polyester .0005 inches. Tri-directional fiberglass/polyester and facing meeting Flame Spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723.

10. R-3035 HD (FSK-HD) Facing: Foil .0005 thick; barrier coating= elastomeric polymer, reinforcing= tri-directional fiberglass, ., 0.02 perms (1.15 ng/Ns). Film is natural craft 30#. facing meeting Flame spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723.

11. R-3035 HD (FSK-HD) Facing: Foil .0005 thick; barrier coating= elastomeric polymer, reinforcing= tri-directional fiberglass, ., 0.02 perms (1.15 ng/Ns). Film is natural craft 30#. facing meeting Flame spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723.

12. WMP-F (PSF) Facing: White polypropylene film fiberglass scrim aluminum foil .0015 thick; reinforcing= Bi-directional fiberglass, ., 0.02 perms (1.15 ng/Ns). Foil facing .0003 inches. facing meets Flame Spread of 10 or less, Smoke Developed of 20 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723 on film side.

13. WMP-VR-R (PSP) Facing: White polypropylene film fiberglass & polyester scrim metalized polyester .0015 thick; reinforcing= Tri-directional fiberglass, ., 0.02 perms (1.15 ng/Ns). Film= Metalized Polyester .0005 inches. Facing meets Flame Spread of 10 or less, Smoke Developed of 35 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84/ UL 723 on polypropylene side.

14. Gymguard: Facing = White film (metalized polypropylene) .0015 inches, fabric facing = Fiberglass polyester blend 75#. .02 perm (1.15 ng/Ns). Fire testing per ASTM E84/ UL 723 on fabric side= flame spread of 5 or less, smoke development of 40 or less.

15. Areanshield: Facing = foil (Aluminum) .0003 inches. Fabric facing = Fiberglass polyester blend 75#. .02 perm (1.15 ng/Ns). Fire testing per ASTM E84/ UL 723 on fabric side= flame spread of 5 or less, smoke development of 5 or less.

16. Insulations available in black facings are: WMP-VR, WMP-VR-R, WMP-10, WMP-30, WMP-50WMP-F.

17. Provide facing 3 inches (75 mm) wider than blanket on both edges. 18. Width: As required for installation.

C. Rigid Board Insulation: Glass-fiber-reinforced polyisocyanurate foam core, laminated between 1.0 mil smooth, reflective aluminum foil facers on both sides. 1. Facer Finish: ________. 2. Width: 4 feet (1220 mm).


D. Thermal Blocks: High density, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick expanded polystyrene, for installation over the purlin.

E. Thermal Blocks: Superblock; 1 inch by 3-1/2 inch (25 mm by 89 mm) extruded polystyrene thermal spacer strips capped by 22 gage (0.76 mm) galvanized channels, with swagged end for interconnection along the purlin run, metal tabs at 2 feet (610 mm) on center at SSR clip locations, and pre-punched fastener holes.

F. Stran-Lok blanket insulation: Glass fiber insulation, cut to width for applications between or outside Stran-Lok. Thermal resistance (R-value) R-10 at 75 degrees F (1.7 square m K/W at 24 degrees C) mean temperature.

G. Sky-Web II: Superior fall protection and insulation support for pre-engineered buildings. 1. The Sky-Web II system has a flame spread index of 3 or less and a smoke

developed index of less than 10 as tested in accordance with U.L. 723. 2. The system is compatible with all VP framing systems. 3. The system should be ordered so splices are made at the frame lines. 4. The basic mesh is knotted mesh on a 2.75 inch x 2.75 inch grid. The mesh

is made from twisted twine of DuPont nylon type 6-6 fiber. The mesh covering the interior bays is made from #21 twine.

5. The mesh has double selvage along the two edges in the machined direction.

2.8 WALL ACCESSORIES

A. Windows: Extruded aluminum frames with extruded aluminum sash of 6063-T5 alloy, complying with AAMA 101 performance and testing requirements for: 1. Grade: ___. 2. Class: ___. 3. Screens: 18 by 16 black fiberglass mesh. 4. Finish on all exposed areas of aluminum windows and fins: Baked enamel

complying with AAMA 603.8. 5. Color: Manufacturer's standard bronze. 6. Type: Horizontally sliding. 7. Type: Casement, project-out, single hung. 8. Type: Fixed. 9. Glass: As scheduled on drawings. 10. Glass: Single glazing. 11. Glass: Single glazing, tempered. 12. Glass: Single glazing, tinted. 13. Glass: Single glazing, obscure. 14. Glass: Sealed insulating units(clear or obscured), ASTM E 774, CBA rated

with a 5 year warranty against seal failure; polysulfide sealant; overall unit thickness not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm).

15. Available sizes for Panel Rib & Vee Rib walls are: • 2060 clear fixed- insulated • 3030 horizontal slide- clear or obscure glass- insulated • 6030 horizontal slide- clear or obscure glass- insulated • 6040 horizontal slide- clear or obscure glass- insulated • 3040 single hung- clear glass- insulated

16. Available size for Stran-Lok walls: • 4042 horizontal slide – clear – insulated


B. Service Doors: 1. Doors for cylindrical locks: SDI 100, Grade 1, Model 1 (1-3/4 inches (44 mm)

thick minimum 20 gage (0.91 mm) steel face sheets). 2. Doors for mortise locks or panic devices: SDI 100, Grade 2, Model 1, 1-3/4

inches (44 mm) thick minimum 18 gage (1.22 mm) steel face sheets. 3. Type: Full flush. 4. Type: Half glass. 5. Type: Narrow lite style. 6. Frames: SDI 100, modified drywall type, 4-3/4 inches (120 mm) jamb depth

minimum 16 gage (1.52 mm) steel; self-framing and self-flashing. 7. Hardware reinforcements: Comply with SDI 100; locate so that door and

frame are non-handed. 8. Finish: Two coat baked on paint on all exposed surfaces, apply after cleaning

and chemical treatment for corrosion resistance and paint adhesion; manufacturer's standard bronze color.

9. Weatherstripping: At jambs, head and sill, complying with water and air resistance requirements of SDI 115 and SDI 116.

10. Hardware: a. One key in-knob cylindrical lockset per opening. b. One mullion and one pair surface bolts per double door opening. c. Three full mortise hinges per leaf, one with non-removable pin.

11. Size: As scheduled on drawings. 12. Single door size: 3 feet by 7 feet (915 by 2135 mm). 13. Single door size: 3 feet 6 inches by 7 feet (1065 by 2135 mm). 14. Double door size: 6 feet by 7 feet (1830 by 2135 mm) overall.

C. Louvers: 18 gage (1.22 mm) G-90 galvanized steel, self-framing, self-flashing with integral head gutter, with paint finish. 1. Type: Fixed blade. 2. Type: Operable blade, with weather-stripped blades and 15 feet (4575 mm)

of pull chain with dogging clip. Blades open up to 45 degrees. 3. Self flashing to VP Panel Rib, reverse panel rib, Stran-Lok or Vee Rib wall

panels 4. Screen: Exterior mounted, removable insect screen. 5. Minimum free area: 65 percent. 6. Size: 4 feet by 3 feet (1220 by 915 mm). 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard bronze.

D. Wall Openings: Cold-formed sheet metal framing concealed with manufacturer's standard colored trim.

2.9 ROOF ACCESSORIES

A. Eave Gutters: Roll-formed 26 gage (0.45 mm) steel sheet, with gutter straps, fasteners and joint sealant; manufacturer's standard color. 1. Downspouts: 29 gage 4 inches by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) in 10 foot (3050

mm) lengths, with downspout elbows and downspout straps; same color as wall panels unless specified otherwise.

B. Multi-Gutters and Valley Gutters: 0.059 inch (1.5 mm)(17 gage) thick cold-formed steel sheet. 1. Finish: G90/Z275 galvanized coated. 2. Joints: mechanically fastened. 3. VP provides gutter wedges only. Gutter liner and all outlet material for water

drainage is typically by others.


C. Translucent Roof Panels: Tuf-Lite; UV stabilized thermosetting polyester resin reinforced with chopped and woven roving glass fiber; manufacturer's standard configuration. 1. Color: White exterior surface and minimum 55-60 percent light transmittance. 2. Self-ignition temperature: 650 degrees F (343 degrees C) or greater, when

tested in accordance with ASTM D 1929. 3. Smoke density index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E

84, or 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2843. 4. Extent of burning: 1 inch (25.4 mm) or less, when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 635. 5. Rate of burning: 2.5 inches (64 mm) per minute or less, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 635. 6. Tuf-lites are available with UL Class 90. 7. Optional condensation pans are also available 8. Seamed in rails for the Tuf-lite only come in one color (Egyptian White) &

must be field painted to match other colors if required.

D. Tuf-Dome: Raised dome design for attractive architectural appearance. 1. Designed to fit roof panel profile for superior weathertightness. 2. High side is curved to divert water flow 3. Supports up to 300 lbs. The superior clarity of the material allows for a higher

level of natural light transmission and yellowing, cracking, fading and has been tested to withstand high winds, hail, ice or other weather conditions.

4. Tuf-dome can be used with burglar bars and can be used in new construction or retro-fit applications.

E. Gravity Ventilators: APEX 20; factory assembled, round, with 20 inch (510 mm) diameter throat with damper, operating cord and bird screen and base configured to match roof panel. Exterior material is 26 gage metal 1. Color: Manufacturer's standard white. 2. Provide insulation retaining ring at interior. 3. One piece stamped rain cap

F. Ridge Ventilators: 10 feet (3050 mm) long, 24 gage Galvalume, with damper with chain and worm gear operator and bird screen, and base configured to match roof panel. 1. Throat opening: 9 inches (229 mm). 2. Throat opening: 12 inches (305 mm). 3. Connect individual vents to form continuous ridge vent with up to 5 vents.

G. Structural Facade System: Facade mounted below the plane of the roof, without roof supports or through the roof structural attachments. 1. Face: Panel Rib wall panels. 2. Face: Vee Rib wall panels. 3. Face: As indicated on drawings. 4. Face Style: Vertical. 5. Face Style: Mansard with incline of _____. 6. Height: ___ feet (____ m), with bottom edge at 2 feet (610 mm) below

building eave line. 7. Close space between facade and roof with gutter. 8. Provide standard eave gutter on roof with open space between gutter and

back side of facade. 9. Back Side: Closed with standard wall panels. 10. Soffit: Matching panels.


H. Light Facade System: Facade mounted on the roof, with through the roof structural attachments; G90/Z275 galvanized cold-formed light gage steel framing. 1. Face: Panel Rib wall panels. 2. Face style: Vertical. 3. Face style: Mansard with incline of _____. 4. Height: ___ feet (____ mm), with bottom edge at 1 foot (305 mm) below

building eave line. 5. Provide standard eave gutter on roof with open space between gutter and

back side of facade. 6. Back side: Closed with standard wall panels. 7. Soffit: Matching panels.

I. Roof Curbs: Welded units fabricated for shingled installation with roof panels; minimum 18 gage (1.22 mm) Galvalume coated steel, with welds cleaned and treated with protective coating compatible with the Galvalume substrate. 1. Top of curbs horizontal with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) perimeter flange. 2. Curb walls insulated with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm), 3 pcf (48 kg/cu m) density rigid

glass fiber insulation. 3. Water diversion: Integral 4 inch (102 mm) high by full length cricket on

upslope side. 4. Exposed curb flanges pre-drilled for correct fastener locations. 5. Upslope and down slope curb flanges with integral welded inside and outside

cell closures compatible with the roof panel profile. 6. Curb framing: Mounted on secondary structural members and installed from

the top; compatible with the thermal expansion and contraction properties of the roof on which it is used.

7. Opening size: As indicated on drawings. 8. Roof Access Hatch: Manufacturer's standard 30 by 36 inch (762 by 914 mm)

opening, with curb. 9. Curbs for SSR Roof Panels: One-piece type. 10. Curbs for SSR Roof Panels: Three-piece type. 11. Curbs for SSR Roof panels: Seamed in type. 12. Curbs for SSR Roof panels: Concealed fastener.

J. Roof Walkways: 18 gage (1.22 mm) G90/Z275 galvanized planks, supports and hardware; for attachment to top of the SSR rib with no fastener penetrations through roof panel. 1. Planks: Interlocking, with slip resistant die formed tooth pattern on surface. 2. Width: As indicated on drawings. 3. Width: 18 inches (457 mm). 4. Width: 24 inches (610 mm). 5. Width: 36 inches (915 mm). 6. Length: 20 foot (6.1 m) modules.

2.10 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Plate, Bar, Sheet, and Strip for Use in Bolted and Welded Constructions: ASTM A 572/A 572M, A 529/A 529M, A 1011 or A 36/A 36M Modified 50, with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi (380 MPa).

B. Galvanized Structural Steel Material for Use in Roll Formed or Press Broken Secondary Structural Members: ASTM A 563, with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi (410 MPa).

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet for Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof and Wall Coverings, Trim and Flashing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345 MPa).


D. Galvalume Steel Sheet Used in Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof Covering: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345 MPa); nominal coating weight of 0.5 oz per sq ft (152 kg/sq m) both sides, equivalent to an approximate coating thickness of 0.0018 inch (0.05 mm) both sides.

E. Hot Rolled Steel Shapes: W, M and S shapes, angles, rods, channels and other shapes; ASTM A 500, ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 36/A 36M as applicable; with minimum yield strengths required for the design.

F. Structural Bolts and Nuts Used with Primary Framing: High strength, ASTM A 325 bolts and ASTM A563 Grade C nuts.

G. Bolts and Nuts Used with Secondary Framing Members: High Strength ASTM A 325 Bolts and ASTM A563 Grade C nuts.

H. Panel Fasteners: 1. For Galvalume and KXL finished roof panels: Stainless steel-capped carbon

steel fasteners with integral sealing washer. 2. For wall panels: Coated carbon steel. 3. Color of exposed fastener heads to match the wall panel finish. 4. Concealed Fasteners: Self-drilling type, of size as required. 5. Provide fasteners in quantities and location as required by the manufacturer.

I. Flashing and Trim: Match material, finish, and color of adjacent components. Provide trim at rakes, including peak and corner assemblies, high and low eaves, corners, bases, framed openings and as required or specified to provide weathertightness and a finished appearance.

J. Plastic Parts: Glass fiber reinforced resin or thermoformed ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene). 1. ABS: Minimum 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 2. Color: Manufacturer's standard color.

K. Sealants, Mastics and Closures: Manufacturer's standard type. 1. Provide at roof panel end laps, side laps, rake, eave, transitions and

accessories as required to provide a weather resistant roof system; use tape mastic or gun grade sealant at side laps and end laps.

2. Provide at wall panel rakes, eaves, transitions and accessories. 3. Closures: Formed to match panel profiles; closed cell elastic material,

manufacturer's standard color. 4. Tape mastic: Pre-formed butyl rubber-based, non-hardening, non-corrosive

to metal; white or light gray. 5. Gun grade sealant: Non-skinning synthetic Elastomeric based material; gray

or bronze.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication: Fabricate according to manufacturer's standard practice. 1. Fabricate structural members made of welded plate sections by jointing the

flanges and webs by continuous automatic submerged arc welding process. 2. Welding operators and processes: Qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Field connections: Prepare members for bolted field connection by making

punched, drilled, or reamed holes in the shop.


B. Component Identification: Mark all fabricated parts, either individually or by lot or group, using an identification marking corresponding to the marking shown on the shop drawings, using a method that remains visible after shop painting.

2.12 FINISH

A. Schedule of Finishes: 1. Roof finish and color: ________. 2. Wall finish and color: ________. 3. Mansard panel finish and color: ________. 4. Liner panel finish and color: ________. 5. Soffit panels finish and color: ________.

B. Shop Coat: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer paint; manufacturer's standard color. 1. Finish all structural steel members using one coat of manufacturer's standard

shop coat, after cleaning of oil, dirt, loose scale and foreign matter.

C. SP Pre-Painted Finish: 0.8 mil baked on silicone polyester exterior surface. 1. Interior finish: Off white 0.5 mil (0.01 mm) washcoat.

D. KXL Pre-Painted Finish: 1 mil (0.025 mm) 70% Kynar 500, Hylar 5000 coating on exterior surface. 1. Color: Interior Finish: Off white 0.5 mil (0.01 mm) washcoat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion. 1. Verify foundations are properly installed, to correct dimensions and within

acceptable tolerances. 2. Verify location of covered or built-in work. 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Framing Erection: Erect framing in compliance with AIS Specification & the latest edition of the MBMA metal building systems manual.

B. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate braced bays as required by manufacturer.

3.3 ERECTION OF FRAME

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not erect frames without complete installation of tie beams and anchorages.

C. Set column base plates with non-shrink grout to full plate bearing.

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without written approval.


E. After erection, prime bolts, welds, abrasions, and surfaces not primed with primer used in shop painting.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL AND ROOF SYSTEM

A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface.

C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb.

D. Locate end laps over supports. End lap panels according to manufacturer's recommendations. Place sidelaps over adjacent panel and mechanically seam or stitch fastener per erection guidelines.

E. Provide expansion joints where indicated.

F. Use concealed fasteners.

G. Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration.

H. Install system free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement, and wind whistles.

I. Install door frames, service doors, overhead doors, window and glass, and gutter system in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

J. Seal wall and roof accessories watertight and weathertight with sealant in compliance with building manufacturer's standard procedures.

K. Rigidly support and secure gutters and downpouts. Joint lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts.

L. Tolerances: 1. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from level; 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plumb. 2. Racking: 1/8 inch (3 mm) from true position. Provide shoring to maintain

position prior to cladding installation.


A. Testing by Contractor: 1. Roof installation inspection by roof manufacturer's representative; as required

as part of warranty provision.

B. Testing by Owner: 1. High Strength Bolted Connections: Specification for Structural Joints Using

ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, with minimum testing of bolted connections per the arbitration inspection procedure.

2. Welded Connections: AWS. Visual inspection of 100 percent of welds. Ultrasonic inspection of 50 percent of full and partial penetration welds. A rejection rate greater than 5 percent will increase the inspection to 100 percent.

3. General Testing: For materials and installed tolerances.

END OF SECTION

Visitor’s Center 11/19/10 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing

Architectural Specifications Part 1 General 1.0 Description A. Work in this section includes, but is not limited to: Prefabricated Wood I Beam™ 40 Series (GPI or WI), 60 Series (GPI or WI) and 80 Series (WI 80) ceiling, floor, and roof joists with FiberStrong® webs and lumber flanges (WI) or LVL flanges (GPI). B. Related work specified elsewhere: Rough carpentry.

1.1 Submittals A. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature indicating material composition, thicknesses, dimensions, loading and fabrication details. B. Shop drawings or installation guide: Manufacturer’s literature indicating installation details. Include locations and details of bearing, blocking, bridging, and cutting and drilling of webs for work by others.

1.2 Quality Assurance A. Certification: WI and GPI Series Wood I Beam joists are manufactured in accordance with APA® PRI™-400 performance standard for APA EWS I-joists and NER-QA 397.

1.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer’s original packaging, containers and bundles with manufacturer’s brand name and identification intact and legible. B. Storage and handling: Store and handle materials to protect against contact with damp and wet surfaces, exposure to weather, breakage and damage. Provide air circulation under covering and around stacks of materials. Individual joists shall be handled in the upright position.

1.4 Limitations A. Loads: Concentrated loads shall not be applied to the bottom flange. B. Cutting: Except for cutting to length, top and bottom flanges of Wood I Beam floor and roof joists shall not be cut, drilled or notched.


C. Wood I Beam joists are for use in covered, dry conditions only.

Part 2 Products 2.0 Prefabricated Wood Beams and Joists A. Acceptable products:

1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, WI 40. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, WI 60. 3. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, WI 80. 4. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, GPI 40. 5. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, GPI 60.

B. Characteristics: 1. Flanges:

High-grade lumber flanges. a. WI 40: 2-1/2” b. WI 60: 2-1/2” c. WI 80: 3-1/2” LVL flanges. a. GPI 40: 2-1/2” b. GPI 60: 2-1/2”

1. Webs:

3\8" thick APA Rated oriented strand board.

1. Beam depths:

a. GPI 40 or WI 40: 9-1/2”, 11-7/8” and 14” as required for loading, deflection and span. b. GPI 60 or WI 60: 9-1/2”, 11-7/8”, 14” and 16” as required for loading, deflection and span. c. WI 80: 11-7/8”, 14” and 16” as required for loading, deflection and span.

1. Beam length: As required for span and bearing.

2.1 Accessories


A. Nails: 8d, 10d, and 12d box, sinker, and common nails. B. Bracing and blocking:

1. Bearing stiffeners: 2x4 or combination of 3/8”, 1/2” or 5/8” plywood or OSB. 2. Band joists and continuous closure at load-bearing walls: per standard approved Wood I Beam details. 3. Lateral support at intermediate supports of multiple span joists: Wood I Beam blocking.

C. Joist hangers:

1. Model numbers are shown for United Steel Products (Kant-Sag®) and Simpson Strong-Tie® connectors. Contact Georgia-Pacific for other acceptable connectors.

Part 3 Execution 3.0 General A. Provide Wood I Beam floor and roof joists where indicated on drawings using hangers and accessories specified. B. Install Wood I Beam joists in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Install and brace Wood I Beam floor and roof joists to prevent dominoing of system and buckling of top flange.

3.1 Accessories Install accessories where indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

UC601 SPECS.DOC

Stuckeman Family Building/11-19-10 05 33 00 - 1 Aluminum Decking

SECTION 07610

SHEET METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Preformed corrugated decking.

2. Fasteners.

3. Underlayment.

4. Slip sheet.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry

2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

3. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA)

1. AA-C22-A41: Clear Coatings

2. AA-C22-A42: Integral Color Coatings

3. AA-C22-A44: Color In Process

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A167: Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip

2. ASTM A653: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process

3. ASTM B137: Test Method for Measurement of Coating Mass Per Unit Area of

Anodically Coated Aluminum

4. ASTM B209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

5. ASTM B370: Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

6. ASTM D1922: Specification for Non-Asphalt, fiberglass-based underlayment used in

Roofing and Waterproofing

7. ASTM D1970: Self-adhering rubberized sheet membrane.

UC601 SPECS.DOC


C. Copper Development Association (CDA)

1. CDA 110: General Requirements

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 [Other]:

1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for the roofing specified.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate thickness and dimension of parts, flashing and anchoring

methods, and detail and location of joints; including joints necessary to accommodate

thermal movement.

3. Samples

a. 2 samples of each type of panel assembly, 12 inch by 12 inch minimum.

b. 6 samples of each finish in color or colors selected, 3 inch by 5 inch minimum.

4. Affidavit certifying that the material meets the requirements specified.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing roofing

panels similar to those specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to roofing manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original crating, properly labeled

for identification and installation purposes. Store materials in accordance with panel

manufacturer’s recommendations. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage to panels

and finishes.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warrant the materials to be free of faults and defects in accordance

with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by paint

manufacturer's standard multi-year warranty. The warranty shall be in writing and shall

be signed by the manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Firestone Metal Products / UNACLAD

UC601 SPECS.DOC


B. Other manufacturers seeking approval of their products must comply with requirements

of the Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document A701), Paragraph 3.3 prior to bidding.

C. Other manufacturers seeking approval of their products must comply with requirements

of Section 01600 [Other] during construction.

2.02 ROOFING TYPE

A. UNA-CLAD UC-601 C-Deck, formed [aluminum] [steel] [copper] [RHEINZINK]

corrugated roofing panels.

2.03 PANEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Aluminum Panels: ASTM B209, Aluminum Association specification sheet [3003-

H14/3105-H14 for painted finish][5005-H34 for anodized finish].

1. Thickness: [0.032][0.040] inch.

B. Steel Panels: ASTM A653, G90 (lock-forming quality), extra smooth, galvanized steel,

minimum spangle.

C. Copper Panels: ASTM B370

1. Thickness: 16 ounce.

D. RHEINZINK Panels: EURO – Norm Standard – DIN EN 988 (formally DIN 17770)

1. Thickness: [24][22] gauge.

E. Form roofing panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square,

and free from distribution or manufacturing defects.

1. Panel Width: 40 inches.

2. Panel Length: 600 inches (maximum).

3. Panel Depth: 0.5 inch.

4. Corrugation Ribs: 2 inches on center (nominal).

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners shall be concealed, non-corrosive type, as recommended by the panel

manufacturer.

B. Underlayments

1. Non-asphaltic fiberglass-based underlayment meeting ASTM D146, D1922 and

D4869.

2. Waterproof Membrane: ASTM D1970, self-adhering rubberized sheet membrane.

UC601 SPECS.DOC


2.05 FINISHES

A. Coil-Coated or Spray-Applied Fluorocarbon Resin

1. Color: Selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2. Number of Coats: [2-coat][3-coat][4-coat].

3. Provide factory applied strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication and

installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed and notify the

[Contractor] [Construction Manager] in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper

and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, free of ice and snow,

and free from defects.

C. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, vents, and other penetrations

through roof substrate are complete.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Obtain field measurements prior to completion of manufacturing and finishing. When

field measurements are not possible, provide method of installation which will allow

minor adjustment in the field.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing system plumb, level and true, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, final shop drawings, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal manual and

standard practices.

B. Install starter and edge strips before underlayment is installed.

C. Install waterproof membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions beginning at

the roof edge and extending up roof slope to 24 inches inside of interior wall line

(minimum), measured perpendicular to the floor. Lap ends and edges 6 inches. Over

valleys prior to installing flashing, install waterproofing shingle underlayment in one

continuous sheet, top to bottom of valley, and extending 18 inches minimum in each

direction.

UC601 SPECS.DOC


D. Install felt underlayment over remainder of roof substrate to receive roofing system, in

shingle fashion, lapping ends 12 inches and edges 6 inches minimum. Install slip-sheet

over underlayment in a similar fashion.

E. Completed system shall be free from over-bending, deforming, stretching, distortion,

waves, and buckles.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair panels with minor damage.

B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent

undamaged panels.

C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with

recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers.

D. Remove protective film immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

Penn Stater 11/19/2010

05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work All interior and exterior load-bearing and non load-bearing light gage steel and wood studs, track, joists, trusses, bridging and related accessories are as indicated on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. B. Related work specified elsewhere. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior and Interior non load-bearing walls. 2. Exterior and Interior load-bearing walls.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes undivided responsibility for engineering FLEX-C TRAC metal framing by employing a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data. B. Design exterior non load-bearing curtainwall framing to accommodate lateral deflection without regard to contribution of sheathing materials. C. All Exterior and Interior load-bearing applications are to be engineered by a qualified professional Engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Standard

1. Work shall meet the requirements of the following standards: a. American Iron and Steel Institute (A.I.S.I.) “Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members,” 1986 with 1989 amendments. b. American Welding Society (A.W.S.) D.1.3, 1981 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.” c. American Society for Testing Materials (A.S.T.M.) d. American Institute of Steel Construction (A.I.S.C.) “Manual of Steel Construction,” 9th edition. e. All pertinent Federal, State, and Local codes.


2. The most stringent requirements shall govern in conflicts between specified codes and standards. 3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification within the past twelve months.

C. Inspection

1. As directed by Architect, Owner’s testing agency may inspect the maintenance of a quality control program including spot checking weldments and welding procedures in accordance with A.W.S. standards. 2. Full responsibility for quality control shall remain with the Contractor.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect FLEX-C TRAC metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store FLEX-C TRAC metal framing, protect with waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A Structural Calculations

1. Submit structural calculations prepared by the Professional Engineer of record. Calculations shall include, but are not limited to: a. Description of design criteria. b. Engineering analysis depicting stress and deflection (stiffness) requirements for each framing application. c. Selection of framing components and accessories. d. Verification of attachments to structure and/or adjacent framing components.

B. Drawings

1. Submit drawings prepared by the manufacturer for approval by the Project Architect and Engineer. These drawings should include: a. Cross-sections, plans and/or elevations depicting component locations.


b. Connection details showing screw types and locations, weld lengths and locations or other related fastener requirements. c. Where the Contractor intends on erecting prefabricated/prefinished panels, drawings depicting panel configurations, dimensions and locations would be developed by the Contractor.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers offering FLEX-C TRAC metal framing that may be incorporated in the work include, and are limited to, the following: 1. FLEX-ABILITY CONCEPTS 5500 SW 36th Street Oklahoma City, OK 73179 Tel: (405) 996-5343 Fax: (405) 996-5353 Web site: http://www.flexc.com 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized – 20 Ga. Steel Sheet Track: ASTM A 653, and as follows:

1. Coating Designation: G40 2. Grade: As required by Specification

B. Galvanized – 20 Ga. Steel Sheet Track (for 6” track): ASTM A653, and as follows: 1. Coating Designation: Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel equal or superior to ASTM A653 G60 or A60. 2. Grade: Structural Grade 33

C. Galvanized – 20 Ga. Steel Sheet Angle: 1. Coating Designation: Galvanized Steel equal or superior to ASTM A653 G40 or A40. 2. Grade: As required by Specification

D. Galvanized Sliding Steel Strap ( for all track and angles): ASTM A653 1. Coating Designation: Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel equal or superior to ASTM A653 G60 or A60.


2.3 WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs with punched webs in depths indicated, with lipped flanges 1-5/8 inches in width. Design uncoated-steel thickness of specified gauge unless noted otherwise. B. Wood Studs: Per applicable drawing specifications. C. FLEX-C-TRAC: manufacturer's standard C-shaped flexible steel track with banded flanges and screw attachments at every flange interval. 2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members; with a minimum yield strength of 33.000 psi. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer’s standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer’s standard elsewhere.

B. Welded Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 of DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate FLEX-C TRAC metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, true to radius, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of this Section.

1. Fabricate assemblies in jig templates or free form scribed radiuses. 2. Extreme care should be taken when handling or cutting metal products. Observe all safety precautions when handling or cutting FLEX-C TRAC. 3. Cut FLEX-C TRAC metal framing by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 4. Fasten FLEX-C TRAC metal framing by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of FLEX-C TRAC framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to FLEX-C TRAC manufacturer’s instructions with screw penetrating banding at every flange interval and joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.


4. Fasten other materials to FLEX-C TRAC metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies as required. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. FLEX-C TRAC metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install FLEX-C TRAC metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, true to radius, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of this Section.

1. Extreme care should be taken when handling or cutting metal products. Observe all safety precautions when handling or cutting FLEX-C TRAC. 2. Cut FLEX-C TRAC members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten FLEX-C TRAC members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of FLEX-C TRAC members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to FLEX-C TRAC manufacturer’s instructions with screw penetrating banding at every flange interval and joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.

C. Install FLEX-C TRAC members in one or multi-piece lengths as specified. D. Splice FLEX-C TRAC segments by overlapping bands from one FLEX-C TRAC to another and attaching screwed fasteners at overlapping plates or flange intervals. Screw penetrations of not less than 3 exposed screw threads. E. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized. F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with FLEX-C TRAC metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. G. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer’s standard punched openings. 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed FLEX-C TRAC metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Touchup painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and installed prime-painted, FLEX-C TRAC metal framing.

1. Touchup painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure that FLEX-C TRAC metal framing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

www.pacificstair.com .

Pacific Stair Corporation Standard Specifications Section 05-5100

Visitors Center 11/16/10 05 51 00 Steel Stair and railing system

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design build steel stairs and landings B. Embedded weld connections C. Related supports and connections D. Handrails and guardrails E. Wall rails with brackets F. Exit control gates

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A6/A 6M - Standard specification for general requirements for rolled structural steel bars, plates, shapes, and sheet piling; 2006.

B. ASTM A36/A 36M - Standard specification for carbon structural steel; 2005. C. ASTM A53/A 53M - Standard specification for pipe, steel, black and hot-dipped, zinc coated welded and

seamless. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard specification for zinc coating (hot dip) on iron and steel hardware; 2005. E. ASTM A307 - Standard specification for common steel bolts. Minimum tensile strength 60 ksi. F. ASTM A 325 - Standard specification for structural bolts, steel, heat treated, 120/105 ksi minimum tensile

strength; 2006. G. ASTM A 325M - Standard specification for structural bolts, steel, heat treated 830MPa tensile strength

(metric); 2005.

H. ASTM A1044 / A1044M-05 - Standard specification for steel stud assemblies for shear reinforcement of concrete (Embedded weld connections).

I. ASTM A500 - Standard specification for cold-formed welded and seamless carbon steel structural tubing in

rounds and shapes; 2003. J. ASTM A501 - Standard specification for hot-formed welded and seamless carbon steel structural tubing;

2001 (Re-approved 2005). K. ASTM A513 - Standard specification for electric-resistance-welded carbon and allow steel mechanical

tubing.

http://www.pacificstair.com/




L. ASTM A1011 / A1011M - Standard specification for steel, sheet and strip, hot rolled, carbon structural, high-strength low alloy, high-strength low-alloy with improved formability, and ultra-high strength.

M. ASTM A653 / A653M - Standard specification for steel sheet zinc-coated (galvanized) or zinc-iron alloy

coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process; 2006a (metal decking). N. ASTM E985 - Standard specification for permanent metal railing systems and rails for buildings; 2000 (re-

approved 2006). O. AWS A2.4 - Standard welding symbols for welding, brazing, and nondestructive examination; American

Welding Society; 2007.

P. AWS D1.1 / D1.1M - Structural Welding Code – Steel – American Welding Society; 2006.

Q. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel joist shop primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

R. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand tool cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

S. RR-G-1602D - Federal specification for safety grating.


A. SECTION 03300 - Cast in place concrete; Poured treads and landings.

B. SECTION 05120 - Structural steel; Stair system supports.

C. SECTION 05500 - Metal Fabrications; miscellaneous metals and fabrications.

D. SECTION 09900 - Paints and Coatings; Field applied finishes.

E. SECTION 055119 - Metal Grating Stairs.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Please note: The design criteria shown below complies with most jurisdictions, however due to some areas having more stringent codes please verify compliance.

A. Stair systems are designed and fabricated to support a uniform live load of 100 lbs/sq. foot and a concentrated load of 300 lbs. with a deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed L/240 or 1/4 inch whichever is less.

B. Handrail and guardrail systems are designed and fabricated to the following specifications:

1. Uniform load of 50 lb/f. applied in any direction. 2. Concentrated load of 200 lb/f. Applied in any direction. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads are not assumed to act concurrently.





C. Infills of guards are designed to withstand a load of 50 lbs. applied horizontally on an area of one square foot. Infill loads and other loads are not assumed to act concurrently.

D. Seismic Performance: Stair systems are designed, tested, and fabricated to resist seismic events in

compliance with ASCE 7-02 Section 9.5.2.8, and IBC section 1617.3 allowable story drift. (download test results at http://www.pacificstair.com/story_drift.html)

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings will be stamped by a professional structural engineer licensed in the state where project is located.

B. Shop drawings will indicate profiles, sizes, connection details, anchorage and sizes of fasteners. Shop drawings will also include elevations and sections.

C. Submittals will include structural calculations stamped by a professional structural engineer.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All components will meet or exceed the requirements of ADA, OSHA, UBC, IBC, and/or local code requirements.


A. Manufacturer to have a minimum of ten years of documented experience in the design, engineering, fabrication and installation of the products specified in this section.

B. Embedded weld connections to be welded by certified welders, and inspected by an independent testing laboratory.


http://www.pacificstair.com/story_drift.html




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.00 PRODUCTS

A. Stair assemblies to include the following; metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms to the supporting structure.

B. Components will be joined by welding unless otherwise indicated.

C. Connections will be used to maintain the structural value of joined pieces.

D. Stairs will be assembled to the greatest possible extent.

E. Cutting, drilling and punching to be done cleanly and accurately. Burrs and rough edges to be removed.

F. Exposed connections to be made with hairline joints, flush and smooth. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.01 EMBEDDED WELD CONNECTIONS

A. Steel angle: Standard sizes, 3” x 2” x.25”, 4” x 4” x.25”

B. Steel plate: Standard sizes, 4 x 10” x .25, 12” x 12” x .25”

C. Headed weld studs: .500” dia, x 0’- 4”

D. Attachment of studs to angle or plate: Specialized arc welding equipment.

E. Embeds: All embeds are 100% Tested and Certified by independent third party inspection.

2.02 FASTENERS FOR STANDARD APPLICATIONS

A. Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ .625” dia. X 6” (Concrete anchors).

B. Hilti Kwik Bolt KB3 .625” dia. X 6” (CMU anchors).

C. .625” x 1.5” A325 Tension control bolts.

D. .625” x 4.5” A307 MB for tube steel posts.





2.03 STEEL FRAMED STAIRS WITH STEEL TREADS

A. Risers are closed.

B. Treads: Smooth steel plate or checker plate with a medium pattern.

i. Thickness: 14 ga. standard minimum thickness (.075”) or as determined by structural design and/or calculations.

C. Anchorage to stringers: Treads and Risers to be welded to stringers to eliminate buckling.

i. Riser thickness: 14 ga. Standard minimum thickness (.075”) or as determined by structural design and/or calculations.

D. Riser nosing profile: Sloped riser with rounded nosing of minimum radius.

E. Stringers:

i. Steel plate, 1/4” minimum thickness or greater as determined by structural design and/or calculations.

ii. Channel, MC10 – 8.4# minimum sizing or greater as determined by structural design and/or calculations.

2.04 STEEL FRAMED LANDINGS

A. CHECKER PLATE:

i. Structural framing supports: C6 x 8.2# channel w/ 14 ga. bent plate supporting members or greater as determined by structural design and/or calculations.

ii. Surfacing: 1/8” checker plate sheeting w/ medium pattern.

B. PAN-FILL CONCRETE:

i. Structural framing supports: C6 x 8.2# channel w/1 ½” BR decking and 10 ga. bent plate outside framing or greater as determined by structural design and/or calculations.

ii. Surfacing: Concrete fill by others.





2.05 STAIR RAILINGS

A. SERIES 100 ~ TWO LINE (2-line – Detail No. R140)

i. Stair Rail: (2) Lines of 1 ¼” pipe (1.66” O.D.) with mandrel bent hoop ends.

ii. Guards: (3) Lines of 1 ¼” pipe (1.66” O.D.) with .25” x 4” kick plate.

iii. Posts: Offset 1 ¼” pipe (side mount).

B. SERIES 200 ~ PIPE (6-line – Detail No. R240)

i. Stair Rail: 1.5” x .120 wall square tube steel top cap and posts.

ii. Guardrail: 1.5” x .120 wall square tube steel top cap and posts.

iii. Hand Grab: Continuous 1 ¼” pipe (1.66” O.D.), offset by 1 ½” with 3/16” x 1 ¼’ bent brackets.

iv. Infill: Offset 1 ¼” pipe (1.66” O.D.), w/ dome caps both ends.

v. Spacing: Minimum of 3.875”.

vi. Mounting of rails: To side of plate stringer, top of channel stringer or embed by welding.

C. SERIES 300 ~ TUBE (7-line – Detail No. R340)




iv. Infill: Inline ¾” x 1 ½’ rectangular tube steel.







D. SERIES 400 ~ PICKET (3-line – Detail No. R440)

i. Stair Rail: 1.5” x .120 wall square tube steel top cap, bottom cap and posts.



iv. Infill: ½” square bar picket.



E. SERIES 400a ~ MODIFIED PICKET (4-line – Detail No. R440a)




iv. Infill: Offset 1 ¼” pipe (1.66” O.D.), w/ ½” square bar pickets.



F. SERIES 500 ~ WIRE MESH (Inset Panels – Detail No. R540)

i. Stair Rail: 1.5” x .120 wall square tube steel top cap, bottom cap and posts.



iv. Infill: 2” Intercrimp wire mesh inside 1” u-clip frame insert.

v. Spacing: Minimum of 3.875” (Rail), 2” (Mesh).






G. SERIES 600 ~ CABLE (8-line – Detail No. R640)

i. Stair Rail: 1” x 2” C.D. bar topcap w/ 3/4” x 2” C.D. bar posts.

ii. Guardrail: 1” x 2” C.D. bar topcap w/ 3/4” x 2” C.D. bar posts.


iv. Infill: 187” Stainless Steel cable with polished Stainless Steel hardware.



H. SERIES 700 ~ ROD (9-line – Detail No. R740)

i. Stair Rail: 1” x 2” C.D. bar topcap w/ 3/4” x 2” C.D. bar posts.

ii. Guardrail: 1” x 2” C.D. bar topcap w/ 3/4” x 2” C.D. bar posts.


iv. Infill: ½” Minimum C.D. round rod.



I. SERIES 800 ~ GLASS (Inset Panels – Detail No. R840)

i. Stair Rail: 1.5” x .120 wall tube steel top cap, bottom cap and posts.

ii. Guardrail: 1.5” x .120 wall tube steel top cap and posts.

iii. Hand Grab: Continuous 1 1/2” O.D. Stainless Steel Tubing, offset by 1 ½” with Stainless Steel Brackets.

iv. Infill: 3/8” tempered glass panels with Stainless Steel hardware.







2.06 WALL RAIL

A. Mandrel bent 1 ¼” pipe (1.66” O.D.), w/ minimum 12” level-offs returning to wall.

B. Offset 1 ½” wall brackets evenly spaced w/ (3) mounting holes.

2.07 GATES

A. Fabricate gates from 1 ¼” pipe (1.66” O.D.). Provide self closing hinges for fastening to walls. Overlapping stop provided with bumper to prevent opening in opposite direction of egress.

3.00 SHOP FINISHES

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and all foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding will occur.

C. Remove all sharp edges and burrs.

D. Preparation of steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP2, hand tool cleaning.

E. Prime painting: Rodda Low HAP Shopcoat Primer

i. VOC Compliant Red Oxide #33954

F. Coverage: (1) mil. Minimum DFT.

3.01 EXECUTION

A. Verify that all field conditions are acceptable, and ready for work to begin.

B. If any deviations or mistakes are discovered in framing or embed placement notify Pacific Stair Corp. in writing immediately. Work will not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.





3.02 STAIR INSTALLATION

A. Install all stair components plumb, level and accurately, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide all hardware, hangers, fasteners and struts required to connect stairs to parent structure.

C. Provide temporary bracing to maintain alignment until installation has been completed and all connections are deemed permanent.

D. All field welding to be done in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Field welding and bolting to match shop work. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.

F. All joints to be butted tight flush, with hairline joints. Welds to be ground smooth and flush.

G. Touch up paint after welding and grinding.

3.03 RAIL INSTALLATION

A. Railing to be installed plumb, and straight.

B. Welded Connections to be used for permanent connections. All splices to be ground smooth, free from grinder marks and irregularities.

C. Railing to be welded to stair stringers per plans and specifications. Welds to be clean and have good conformance to acceptable standards.

3.04 WALL RAIL INSTALLATION

A. Make certain that proper backing has been placed in wall for attachment of wall rails.

B. Attach wall rails to walls with brackets that provide 1.5” clearance from face of finish wall to the inside face of railing.

C. Use proper fasteners to secure railing to substrate. If fastening to gypsum board make certain that proper spacer is provided to prevent the gyp board from being damaged.

3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum variation from plumb: .25” per story, non accumulative.

B. Maximum offset from true alignment: .25”

C. Maximum out of position: .25”

END OF SECTION


Penn Stater Hotel and Conference Center 05 52 13 Stainless Steel Tube Railing

Atlantis Rail Systems 70 Armstrong Rd Plymouth, MA 02360

SECTION 05 52 13 STAINLESS STEEL TUBE RAILING:

The distance between a stair nose and the bottom rail or cable of a railing system may not exceed 2” On any stair.

Stainless Steel Tube Component Railings

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 – General Requirements apply.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES Specifier Note: Delete items below that are not included in this section.

Horizontal stainless steel cable railing system.

Vertical stainless steel cable railing system.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS Specifier Note: In this article, specify work specified in other sections that is related to work of this section.

Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs: Metal tube railings provided with metal stairs.

SECTION 05 73 16 WIRE ROPE STRUCTURAL METAL RAILINGS

Specifier Note: Delete the following paragraph if decorative metal railings are provided only in this section.

Section 05 71 00 - Decorative Metal Stairs: Decorative metal railings provided with decorative metal stairs.

Section 06 43 13 - Wood Stairs. Specifier Note: The following paragraph is a sample that may be used in this article. Add to or delete from the following as appropriate for the specific project.

Section [xx xx xx] - [Section Title]: [Include brief description of work specified in another section that is related to the work of this section.]

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Provide cable railing systems, including top rail, bottom rail, end posts, intermediate posts, intermediate cable braces, cables, and cable hardware capable of withstanding both gravity loads and the following loads and stresses conforming to the applicable building codes:

Specifier Note: Complete the blanks in the following two subparagraphs based upon requirements of governing building code.

1. Handrails: a. Concentrated load of [____] lbf applied in any direction. b. Uniform load of [____] lbs/ft applied in any direction. c. Concentrated and uniform loads do not need to be considered acting

concurrently.


2. Intermediate Posts and Cables: a. Minimum uniform load of [____] lbs/sq ft over gross area of cable railing

system of which they are a part. b. Loads of intermediate posts and cables and other loads do not need to be

considered acting concurrently.

Design railing components and cable hardware to withstand loads encountered without excessive deflection or distortion when cables are tensioned to comply with requirements of applicable building codes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS Specifier Note: In this article, specify various types of data to be furnished by the contractor before, during, or after construction. Topics included in this article are: product data, shop drawings, samples, design data, test reports, certificates, manufacturers’ instructions, manufacturers’ field reports, qualification statements, and closeout submittals.

Submit under provisions of Section [01 33 00] [______].

Product Data: Submit for decorative metal railings and components.

Shop Drawings: Submit for decorative metal railings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Specifier Note: Delete the following subparagraph if not required. 1. For products required to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

Samples: Submit two (2) sets of samples of each of the following illustrating the exposed finish and workmanship.

2. Railing frame components. 3. Intermediate cable braces. 4. Cables and cable hardware.

Manufacturer’s Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty for decorative metal railing system.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Specifier Note: In this article, describe qualifications, regulatory requirements, certifications, field samples, mock-ups, and pre-installation meetings.

Source Limitations: Obtain decorative metal railings through one (1) source from a single manufacturer.

Specifier Note: Delete the following paragraph and subparagraphs if not required.

Mockups: Construct a mockup to verify finish selections and to serve as a standard for aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

Specifier Note: In the following subparagraph, retain one (1) of the two (2) options and delete the other.

1. Approved mockups [may] [may not] become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

2. Build mockups of railing consisting of two (2) posts, top rail, cables, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches in length.


Pre-Installation Meeting: Schedule pre-installation meeting [___] weeks before start of fabrication of railing frame components [at project site] [by telephone].


Field Measurements: Prior to fabrication, verify actual locations of walls, stairs, and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements and indicate measurements on shop drawings.


Deliver decorative metal railings with manufacturer’s protective covering intact.

Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Basis-of-Design Product: The design for wire rope decorative metal railings is based on SunRail™ manufactured by Atlantis Rail Systems, Division of Suncor Stainless, Inc., 70 Armstrong Road, Plymouth, MA 02360; telephone: 800-541-6829, fax 508-732-9798; Web Site: www.atlantisrail.com.

Specifier Note: Select either of the following two (2) paragraphs and delete the other.

Substitutions are not permitted.

Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 01 60 00.

2.2 MATERIALS

Stainless Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A554, Type 316, minimum tensile strength 70,000 psi; two (2) inch diameter.

2.3 RAILING FRAME COMPONENTS

Top and Bottom Rails: Minimum [_____] inch wall thickness stainless steel tubing.

Intermediate Posts: Minimum [_____] inch wall thickness stainless steel tubing. Specifier Note: In the following subparagraph, retain one (1) of the options and delete the others.

1. Maximum Spacing: [Insert dimension] [As indicated on Drawings]. 2. Connect top rail to mounting surface.

End Posts: Minimum [_____] inch wall thickness stainless steel tubing.

Corner Posts: Minimum [_____] inch wall thickness stainless steel tubing. Specifier Note: In the following paragraph, retain one (1) of the options and delete the other.

Tubing Finish: [Polished] [Satin].

Connecting Joints: Cast Type 316 stainless steel.

Balusters: 1/2-inch diameter stainless steel spaced at four (4) inches on center.

2.4 WIRE ROPE AND WIRE ROPE HARDWARE

Wire Rope: ASTM A492, Type 316 stainless steel wire; 5/32-inch diameter, 1x19 configuration, conforming to dimensional properties specified in MIL-W-87161.

1. Orientation: [Horizontal] [Vertical] [As indicated on Drawings].

http://www.atlantisrail.com/


2. Spacing: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Finish: [Mill] [Insert finish].

Turnbuckle Assemblies: RailEasy™ stainless steel turnbuckles with mechanical swaging capability. Slotted base has capability of making up to 45 degree angles. Concave base fits two (2) inch diameter posts.

2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Clear Glass: Class 1 (clear).

2.6 FASTENERS

Stainless Steel Components: Type 316 stainless steel fasteners.

Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated [and capable of withstanding design loads].

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Electrical Components: MicroStar™ LEDs encased in Type 316 stainless steel housings; 1/4-inch diameter by 7/8-inch long installed in railings. Bulbs have expected life of 100,000 hours.

2.8 FABRICATION

Fabricate decorative metal railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage[, but not less than that required to support specified structural loads].

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect decorative metal railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to which decorative metal railings attach or abut, for compliance with requirements that affect installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and recommendations and approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances.

Install decorative metal railing system plumb, level, square, and rigid.

Anchor and assemble decorative metal railing system to mounting surfaces as indicated on Drawings. Field welding of components is not acceptable except as an additional source of structural support.


Install wire rope and hardware, and terminate and tension wire rope, in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

Ensure that wire ropes are parallel to each other, free of kinks, sags or other defects, and clean.

Replace defective or damaged wire ropes and hardware as directed by the Architect.

3.3 ADJUSTING

Adjust wire ropes and hardware as required to provide a complete and properly installed decorative metal railing system.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Clean exposed surfaces of decorative metal railing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

Protect installed products from damage or soiling until completion of project.

Remove and replace decorative metal railing components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent components.

END OF SECTION

IST Building 05 73 13 - 1 Stainless Steel and Glass Railing

SECTION 05 73 13

GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS


A. Glazed decorative metal railings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 52 00 – Handrails and Railings (Metal Railings): Metal handrails and railings of utilitarian nature.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings.

B. ASTM C 1048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.

C. ASTM E 488 – Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry

Elements.

D. ASTM E 985 – Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.


A. Design glazed decorative metal railings to conform to building code and ADA requirements for openings and stress.

B. Design glazed decorative metal railings to withstand a minimum [concentrated load of 200

pounds applied horizontally or vertically down at any point on top rail] [uniform load of 50 pounds per foot applied vertically down and horizontally, but not simultaneously on top rail].

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01330 (01 33 00) – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:


1. Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, sizes, fabrication, accessories, fasteners, hardware, and finish. 2. Show details of attaching posts to supports.

D. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s samples of standard materials, finishes, and colors.

1. Handrails: Minimum 12 inches long. 2. Posts: Minimum 12 inches long. 3. Rods: Minimum 12 inches long. 4. Cones: Minimum 12 inches long. 5. Glass Infill: Minimum 6 inches by 6 inches. 6. Other Components: Each type required.

E. Test Reports: Submit test reports from qualified, independent testing agency indicating

compliance of glazed decorative metal railings with ASTM E 985.

F. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.

G. Cleaning Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s cleaning instructions.


A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Install glazed decorative metal railings by manufacturer or qualified, authorized representative of manufacturer. 2. Welders: Perform welding by certified welders.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage:

1. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Do not store materials directly on floor. 3. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until installation.

B. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER


A. RamiDesigns, 24 Hammond, Suite E, Irvine, California 92618. Phone (949) 588-8288. Fax (949) 588-9988. Website www.ramidesigns.com. E-mail [email protected].

2.02 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

A. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings: “Odyssey” glass and rod railing system. 1. Description: Modular, decorative, stainless steel railing system with horizontal stainless steel rods, vertical wood cones, and glass infill. 2. Handrails:

a. Size: 1-1/2-inch diameter. b. Wall Thickness: 0.120 inch.

c. Material: Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]. d. Finish: [Brushed] [Polished].

3. Posts: a. Size: 2 inches by 3/8 inch. b. Material: Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]. c. Finish: [Brushed] [Polished].

4. Rods: a. Size: 1/2-inch diameter. b. Material: Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]. c. Finish: [Brushed] [Polished].

5. Cones: a. Diameter: 2-1/2 inches. b. Wood: [Cherry] [Maple] [Mahogany] [Poplar]. c. Finish: ____________ .

6. Glass Infill: a. Type: Tempered safety glass with polished edges. b. Compliance: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type 1, Quality Q3, clear glass

Class 1. c. Thickness: 3/8 inch. d. Color: [Clear] [ ____________ ].

7. Knobs: a. Material: Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]. b. Finish: [Brushed] [Polished]. c. Washers: Rubber.

8. Clevises: Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]. 9. Sleeves: Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]. 10. Plates: [Carbon steel] [Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]].

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: 1. Material: Stainless steel, Type [304] [316]. 2. Safety Factor: Capable to sustain, without failure, load imposed with a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 488.

http://www.ramidesigns.com/

mailto:[email protected]


2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate glazed decorative metal railings for compliance with structural requirements of building code.

B. Stainless Steel: Cut stainless steel tubing square, without burrs and where exposed, rounded

to produce smooth, rigid hairline joints.

C. Shop Assembly: 1. Pre-assemble glazed decorative metal railings before shipping to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. 2. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 3. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and for coordination with shop drawings.


A. Examine areas to receive glazed decorative metal railings.

B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.

C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

D. Field Measurements: 1. Take field measurements for glazed decorative metal railings from elements to which railings are to fasten. 2. Record field measurements on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install glazed decorative metal railings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install glazed decorative metal railings plumb, level, square, true to line, and rigid.

C. Attach glazed decorative metal railings securely in place using anchors and other components

supplied or approved by manufacturer.

D. Attach glazed decorative metal railings to supports as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Ensure surfaces of glazed decorative metal railings are smooth with no sharp, rough, or uneven areas.

F. Site Tolerances:

1. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch.


2. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch non-accumulative for every 50 feet of length.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Architect.

B. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined

by Architect. 3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean glazed decorative metal railings promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage glass or finish.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed glazed decorative metal railings from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 05 76

MOLD-RESISTANT WOOD This section includes editing notes to assist the user in editing the section to suit project requirements. These notes are included as hidden text, and can be revealed or hidden by one of the following methods:

Microsoft Word: From the pull-down menus select TOOLS, then OPTIONS. Under the tab labeled VIEW, select or deselect the HIDDEN TEXT option.

Corel WordPerfect: From the pull-down menus select VIEW, then select or deselect the HIDDEN TEXT option.

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Shop-applied mold-resistant treatment of: 1. [Framing lumber.] 2. [Plywood.] 3. [Oriented strand board.] 4. [Engineered wood products.] 5. [Parallel strand lumber.] 6. [Laminated veneer lumber.] 7. [Wood I-beams].


1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section [06 11 00 - Wood Framing] [_____ - _______]: Lumber for mold-resistant treatment. 3. Section [06 12 00 - Structural Panels] [_____ - _______]: Wood faced panels for mold-resistant

treatment. 4. Section [06 15 00 - Wood Decking] [_____ - _______]: Decking for mold-resistant treatment. 5. Section [06 16 00 - Sheathing] [_____ - _______]: [Plywood] [Oriented strand board] sheathing

for mold-resistant treatment. 6. Section [06 17 00 - Shop-Fabricated Structural Wood] [_____ - _______]: Engineered lumber

for mold-resistant treatment. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): 1. E1-06 - Standard Method for Laboratory Evaluation to Determine Resistance to Subterranean

Termites. 2. E12-94 - Standard Method of Determining Corrosion of Metal in Contact with Treated Wood.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) – D 3273-00 (2005) - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of

Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

C. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) - Registered products listing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive data and test results for treated products. 2. Samples:

a. [12] [__] inch long treated lumber samples. b. [12 x 12] [__ x __] inch treated [plywood] [oriented strand board] samples.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Low-emitting materials. 2. Innovation in design.

C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Current EPA approval listing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Licensed by mold treatment manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver treated products bearing manufacturer’s quality stamp indicating: 1. Inspection agency. 2. Month and year of application. 3. Treatment facility. 4. Treatment used. 5. Suitable end uses for products.

B. Store treated products off ground.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s warranty providing coverage against: 1. Development of mold on treated products for 180 days prior to installation. 2. Development of mold on treated products for period of 20 year after installation. 3. Structural damage by termites other than Formosan termites for period of 20 year after

installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Contract Documents are based on FrameGuard wood treatment by Arch Wood Protection, Inc.

B. Substitutions: [Under provisions of Division 01.] [Not permitted.] 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Treatment Chemicals: 1. Proprietary broad-spectrum anti-mold and borate chemicals. 2. Registered with EPA.

B. Treated Wood:

1. Mold growth: 0 rating, tested to ASTM D 3273 for 8 weeks at 77 degrees F and 100 percent relative humidity.

2. Termite resistance: Minimum rating of 7.0, tested to AWPA E1. 3. Corrosion potential for metals in contact with treated wood: Maximum 2 mils per year, tested to

AWPA E12 for minimum of 60 days on aluminum 2024, carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, and G90 galvanized steel.

4. Equivalent lateral resistance and tooth holding capacity as untreated wood. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. Apply mold-resistant treatment to scheduled components under controlled conditions by spray or dip method, to retention levels required by treatment manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install mold-resistant treated products under provisions of Section[s] [06 11 00] [06 12 00] [06 15 00] [06 16 00] [06 17 00] [_____].

B. Treatment of field cuts and holes is not required.

END OF SECTION

Project Name/Project Number/14-Dec-10 08 52 00 - 1 WOOD WINDOWS JELD-WEN® Custom Wood Windows

(Specifier Note: The purpose of this guide specification is to assist the specifier in cor-rectly specifying JELD-WEN® Custom Wood wood windows and their installation. The specifier needs to edit these guide specifications to fit the needs of each specific pro-ject. Contact a JELD-WEN representative to assist in appropriate product selections. Throughout the guide specification, there are Specifier Notes to assist in the editing of the file. The term Architect is used throughout these guide specifications and may be revised to read “Design Professional”,” Engineer”, “Owner” or other appropriate desig-nation as required for specific projects. References have been made within the text of the specification to MasterFormat 2004 Section numbers and titles, specifier need to coordinate these numbers and titles with sections included for the specific project. Brackets []; “AND/OR”; and “OR” have been used to indicate when a selection is required, in most cases the first option is the stand-ard feature, and optional features are indicted in brackets. Some options may require additional lead-time; if this is a consideration, contact a JELD-WEN representative for assistance.)

SECTION 08 52 00.00.CUSTOM WOOD WINDOWS

JELD-WEN® Custom Wood Windows

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Awning Windows

B. Casement Windows

C. Double-Hung Windows

D. Horizontal Sliding Windows

E. Radius and Geometric Windows

(Specifier Note: Direct-Set windows are fixed units. In-Sash windows are fixed or operable and come with hardware and screen options.)

1. Direct-Set

2. In-Sash


1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer Association (AAMA)

1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 /NAFS; Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors

(Specifier Note: In applications where hurricane resistance is not required DELETE AAMA 506 reference.)

2. AAMA 506; Voluntary Specifications for Hurricane and Impact and Cycle Testing of Fenestration Products

B. ASTM International

(Specifier Note: In applications where hurricane resistance is not required DELETE ASTM E 1886 and E 1996 references.)

1. ASTM E 1886; Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials

2. ASTM E 1996; Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes

C. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)

1. NFRC 100; Procedure for Determining Fenestration Thermal Properties

2. NFRC 200; Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance (Specifier Note: DELETE Florida TAS information if project is not within the High Velocity Hurricane Zone)

D. South Florida Building Code Impact Test Procedures (Miami-Dade TAS)

1. TAS 201; Impact Test Procedures

2. TAS 202; Criteria for testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components using Uniform Static Air Pressure

3. TAS 203; Criteria for testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading

E. Window & Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA)

1. WDMA I.S.4; Water Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork



A. Provide windows capable of complying with requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer’s window that are representative of those specified and that are of test size required by ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101 I.S.2/NAFS.

(Specifier Note: Include window design pressure (DP) ratings as part of the performance requirements. Required DP will vary dependent on project site, the location in the building and window size. Coordinate DP with the Structural Engineer. DP ratings and related window size and style are available at www.jeld-wen.com or by contacting a JELD-WEN representative.)

B. Structural Requirements – Provide windows capable of complying with requirements indicated:

1. Design pressure: [Insert value] [As indicated on drawings]

(Specifier Note: DELETE Impact Resistance requirement if products will not be used in a high velocity hurricane zone or will be used in conjunction with another type of approved hurricane protection device.)

C. Impact (Windborne-Debris) Resistance

1. Windows capable of resisting impact from windborne debris, when tested in accordance with ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996, and AAMA 506.

AND/OR

2. Provide windows that have been tested in accordance with TAS 201, TAS 202, and TAS 203 and have received NOA from Miami-Dade Code Officials.

(Specifier Note: Include NFRC ratings as part of the performance requirements. NFRC ratings qualifying for the Energy Star program are based on the performance of the whole window assembly. Qualifying windows vary to fit the needs of different regions throughout the country. NFRC ratings and related JELD-WEN window size and styles are available at www.jeld-wem.com or by contacting a JELD-WEN representative.)

D. NFRC Requirements – Provide windows capable of complying with the following total window ratings:

1. U-Factor: [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC 100.

3. Visible Transmittance (VT): [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC 200.

http://www.jeld-wen.com/

http://www.jeld-wem.com/


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit window manufacturer current product literature, including installation instruction.

C. Samples: Provide finish samples for all products.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals

(Specifier Note: DELETE Design Data, Test Reports submittal requirements when propriety specification is used and can be held. MAINTAIN Design Data, Test Reports submittal requirement when other products may be submitted as substitution.)



E. Closeout Submittals

1. Refer to Section [01 78 00 Closeout Submittals] [Insert section number and title].


A. Certifications

1. WDMA Hallmark certification label indicating windows meet the design requirements.

B. Mock-ups

1. Window mock-up shall incorporate surrounding construction, including wall assembly fasteners, flashing, and other related accessories installed in accordance with window manufacturer’s approved installation methods.

a. Mock-up size: [Insert size] [As indicated on drawings] b. Mock-up may [not] remain as part of the work.

C. Pre-installation Meeting

1. Refer to Section [01 31 19 Project Meetings] [Insert section number and title].




B. Deliver windows materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store windows as recommended by manufacturer.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section [01 78 36 Warranties] [Insert section number and title].

(Specifier Note: DELETE warranty information not specific to project.)

B. Manufacturer standard warranty indicating that the window will be free from material and workmanship defects from the date of substantial completion for the time periods indicated below:

1. Window Unit: 20 years (Specifier Note: SELECT warranty associated with the glazing types specified. Specialty Glazing includes patterned and textured glass. Insulated glass that incorporates a specialty glass may be eligible for an extended warranty, but requires input from the manufacturer. Contact a JELD-WEN representative to discuss design options and their effect on the warranty. )

2. Glazing:

a. Insulated Glass: 20 years against seal breakage b. [Laminated Glass] [Hurricane Glass] [Specialty Glazing]: 5 years

against delamination


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Specifier Note: Product Information is proprietary to JELD-WEN. If additional products are required for competitive procurement, contact JELD-WEN for assistance in listing competitive products that may be available.)

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. JELD-WEN Windows and Doors; 3250 Lakeport Blvd. P.O. Box 1329; Klamath Falls, OR 97601-0268, USA; Phone 541.885.7412, fax 541.884.3331; Toll free 800.535. 3936; website www.jeld-wen.com

B. Basis of Design: Windows are based on the JELD-WEN’s Custom Wood Windows.

2.2 MATERIALS

(Specifier Note: AuraLast™ is a trademark preservative treatment by JELD-WEN and is distinguished from traditional preservation methods by its minimum treatment penetration of 92%.)

A. Exterior Wood: Western Pine, preservative treated with AuraLast® in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.

B. Interior Wood: Western Pine

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Frame

1. Select kiln-dried pine AuraLast® treated wood

2. Jamb Width: 4-9/16 inch (116 mm)

B. Sash


2. Sash Thickness: [awning/casement/radius and geometric in-sash windows: 2-3/32 inch (53 mm)] [double hung/horizontal sliding: 1-7/16 inch (37mm)]

C. Exterior Trim

1. Sill: [standard: Subsill] [option: Extended Sill Nose]

(Specifier Note: MAINTAIN casing when construction conditions or aesthetics require inclusion. Utilize the following trims for indicated applications - Brickmould in



conjunction with masonry veneers; Flat Casing for narrow, and Adams Casing for medium aesthetic conditions.)

2. Casing: [standard: Brickmould] [options: [[3-1/2 inch (88.9 mm)] [4-1/2 inch (XX mm)] [5-1/2 inch (XX mm)] Flat Casing] [Adams Casing]]

(Specifier Note: DELETE Mull Cap when window layout does not require units to be joined (mulled) together at the factory.)

3. Mull Cap: [standard: ½ inch wide] [options: [1 inch] [2 inch] [3-1/2 inch] [6 inch] wide]

D. Factory Applied Extension Jambs: Provide on four sides of frame interior.

(Specifier Note: DELETE jamb extensions for window styles not project specific or when construction does not require extension.)

1. Awning: [4/4 up to 9-1/8 inch] [5/4 for up to 13-11/16 inch] 2. Casement: [4/4 up to 9-1/8 inch] [5/4 for up to 13-11/16 inch] 3. Double-Hung: 4/4 up to 9-1/8 inch 4. Horizontal Sliding: 4/4 up to 9-1/8 inch 5. Radius and Geometric: [4/4 up to 9-1/8 inch] [5/4 for up to 13-11/16 inch]

E. Weatherstripping

(Specifier Note: DELETE weatherstripping for window styles not project specific.)

1. [Awning Windows] [Casement Windows] [Radius and Geometric Windows]: Foam lined bulb seal between sash interior and frame with secondary leaf seal between sash edge and frame.

2. Double-Hung Windows: Concealed non-compression jamb liner forming

compression seal with dual durometer bulb seal against sash stiles and between top and bottom rails of sash and frame, bulb seal between top rail and header and between sash meeting rails.

3. Horizontal Sliding Windows: Compression bulb seal at sash and foam filled

vinyl at exterior sides and head jamb.

F. Hardware

(Specifier Note: DELETE hardware for window styles not project specific. Specifier needs to carefully SELECT desired options, many have nested options throughout.)

(Specifier Note: Due to the corrosive nature of costal environments, SPECIFY stainless steel hardware (coastal option) for installations located within 2 miles of the coast.)


(Specifier Note: In applications where both operable and non-operable awning or casement windows are desired, to maintain the aesthetic profile specify “stationary” awning or casement units in Part 3 Schedule Article.)

1. Awning Windows

a. Hinges: Corrosion resistant [coastal option: stainless] steel b. Operator: [standard: Lever Lock] [option: [coastal option: Stainless

steel] [Steel] roto gear with heavy gauge scissor operating arm] c. Lock: Concealed

(Specifier Note: SELECT handle profile or an electric option to control operation of window. When operator is to be controlled electrically, coordinate electrical requirements with other disciplines. DELETE controls not project specific.)

d. Handle Profile (standard): Manual Folding Crank OR

e. Electric Options: [Electrical Hardwired Motor] [Electrical Remote Control]]

(Specifier Note: Additional options are available only for the electrical operators. DELETE if not electrically operated or options are not desired.)

1) Features: [Built-in thermostat] [Rain sensor] [Accessories input]

[Settings memory] [Synchronous motor]

f. Finish: [standard: [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [White]] [options: [Antique Brass] [Brushed Chrome] [Brushed Nickel] [Polished Brass] [Polished Chrome] [Oil Rubbed Bronze] [Western Pewter]]

2. Casement Windows

a. Hinges: Corrosion resistant [coastal option: stainless] steel b. Operator: Hardened [coastal option: stainless] steel worm gears and

dual action heavy gauge [coastal option: stainless] steel operating arm

c. Lock: Concealed


d. Handle Profile: [standard: Manual Folding Crank] [options: [Round] [T-Handle]

OR e. Electric Options: [Electrical Hardwired Motor] [Electrical Remote

Control]



1) Features: [Built-in thermostat] [Rain sensor] [Accessories input]

[Settings memory] [Synchronous motor]


3. Double-Hung Windows

a. Balance: Concealed Block and Tackle b. Sash Retainer: Recessed top and bottom c. Lock: Cam Action d. [option: Interior Sash Lift] e. Finish: [standard: [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [White]] [options:

[Antique Brass] [Brushed Chrome] [Brushed Nickel] [Polished Brass] [Polished Chrome] [Oil Rubbed Bronze] [Western Pewter]]

4. Horizontal Sliding Windows

a. Sliding System: Vinyl track and reduced friction buttons b. Sash Pull: Surface mounted. c. Sash Lock: Surface mounted, Cam Action d. Finish: [standard: [White] [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand]] [options

[Antique Brass] [Brushed Chrome] [Brushed Nickel] [Polished Brass] [Polished Chrome] [Oil Rubbed Bronze] [Western Pewter]]

5. Radius and Geometric In-Sash Windows

a. Hinges: [Corrosion resistant [coastal option: stainless] steel] [operating radius and geometric sash only: Stainless steel leaf]

b. Operator: [Hardened steel worm gears and heavy gauge steel arm] [operating octagon only: Single arm pull scissor with roto handle]

c. Lock: Concealed


d. Handle Profile (standard): Manual Folding Crank OR

e. Electric Options: [Electrical Hardwired Motor] [Electrical Remote Control]]



1) Features: [Built-in thermostat] [Rain sensor] [Accessories input] [Settings memory] [Synchronous motor]


G. Glazing

(Specifier Note: Various types of glass are available. The most common types have been included here. Contact a JELD-WEN representative when other options are required. DELETE glass not project specific.)

(Specifier Note: Reflective glare from glazing has been found to affect the beach nesting of turtles in coastal environments. Some governing authorities require the use of turtle glass which uses tinted glass to achieve an industry-approved, inside-to-outside visible light transmittance value of 45% or less (visible spectrum = 400 to 700 nanometers). Verify the requirements for turtle glass with local authorities in coastal environments.)

(Specifier Note: Laminated glass uses a vinyl interlayer to provide added security against impact, comfort with higher STC ratings and energy savings by blocking UV energy. Hurricane glass differs from laminated by a thicker vinyl interlayer. Specify hurricane glass over laminated when windborne debris impact resistance is required.)

1. Strength: [standard: Annealed] [options: [Hurricane Glass] [Laminated]

[Tempered]

2. Insulated Glass (standard):

a. Two panes of glass utilizing [a continuous roll formed stainless steel] [for radius insulating glass only: an anodized rectangular] spacer and dual seal sealant.

b. Overall Nominal Thickness:

1) (Specifer Note: for awning, casement, and radius and geometric direct-set windows) 15/16 inch (238mm)

2) (Specifer Note: for double-hung, horizontal sliding, and radius and geometric in-sash) ¾ inch (19mm)

c. Type: [standard: Type 1- Clear] [options: [Type 2 – Tinted [Bronze] [Gray] [Green]] [Specialty Glass – [Obscure] [Glue Chip] [Narrow Reed] [Rain]]]

(Specifier Note: Low E is standard on all window units but may be deleted at the design professional’s option. DELETE Coatings if not desired.)

d. Coatings: Low-E on surface 2


(Specifier Note: Argon option is only available with Low-E coating and cannot be used with capillary tubes.)

(Specifier Note: Installations at elevations above 4,000 feet Mean Sea Level require glazing known as High Altitude glazing with capillary tubes to equalize environmental stress.)

e. Air Space: [Air] [Argon] [Air with capillary tubes]

OR

3. Monolithic Glass (option):

a. Overall Nominal Thickness: [1/8 inch to ¼ inch] (Specifier Note: for laminated or hurricane glass) [3/8 inch to ½ inch]

b. Type: [standard: Type 1- Clear] [options: [Type 2 – Tinted [Bronze] [Gray] [Green]] [Specialty Glass – [Obscure] [Glue Chip] [Narrow Reed] [Rain]]]

2.4 WINDOW ACCESSORIES

(Specifier Note: DELETE accessories for window styles not project specific.)

(Specifier Note: SELECT exterior insect screens for double-hung and horizontal sliding windows. SELECT interior insect screens for awning, casement and radius and geometric windows.)

A. Exterior Insect Screen

1. Material: Charcoal fiberglass screen cloth (18 by16 mesh) set in painted roll formed aluminum frame

a. Frame Color: [Black Licorice] [Brilliant White] [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [French Vanilla] [Hartford Green] [Heirloom White] [Hunter Green] [Mesa Red] [Redwood] [Sage Brown] [Smoke]

OR

B. Interior Insect Screen

(Specifier Note: DELETE screen material and finish not project specific.)

1. Material: Charcoal fiberglass screen cloth (18 by 16 mesh) set in painted roll formed aluminum frame.

a. Finish: [Bronze] [Champagne] [White]

OR


2. Material: Charcoal fiberglass screen cloth (18 by 16 mesh) set in wood veneer roll formed aluminum frame.

a. Finish: [Mahogany] [Pacific Coast Red Adler] [Ponderosa Pine]

[Vertical Grain Douglas Fir]

C. Grilles

(Specifier Note: Grilles are not available for textured glass. SELECT grilles, profiles, and width based on the desired aesthetic appearance of the window.)

1. Simulated Divided Lites (SDL)

a. Exterior Muntins

1) Material: Extruded aluminum permanently applied to exterior of insulating glass unit.

(Specifier Note: SELECT profile based on desired aesthetics. Utilize bead stop for a flattened curve aesthetic and putty for a deeper, angular aesthetic.)

2) Profile: [Bead Stop] [Putty] 3) Pattern: As selected by Architect 4) Width:

a) (Specifier Note: for bead stop profile) [7/8 inch (22mm)] [1-1/8 inch (28.5mm)] [1-3/8 inch (34.9mm)] [2-5/16 inch (59mm) (for simulated double-hung checkrail)]

OR b) (Specifier Note: for putty profile) [7/8 inch (22mm)] [1-1/8

inch (28.5mm)] [awning, casement, double-hung and radius and geometric in-sash units only: 1 inch Copper]

5) Finish: Match exterior finish

(Specifier Note: Internal shadow bar will give the appearance of a true divided lite and is standard on all SDL units. Internal shadow bar may be deleted at the design professional’s option. DELETE Internal Shadow Bar if not project specific.)

b. Internal Shadow Bar: [standard: Light Bronze] [option: Silver] c. Interior Muntins

1) Material: Clear pine permanently bonded to interior of insulating glass unit.

2) Profile: Match exterior muntin OR

2. Full Surround Wood Grilles


a. Material: Unfinished clear pine b. Profile: Modified OGEE c. Pattern: As selected by Architect d. Size: [7/8 inch (22mm)] [1-1/8 inch (28.5mm)] [1-3/8 inch (34.9mm)]

OR

3. Grilles Between the Glass (GBG)

a. Material: Made of roll formed aluminum suspended within the air cavity.

(Specifier Note: SELECT profile based on desired aesthetics. Utilize flat for a narrow aesthetic and contour for a wider aesthetic.)

b. Profile: [Flat] [Contour] c. Pattern: As selected by Architect d. Width:

1) (Specifier Note: for flat profile) [5/8 inch (22mm)] OR

2) (Specifier Note: for contour profile) [23/32 inch (18.25mm)] [1 inch (25.4mm)]

e. Finish: [Brilliant White] [Chestnut Brown] [Desert Sand] [French Vanilla] [Hartford Green] [Mesa Red]

(Specifier Note: Precise Divided Lites are not available for radius and geometric direct set units.)

4. Precise Divided Lites (PDL)

a. Material: [Wood] [Extruded aluminum] permanently applied to exterior of insulating glass unit.

b. Width: [¾ inch (XX mm)] [1-1/2 inch (XX mm)]

2.5 CONSTRUCTION ACCESSORIES

(Specifier Note: Construction Accessories compatible with windows and required installation may be specified in this section or in related sections. COORDINATE with related sections to not duplicate information.)

A. Flashing

1. Refer to Section [04 20 00 Unit Masonry] [07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal] [Insert section number and title].


B. Sealants


(Specifier Note: For sealants specified within this section list recommended products.)

2. Provide manufacturer recommended sealants maintain watertight conditions.

3. Products:

a. [Insert products and manufacturer]

2.6 FABRICATION

(Specifier Note: DELETE Fabrication for window styles not project specific.)

A. [Awning Windows] [Casement Windows]

1. Frame: Corner joints mechanically fastened.

2. Sash: Corner joints mortised-and-tenoned.

3. Glass: Mounted using silicone glazing compound on exterior and acrylic sealant on interior, secured with interior applied profiled wood stops.

B. [Double-Hung Windows] [Horizontal Sliding Windows]


2. Sash: Corner joints mortised-and-tenoned, glued and nailed from interior.

3. Glass: Mounted using silicone glazing compound on exterior, secured with interior applied profiled wood stops.

C. Radius and Geometric Direct Set Windows

1. Frame: Corner joints are mechanically fastened.

2. Glass: Mounted using silicone glazing compound on exterior then secured with interior applied profiled wood stops.

D. Radius and Geometric In-Sash Windows


2. Sash: Corner joints mortised-and-tenoned.


3. Glass: Mounted using silicone glazing compound on exterior and acrylic sealant on interior, secured with interior applied profiled wood stops.

2.7 FINISH

(Specifier Note: Window interior wood is left unfinished for field finishing unless indicated otherwise. DELETE finish options not project specific.)

A. Interior:

1. [standard: Unfinished] [option: Primed] OR

2. Pre-finished Options:

a. Paint: [Extra White] [Moderate White] [Natural Choice] [Pure white] OR

b. Stain: [Cherry] [Cordovan] [Fruitwood] [Wheat] OR

c. Clear Lacquer

B. Exterior:

1. [standard: Factory-applied latex primer] [option: Natural]

AND (Specifier Note: SELECT a frame color AND a sash color when specifying the sash only color option.)

2. Pre-finished Sash Only Color Options: [Hand Rubbed Copper] [Natural Copper] [Speckled Patina]

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect window prior to installation.


B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with window manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Form sheet metal sill pan in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Prepare windows for installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 INSTALLATION (Specifier Note: DELETE installation paragraphs not project specific.)

A. Insert window into rough opening (for use on window units with exterior trim): 1. Shim side jambs straight. 2. Inspect window for square, level and plumb. 3. Fasten window through exterior trim around entire window. 4. Test and adjust for smooth operation of window. 5. Set all nails below wood surface.

B. Insert window into rough opening (for use on window units without exterior trim):

1. Shim side jambs straight. 2. Inspect window for square, level and plumb. 3. Fasten window through jamb, shim and into rough opening jamb. 4. Test and adjust for smooth operation of window. 5. Set all nails below wood surface. 6. Ensure seal between sill pan and inside face of windowsill. 7. Install backer rod and sealant at exterior jambs and head. 8. Apply backer rod and sealant on exterior below sill. Leave gaps for

drainage. 9. Seal interior joints between rough opening and jambs with backer rod

and sealant.


A. Manufacturers’ Field Services: Field inspections.


3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove Preserve® film from glass.

B. Clean the exterior surface and glass with mild soap and water. 3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed windows from damage.

3.8 SCHEDULES

(Specifier Note: Below are sample schedules that require editing for specific project. When a single type of window is utilized on a project, Specifier may elect to delete the schedule in its entirety. When Schedules are included on the drawings, schedule should be deleted from the specification.)

A. Window Type A

1. Style: Double Hung 2. Operation: Operable 3. Size: 29 -7/8” x 49 –3/16” 4. Exterior Finish: Primed 5. Interior Wood: Western Pine 6. Interior Finish: Pre-finished, Cherry Stain 7. Exterior Trim: standard 8. Mull Cap: ½ inch 9. Extension Jamb: 7 ¾” 10. Hardware: Standard, Interior Lift Sash 11. Hardware Finish: Desert Sand 12. Glazing: Standard, Tempered, Low-E with Argon 13. Grilles: GBG, 5/8” Flat Profile 14. Insect Screen: Yes 15. Screen Frame Finish: Hartford Green

B. Window Type B

1. Style: Casement 2. Operation: Stationary 3. Size: 24 x 30 4. Exterior Finish: unfinished 5. Interior Wood: Western Pine 6. Interior Finish: Pre-finished, Cherry Stain 7. Exterior Trim: Adams Casing 8. Mull Cap: 2 inch 9. Extension Jamb: 7 ¾” 10. Hardware: Manual folding crank, Concealed Lock 11. Hardware Finish: Brushed Nickel


12. Glazing: standard, Type 2 – Gray Tinted, Tempered 13. Grilles: SDL 7/8 inch Bead Stop profile, silver shadow bar 14. Insect Screen: Yes 15. Screen Frame Finish: Wood veneer frame, Pacific Coast Red Alder:

END OF SECTION

IST BUILDING 11/19/10 07 01 40-1 Aluminum Paneling

SECTION 07 01 40

ALUMINUM CLADDING PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Included in this Section is the furnishing and installation of exterior pre-formed aluminum wall panels. B. Included shall be the coordination with all related construction, including entrances, doors, window walls and all other adjacent and adjoining construction. C. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer complete data by an independent testing laboratory to substantiate that his system meets the non-combustibility, thermal and design criteria herein. 1.02 CERTAIN RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Window Wall B. Light-gage Structural Steel Studs C. Miscellaneous Metals D. Glass and Glazing


E. Flashing F. Dry Wall Construction G. Thermal Insulation 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Wall panels, fastenings, anchorage, bracing and supports shall be designed to accommodate:

1. Sustained, positive and negative wind pressures as specified herein. 2. Joint design shall be such that the movement of panels, as a result of thermal changes or other causes,

shall be noiseless and shall meet all requirements thereof for exclusion of air and water. 3. The wall panels under full design load shall not deflect in the plane of the wall, more than 75% of the

design clearance dimensions between the panels and the inside or outside structural members adjacent to them.

4. The Contractor shall furnish the wall panels with horizontal, hairline joints as shown on the Contract Drawings.

5. Regardless of the details of the exterior aluminum wall panels as shown on the Contract Drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to design a system whereby the panels shall be individually removable and replaceable without damage to adjacent panels or construction.

B. The Contractor shall verify all existing environmental conditions and variations at the site. C. Anticipated Thermal Factors:

1. Provide for expansion and/or contraction of all component materials that could cause buckling, opening of joints, undue stress on fastenings and damage to weather seals.

2. Determine and adequately provide for ambient temperature changes for the various materials (and finishes) and manufacture all components to eliminate the possibility of detrimental effects on the wall


panel system or adjoining construction. 3. Design for the following temperature range:

a) Exterior surface temperature range of minus 10 degrees F to plus 160 degrees F b) Interior temperature, a constant 70 degrees F

1. Provide a positive thermal break, so positioned that no member will induce uncontrolled condensation when the exterior of the system is exposed to an ambient temperature of minus 18 degrees C (-0.4F), and interior ambient temperature of 22 degrees C (71.6F) and an interior ambient relative humidity of 50%.

2. Uncontrolled condensation shall be defined as when water will condense on the interior metal surface and run down, following the exposure to the above conditions for a period of at least eight (8) hours and then followed by the raising of the exterior ambient temperature of 10 degrees C (50F).

D. Wind Loads:

1. Design for wind load normal to the plane of the panel system of 30 (Thirty) PSF positive (acting inward) and negative (acting outward).

2. Maximum allowable deflection in a direction normal to the plane of the wall panels shall be 1/360 of the clear span of the member.

3. Maximum deflection in a direction parallel to the plane of the wall panels, under full load, shall not exceed 75% of the design clearance between the individual member and its mating part, directly below it.

4. Air infiltration through the panel system shall not exceed 0.025 CFM per square foot of wall footage and maximum 0.04 CFM per linear foot of joints and seams (other than continuously welded joints and seams) under inward (positive) pressure of 1.56 PSF acting normal to plane of wall panels.

E. Water Infiltration: No water shall be permitted to infiltrate from the exterior to the interior side of the wall panel system when subjected to the following conditions:

1. Positive (inward) pressures normal to the plane of the wall panels over a minimum period of 30 minutes, both static and dynamic 10 PSF.


2. With water spray discharged at 10 PSF, minimum 10 gallons per hour at the frontal areas F. Fire resistance:

1. All materials and components shall be certified by the manufacturers to be non-combustible, as defined in ASTM E - 176 and tested in accordance with ASTM designations.

2. Materials that have been previously tested by an approved testing laboratory and can be required to be re-tested.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals as follows, shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the Section of Division I entitled "Working Drawings and Catalog Cuts".

1. Shop Drawings: a) Shop Drawings shall clearly show at large scale (full size cross-section, jointing and other critical details) all connections, construction, adjoining construction, materials, insulation and backing. b) Installation drawings, at large scale, showing method and sequence of installation. c) Furnish full scale details of all openings that are to be made in the panel system that are to receive equipment such as vents, scuppers, etc., d) Structural systems, components, connections and details for the support of the wall panel system and its components.

1. Samples: a) Furnish samples in quadruplicate (more if required by Engineer), minimum 12" x 12" of panels. b) Furnish samples of all related materials such as adhesives, sealants and hardware. c) Furnish color chips for approval, for each color prior to applying paint to samples.

1. Certification: a) The Contractor shall submit a certification stating that all materials provided for this Contract conform to the requirements specified in the Section. 1.05 COORDINATION


A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the Section with the work of all other Sections so that all mating parts, inserts and cutouts are properly provided for whether they are for shop or field installation. B. All panels that are to be installed around existing (previously erected) items or items that are to be installed after the installation of the wall panels etc., shall be coordinated by the contractor. All cutting, fitting and other such preparation shall be performed in the shop, where possible. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Preformed aluminum wall panels shall be Series 1200 "Tech Clad" as manufactured by Industrial Building Panels, Troy, MI approved equal, and shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Components shall be shop fabricated and wherever practical furnished in large assemblies. They shall be carefully wrapped and crated at the factory, or protected by other means, identified for erection and shipped to the site for installation.

2. All panels both at factory and field shall be stored on edge, in a vertical, upright position until ready for erection, not flat.

B. Panel Flatness:

1. Panels shall be formed in such a way as to maintain their inherent flatness regardless of expansion, building movement, ambient temperature changes or any other factors that might affect their flatness.

2. Panels shall be considered flat when no portion of the panel exceeds 0.2% of panel dimensions in width and length up to 0.1875" maximum, at an ambient temperature of 100 degrees F (38 degrees centigrade).

C. Panel Imperfections:

1. Dimples, lines recesses or any other imperfections in the visible surface such as may be caused by


welding, tool marks or any other reason will not be acceptable. 2. Oil canning, warping, sagging or bellying will not be acceptable.

D. Panel Joints: Joints will be permitted only where shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as approved by the Engineer. E. Fasteners:

1. Fasteners in finished construction shall be concealed. Where permitted to be exposed in the final construction, the heads shall be permanently coated to match the finished material.

2. Connections to dissimilar metals shall be protected by approved means. F. Corners: All corners of exposed aluminum shall be sharp except where radius (rounded) corners are shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.02 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. All panels shall have concealed built-in, adequate stiffening and bracing. B. All panel edges and corners shall be closed full length and sealed. C. Provide all back-up plates, closures, flashing, insulation, drips, and accessories. D. Assemblies shall be provided with adequate concealed weep holes to remove all moisture, condensations and spillages to the exterior. Provide two weep holes in the bottom of each panel. E. All joints in wall panels shall be air and water tight.


F. Coping face panel shall be formed (or extruded) with joints properly backed up with battens and flashing gutters. G. All openings in wall panels for vents, scuppers etc. shall be made in the factory and provided with proper closures and accessories to receive same. 2.03 METALS A. Aluminum for Panels: Panels shall be custom fabricated from minimum .120" (3.04mm) thick aluminum solid plate of 303H134 or 5005H2AQ alloy, in accordance with architectural drawings and manufacturer's approved shop drawings including verified field dimensions. B. Aluminum (other panels): Principal Extrusions:

1. Minimum thickness 0.125" alloy 6030 Temper T5 ASTM B221. 2. Removable glazing stops minimum thickness 0.062".

C. Comply with the applicable practices of the Aluminum Industry and NAAMM (National Association of Metal Manufacturers). D. Welding:

1. Comply with recommendation of AWS and NAAMM for electrodes and methods, and producers of metals.

2. Qualify welders and welding procedures in accordance with ASME Section 9. 3. Aluminum panels and/or flashing requiring welding shall have a weld seam continuously welded on

both sides. The exposed exterior surface shall be ground and sanded smooth prior to finishing.


4. The edges of heavy gauge aluminum shall be beveled prior to welding to allow for the welding seam to be ground smooth in the same plane as the base metal.

5. Welding seams shall not crack, pit, corrode or otherwise fail as a result of defect in materials and workmanship, and further promising to repair or replace defective work during a 10 day period following substantial completion of the work.

2.04 PAINTED FINISH A. All surfaces of exterior aluminum wall panels shall be thoroughly cleaned, pretreated, primed and receive a final baked on coat of paint in accordance with the following. All coats shall be applied in strict compliance with the finish paint manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Final Coat: a) Final Coat shall contain full strength polyvinylidene fluoride resin system, similar and equal to "Kynar 500", product of Pennwalt Corp. System shall be "Fluorpon", manufactured by Glidden-Durkee Div., SMC Corp., or "Duramar", manufactured by PPG Industries. All such paint systems shall be applied by an application by the paint manufacturers mentioned. b) finish coat shall be applied to an average dry film thickness of 1 mil. and shall sustain a hardness, Pencil test min. "F". Max. chalk No. 7 per ASTM D659.

1. Prime coat: a) Corrosion inhibiting epoxy primer, compatible with and as recommended by final coat manufacturer. b) Prime coat applied to a dry film average thickness of 0.4 mil.

1. Metal pretreatment: a) All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with a mild alkaline cleaner, washed and shall receive a uniform conversion coating of an acid-chromate-fluoride system recommended by the final coat manufacturer. b) Comply with ASTM B449

1. Reverse side coating: a) Wash coat 30 percent floss acrylic paint, as recommended by manufacturer, dry film thickness 0.5 mil.


b) All paint, finishing systems shall be factory applied. c) Finish paint shall be uniform, without flow or applicator marks, streaks, blisters, craze lines or other imperfections. D. Performance Requirements:

1. Salt spray: 1,000 hour test per ASTM B117. 2. Humidity Resistance: 1,000 hours at 100% relative humidity of 100 degrees F per ASTM D-1735. 3. Acid Alkali Resistance: 15 minute spot test per ASTM D 1308.

2.05 PROTECTION All surfaces of metals shall be protected as follows: A. Dissimilar metals: Zinc-chromate and/or heavy brush coat of bituminous paint. B. Masonry, concrete etc.: Heavy brush coat of bituminous paint. C. Where movement is anticipated or desirable, separate materials with stainless steel shims or Teflon separators. 2.06 SUBSTRUCTURE All reinforcing, steel members, bracing shall comply with applicable provisions section _____ Light-gage Structural steel studs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Single Source Responsibility: Installer shall be under the direct supervision and employment of the wall cladding manufacturer. The manufacturer is to be solely responsible for the workmanship and quality of the finished installation.


B. Installation of aluminum wall panels and related items shall be in accordance with "Working Drawings" and manufacturer's installation instruction and drawings. C. Under no circumstances will on site fabrication of special panels, corners, flashings and other related work be acceptable. All fabrications shall be done under controlled shop conditions. D. Panels shall be installed plumb and true, properly aligned, rigid and secure. E. Installation shall be performed by skilled workmen, thoroughly experienced in the handling and installation of such materials. F. All screws and fittings shall be drawn up tight. G. Sealants as specified in the "Sealants" Section of this Contract shall be installed in aluminum wall panels under the requirements of this Section. H. Panel fabricator/installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all components of the exterior panel system including, but not limited to, attachment to subconstruction, panel to panel joinery, panel to dissimilar material joinery, and joint seal associated with panel system. 3.02 SITE PROTECTION All panels shall be stored in an upright (on edge) position without permitting furnished materials to come in contact with mud, concrete, chemicals, cement moisture, untreated wood and sun. 3.03 FINAL CLEANUP It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to clean all surfaces, using proper cleaners and/or solvents and leave entire system clean, free of all debris and completely acceptable to the Engineer/Contractor.

Waterproof Traffic Membrane Forrest Resource Building 07185-1

SECTION 07185

WATERPROOF TRAFFIC MEMBRANE

Display hidden notes to specifier.

Web: www.duradek.com

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Traffic membrane, consisting of welded seam PVC waterproofing, over the following surfaces: 1. Balcony decks and roof decks. 2. Walkways, ramps, and stairways. 3. Patios and courtyards.


A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Scuppers, counterflashings, and fascias.

B. Section 07710 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts: Scuppers, counterflashings, and fascias.

C. Section 15160 - Roof drains

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CAN/ULC-S107 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; National Standard of Canada.

B. CCMC - Technical Guide for PVC Sheet Waterproofing (Exposed to Light Pedestrian Traffic); National Research Council, Canada Construction Materials Centre (CCMC).

C. CGSB 37.54-95 - Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane, Sheet Applied, Flexible, Polyvinyl Chloride; Canadian General Standards Board.

D. CGSB 37-GP-55M - Application of Sheet Applied Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Membrane; Canadian General Standards Board.


E. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

F. ICC - Acceptance Criteria for Walking Decks; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES).

G. UBC Std 15-2 - Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof-covering Materials; International Conference of Building Officials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's specifications, including data substantiating compliance with physical properties specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Installation and seaming plan, showing joints, termination details, and interface with other materials.

D. Samples: Two 8-1/2 by 11 inch (210 by 250 mm) pieces showing finish, pattern, color, and backing; labelled.

E. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions and recommendations, including precautions required for seaming and adhering membrane.

F. Installer's Qualifications.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in providing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum of 15 years documented experience with products in use.

B. Installer Qualifications: Trained and currently certified by manufacturer.

C. Pre-installation Meeting: Discuss waterproofing practices and precautions applicable to this project. 1. Convene minimum of 7 days prior to start of installation. 2. Require the attendance of:

a. Manufacturer's representative. b. Contractor's field superintendent. c. Installation foreman. d. Other trades affected by this work. e. Owner's representative.


A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact. 1. Label uncured materials, both sheets and canned goods, with date of

manufacturer and shelf life. 2. Do not use creased or damaged sheets. 3. Do not use products after end of shelf life.

B. Store and handle materials to prevent damage. 1. Place materials on pallets. 2. Prevent creasing of rolled materials. 3. Do not use polyethylene to cover stored materials (canvas tarpaulins are

acceptable). 4. Keep containers closed, except when removing materials from them.


C. Keep materials at temperature between 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) and 80 degrees F (26.6 degrees C); if adhesives are exposed to lower temperature, verify useability with manufacturer before using.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty for membrane leaks due to a manufacturing defect, covering materials, and/or repair and replacement labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Provide products of Duradek/Durarail U.S. Inc., 1722 Iron Street, North Kansas City, MO 64116. ASD. Tel: (816) 421-5830. Fax: (816)421-2924.

B. Manufacturer: Provide products of Duradek/Durarail Canada Ltd., 8288 129th Street, Surrey, BC V3W 0A6 Canada. ASD. Tel: (604) 591-5594. Fax: (604) 591-3100.

C. Requests for substitution will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.

D. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Membrane: Duradek Ultra; polyester reinforced PVC membrane with ultra-violet resistance, for fully-adhered installation with heat-welded seams and perimeter attachment. 1. Sheet Width: 54 inches (1371.5 mm).and 72 inches (1828.8mm) 2. Overall Sheet Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.5 mm). 3. PVC Film Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). 4. Weight: 50 oz/sq yd (1695 g/sq m). 5. Color: As selected by Architect.

A Color: Ultra Supreme Granite. B Color: Ultra Supreme Taupe.

6. Coefficient of Friction: a. Dry leather: 0.53. b. Dry rubber: 0.89. c. Wet leather: 0.62. d. Wet rubber: 0.92. C Color: Ultra Classic Sandstone D Color: Ultra Classic Steel E Color: Ultra Marble Mocha. F Color: Ultra Marble Pewter. G Color: Ultra Marble Slate. H Color: Ultra Supreme Chip I Color: Ultra Heritage Agate J Color: Ultra Heritage Aspen K Color: Ultra Heritage Sienna L Color: Ultra Heritage Sunrise M Color: Ultra Surcoseal Cappuccino N Color: Ultra Surcoseal Grey. O Color: Ultra Surcoseal Greige. P Color: Ultra Surcoseal Latte Q Color: Ultra Surcoseal Suede


R Color: As selected by Architect. 6. Coefficient of Friction:

a. Dry leather: 0.50. b. Dry rubber: 0.70. c. Wet leather: 0.60. d. Wet rubber: 0.65.

7. Flammability (ASTM E 108 and UBC Std 15-2): Class A, when installed over non-combustible substrate.

8. Flammability (CAN/ULC-S107): Class A, when installed over non-combustible substrate.

9. Comply with CAN/CGSB-37.54. 10. National Building Code of Canada Compliance: Comply with National

Building Code of Canada 2005, Part 9, Clause 9.26.2.1(1)(h), and CCMC Technical Guide for PVC Sheet Waterproofing (Exposed to Light Pedestrian Traffic), as evidenced by current Evaluation Report prepared by National Research Council, Canada Construction Materials Centre (CCMC).

11. CMHC Approval: Approved by Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation for use in construction financed or insured under the National Housing Act.

12. International Building Code Compliance: Comply with 2006 International Building Code requirements for walking decks and ICC Acceptance Criteria for Walking Decks, as evidenced by current Evaluation Report prepared by ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES).

B. Surface Conditioners, Adhesives, Sealants, Fillers, and Cleaners: As specified or provided by membrane manufacturer.

C. Perimeter Fasteners: Mechanical fastening devices furnished by membrane manufacturer; color coordinated to membrane color.

D. PVC Coated Metal, Scuppers, Overflow Drains, Roof Drains, and Trims furnished by membrane manufacturer.

E. Adjacent Flashings: Specified in other sections; installed by others.

PART 2 EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work and conform to membrane manufacturer's requirements.

B. Verify that deck is: 1. Secure, well supported, solid, and in accordance with local code structural

requirements. 2. Clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, and projections, properly

sloped to drains, valleys, or eaves. 3. Dry and free of ice and snow.

C. Verify that adjacent precast deck members are flush within 1/4 inch (6 mm) vertical variation, with grout keys filled flush.

D. Notify the Architect of any conditions that would prevent satisfactory completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

2.2 PREPARATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until substrate preparation is complete.


B. Coordinate timing of installation to avoid construction traffic over completed traffic membrane surfaces.

C. Wood Deck: Fill joints, knot holes, voids, and low areas with filler and sand smooth.

D. Wood Deck: Cover with cementitious board meeting requirements of Class A approved application. Fill joints, knot holes, voids, and low areas with filler and sand smooth.

E. Concrete Deck: Fill surface imperfections and variations with leveling compound. Test for and remove surface contaminants.

F. Coordinate installation with installation of drains and similar accessories.

2.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes, and CGSB-37-GP-55M.

B. Do not install when temperature is below 25 degrees F (minus 3.8 degrees C) or above 98 degrees F (36.6 degrees C). Do not install when winds are gusting over 30 mph (48.3 kph).

C. Do not dilute primers, adhesives, coatings, or sealants.

D. Install membrane with minimum number of seams possible. Overlap seams 3/4 inch (19 mm), to shed water; heat-weld all seams.

E. Adhere membrane to substrate.

F. Mechanically fasten all perimeter edges and penetrations.

G. Install flashings and accessories. Seal around all penetrations, drains, and edges.

2.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean soiled areas in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Repair damaged areas to match original materials.

2.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished work from traffic using durable temporary materials.

END OF SECTION

072116 Eastview Terrace Harris Building 11/19/2010

Sample Specifications Section 7210 Part 1. General. 1.01 Summary. A. Provide glass fiber thermal/sound attenuation insulation for assembly as indicated in building plans. 1.02 Materials provided in other sections. A. Section 09100 - Metal Support Systems. B. Section 09120 - Ceiling Suspension Systems. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems. 1.03 References.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. C665 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 2. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics. 3. E96 - Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. E136 - Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750° C. 5. C518 - Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter. 6. E970 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Exposed Attic Floor Insulation Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.04 Submittals. Submit Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. product data, product literature and product samples for specified insulation. 1.05 Delivery. Protect product from damage and becoming wet or covered with ice and snow. 1.06 Limitations. A. Kraft and standard foil facings will burn and should not be left exposed. Part 2. Products. 2.01 Manufacturer.

A. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 2.02 Thermal/Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation.


A. Type: Unfaced glass fiber batt complying with ASTM C665 Type I - Class A. B. Type: Kraft faced glass fiber batt complying with ASTM C665 Type II - Class C. C. Type: Foil faced glass fiber batt complying with ASTM C665 Type III, Class B. D. Type: Foil Scrim Kraft (FSK) faced glass fiber batt complying with ASTM C665 Type III, Class A. E. Size: Select from product literature. Metal Frame Insulation R-value _____ Thickness _____ Width _____ Length _____ Wood Frame Insulation R-value _____ Thickness _____ Width _____ Length _____ F. Surface Burning Characteristics

1. Unfaced batt Flame spread of 25 or less Smoke developed of 50 or less When tested in accordance with ASTM E84 2. Foil faced batt Flame spread of 75 or less Smoke developed of 150 or less When tested in accordance with ASTM E84 3. Foil Scrim Kraft (FSK) faced batt Flame spread of 25 or less Smoke developed of 50 or less When tested in accordance with ASTM E84

G. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating 1. Kraft/Foil facings maximum 1 perm 2. Foil Scrim Kraft (FSK) faced maximum .05 perm

H. Combustion Characteristics Tested in accordance with ASTM E136 2.03 Other materials. Provide other materials not listed but required for proper installation for work in this section.


Part 3. Execution. 3.01 Inspection. A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been tested. B. Provide written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 General Installation. A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. B. Between Metal Studs Friction-fit insulation between studs after cover material has been installed on one side of the cavity. Use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place in applications without a cover material or where the stud depth is larger than the insulation thickness. When faced insulation is used, the attachment flanges may be taped to the face of the metal stud prior to applying the interior finish. -- Provide supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish surface is applied when insulation is installed in heights over 8 feet. C. Between Wood Studs. Friction-fit unfaced insulation between studs after cover material has been installed on one side of the cavity. Use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place in applications without a cover material. When faced insulation is used, staple attachment flanges to face or side of stud every 8 to 12 inches to prevent gaps along the edge of the vapor retarder. D. Furring Strips.

- Install insulation between furring strips, hat channels, or z-shaped furring in areas where finish surface will be applied. - Contact the furring strip manufacturer for recommendations on the appropriate fastener system to use.

E. Mechanical Fasteners. Apply insulation directly to the interior surface of the exterior wall with appropriate spindle or prong-type anchors.

- Fasten anchors to wall by welding the pin to metal and then impale the insulation, or by using pre-attached heads and welding them through the insulation. - Fasten anchors to wall with adhesive. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation and adhesive pattern. - Impale insulation on anchor and secure with washer. Select pin lengths to ensure tight fit. Protect pin tips where subject to human contact. See manufacturer's diagram for impaling pin pattern.

3.03 Material Storage and Protection.


Protect insulation from damage and protect during installation and after from becoming wet.

Eisenhower Chapel/ 11- 15-10 07 22 00 Building Insulation

Johns Manville 717 17th Street 80202

PO Box 5108 Denver, CO 80217-5108

Phone: (800) 654-3103 Fax: (303) 978-2318 E-mail: [email protected]

www.specJM.com

This 3-part spec is a Johns Manville product specification and designed to allow users to leverage the specification details provided by JM and insert optional text. Revise section numbers and titles below to suit project requirements, specification practices and section content. Refer to CSI MasterFormat for other section numbers and titles.

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Formaldehyde-free™ fiberglass thermal [And] [Sound control] insulation.

Specifier Note: Revise paragraph below to suit project requirements. If a reader of this section could reasonably expect to find a product or component specified in this section, but it is actually specified elsewhere, then the related section number(s) should be listed in the paragraph below. Add section numbers and titles per CSI MasterFormat and specifier’s practice. In the absence of related sections, delete paragraph below.


1. Division 7 Section: Roof Deck Insulation.

2. Division 7 Section: Joint Sealants.

3. Division 8 Section: Curtain Wall.

4. Division 9 Section: Gypsum Board.

5. Division 9 Section: Acoustical Ceilings.

6. Division 15 Section: Mechanical: [Duct insulation] [Equipment insulation] [And] [Pipe insulation].

Specifier Note: Article below may be omitted when specifying manufacturer’s proprietary products and recommended installation. Retain References Article when specifying products and installation by an industry reference standard. If retained, list standard(s) referenced in this section. Indicate issuing authority name, acronym, standard designation and title. Establish policy for indicating edition date of standard referenced. Conditions of the Contract or Division 1 References Section may establish the edition date of standards. This article does not require compliance with standard. It is a listing of all references used in this section.

1.02 REFERENCES

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C165 Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulations.

2. ASTM C356 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage of Preformed High-Temperature Thermal Insulation Subjected to Soaking Heat.

3. ASTM C411 Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation.

4. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

5. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

6. ASTM C612 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

7. ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

8. ASTM C764 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation.

9. ASTM C1014 Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Mineral Fiber Thermal and Sound Absorbing Insulation.

10. ASTM C1015 Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation.

11. ASTM C1104 Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Sorption of Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation.


http://www.jm.com/

Eisenhower Chapel/ 11-15-10 07 22 00 Building Insulation

12. ASTM C1149 Standard Specification for Self-Supported Spray Applied Cellulosic Thermal Insulation

13. ASTM C1304 Standard Test Method for Assessing the Odor Emission of Thermal Insulation Materials.

14. ASTM C1320 Standard Practice for Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction.

15. ASTM C1338 Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings.

16. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

17. ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

18. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

19. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

20. ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C.

21. ASTM E736 Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members.

22. ASTM E759 Standard Test Method for Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members.

23. ASTM E970 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Exposed Attic Floor Insulation Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

D. California Integrated Waste Management Board (CIWMB):

1. Section 01350 Special Environmental Requirements Specification.

E. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED):

1. Materials and Resources (MR) Credit 4.1 - Recycled Content 10%.

2. Materials and Resources (MR) Credit 4.2 - Recycled Content 20%.

3. Materials and Resources (MR) Credit 5.1 – Regional materials 10%.

4. Materials and Resources (MR) Credit 5.1 – Regional materials 20%.

Specifier Note: Article below should be restricted to statements describing design or performance requirements and functional (not dimensional) tolerances of a complete system. Limit descriptions to composite and operational properties required to link components of a system together and to interface with other systems. Because insulation applications may have multiple performance criteria, coordinate language used here with other sections.


F. Design Requirements: Provide [Products/systems] that have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to the following criteria:

1. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test methods indicated below or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

a. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): [Specify flame spread/smoke developed ratings.].

b. Assembly Fire Resistance Rating (ASTM E119): [Specify assembly rating and design number.].

c. Combustion Characteristics (ASTM E136): [Specify non-combustible.].

2. Assembly Sound Transmission Rating (ASTM E90): [Specify sound transmission class (STC).].

3. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): [Specify noise reduction coefficient.].

4. Thermal Performance (ASTM C518): [Specify R-value.].

5. [Specify any additional design requirements (fire, sound, thermal).].

G. Performance Requirements: Provide [Products/systems] that have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to the following criteria:

1. Surface Burning Characteristics, Unfaced (ASTM E84): Flamespread index 25, smoke developed 50.

2. Recycled Glass Content: 25%.

3. Combustibility (ASTM E136): Noncombustible.

4. Formaldehyde Content: Free of formaldehyde.

5. [Specify any additional performance requirements (fire, sound, thermal).].


Specifier Note: Article below includes submittal of relevant data to be furnished by Contractor before, during or after construction. Coordinate this article with Architect’s and Contractor’s duties and responsibilities in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

H. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 Administrative Requirements.

I. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions, including manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA® sheets.

J. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection and verification samples.

K. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit [Fire] [Sound] [And] [Thermal] test reports from recognized test laboratories.

2. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

L. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation indicating how the requirements of Credit MR 4.1 [And 4.2] will be met.

1. List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate post-consumer recycled content and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.

2. Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content.

3. Documentation that the product passes CIWMB Section 01350 for indoor air quality.

Specifier Note: Article below should include statements of prerequisites, standards, limitations and criteria that establish an overall level of quality for products and workmanship for this section. Coordinate article below with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section.


M. Obtain each type of building insulation through a single source.

N. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.

Specifier Note: Paragraph below should list obligations for compliance with specific code requirements particular to this section. General statements to comply with a particular code are typically addressed in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Regulatory Requirements Section. Repetitive statements should be avoided.

O. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: [Specify applicable requirements of regulatory agencies.].

1. [Code agency name].

a. [Report or approval number].

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below if mock-up is required.

P. Mock-Ups: [Specify requirements for mock-up.].

1. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finish work.

2. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up.

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below if preinstallation meeting is required.

Q. Preinstallation Meetings: [Specify requirements for meeting.].

Specifier Note: Article below should include specific protection and environmental conditions required during storage. Coordinate article below with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.


R. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.

S. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

T. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Specifier Note: Retain article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance characteristics, material standards and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as “or equal” or “or approved equal” or similar phrases may cause ambiguity in specifications. Such phrases require verification (procedural, legal and regulatory) and assignment of responsibility for determining “or equal” products.


1.07 FORMALDEHYDE-FREE™™ BUILDING INSULATION

A. Manufacturer: Johns Manville.

1. Contact: 717 17th Street 80202; PO Box 5108, Denver, CO 80217-5108; Telephone: (800) 654-3103; Fax: (303) 978-2318; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.specJM.com.

B. Proprietary Products/Systems: Building insulation, including the following:

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for installation within wall cavities, floors and ceilings. Product is also available for metal or wood framing and may be used with a separate vapor retarder when moisture control is required. High-performance cathedral ceiling batts are also available.

1. JM Formaldehyde-free™ Unfaced Batts:

Specifier Note: Indicate appropriate R-value in the following subparagraph; select from R-11 through R-38.

a. Thermal Resistance (R-Value) (ASTM C518): [Specify R-value.].

b. Combustion Characteristics (ASTM E136): Pass.

c. Critical Radiant Flux (ASTM E970): Greater than 0.11 Btu/ft2 × s (0.12 W/cm2).

d. Water Vapor Sorption (ASTM C1104): 5% or less.

e. Odor Emission (ASTM C1304): Pass.

f. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665): Pass.

g. Fungi Resistance (ASTM C1338): Pass.

h. Recycled Content: Certified by Scientific Certification Systems to contain minimum of 20% post-consumer and 5% pre-consumer recycled glass product, on average of manufacturer’s products.

i. Prove through documentation that product complies with CIWMB Section 01350 for indoor air quality.

Specifier Note: Fill in selected thickness in the subparagraph below from those available from manufacturer. If project includes multiple thicknesses, indicate below.

j. Thickness: [Specify thickness.].

k. Flamespread (ASTM E84): 25, maximum.

l. Smoke Developed (ASTM E84): 50, maximum.

m. Material Standard: ASTM C665, Type I.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for metal framing. Kraft faced insulation is also available for wood-framed construction. Kraft and foil faced batts should be used in concealed applications. Foil facings provide excellent vapor retarders.

2. JM Formaldehyde-free™ Kraft and Foil-faced Batts:



Specifier Note: The following subparagraph applies only to foil faced batt insulation. Delete if retaining only kraft faced insulation.

b. Critical Radiant Flux (ASTM E970): Greater than 0.11 Btu/ft2 × s (0.12 W/cm2).

c. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): [0.05 perm (2.9 ng/Pa × s × m2) for foil faced] [1.0 perm (57.5 ng/Pa × s × m2) for Kraft faced].

d. Water Vapor Sorption (ASTM C1104): 5% or less by weight.


f. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665, 13.8): Pass.






http://www.jm.com/



k. Flamespread (ASTM E84):

1) Foil-faced Batts: 75, maximum.

2) Kraft-faced Batts: Unrated.

l. Smoke Developed (ASTM E84):

1) Foil-faced Batts: 450, maximum.

2) Kraft-faced Batts: Unrated.

m. Material Standard:

1) Foil-faced Batts: ASTM C665, Type III, Class B, Category 1.

2) Kraft-faced Batts: ASTM C665, Type II, Class C, Category 1.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for metal framing where an EPA-registered mold inhibitor on the facing is desired. MR-faced insulation is also available for wood-framed construction. MR-faced batts should be used in concealed applications.

3. JM Formaldehyde-free™ MR®-Faced Batts:



b. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 1.0 perm (57.5 ng/Pa × s × m2)

c. Water Vapor Sorption (ASTM C1104): 5% or less by weight.

d. Odor Emission (ASTM C1304): Pass.

e. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665, 13.8): Pass.

f. Fungi Resistance (ASTM C1338): Pass.

g. Fungi Resistance (ASTM D2020): Pass





k. Material Standard:

1) MR-faced Batts: ASTM C665, Type II, Class C, Category 1.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for metal or wood framing. FSK-25 facings provide excellent vapor retarders. FSK-25 faced batts are for exposed applications.

4. JM Formaldehyde-free™ FSK-25 Faced Batts:

Specifier Note: Indicate appropriate R-value in the following subparagraph; select from R-11, R-13, R-19, R-30.

a. Thermal Resistance (R-Value) (ASTM C518): [R-11] [R-13] [R-19] [R-30].



d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.05 perm (3 ng/Pa × s × m2).

e. Water Vapor Sorption (ASTM C1104): 5% or less.

f. Odor Emission (ASTM C1304): Pass.

g. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665, 13.8): Pass.


h. Fungi Resistance (ASTM C1338): Pass.

i. Recycled Content: Certified by Scientific Certification Systems to contain minimum of 20% post-consumer and 5% pre-consumer recycled glass product, on average of manufacturer’s products.

j. Prove through documentation that product passes CIWMB Section 01350 for indoor air quality.


k. Thickness: [Specify thickness.].

l. Flamespread (ASTM E84): 25, maximum.

m. Smoke Developed (ASTM E84): 50, maximum.

n. Material Standard: ASTM C665, Type III, Class A, Category 1.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for various concealed exterior and interior metal or wood framed cavities and directly above suspended ceilings. For wall applications, the vapor retarder is placed on the flange side while the remaining sides are perforated for moisture flow. For underfloor applications, the vapor retarder is placed on the side opposite the stapling flange side for proper contact with the subfloor.

5. JM Formaldehyde-free™ ComfortTherm® Poly-Encapsulated Batts:






e. Water Vapor Sorption (ASTM C1104): 5% or less by weight.










n. Material Standard: ASTM C665, Type II, Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flamespread of 25 or less), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for panel deck roof applications where improved thermal performance and light reflectivity are important.

6. JM Formaldehyde-free™ FSK-25 and PSK-faced Panel Deck Batts:

Specifier Note: Indicate appropriate R-value in the following subparagraph; select from R-19 or R-30.

a. Thermal Resistance (R-Value) (ASTM C518): [R-19] [R-30].















n. Material Standard:

1) FSK-25 Faced Panel Deck Batts: ASTM C665, Type III, Class A, Category 1.

2) PSK-faced Panel Deck Batts: ASTM C665, Type II, Class A, Category 1.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for curtain wall and other general commercial construction applications. Product below is generally used where framing members are not present.

7. JM Unfaced Insul-SHIELD® Board:

Specifier Note: Indicate appropriate R-value in the following subparagraph.



c. Maximum Use Temperature (ASTM C411): 350 degrees F (177 degrees C).


e. Compressive Resistance (IS 300 and 600 Only) (ASTM C165): 25 psf (1.2 kPa) at 10%.

f. Linear Shrinkage (ASTM C356): None.

g. Odor Emission (ASTM C1304): Pass.

h. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665, 13.8): Pass.

i. Fungi Resistance (ASTM C1338): Pass.





m. Material Standard: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for curtain wall and other general commercial construction applications. Products below are generally used where framing members are not present.

8. JM FSK-25 and PSK-faced Insul-SHIELD® Board:

Specifier Note: Indicate appropriate R-value in the following subparagraph; select from available R-values: (IA 100, 150, 225, 300, 600) (IA & IB 300, 600).



c. Maximum Use Temperature (ASTM C411): 250 degrees F (121 degrees C).


e. Water Vapor Sorption (ASTM C1104): 5% or less by weight.

f. Compressive Resistance (IS 300 and 600 only) (ASTM C165): 25 psf (1.2 kPa) at 10%.

g. Linear Shrinkage (ASTM C356): None.

h. Odor Emission (ASTM C1304): Pass.


i. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665, 13.8): Pass.

j. Fungi Resistance (ASTM C1338): Pass.





n. Material Standard: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs when acoustical performance is crucial. The following product can also be used behind curtains or other wall coverings. Product is generally used where framing members are not present.

9. JM Black Faced Insul-SHIELD® Board:




c. Maximum Use Temperature (ASTM C411): 250 degrees F (121 degrees C) for faced.


e. Compressive Resistance (ASTM C165): 25 psf (1.2 kPa) at 10%.

f. Linear Shrinkage (ASTM C356): None.

g. Odor Emission (ASTM C1304): Pass.

h. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665, 13.8): Pass.

i. Fungi Resistance (ASTM C1338): Pass.





m. Material Standard: ASTM C612.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for use in attics and hard-to-reach locations.

10. JM Formaldehyde-free™ Climate Pro® Loose Fill Insulation:




c. Critical Radiant Flux (ASTM E970): 0.11 Btu/ft2 × s (0.12 W/cm2) or greater.

d. Water Vapor Sorption (ASTM C1104): 5% or less.


f. Corrosiveness (ASTM C665, 13.8): Pass.


Specifier Note: Indicate appropriate recycled content based upon manufacturer’s product literature.


i. Prove through documentation that product passes CIWMB Section 01350 for indoor air quality.






m. Material Standard: ASTM C764.

Specifier Note: Retain the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs for use in wood or steel stud walls, floor cavities, cathedral ceilings, or under wood, metal, or concrete decks.

11. JM Spider™ Custom Insulation System


a. Thermal Resistance (R-Value) (ASTM C 518): [Specify R-value.].


c. Critical Radiant Flux (ASTM E970): 0.11 Btu/ft2 × s (0.12 W/cm2) or greater.

d. Smoldering Combustion (ASTM C 1149): Pass





i. Adhesive/Cohesive bond strength (ASTM E 736): pass

j. Substrate Deflection (ASTM E 759): pass

Specifier Note: Indicate appropriate recycled content based upon manufacturer’s product literature.

k. Recycled Content: Certified by Scientific Certification Systems to contain minimum of 20% post-consumer and 5% pre-consumer recycled glass product, on average of manufacturer’s products.

l. Prove through documentation that product passes CIWMB Section 01350 for indoor air quality.


m. Thickness: [Specify thickness.].

n. Flamespread (ASTM E84): 25, maximum.

o. Smoke Developed (ASTM E84): 50, maximum.

p. Material Standards: ASTM C1014 and ASTM C764.

C. Insulating Materials:

1. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and referenced standards.

q. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths.

r. Loose-fill: Provide required thickness and density per manufacturer’s instructions to achieve indicated R-value.

2. Recycled Content: To meet the requirements of LEED Credit MR 4.1 [And MR 4.2], provide insulating materials complying with the following:

Specifier Note: Retain, edit or delete the following subparagraphs to suit project.

s. Credit MR 4.1: Provide insulating materials with post-consumer recycled content constituting a minimum of 5% of cost of materials used for project or post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constituting a minimum of 10% of cost of materials used for project.

t. Credits MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Provide insulating materials with post-consumer recycled content [Constituting a minimum of 10% of cost of materials used for project or post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constituting a minimum of 20% of cost of materials used for project] [Constituting a minimum of 20% post-consumer recycled content plus 5% pre-consumer recycled content, consisting of a minimum of 25%].

Specifier Note: Edit Article below to suit project requirements. If substitutions are permitted, edit text below. Add text to refer to Division 1 Project Requirements (Product Substitutions Procedures) Section.


1.08 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS:

D. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

Specifier Note: Specify subordinate or secondary items that aid and assist primary products specified above or are necessary for preparation or installation of those items. Retain, edit or delete to suit project requirements and specifier practice.

1.09 ACCESSORIES

E. Tape: Self-adhesive vapor retarder tape with flamespread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 50 or less.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Specifier Note: Article below is an addition to the CSI SectionFormat and a supplement to MANU-SPEC. Revise article below to suit project requirements and specifier’s practice.

1.010 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the building insulation manufacturer.

Specifier Note: Specify actions to physically determine that conditions are acceptable to receive primary products of the section.

1.011 EXAMINATION

B. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of building insulation.

2. Do not proceed with installation of building insulation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

Specifier Note: Specify actions required to physically prepare the surface, area or site or to incorporate the primary products of the section.

1.012 PREPARATION

C. Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with manufacturer’s recommended installation requirements.

1.013 INSTALLATION

D. General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

1. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow.

2. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.

3. Water Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

4. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

E. Installation of General Building Insulation:

1. Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.

u. Tape ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

3. Install glass-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

v. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

w. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

x. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs.

4. Wood-Framed Construction: Install mineral-fiber blankets in accordance with ASTM C1320 and as follows:

y. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by friction fit inset or face stapling flanges to sides of framing members.


z. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place.

Specifier Note: Coordinate following paragraph with Part 2 and Division 9 Acoustical Ceiling section. Delete if acoustical insulation is specified in Division 9 section or if acoustical insulation is not required for project.

5. Acoustical Insulation Installation: Install insulation where indicated in sound rated assemblies. Maintain acoustical rating of assembly.

Specifier Note: Coordinate following paragraph with Division 8 Curtain Wall section. Delete if board insulation is specified in Division 8 section or if board insulation is not required for project.

6. Board Insulation Installation: Install insulation where indicated:

aa. Cut and friction fit insulation between vertical or Z-shaped framing.

bb. Alternatively install insulation on impaling pins or with suitable adhesives.

cc. Place pins 3 inches - 5 inches (76 - 127 mm) from edges of insulation.

Specifier Note: Delete the following paragraph and associated subparagraphs if no loose fill insulation on project.

7. Loose-Fill Insulation: Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated. Hold insulation back from air vents, flues and heat-generating appliances.

F. Installation of Vapor Retarders:

1. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

2. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.

3. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.

4. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.

Specifier Note: Specify provisions for protecting work after installation but prior to acceptance by the owner. Coordinate article below with Division 1 Execution Requirements Section.

1.014 PROTECTION

G. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. Repair damage to installed products prior to installation of finish materials.

END OF SECTION

Food Science Building 11/19/10

(Specifier Note: The purpose of this guide specification is to assist the specifier in correctly specifying high-performance weather barrier products and execution. The specifier needs to edit these guide specifications to fit the needs of each specific project. Contact a DuPontTM Tyvek® Product Representative to assist in appropriate product selections. Throughout the guide specification, there are Specifier Notes to assist in the editing of the file. The term Architect is used throughout these guide specifications and may be revised to read “Design Professional”,” Engineer”, “Owner” or other appropriate designation as required for specific projects. References have been made within the text of the specification to MasterFormat 2004 Section numbers and titles, specifier need to coordinate this numbers and titles with sections included for the specific project. Brackets [ ]; “AND/OR”; and “OR” have been used to indicate when a selection is required. This guide is for commercial applications using a non-woven, spun-bonded olefin sheet air and moisture barrier assembly. This high-performance barrier is non-perforated, without visible holes or voids, designed to help stop the passage of bulk water and airflow movement, yet it is vapor permeable. This barrier assembly offers a balance of properties and protection for the building envelope by providing a lightweight barrier that will resist wind, water, abrasion, tearing, puncturing, and UV exposure for up to 9 months. This weather barrier is specifically for above grade, vertical wall surfaces where the wall assembly may consist of any of the following: exterior gypsum sheathing, exterior plywood sheathing, oriented strand board (OSB) sheathing, stud walls with no sheathing, and masonry.)

SECTION 07 25 00

WEATHER BARRIERS DuPont TM Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D

PART 1 - GENERAL


(Specifier Note: “Weather barrier assembly” has been used throughout the document. A weather barrier is a weather-resistant membrane for vertical building envelope protection that will maintain air/moisture resistance while maintaining moisture-vapor permeability. The assembly consists of the following four components.)

A. Weather barrier membrane (DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D)

B. Seam Tape (DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape)

C. Flashing (DuPont™ FlexWrap™, DuPont™ StraightFlash™, DuPont™ StraightFlash™ VF, and DuPont™ Thru-Wall Flashing)

D. Fasteners

1.2 REFERENCES



1. ASTM C 920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C 1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D 882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D 1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E 84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E 96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E 1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building

Walls

B. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists

1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test

C. TAPPI

1. Test Method T-410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Hill Method)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

(Specifier Note: When project is being submitted for USGBC LEEDTM certification, contact DuPont TM Tyvek® Product Representative for assistance in determining how the use of CommercialWrap® D can assist in obtaining points. ADD submittal requirements as required.)

A. Refer to Section [01 33 00 Submittal Procedures] [insert section number and title].

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component.

C. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch.


(Specifier Note: DELETE Design Data, Test Report submittal requirements when propriety specification is used and can be held. MAINTAIN Design Data, Test Report submittal requirement when other products may be submitted for substitution.)



(Specifier Note: Manufacturer field service reports are mandatory for projects where the Manufacturer’s Warranty is specified and recommended for all projects using DuPont TM Tyvek® CommercialWrap®. Requirement may be DELETED if Manufacturer’s Warranty is not specified.)

3. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation.


1. Refer to Section [01 78 00 Closeout Submittals] [insert section number and title].


(Specifier Note: If Manufacturer’s Warranty is not specified, DELETE warranty requirement below.)

2. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion.


A. Qualifications

1. Installer shall have experience with installation of DuPont TM Tyvek® weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions.

2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.

B. Mock-up

(Specifier Note: Mock-ups are mandatory for projects where the Manufacturer’s Warranty is specified and recommended for all projects using DuPont TM Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D. Requirement may be DELETED if Manufacturer’s Warranty is not specified. EDIT mock-up requirements for specific project.)

1. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier assembly including fasteners, flashing, tape and related accessories per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations.

a. Mock-up size: [10 feet by 10 feet] [insert size]. b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window

opening. c. Mock-up may [not] remain as part of the work.

(Specifier Note: Visual inspection by manufacturer’s designated representative is mandatory for projects where the Manufacturer’s Warranty is specified and recommended for all projects using DuPont TM Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D. Requirement may be DELETED if Manufacturer’s Warranty is not specified.)

2. Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier assembly installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty.

C. Pre-installation Meeting

1. Refer to Section [01 31 19 Project Meetings] [insert section number and title].

(Specifier Note: A Pre-installation meeting is mandatory for projects where the Manufacturer’s Warranty is specified and recommended for all projects using DuPont TM Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D. Requirement may be DELETED if Manufacturer’s Warranty is not specified.)


2. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, installer, Owner’s Representative, and weather barrier manufacturer’s designated representative.

3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection.


A. Refer to Section [01 60 00 Product Requirements] [insert section number and title].

B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

1.6 SCHEDULING

(Specifier Note: The preferred order of installation for DuPont TM Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D is prior to the installation of windows and doors.)

A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly.

B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine

months of weather barrier assembly installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section [01 78 36 Warranties] [insert section number and title].

(Specifier Note: Special manufacturer Warranty Program – Manufacturer’s Warranty is project specific and requires approval by the manufacturer. Include warranty only when manufacturer’s limited warranty program is to be utilized. Manufacturer’s Warranty is subject to use of manufacturer’s recommended installation methods, required actions and submittals.

When the Manufacturer’s Warranty is specified, Contractor is required to submit to weather barrier manufacturer the "Project Evaluation Request Form" and supporting documentation prior to assembly installation to obtain the required “Intent to Warranty” documentation. After completion of installation, to obtain warranty, Contractor must submit to weather barrier manufacturer site visit reports and supporting documentation from the manufacturer’s designated representative.)


B. Special Warranty

1. Weather barrier manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Approval by weather barrier manufacturer for warranty is required prior to assembly installation.

3. Warranty Areas: [Describe specific areas of work protected and areas of work excluded as required by project conditions].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Specifier Note: Product Information is proprietary to DuPont™ Tyvek products. If additional products are required for competitive procurement, contact DuPont for assistance.)

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company ; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1.800.44TYVEK (8-9835); http://construction.tyvek.com

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design: High-performance, flash spun-bonded olefin, non-woven, non-perforated, secondary weather barrier is based upon DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D and related assembly components.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Air Penetration: Type 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1677. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 30 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96,

Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: 235 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC

Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: 2.4 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method

T-410. 5. Air Infiltration Resistance: Air infiltration at >750 seconds, when tested in

accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: 33/41 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 822 ,

Method A. 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E 84 . Flame Spread: 15, Smoke Developed: 25.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Seam Tape: 3” DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape as manufactured by DuPont.

http://construction.tyvek.com/


B. Fasteners:

(Specifier Note: Fasteners are dependent upon substrate construction. More than one type of fastener may be required on a single project, REVIEW construction conditions and DELETE fasteners that are unnecessary.)

1. (Specifier Note: Steel Frame Construction) DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws,: 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap fasteners.

AND/OR 2. (Specifier Note: Wood Frame Construction) DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps: [#4

nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners] [1-inch minimum plastic cap staple with a 7/8” minimum staple length].

AND/OR 3. (Specifier Note: Masonry Construction) Masonry tap-con fasteners with DuPont™

Tyvek® Wrap Caps: 2-inch diameter plastic cap fasteners.

C. Sealants

(Specifier Note: Sealants compatible with weather barrier assembly may be specified in this section or in Division 07 sealants section. DELETE paragraphs 2 and 3 when sealants are specified in Division 07.)

1. Refer to Section [07 92 00 Joint Sealants] [insert section number and title]. OR

2. Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions.

(Specifier Note: Sealant products listed below have been tested for compatibility and intermittent contact with DuPont™ weather barrier materials. EDIT for specific project as appropriate when sealants are specified within this section.)

3. Products:

a. Tremco 830 b. Tremco Butyl c. Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer.

D. Adhesives:

1. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.


2. Products:

a. Liquid Nails® LN-109 b. Polyglaze® SM 5700 c. Denso Butyl Liquid d. 3M High Strength 90

(Specifier Note: SIA product meets California VOC requirements.) e. SIA 655 f. Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer.


E. Primers:

1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing.


2. Products:


(Specifier Note: SIA product meets California VOC requirements.) c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 e. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer

F. Flashing

(Specifier Note: Flashing is dependent upon construction conditions. DELETE flashing products that are unnecessary and inappropriate for specific project.)

1. DuPont™ FlexWrap™: Flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations.

AND/OR 2. DuPont™ StraightFlash™: Straight flashing membrane materials for flashing

windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc. AND/OR

3. DuPont™ StraightFlash™ VF: Dual-sided flashing membrane materials for brick mold and non-flanged windows and doors.

AND/OR 4. DuPont™ Thru-Wall Surface Adhered Membrane with Integrated Drip Edge: Thru-

Wall flashing membrane materials for flashing at changes in direction or elevation (shelf angles, foundations, etc.) and at transitions between different assembly materials.

AND/OR 5. Preformed Inside and Outside Corners and End Dams as manufactured by

DuPont: Preformed three-dimensional shapes to complete the flashing system used in conjunction with DuPont™ Thru-Wall Flashing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.


3.2 INSTALLATION - WEATHER BARRIER

A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations

B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors.

C. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap.

D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level

E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings.

G. Overlap weather barrier 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches.

H. Weather Barrier Attachment:

(Specifier Note: Attachment method is dependent upon substrate construction. DELETE methods that are unnecessary and inappropriate for specific project.)

1. (Specifier Note: Steel or Wood Frame Construction) Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommend fasteners, space 6 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally.

AND/OR 2. (Specifier Note: Masonry Construction) Attach weather barrier to masonry.

Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommend fasteners, space 6-18 inches vertically on center and 24 inches maximum horizontally. Weather barrier may be temporarily attached to masonry using recommended adhesive, placed in vertical strips spaced 24 inches on center, when coordinated on the project site.

(Specifier Note: Cladding anchors, supports and fasteners will likely be specified in the section including the cladding, COORDINATE the inclusion of the following paragraph in the appropriate specification section. With weather barrier manufacturer’s approval cladding anchors can be used to fasten the weather barrier.)

I. Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont TM StraightFlashTM to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchors.


3.3 SEAMING

A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams.

B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

(Specifier Note: Opening preparation and flashing installation is dependent upon the construction of the opening and construction of the window. DELETE execution requirements that are not appropriate for specific project. COORDINATE proper design and detailing at windows, doors and other openings or intersections for proper flashing in accordance with window manufacturer guidelines, industry standards and best flashing and waterproofing practices.)

(Specifier Note: MAINTAIN the following opening preparation and flashing articles when used in conjunction with non-flanged windows.)

3.4 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types)

A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening.

B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.5 FLASHING (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types)

(Specifier Note: DuPont recommends the use of the 7-inch wide FlexWrap™ with 2 by 4 framing and 9-inch wide FlexWrap™ with 2 by 6 framing.)

A. Cut [7-inch] [9-inch] wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening.

B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont™ FlexWrap™ edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

C. Fan DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.

D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start StraightFlash™ at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill.

E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing.

F. Install DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches.

G. Coordinate flashing with window installation.


H. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.

I. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont™ StraightFlash™ over the 45-degree seams.

J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.

(Specifier Note: MAINTAIN the following open preparation and flashing articles when used in conjunction with flanged windows and doors.)

3.6 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with flanged windows)

A. Cut weather barrier in a modified “I-cut” pattern.

1. Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom of the header. 2. Cut weather barrier vertically 2/3 of the way down from top center of window

opening. 3. Cut weather barrier diagonally from bottom of center vertical cut to the left and

right corners of the opening. 4. Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten.

B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.7 FLASHING (for use with flanged windows)

(Specifier Note: DuPont recommends the use of the 7-inch wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ with 2 by 4 framing and 9-inch wide FlexWrap™ with 2 by 6 framing.)

A. Cut [7-inch] [9-inch] wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening.

B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont™ FlexWrap™ edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

C. Fan DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.

D. On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill.

E. Install window according to manufacturer’s instructions.


F. Apply 4-inch wide strips of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing 1-inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing.

G. Apply 4-inch wide strip of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ as head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings.

H. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont™ StraightFlash™ over the 45-degree seams.

I. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations

J. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.

3.8 THRU-WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply primer per manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install preformed corners and end dams bedded in sealant in appropriate locations along wall.

C. Starting at a corner, remove release sheet and apply membrane to primed surfaces in lengths of 8 to 10 feet.

D. Extend membrane through wall and leave ¼ inch minimum exposed to form drip edge.

E. Roll flashing into place. Ensure continuous and direct contact with substrate.

F. Lap ends and overlap preformed corners 4 inches minimum. Seal all laps with sealant.

(Specifier Note: DELETE paragraph below if a metal drip edge is not required.)

G. Trim exterior edge of membrane 1-inch and secure metal drip edge per manufacturer’s written instructions.

(Specifier Note: DELETE option below when not required for project.)

H. Terminate membrane on vertical wall. [Terminate into reglet, counterflashing or with termination bar.]

I. Apply sealant bead at each termination.

(Specifier Note: DELETE remaining installation paragraphs below not required for project. Coordinate with accessories named in Part 2 above.)

3.9 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT BASE OF WALL


A. Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6-inches.

B. Mechanically fasten bottom of weather barrier through top of thru-wall flashing.

C. Seal vertical and horizontal seams with tape or sealing membrane.

3.10 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT SHELF ANGLE

A. Seal weather barrier to bottom of shelf angle with sealing membrane.

B. Apply thru-wall flashing to top of shelf angle. Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6-inches.

C. Seal bottom of weather barrier to thru-wall flashing with tape or sealing membrane.

3.11 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT WINDOW HEAD

A. Cut flap in weather barrier at window head.

B. Prime exposed sheathing.

C. Install lintel as required. Verify end dams extend 4 inches minimum beyond opening.

D. Install end dams bedded in sealant.

E. Adhere 2 inches minimum thru-wall flashing to wall sheathing. Overlap lintel with thru-wall flashing and extend ¼ inch minimum beyond outside edge of lintel to form drip edge.

F. Apply sealant along thru-wall flashing edges.

G. Fold weather barrier flap back into place and tape bottom edge to thru-wall flashing.

H. Tape diagonal cuts of weather barrier.

I. Secure weather barrier flap with fasteners.


(Specifier Note: Field observation by a manufacturer designated representative is mandatory for projects where the Manufacture's Warranty is specified and recommended for all projects using DuPont TM Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D. Requirement may be DELETED if Manufacturer’s Warranty is not specified.)

A. Notify manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain [required] periodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation.


3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage.

END OF SECTION

DISCLAIMER: DuPont Guide Specifications have been written as an aid to the professionally qualified Specifier and Design Professional. The use of this Guideline Specification requires the sole professional judgment and expertise of the qualified Specifier and Design Professional to adapt the information to the specific needs for the Building Owner and the Project, to coordinate with their Construction Document Process, and to meet all the applicable building codes, regulations and laws. DUPONT EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THIS PRODUCT FOR THE PROJECT.

Dampproofing Forest Resources Building 07 26 19 - 1 © 2010 DuPont. DuPont™, and all products denoted herein with ™ or ® are trademarks or registered trademarks of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. All rights reserved

(Specifier Note: The purpose of this guide specification is to assist the specifier in correctly speci-fying high-performance weather barrier products and execution. The specifier needs to edit these guide specifications to fit the needs of each specific project. Contact a DuPontTM Tyvek® Product Representative to assist in appropriate product selections. Throughout the guide speci-fication, there are Specifier Notes to assist in the editing of the file. References have been made within the text of the specification to MasterFormat 2004 Section numbers and titles, specifier need to coordinate these numbers and titles with sections included for the specific project. Brackets [ ]; “AND/OR”; and “OR” have been used to indicate when a selection is required. This guide is for applications using a fluid-applied air and moisture barrier system. This high-performance barrier is a one-coat fluid-applied product which provides a flexible seamless air and water barrier, yet it is vapor permeable. This fluid-applied weather barrier system offers a balance of properties and protection for the building envelope by providing a flexible air-barrier that will resist wind, water, mold, mildew, and UV exposure for up to 9 months. This fluid-applied weather barrier is specifically for above grade complex wall surfaces and inter-faces where the wall assembly may consist of any of the following: exterior gypsum sheathing, exterior plywood sheathing, oriented strand board (OSB) sheathing, concrete and masonry.)

SECTION 07 26 19

FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIERS DuPont TM Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB System

PART 1 - GENERAL


(Specifier Note: “Weather barrier system” has been used throughout the document. A weather barrier is a weather resistant membrane for vertical building envelope protection that will maintain air/moisture resistance while maintaining moisture-vapor permeability and is interchangeable with the term fluid-applied air-barrier system. The system consists of the following components.)

A. Fluid-applied, vapor permeable weather barrier membrane. (DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB System.)

B. Joint Tape.

C. Flashing:

1. Vapor Permeable Elastomeric Flashing. (DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound or DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Grade, as manufactured by DuPont™)

2. Flexible Flashing.(DuPont™ FlexWrap™NF) 3. Sheet Flashing. (DuPont™ StraightFlash™) 4. Thru Wall Flashing. (DuPont™ Thru-Wall Flashing, as manufactured by DuPont™)

Fluid-Applied Weather Barriers 07 26 19 - 2 Project Name/Project Number/14-Dec-10 Guide Specification by DuPont™ Tyvek®

D. Joint Compound. (DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, trowel grade)

E. Sealant. (DuPont™ Sealant for Tyvek® Fluid Applied Systems)

F. Primers for flexible flashing and sheet flashing.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ASTM C 1250 – Standard Test Method for Nonvolatile Content of Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes.

2. ASTM D 412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension.

3. ASTM D 2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness. 4. ASTM D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-off Strength of Coatings Using

Portable Adhesion Testers. 5. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 6. ASTM E 96 - Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E 283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage

through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

8. ASTM E 331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylight, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences.

9. ASTM E 779 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization.

10. ASTM E 783 – Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors.

11. ASTM E 1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

12. ASTM E 1186 – Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems.

13. ASTM E 1677 - Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls.

14. ASTM E 2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 15. ASTM E 2357 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier

Assemblies. 16. ASTM G155 – Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for

Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials.

B. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists

1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test.

C. TAPPI

1. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Hill Method).


1.3 SUBMITTALS

(Specifier Note: When project is being submitted for USGBC LEED™ certification, contact DuPont TM Tyvek® Product Representative for assistance in determining how the use of weather barriers can assist in obtaining credits. ADD submittal requirements as required.)

A. Refer to Section [01 33 00 Submittal Procedures] [insert section number and title].

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current technical literature for each component.

C. Quality Assurance Submittals:



(Specifier Note: Weather barrier field service reports are recommended for all projects and may be required by manufacturers on projects where warranties are specified. Verify requirements with manufacturer. DELETE requirement if not project specific.)

3. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier system installation.

(Specifier Note: When DuPont™ Weatherization Products 10 Year Limited Product Warranty is not specified, DELETE closeout warranty submittal requirement.)

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Refer to Section [01 78 00 Closeout Submittals] [insert section number and title]. 2. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with

authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion.


A. Qualifications:

1. Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial fluid-applied weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions.

2. Installer shall be trained and certified for installation by manufacturer.

B. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

C. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.

D. Mock-up:


(Specifier Note: Mock-ups are recommended for all projects and may be required by manufacturers on projects where special warranties are specified. Verify requirements with manufacturer. DELETE or EDIT mock-up requirements for specific project.)

1. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier system including membrane, flashing, joint and detailing compound and related weather barrier accessories according to weather barrier manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations.

a. Mock-up size: [10 feet by 10 feet] [insert size]. b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window

opening. c. Mock-up may [not] remain as part of the work.

(Specifier Note: Visual inspection by manufacturer’s designated representative is recommended for all projects and may be required by WB manufacturer on projects where a warranty is specified. Verify requirements with manufacturer prior to completion of specification. DELETE or EDIT inspection requirements for specific project.)

2. Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier system installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty.

E. Pre-installation Meeting

1. Refer to Section [01 31 19 Project Meetings] [insert section number and title].

(Specifier Note: A pre-installation meeting is recommended for all projects where warranties are specified. Verify requirements with manufacturer prior to completion of specification. DELETE or EDIT pre-installation requirements for specific project.)

2. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, certified installer, Owner’s Representative, and weather barrier manufacturer’s designated field representative.

3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier system materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection.


A. Refer to Section [01 60 00 Product Requirements] [insert section number and title].

B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by manufacturer.


1.6 SCHEDULING

(Specifier Note: The preferred order of installation for weather barrier is prior to the installation of windows and doors.)

A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier system with in-stallation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier system.

B. Schedule installation of exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier system

installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section [01 78 36 Warranties] [insert section number and title].

(Specifier Note: Manufacturer warranty program - The DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB offers a 10 Year Limited Product Warranty Program that is project specific and requires pre-installation meetings and jobsite observations by the manufacturer. Include warranty language only when manufacturer’s limited product warranty program is to be used. To receive coverage under the DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB Product 10 Year Limited Product Warranty Program, it is required that the following conditions are met; the use of manufacturer’s recommended installation methods, a DuPont™ Certified Installer, required mock-up and pre-construction meetings and observation visits during installation along with required submittal and post installation documentation process. Please refer to: www.weatherization.TYVEK.com for complete details on the DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB 10 Year Limited product warranty program.)

B. Limited Warranty

1. Manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten (10) years from date of Purchase.

2. Pre-installation meeting and jobsite observations by weather barrier manufacturer for warranty are required.

3. Warranty Areas: [Describe specific areas of work protected and areas of work excluded as required by project conditions].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Specifier Note: Product information listed is proprietary to DuPont Building Innovations – DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB products. If additional products are required for competitive procurement, contact DuPont Building Innovations for assistance.)

2.1 WEATHER BARRIER

A. Manufacturer: DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 728, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1.800.44TYVEK (8-9835); http://weatherization.tyvek.com

http://www.weatherization.tyvek.com/

http://weatherization.tyvek.com/


1. Description: A single-component, low VOC, 25 mil thick synthetic polymer fluid-applied product with superior elasticity and flexibility providing resistance to air flow, bulk water and wind driven rain yet allows moisture vapor to escape.

2. Basis of Design: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB System; including DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB, DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Grade and DuPont™ Sealant for Tyvek® Fluid Applied Systems.

(Specifier Note: Additional Self-Adhered Flashing products from DuPon™t Flashing Systems may be added as needed for masonry or stud-frame sill-pan or other uses as required.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Air Penetration: 0.0002 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. Type I per ASTM E 1677 and ≤ 0.01 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2357.

2. Water Vapor Transmission: 25 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B at 25 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness).

3. Water Penetration Resistance: Greater than 1000 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. No leakage at 15 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.

4. Air Resistance: Air infiltration greater than 10,000 seconds per 100cc, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.

5. Tensile Strength: Minimum 169 lbs/in2, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412.

6. Estimated Elongation: 420% in accordance with ASTM D 412. 7. Hardness: Passes at a Shore A hardness of 71, when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 2240. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E 84. Flame Spread: 25, Smoke Developed: 25. 9. Accelerated Weathering: 9 month exposure of membrane to ultraviolet light (UV)

in accordance with ASTM G 155. 10. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Less than 2% when measured in accordance

with ASTM C 1250. 11. Adhesion Strength (Concrete): Greater than 33 psi when measured in

accordance with ASTM D 4541.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Tape: Self-adhered fiberglass mesh tape as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

B. Flashing:

(Specifier Note: Flashing is dependent upon construction conditions. DELETE products that are unnecessary and inappropriate for specific project. Vapor permeable elastomeric flashing is used around openings in walls and joints between different building materials. )

1. Vapor permeable elastomeric flashing:

(Specifier Note: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound is the preferred product for use around openings in commercial construction.)


a. Product: [DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound] or [DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Grade, as manufactured by DuPont™].

AND/OR 2. Flexible flashing with butyl adhesive layer.

(Specifier Note: DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF and DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound products are acceptable for use around openings in commercial construction.)

a. Product: DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF.

(Specifier Note: Sheet Flashing is used at transitions between wall material, building corners, and over gaps in sheathing up to 1 inch wide.)

3. Sheet flashing with butyl adhesive layer.

a. Product: DuPont™ StraightFlash™.

(Specifier Note: Coordinate thru-wall flashing material with Division 04 Section on masonry. Verify that Division 04 Section does not contain thru wall flashing.)

4. Thru-wall flashing, with butyl adhesive layer.

a. Product: DuPont™ Thru-Wall Flashing.

C. Joint Compound: Fluid-applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric flashing material; trowel applied.

1. Product: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound.

D. Sealant: Elastomeric; non-vapor permeable sealant; compatible with weather barrier.

1. Product: DuPont™ Sealant for Tyvek® Fluid Applied Systems.

E. Primers for flexible flashing and sheet flashing:

1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing.


2. Products:


(Specifier Note: SIA product meets California VOC requirements.) c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 e. ITW TACC Sta’ Put SPH


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete surface preparation, priming, flashing and detailing of openings, cracks, and material transitions prior to beginning installation of fluid-applied weather barrier system.

B. Surfaces shall be clean and free of frost, oil, grease, mold and efflorescence prior to application of fluid-applied weather barrier system.

3.3 INSTALLATION - DETAILING

(Specifier Note: Either option for preparation of corners is acceptable to manufacturer, select one and delete the other.)

A. Corners: [Apply joint compound, 25 mil thick, to outside and inside corners. Joint compound shall extend 2 inches from corner for full height of corner] or [Apply primer to outside and inside corners, extend 2 inches on each side of corner. Center sheet flashing over corner and press firmly in place per manufacturer’s recommendations]. Apply ½ inch fillet bead of joint compound applied to full-height of inside corners.

B. Joint treatment:

(Specifier Note: Verify that sheathing on project is an acceptable material to apply weather barrier. Acceptable substrates are gypsum, OSB or plywood sheathing, masonry or concrete.)

1. Sheathing:

a. Joints shall be prepared per manufacturer’s approved joint treatment details.

b. Apply joint tape as recommended by fluid-applied weather barrier manufacturer.

1) No joint treatment required for joints up to 1/16 inch. 2) Joints 1/16 to 1/4 inch: Joint compound applied to form a 1 inch

width on each side of sheathing joint; smooth joint compound across sheathing joint. Thickness shall be 15 to 25 mils.

3) Joints 1/16 to 1/2 inch: Apply joint tape to bridge both sides of joint equally. Apply joint compound and trowel smooth embedding joint compound uniformly into joint tape to form a 1 inch width on each side of sheathing joint at a consistent thickness of 15 to 25 mils.

4) Joints 1/2 to 1 inch: Apply sheet flashing primer above and below sheathing joint. Center sheet flashing over sheathing joint and press firmly in place per manufacturer’s recommendations.


2. Non-movement joints in masonry and transitions to columns and beams:

a. Joints 1/4 inch wide or less: Apply joint compound a minimum of 2 inches wide by 60 mils thick to each side of joint or crack.

(Specifier Note: Either option for preparation of joints is acceptable to manufacturer, select one and delete the other.)

b. Joints 1/4 to 1/2 inch: [Apply joint tape to joint, then apply joint compound to joint 2 inches wide by 60 mils thick.] or [Apply primer 2 inches on each side of joint. Center sheet flashing over joint and press firmly in place per manufacturer’s recommendations.]

C. Apply joint compound to cladding anchors prior to installation of weather barrier membrane per manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Apply joint compound around penetrations in exterior walls forming a fillet bead minimum ½ inch onto each surface.

(Specifier Note: Opening preparation and flashing installation is dependent upon the construction of the opening and construction of the window. DELETE execution requirements that are not appropriate for specific project. COORDINATE proper design and detailing at windows, doors and other openings or intersections in accordance with window manufacturer guidelines, industry standards and best flashing and waterproofing practices.)

(Specifier Note: Vapor permeable elastomeric flashing is the preferred application around openings in walls)

E. Installation – Vapor permeable elastomeric flashing at openings:

1. At jambs and head of rough opening: Apply 25 mil thickness of flashing to full depth of opening and 2 inches outside face of opening.

2. At sills: Apply primer to substrates as recommended by manufacturer. Cut sheet flashing to fit directly between jambs of opening. Install sheet flashing to full width of sill opening and down onto outside face of opening a minimum of 6 inches. Cover sheet flashing with 25 mil thickness of vapor permeable elastomeric flashing per fluid-applied weather barrier manufacturer’s instructions.

OR

F. Installation – Flexible flashing at openings:

1. Prime substrates as recommended by self-adhered sheet membrane flashing manufacturer. Cut sheet membrane flashing a minimum of 12 inches longer than length of sill rough opening.

2. Cover horizontal sill by aligning sheet membrane edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure sheet membrane tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

3. Fan sheet membrane at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. 4. Apply 9-inch wide strips of sheet membrane at jambs. Align sheet membrane

with interior edge of jamb framing. Start sheet membrane at head of opening and lap sheet membrane at sill.


5. Install sheet membrane at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches.

6. Coordinate flashing with fluid-applied weather barrier and window installation.

G. Allow Flashing, Joint Compound and Sealant to cure for minimum 24 hours before coating with Fluid-applied Weather Barrier.

3.4 INSTALLATION - FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER

A. Install fluid-applied weather barrier prior to installation of windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Mask and protect any adjacent finished surfaces from fluid-applied weather barrier material.

C. Install fluid-applied weather barrier over exterior face of required exterior wall substrates in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommendations and instructions.

(Specifier Note: Pressure-rolling is the preferred method of application of weather barrier. When using spray applied application, weather barrier must be backrolled.)

D. Install fluid-applied weather barrier by [pressure-rolling method] [or] [spray and backrolling method] to achieve 25 mils providing a consistent and uniform thickness.

E. Repair any voids, holidays, or non-uniform installations or damage by other trades to proper mil thickness prior to installation of final cladding assemblies.


(Specifier Note: Field observation by a manufacturer designated representative is recommended for all projects and may be required by manufacturers on projects where warranties are specified. Verify requirements with manufacturer. DELETE or EDIT field quality control requirements for specific project.)

A. Notify weather barrier manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain [required] periodic observations of weather barrier system installation.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections as required in Contract Documents.

C. Inspections: Weather barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with performance requirements.

(Specifier Note: EDIT as required for the specific project)

D. Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests:

1. Quantitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage according to ASTM E 783.

2. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage according to ASTM E 779.


3. Qualitative Water-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for water leakage according to ASTM E 1105.

4. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186.

E. Weather barriers assemblies will be considered defective upon failure of inspections and specific project testing required.

1. Apply additional fluid-applied weather barrier material, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness, voids, skips, pinholes or other defects as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

2. Remove and replace deficient weather barrier system components for retesting as specified above.

F. Repair damage to weather barriers caused by destructive testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect weather barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved per weather barrier manufacturers recommendation.

B. Protect installed weather barrier system from damage during construction prior to cladding installation.

1. If damaged or exposed to UV beyond nine (9) months, clean and prepare surfaces and install additional, full-thickness, fluid-applied weather barrier application in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's instructions.

C. Remove masking materials and adjacent protection after weather barrier installation.

END OF SECTION

DISCLAIMER: DuPont Building Innovations Guide Specifications have been written as an aid to the professionally qualified Specifier and Design Professional. The use of this Guideline Specification requires the sole professional judgment and expertise of the qualified Specifier and Design Professional to adapt the information to the specific needs for the Building Owner and the Project, to coordinate with their Construction Document Process, and to meet all the applicable building codes, regulations and laws. DUPONT EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THIS PRODUCT FOR THE PROJECT.

Visitor’s Center 11/19/10 07 27 00 Air Barrier

PROSOCO, Inc. 3741 Greenway Circle

Lawrence, KS 66046 Phone: (800) 255-4255 Phone: (785) 865-4200

Fax: (785) 830-9797 E-mail: [email protected]

www.prosoco.com

This MANU-SPEC™ utilizes the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) Manual of Practice, including MasterFormat™,SectionFormat™ and PageFormat™. A MANU-SPEC is a manufacturer-specific proprietary product specification using the proprietary method of specifying applicable to project specifications and master guide specifications. Optional text is indicated by brackets [ ]; delete optional text in final copy of specification. Specifier Notes typically precede specification text; delete notes in final copy of specification. Trade/brand names with appropriate symbols typically are used in Specifier Notes; symbols are not used in specification text. Metric conversion, where used, is soft metric conversion. This MANU-SPEC specifies protective treatments for above-grade vertical and horizontal masonry, concrete, tile and natural stone surfaces. These penetrating water repellents, stain repellents, graffiti repellents and breathable color coatings are manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc. Revise MANU-SPEC section number and title below to suit project requirements, specification practices and section content. Refer to CSI MasterFormat for other section numbers and titles.

SECTION 07190

WATER REPELLENTS


A. Section Includes: Penetrating water repellents, stain repellents, graffiti repellents and breathable color coatings for above-grade, vertical and horizontal masonry, concrete, tile and natural stone surfaces.

Specifier Note: Revise paragraph below to suit project requirements. Add section numbers and titles per CSI MasterFormat and specifier’s practice.

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:

1. Concrete: Division 3 Concrete Sections.

2. Masonry: Division 4 Masonry Sections.

3. Stucco: Division 9 Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Sections.

4. Tile: Division 9 Tile Sections.

5. Paints & Coatings: Division 9 Paints & Coatings Section; Division 9 Graffiti Resistant Coatings Section.

Specifier Note: Article below may be omitted when specifying manufacturer’s proprietary products and recommended installation. Retain References Article when specifying products and installation by an industry reference standard. If retained, list standard(s) referenced in this section. Indicate issuing authority name, acronym, standard designation and title. Establish policy for indicating edition date of standard referenced. Conditions of the Contract or Division 1 References Section may establish the edition date of standards. This article does not require compliance with standard. It is a listing of all references used in this section.

1.02 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to

the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C67 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.

2. ASTM C97 Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone.

3. ASTM C140 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units.

4. ASTM C642 Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete.

5. ASTM D3960 Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings.


6. ASTM D5095 Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile Content in Silanes, Siloxanes and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatments.


8. ASTM G53 Practice for Operating Light- and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials (Withdrawn 2000).

C. Réunion Internationale des Laboratoires d'Essais et de recherche sur les Matériaux et les Constructions (RILEM):

1. RILEM Test Method No. II.4.

Specifier Note: Article below should be restricted to statements describing design or performance requirements and functional (not dimensional) tolerances of a complete system. Limit descriptions to composite and operational properties to extent necessary to link multiple components of a system and to interface with other systems.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide protective treatment that is designed to provide the specified level of protection when

applied to the designated substrate(s). Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Water Repellent Performance: Provide water repellent that achieves the following performance standards when applied to the designated substrate(s).

1. Absorption: [Specify minimum percentage and time period.].

a. Brick (ASTM C67): [Specify minimum percentage and time period.].

b. Stone (ASTM C97): [Specify minimum percentage and time period.].

c. Concrete Unit Masonry (ASTM C140): [Specify minimum percentage and time period.].

d. Hardened Concrete (ASTM C642): [Specify minimum percentage and time period.].

2. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E96): [Specify minimum percentage and time period.].

3. Water Absorption (RILEM Test Method No. II.4): [Specify minimum absorption in ml or mph and time period.].

4. Durability (ASTM G53): [Specify minimum percentage and time period.].

Specifier Note: Article below includes submittal of relevant data to be furnished by Contractor before, during or after construction. Coordinate this article with Architect’s and Contractor’s duties and responsibilities in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures

Section.

B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA™ product sheet, for specified products.

C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:


2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements.

a. Submit certificate by water repellent manufacturer certifying compliance with regulations controlling VOC content.

3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with Part 3 Field Quality Requirements Article herein. Retain or delete as applicable.

4. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Manufacturer’s field reports specified herein.

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.


Specifier Note: Article below should include prerequisites, standards, limitations and criteria that establish an overall level of quality for products and workmanship for this section. Coordinate below article with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section.



A. Qualifications:

1. Installer Qualifications: Installer should be experienced in performing work of this section and should have specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below to suit project requirements; otherwise, delete paragraph below.

a. Certificate: When requested, submit certificate indicating qualification(s).

2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer should be capable of providing field service representation during construction and should be capable of approving acceptable installer application method(s).

Specifier Note: Paragraph below should list obligations for compliance with specific code requirements particular to this section. General statements to comply with a particular code are typically addressed in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Regulatory Requirements Section. Repetitive statements should be avoided.

B. Regulatory Requirements: [Specify applicable VOC requirements of regulatory agencies.].

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below for erected assemblies (either onsite or offsite) required for review of construction, coordination of work of several sections, testing or observation of operation. Mock-ups, when accepted or approved, establish standards by which work will be judged. Coordinate below with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section.

C. Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner’s and Architect’s acceptance of finish color, texture, pattern and workmanship standard(s). Comply with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section.

Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below when specifying mock-up size.

1. Mock-Up Size: [Specify mock-up size.].

2. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when it is no longer required.

3. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings) Section.

D. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings) Section.

E. Preinstallation Testing: Before full-scale application, review manufacturer’s product data sheets to determine the suitability of each product for the specific surfaces. Apply each protective treatment to test panels to determine number of applications, coverage rates, compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures and desired results.

F. Apply protective treatments to test panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Allow 48 hours or until test panels are thoroughly dry before evaluating final appearance and results. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels are inspected and approved by the architect.

G. Test Panel Requirements:

1. Size: Minimum 4 feet × 4 feet (1.2 × 1.2 m) each.

2. Locations: As determined by the Architect.

3. Number: As required to completely test each protective treatment with each type of substrate to be protected.

Specifier Note: Article below should include special and unique requirements. Coordinate article below with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.


Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below to suit project requirements. Consult with water repellent manufacturer. Successful applications influenced by project conditions such as ambient temperature, curing of concrete and mortar, forecasted rain and temperature conditions, substrate surface condition and wind conditions.


A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: Substrate and ambient air temperature shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

1. Do not apply at surface and air temperatures below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) or above 95 degrees F (35 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Do not apply when surface and air temperatures are not expected to remain above 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) for a minimum of 8 hours after application, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s written instructions.

3. Do not apply under windy conditions such that protective treatment may be blown to surfaces not intended.

4. Do not apply to frozen substrate. Allow adequate time for substrate to thaw, if freezing conditions exist, before application.

5. Do not apply earlier than 24 hours after rain or if rain is predicted for a period of 6 hours after application, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s written instructions.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Conditions of the Contract and with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Warranty) Section.

1.08 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

1. Warranty Period: [Specify term.] years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Specifier Note: Retain article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance characteristics, material standards and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as “or equal” or “or approved equal” or similar phrases may cause ambiguity in the specifications. Such phrases require verification (procedural, legal and regulatory) and assignment of responsibility for determining “or equal” products.

2.01 WATER REPELLENTS A. Manufacturer: PROSOCO, Inc.

Specifier Note: Paragraph below is an addition to CSI SectionFormat and a supplement to MANU-SPEC. Retain or delete paragraph below per project requirements and specifier’s practice.

1. Contact: 3741 Greenway Circle, Lawrence, KS 66046; Telephone: (800) 255-4255, (785) 865-4200; Fax: (785) 830-9797; E-mail: [email protected]; Web site: www.prosoco.com.

B. Proprietary Product(s)/System(s): PROSOCO Water Repellents, including the following:

1. Sure Klean Weather Seal Protective Water Repellents for Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces.

2. Consolideck Protective Water Repellents for Horizontal Surfaces.

3. Stand Off Stain Repellents.

4. Defacer Eraser Graffiti Repellents.

5. BMC Breathable Masonry Color Coats.

Specifier Note: Edit article below to suit project requirements. If substitutions are permitted, edit text below. Add text to refer to Division 1 Project Requirements (Product Substitutions Procedures) Section.

2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

2.03 MATERIALS

Specifier Note: Sure Klean Weather Seal products provide colorless, long-lasting protection and repel surface water without trapping water vapor.

A. Sure Klean Weather Seal Water Repellents:

Specifier Note: Siloxanes are recommended for brick, concrete, sandstone, slate and granite surfaces. Weather Seal Siloxane/Siloxane WB Concentrate/Siloxane PD/Weather Seal GP are deeply penetrating, siloxane/silane water repellents that protect concrete and masonry from water penetration and related staining/deterioration.


1. Weather Seal Siloxane WB/Siloxane PD: [Specify for penetrating water repellent for vertical concrete, brick and clay tile surfaces.].

a. Weather Seal Siloxane WB Concentrate Characteristics: Microemulsion concentrate of silanes and oligomeric alkyl alkoxysiloxanes active substance; 100% concentrate solids; clear amber liquid form; 1.000 specific gravity; 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) (in concentrate) flash point; 318 g/L (ASTM D5095) VOC.

b. Weather Seal Siloxane PD Characteristics: Emulsion of silanes and oligomeric alkyl alkoxysiloxanes active substance; 7.0% solids; white milky liquid form; 1.000 specific gravity; greater than 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; less than 200 g/L (ASTM D3960) VOC.

2. Weather Seal GP: [Specify for general purpose, silane/siloxane water repellent for brick, concrete, stucco and most masonry surfaces.].

a. Characteristics: Emulsion of silanes and oligomeric alkyl alkoxysiloxanes; 4.0% solids; white milky liquid; 0.99 specific gravity; greater than 212 degrees F (100 degrees C) flash point; 211 g/L VOC.

Specifier Note: Weather Seal SL100 (100% active monomericsilanes) penetrates deeply to provide colorless protection for dense, color sensitive surfaces, concrete, colored concrete and cast stone.

3. Weather Seal SL100: [Specify for colorless silane protection of vertical or horizontal concrete, colored concrete, cast stone or color sensitive surfaces.].

a. Characteristics: Clear to slight yellow liquid; modified alkyl alkoxysilane active substance; greater than 95% active content; 0.921 specific gravity; 108 degrees F (42 degrees C) flash point; 350 g/L VOC.

Specifier Note: Below Custom Masonry Sealer weatherproofs porous custom masonry, concrete block, cast stone and precast concrete.

4. Custom Masonry Sealer: [Specify for water repellent protection of porous custom masonry, concrete block, cast stone and precast concrete.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; silicone elastomer active substance; 0.797 specific gravity; 100 degrees F (38 degrees C); flash point; 6.63 lb/gal (0.79 kg/L).

Specifier Note: Below Blok-Guard and Graffiti Control is a silicone elastomer providing long-lasting weatherproofing and graffiti resistance for highly porous hard-to-seal masonry.

5. Blok-Guard and Graffiti Control: [Specify for water repellent protection for hard-to-seal, porous concrete block and masonry.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; silicone elastomer active substance; 0.797 specific gravity; 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) flash point; 6.63 lb/gal (0.79 kg/L).

Specifier Note: Below Weather Seal H40 is a consolidating and protective treatment, which increases mechanical strength of deteriorated masonry.

6. Weather Seal H40: [Specify for deep-penetrating protection and strengthening of deteriorating masonry.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; 40% active material content; 0.851 specific gravity; 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) flash point; 7.10 lb/gal (0.85 kg/L).

Specifier Note: Below Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment/Natural Stone Treatment WB is a general-purpose water repellent for limestone marble and traditional masonry surfaces.

7. Natural Stone Treatment: [Specify for siloxane water repellent for limestone, marble and most other masonry.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid form; 15% active substance content; 0.811 specific gravity; 99 degrees F (37 degrees C) flash point; 6.75 lb/gal (0.81 kg/L).

Specifier Note: Natural Stone Treatment WB below is water based siloxane water repellent for limestone, marble and most other masonry surfaces.

8. Natural Stone Treatment WB: [Specify siloxane water repellent protection for limestone, marble and most other masonry.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; 12% active substance content; 4.5% solids; 13 pH; 1.03 specific gravity; no flash point; 30 degrees F (-1 degree C) freeze point; 8.52 lb/gal (1.02 kg/L) 129 g/L VOC.

Specifier Note: Below Consolideck Saltguard WB provides protection of steel reinforced concrete from damage by de-icing salts and frozen moisture.

B. Consolideck Saltguard WB: [Specify for water repellent protection of horizontal steel reinforced concrete.].


1. Characteristics: White, milky liquid; emulsion of silanes and oligomeric alkyl alkoxysiloxanes active substance; 10% active material content; 0.996 specific gravity; greater than 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; 8.29 lb/gal (0.99 kg/L); less than 200 g/L (ASTM D3960) VOC.

C. Stand Off Stain Repellents:

Specifier Note: The 4 Stand Off Stain Repellents below resist common oil, food and water related staining. Protected surfaces last longer and are easier to maintain.

1. Stand Off SLX 100 Water and Oil Repellent: [Specify for VOC compliant water and oil repellent for colorless protection of dense colored concrete, cast stone and natural stone surfaces.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; modified alkyl alkoxysilane active substance, greater than 90% active content, 0.94 specific gravity; 57 degrees F (14 degrees C) flash point; 7.84 lb/gal (0.94 kg/L), less than 380 g/L VOC.

2. Impregnator: [Specify for water and oil protection of grout, tile, concrete and most natural stone when chloride screening is desired.].

a. Characteristics: Modified alkyl alkoxysilane; clear liquid; 32% active content; 0.810 specific gravity; 116 degrees F (47 degrees C) flash point; 6.73 lb/gal (0.81 kg/L).

3. Stand Off Limestone & Marble Protector: [Specify for protection of natural stone, tile and grout surfaces against oil, water and common food staining.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; modified siloxane active substance content, 9.0% active content, 0.800 specific gravity; 77 degrees F (25 degrees C) flash point; 6.62 lb/gal (0.79 kg/L).

4. Stand Off STMP Stone Tile and Masonry Protector: [Specify for water based, VOC compliant protection against oil, water and common food staining.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; organic fluoro chemical active content, 1.005 specific gravity; nonflammable; less than 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) freeze point; 8.42 lb/gal (1.01 kg/L); less than 120 g/L VOC; 6 - 7 pH.

D. Defacer Eraser Graffiti Repellents:

Specifier Note: Below Defacer Eraser Graffiti Repellents prevent penetration of common graffiti into porous masonry surfaces.

1. Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control: [Specify for a coating that forms a durable, breathable, invisible barrier that prevents penetration of most types of graffiti into porous masonry or concrete. Remove graffiti attacks with Defacer Eraser Graffiti Wipe.].

a. Characteristics: Clear liquid; silicone elastomer active substance; 9% active substance content; 0.775 specific gravity; 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) flash point; 6.63 lb/gal (0.79 kg/L).

2. Defacer Eraser SC-1 Sacrificial Coating: [Specify as coating that forms a graffiti resistant sacrificial coating on masonry, concrete, metal, glass and most painted surfaces. Remove graffiti attacks with hot water or Defacer Eraser Graffiti Wipe, and reapply SC-1 Coating.].

a. Characteristics: White, semi-opaque liquid; micro crystalline wax active substance; 7% active substance content; 0.976 specific gravity; greater than 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; 8.12 lb/gal (0.97 kg/L); 0 g/L VOC.

Specifier Note: Defacer Eraser Graffiti Barrier S below is a clear, water-based “sacrificial” treatment for stopping penetration of paint, crayon, ink and other graffiti media from penetrating concrete, masonry and other surfaces.

3. Defacer Eraser Graffiti Barrier S: [Specify as coating that forms a graffiti resistant sacrificial coating on masonry, concrete, metal, glass and most painted surfaces. Remove graffiti attacks with Defacer Eraser Graffiti Release.].

a. Characteristics: Milky white liquid, mild odor; 18% total solids; 1.03 specific gravity; 7.3 pH; 8.55 lb/gal (1.02 kg/L); greater than 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; 30 degrees F (-1 degree C) freeze point; 105 g/L VOC.

E. BMC Breathable Masonry Color Coats:

Specifier Note: Below Color Coat BMC Breathable Masonry Coating II prevents water penetration with attractive architectural finishes that will not entrap moisture and contribute to surface deterioration.

1. BMC II: [Specify for highly breathable color coat for masonry, concrete and natural stone.].

a. BMC II (White Characteristics): Silicone emulsion; 55.67% solids by weight; 1.41 specific gravity; greater than 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; 9.0 - 10.0 pH; 11.76 lb/gal (1.41 kg/L); 203 g/L VOC.

b. BMC II (Tint Characteristics): Silicone emulsion; 54.58% solids by weight; 1.38 specific gravity; greater than 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; 9.0 - 10.0 pH; 11.55 lb/gal (1.38 kg/L); 204 g/L VOC.

c. BMC II (Deep Characteristics): Silicone emulsion; 47.76% solids by weight; 1.28 specific gravity; greater than 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; 9.0 - 10.0 pH; 10.66 lb/gal (1.28 kg/L); 219 g/L VOC.

d. BMC II (Accent Characteristics): Silicone emulsion; 43.08% solids by weight; 1.22 specific gravity; greater than


200 degrees F (93 degrees C) flash point; 9.0 - 10.0 pH; 10.15 lb/gal (1.22 kg/L); 233 g/L VOC.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS A. Related Materials: Refer to other sections listed in Related Sections paragraph herein for related materials.

2.05 MIXES A. Mixing: Mix proprietary materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including product data and product

technical bulletins.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY A. Source Quality: Obtain water repellent materials and surface preparation cleaners from a single manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION Specifier Note: Article below is an addition to the CSI SectionFormat and a supplement to MANU-SPEC. Revise article below to suit project requirements and specifier’s practice.

3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data and container label instructions for installation.

3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are

acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 PREPARATION A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean all dirt, dust, oil, grease and other contaminants from surfaces that interfere with penetration or performance of protective treatment(s). Use cleaners approved by the water repellent manufacturer where necessary. Rinse thoroughly to remove cleaner residues and soiling. Allow surfaces to dry completely. Repair, patch and fill cracks, voids, defects and damaged areas in surfaces as approved by Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely. Apply specified sealants and caulking, and allow to cure completely.

C. Test Application: [Specify requirements of test application for water repellents to suit project requirements and substrate conditions.].

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with manufacturer’s recommended installation details and requirements.

3.04 INSTALLATION

Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below to suit project requirements and substrate conditions. Consult manufacturer on specific products specified.

A. Protective Treatment Installation:

1. Apply protective treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, environmental regulations and application procedures determined from test panels approved by the Architect.

2. Apply to clean, dry, cured and properly prepared surfaces approved by the Architect.

3. Consult manufacturer’s written instructions for information on application equipment to be used and precautions to be taken with specified products.

4. Dilute only as specified with clean, potable water in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.

5. Do not apply to below-grade surfaces.

6. Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in substrate.

7. Avoid overspray, wind drift and splash of protective treatments.

B. Inspection: Inspect protective treatment work with the Contractor, Architect, applicator and PROSOCO representative, and compare with test panels approved by the Architect. Determine if the substrates are suitably protected.

C. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide the services of a manufacturer’s authorized field representative to verify specified products are in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and the test panel results have been approved by the Architect.

D. Finish Colors: [Specify installation finishes coordinated with finishes specified in Part 2 Products.].

E. Related Products Installation: Refer to other sections listed in Related Sections paragraph herein for related products installation.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Division 1 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Sections.


3.05 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Site Tests [Installation and post-installation testing]: [Specify applicable test requirements to be performed during and/or

after product installation.].

B. Inspection: [Specify applicable product inspection requirements to be performed after product installation.].

Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below. Establish number and duration of periodic site visits with Owner and manufacturer. Specify below. Consult manufacturer for services required. Coordinate paragraph below with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section and Part 1 Quality Assurance Submittals herein. Delete if manufacturer’s field service is not required.

C. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit(s) for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Site Visits: [Specify number and duration of periodic site visits.].

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Division 1 Execution Requirements (Cleaning) Section.

3.06 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace products that have been

installed and are damaged. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Division 1 Execution Requirements Section.

3.07 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

Student Health Center 11-19-10 073300 Vegetated Roofing Drainage Composites

Section 07330 Vegetated Roofing Drainage Composites Display hidden notes to specifier by using “Tools”/”Options”/“View”/”Hidden Text”. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Drainage Composites for Vegetated Roof Systems.

B. Drainage and Water Holding Composite for Vegetated Roof Systems.

C. Root Reinforcing Composite Mat for Pre-Vegetated Roof System Mats.

D. Drainage Composites for Plaza Deck Systems.

E. Drainage Composites for Planter Drainage. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02900 - Vegetation and Soil Medium.

B. Section 02910 - Pre-Vegetated Plant Mats.

C. Section 02630 - Storm Drainage: Connection to drainage system.

D. Section 07130 - Membrane Waterproofing: Membrane waterproofing application.

E. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: Membrane roofing application.

F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 737 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics.

B. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Paper.

C. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

D. ASTM D 3776 – Standard Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric.

E. ASTM D 3786 - Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Textile

Fabrics, Diaphragm Bursting Strength Method.

F. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity.


G. ASTM D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles.

H. ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of

Geotextiles.

I. ASTM D 4716 - Standard Test Method for Determining the (In-plane) Flow Rate per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head.

J. ASTM D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a

Geotextile.

K. ASTM D 4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes and Related Products.

L. ASTM D 5199 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Nominal Thickness of

Geosynthetics.

M. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


A. Drainage Composites for Vegetated Roof System: Drainage composites for drainage and roof reinforcement in multilayer green roof configurations. 1. Enkadrain Subsurface Drainage Composite is a drainage product used over

the roof membrane to provide maximum strength and continuous flow under any load while protecting the waterproofing membrane.

2. EnkaRetain & Drain Drainage and Water Holding Composite is a drainage product used over the roof membrane that provides continuous flow of excess water while retaining water for use by the vegetation and the reduction of stormwater runoff.

3. Enkamat permanently anchors plant roots on sloped roofs or in high wind conditions. Its tough root reinforcing system anchors vegetation and provides a holding cavity for the growing medium.

4. Enkaroof VM is an Enkamat core with a nonwoven fabric attached to the bottom side for pre-vegetated mat applications.

B. Pre-Vegetation Mats for a Vegetated Roof System: Mats for growing pre-growing

vegetation used in multilayer green roof configurations. 1. Enkaroof VM is an Enkamat core with a nonwoven fabric attached to the

bottom side for pre-vegetated mat applications.

C. Drainage Composites for Plaza Deck System: Drainage composites for drainage under plaza deck. 1. Enkadrain Subsurface Drainage Composite is a drainage product used over

the waterproofing membrane to provide maximum strength and continuous flow under any load while protecting the waterproofing membrane.

D. Drainage Composites for Planter Drainage System: Drainage composites for

drainage in planters. 1. Enkadrain Subsurface Drainage Composite is a drainage product used on

planter bottoms to provide drainage with continuous flow under any load without clogging.


2. EnkaRetain & Drain Drainage and Water Holding Composite is a drainage product used on planter bottoms that provides continuous flow of excess water while retaining water for use by the planter vegetation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout of membrane layers, high and low points

of pipe inverts, and gradient of slope between corners and intersections.

D. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met: 1. List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate post-consumer

recycled content and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.

2. Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size

6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify specified products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in subsurface drainage composites with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with

minimum three years documented experience.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen is

approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.



B. Handle and store product according to manufacturers recommendations.


C. Store products in a dry space at temperatures between 50 to 90 degrees F (10 to 32

degrees C). Do not store in direct sunlight.

D. For cold weather applications, store products in a heated airspace at 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or above for at least 2 days prior to application. Take out only the amount of material that can be applied within 2 hours.

E. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based

materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Colbond Inc.; P. O. Box 1057, 1301 Sand Hill Rd., Enka, NC 28728. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 365-7391. Tel: (828) 665-5000. Fax: (828) 665-5009. Email: [email protected]. Web Site: www.colbond-usa.com.


C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Drainage Composite. 1. Enkadrain 3811R:

a. Core: Recycled polypropylene with geotextile on two sides. b. Thickness: 0.45 inches (11.4 mm). c. Total Weight: 23.7 oz/sq yd (804 glsm). d. Core Weight: 16 oz/sq yd (543 g/sm). e. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 18.1 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 16.8 gal/min/ft

@ 2000 psf; At 0.2 Gradient - 7.3 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 7.0 gal/min/ft @ 2000 psf.

f. Compressive Load: Greater than 30,000 psf (4713 kN/sm) when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621 modified and ASTM D 4716.

g. Fabric Properties: Gray Side. 1) Polymer: PA6 and PET. 2) Weight: 3.54 oz/sq yd (120 g/sm)when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 3776. 3) Grab Strength: 125 lbs (556 N) when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 4632. 4) Grab Elongation 40 percent when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 4632. 5) Trapezoidal Tear: 40 lbs when tested in accordance with ASTM

D 4533.



6) Puncture Resistance: 35 lbs (155 N) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4833.

7) Mulen Burst: 160 psi (1102 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3786.

8) AOS: 0.357 mm, maximum average when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751.

9) Flow Rate: 185 gal/m/sf (7536 l/sec/sm) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491.

10) Permittivity: 2.5 seconds-1 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491.

h. Fabric Properties: Black side. 1) Polymer: Polypropylene. 2) Weight: 4.5 oz/sq yd (152.6 glsm) when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 3776. 3) Grab Strength: 120 lbs (0.54 kN) when tested in accordance with



D 4533. 6) Puncture Resistance: 70 lbs (310 N) when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 4833. 7) AOS: 0.212 mm, maximum average when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 4751. 8) Flow Rate: 120 gal/m/sf (4887 l/sec/sm) when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 4491. 9) Permittivity: 1.8 seconds-1 when tested in accordance with ASTM

D 4491. 2. Enkadrain 3611R (Medium Duty):

a. Core: Recycled polypropylene with geotextile on one side. b. Thickness: 0.45 inches (11.4 mm). c. Total Weight: 20.5 oz/sq yd (695 glsm). d. Core Weight: 16 oz/sq yd (543 g/sm). e. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 22.0 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 19.0 gal/min/ft

@ 2000 psf; At 0.2 Gradien t- 8.7 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 8.3 gal/min/ft @ 2000 psf.


g. Fabric Properties: Black side. 1) Polymer: Polypropylene. 2) Weight: 4.5 oz/sq yd (152.6 glsm) when tested in accordance










3. Enkadrain 3615R (Heavy Duty): a. Core: Recycled polypropylene with geotextile on one side. b. Thickness: 0.45 inches (11.4 mm). c. Total Weight: 28.5 oz/sq yd (966 glsm). d. Core Weight: 24 oz/sq yd (814 g/sm). e. Fabric Weight: 4.5 oz/sq yd (153 g/sm). f. Flow Rate: Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient- 21.0 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 19.0

gal/min/ft @ 2000 psf; At 0.2 Gradient- 8.2 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 8.0 gal/min/ft @ 2000 psf.

g. Compressive Load: Greater than 30,000 psf (4713 kN/sm) when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621 modified and ASTM D 4716.

h. Fabric Properties: Black. 1) Polymer: Polypropylene. 2) Weight: 4.5 oz/sq yd (152.6 glsm) when tested in accordance







accordance with ASTM D 4491. 9) Permittivity: 1.8 seconds-1 when tested in accordance with ASTM

D 4491. 4. Enkadrain 9120:

a. Core: Nylon 6 with geotextile on one side. b. Thickness: 0.8 inches (20.3 mm). c. Total Weight: 25.6 oz/sq yd (868 glsm). d. Core Weight: 21.3 oz/sq yd (722 g/sm). e. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 17.5 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 3.0 gal/min/ft @

2000 psf. f. Compressive Load: Greater than 30,000 psf (4713 kN/sm) when tested

in accordance with ASTM D1621 modified and ASTM D 4716. g. Fabric Properties:

1) Polymer: PA6 and PET. 2) Weight: 3.54 oz/sq yd (120 g/sm)when tested in accordance with





with ASTM D 4833. 7) Mullen Burst: 160 psi (1102 kPa) when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 3786.


8) AOS: 0.357 mm, maximum average when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751.



B. Drainage and Water Holding Composite:

1. EnkaRetain & Drain 3111. a. Core: Recycled Polypropylene. b. Total Thickness: 0.60 inch (15 mm). c. Total Weight: 36.0 oz/SY ( g/sm) (average). d. Core Weight: 16.0 oz/SY ( g/sm) (average). e. Core Thickness 0.40 inch (10 mm) f. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 23.0 gal/min/ft @ 1000 psf. g. Fabric Properties:

1) Polymer: Polypropylene and PET. 2) Weight: 20.0 oz/sq yd when tested in accordance with ASTM D

5261. 3) Grab Strength: 135 lbs (61 k) when tested in accordance with


ASTM D 4632. 5) Puncture Resistance: 70 lbs (31 k) when tested in accordance


ASTM D 3786. 7) Water Holding Capacity: 1000-2000 percent when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 4250. 8) Water Holding Capacity: 0.10 to 0.15 gal/SF when tested in


C. Vegetated Roofing Composite: Enkamat 7010. 1. Core: Nylon 6. 2. Thickness: 0.40 inches (10 mm). 3. Core Weight: 7.7 oz/sq yd (966 g/sm). 4. Performance Characteristics:

a. Low temperature: Minus 100 degrees F (minus 73 degrees C). b. High temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). c. Fuel and gasoline submersion – Stable.

5. Fire Rating: a. NFPA Class A, ASTM E 84. b. Flamespread: 25. c. Smoke density: 30.

D. Pre-Vegetated Roofing Composite: Enkaroof VM

1. Core: Nylon 6 with a geotextile membrane on one side. 2. Thickness: 0.75 inches (19 mm). 3. Total Weight: 13.7 oz/sq yd (465 glsm). 4. Core Weight: 10.5 oz/sq yd (356 g/sm). 5. Fabric Properties:

a. Polymer: PA6 and PET. b. Weight: 3.2 oz/sq yd (109 glsm) when tested in accordance with ASTM

D 3776.


c. Grab Strength: 125 lbs (556 N) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632.

d. Grab Elongation 40 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632.

e. Trapezoidal Tear: 40 lbs when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533. f. Puncture Resistance: 35 lbs (155 N) when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 4833. g. Mullen Burst: 160 psi (1102 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM

D 3786. h. AOS: 0.357 mm, maximum average when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 4751. i. Flow Rate: 185 gal/m/sf (7536 l/sec/sm) when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 4491. j. Permittivity: 2.5 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D

4491. 6. Performance Characteristics:

a. Low temperature: Minus 100 degrees F (minus 73 degrees C). b. High temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). c. Fuel and gasoline submersion – Stable.

7. Fire Rating: a. NFPA Class A, ASTM E 84. b. Flamespread: 5. c. Smoke density: 70.

E. Drainage Composites for Planter Drainage System:

1. Enkadrain 3611R: a. Core: Recycled polypropylene with geotextile on one side. b. Thickness: 0.45 inches (11.4 mm). c. Total Weight: 20.5 oz/sq yd (695 glsm). d. Core Weight: 16 oz/sq yd (543 g/sm). e. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 22.0 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 19.0 gal/min/ft



g. Fabric Properties: Black side. 1) Polymer: Polypropylene. 2) Weight: 4.5 oz/sq yd (152.6 glsm) when tested in accordance







accordance with ASTM D 4491. 9) Permittivity: 1.8 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM

D 4491. 2. Enkadrain 3615R:


a. Core: Recycled polypropylene with geotextile on one side. b. Thickness: 0.45 inches (11.4 mm). c. Total Weight: 28.5 oz/sq yd (966 glsm). d. Core Weight: 24 oz/sq yd (814 g/sm). e. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 21.0 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 19.0 gal/min/ft



g. Fabric Properties: Black. 1) Polymer: Polypropylene. 2) Weight: 4.5 oz/sq yd (152.6 glsm) when tested in accordance








D 4491. 3. Enkadrain 3811R:

a. Core: Recycled polypropylene with geotextile on two sides. b. Thickness: 0.45 inches (11.4 mm). c. Total Weight: 23.7 oz/sq yd (804 glsm). d. Core Weight: 16 oz/sq yd (543 g/sm). e. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 18.1 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 16.8 gal/min/ft



g. Fabric Properties: Gray Side. 1) Polymer: PA6 and PET. 2) Weight: 3.54 oz/sq yd (120 g/sm)when tested in accordance with






ASTM D 3786. 8) AOS: 0.357 mm, maximum average when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 4751.



10) Permittivity: 2.5 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491.

h. Fabric Properties: Black side. 1) Polymer: Polypropylene. 2) Weight: 4.5 oz/sq yd (152.6 glsm) when tested in accordance








D 4491. 4. Enkadrain 9120:

a. Core: Nylon 6 with geotextile on one side. b. Thickness: 0.8 inches (20.3 mm). c. Total Weight: 25.6 oz/sq yd (868 glsm). d. Core Weight: 21.3 oz/sq yd (722 g/sm). e. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 17.5 gal/min/ft @ 500 psf; 3.0 gal/min/ft @

2000 psf. f. Compressive Load: Greater than 30,000 psf (4713 kN/sm) when tested

in accordance with ASTM D1621 modified and ASTM D 4716. g. Fabric Properties:

1) Polymer: PA6 and PET. 2) Weight: 3.54 oz/sq yd (120 g/sm)when tested in accordance with






ASTM D 3786. 8) AOS: 0.357 mm, maximum average when tested in accordance



D 4491.

F. Planter Bottom Drainage and Water Holding Composite:


1. EnkaRetain & Drain 3111. a. Core: Recycled Polypropylene. b. Total Thickness: 0.60 inch (15 mm). c. Total Weight: 36.0 oz/SY ( g/sm) (average). d. Core Weight: 16.0 oz/SY ( g/sm) (average). e. Core Thickness 0.40 inch (10 mm) f. Flow Rate: At 1.0 Gradient - 23.0 gal/min/ft @ 1000 psf. g. Fabric Properties:

1) Polymer: Polypropylene and PET. 2) Weight: 20.0 oz/sq yd when tested in accordance with ASTM D

5261. 3) Grab Strength: 135 lbs (61 k) when tested in accordance with


ASTM D 4632. 5) Puncture Resistance: 70 lbs (31 k) when tested in accordance


ASTM D 3786. 7) Water Holding Capacity: 1000-2000 percent when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 4250. 8) Water Holding Capacity: 0.10 to 0.15 gal/SF when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 4250. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until waterproofing specified in Section 07130 has been properly installed and that substrate has been properly prepared for waterproofing installation.

B. Do not begin installation until subsurface is smooth and sound.

C. Do not begin installation until substrate has been properly prepared for subsurface

drain installation. Before beginning installation, inspect to ensure that surface is clean free of debris that could puncture the membrane.

D. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate and under the project conditions.

3.3 DRAINAGE COMPOSITE INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Apply in clear dry weather at recommended temperatures.

C. Measure the length needed. Cut piece from roll to correct length.


D. Start at the edge of the surface to be covered and install the first strip of drainage composite with the fabric flap facing the starting edge.

E. Measure the length of the next drainage composite strip as needed. Cut piece from

roll to correct length.

F. Apply a continuous bead of construction adhesive in a zigzag pattern along the edge of the drainage composite strip without the flap. Apply the strip tightly to the previously placed strip overlapping and bonding the fabric.

G. Continue placement over entire surface as required. Remove excess material from

the last strip without removing the fabric overlap.

H. Use temporary ballast if required to hold strips in position. 3.4 VEGETATED ROOFING DRAINAGE COMPOSITE INSTALLATION


B. Measure the length needed. Cut piece from roll to correct length. C. Start at the edge of the surface to be covered and install the first strip of vegetated

roofing composite tight to the starting edge.

D. Measure the length of the next strip as needed. Cut piece from roll to correct length.

E. Apply the strip tightly to the previously placed strip.

F. Continue placement over entire surface as required. G. Use temporary ballast if required to hold strips in position until placement of the soil

medium and planting as specified in Section 02900. 3.5 PRE-VEGETATED ROOFING DRAINAGE COMPOSITE INSTALLATION


B. Measure the length needed. Cut piece from roll to correct length. C. Start at the edge of the surface to be covered and install the first strip of pre-

vegetated roofing composite tight to the starting edge.

D. Measure the length of the next strip as needed. Cut piece to correct length.

E. Apply the strip tightly to the previously placed strip.

F. Continue placement over entire surface as required. 3.6 PLANTER DRAINAGE COMPOSITE INSTALLATION


B. Measure the length needed. Cut piece from roll to correct length. C. Start at the longest direction of the planter and moving in the opposite direction of the

fabric flap, cut the drainage composite to length and place the fabric flap against the planter bottom.


D. Measure the length of the next drainage composite strip as needed. Cut piece from roll to correct length.

E. Apply a continuous bead of construction adhesive in a zigzag pattern along the edge

of the drainage composite strip without the flap. Apply the strip tightly to the previously placed strip overlapping and bonding the fabric.

F. Continue placement over entire surface as required. Remove excess material from

the last strip without removing the fabric overlap.

G. Measure the perimeter of the planter. Cut a strip of drainage composite to the measured length and place horizontally around the planter wall.

H. Place the soil medium and plants as specified in Section 02900.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

Penn Stater 11-19-10 07 41 00 Lucas Manos

Metal Roof & Wall Panels 07410

This document specifies Petersen Aluminum Corporation prefinished factory formed metal roofing marketed as PAC-CLAD steel and aluminum roofing systems and includes PAC-CLAD flashing and Trim. PAC-CLAD is a fluoropolymer (70% Kynar 500 or 70% Hylar 5000) resin coating applied to aluminum or galvanized steel. (Kynar 500 is a registered trademark of Elf Atochem North American, Inc.; Hylar 5000 is a registered trademark of Ausimont USA.) This specification does not include other Petersen Aluminum Corporation products, such as: coping systems and gravel stops.

SECTION 07410 METAL ROOF & WALL PANELS


A. Section includes: Factory-formed metal roofing or soffits, including flashing and accessories. Metal roofing includes: Snap-Clad Panels

Specifier Note: Revise paragraph below to suit project requirements. Add section numbers per CSI Masterformat and specifier’s practice.

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:

1. Metal Roof Deck: Division 5 Metal Deck Sections. 2. Wood Framing and Decking: Division 6 Rough Carpentry Section. 3. Flashing and Trim: Division 7 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section. 4. Coping and Gravel Stops: Division 7 Roof Specialties and Accessories Section. 5. Sealants: Division 7 Joint Sealers Sections.

Specifier Note: Paragraphs below list industry standards referenced in this section. Verify use of listed standards and add edition date of standards retained. Conditions of the Contract or Division 1 References Section may establish edition date of standards referenced. This article does not require compliance with standard, but is merely a listing of references used.


Metal Roof & Wall Panels 07410 1:02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL Classified Tests):

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

1. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 1:03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide sheet metal roofing that has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to withstand structural and thermal movement, wind loading and weather exposure to maintain manufacturer’s performance criteria without defects, damage, failure of infiltration of water.

1. Wind-Uplift: Roof panel assembly shall comply with UL Classification 580 for UL Classified 90 rated assemblies

2. Static Air Infiltration: Completed roof system shall have a maximum of .06 cfm/sf with 6.24 kPa air pressure differential as per ASTM E283/1680.

3. Water Infiltration: No evidence of water penetration at an inward static air pressure differential of not less than 6.24 psf (43 kPa) and not more than 12.0 psf (83 kPa) as per ASTM E331/1646.

Specifier Note: Article below includes submittal of relevant data to be furnished by Contractor either before, during or after construction. Coordinate this article with Architect’s and Contractor’s duties and responsibilities in Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.



1:04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

1. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA product sheet, for specified products. ( Make Spec-Data link to information located in the product section.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit complete shop drawings and erection details, approved by the metal roofing manufacturer, to the architect (owner) for review. Do not proceed with manufacturer of roofing materials prior to review of shop drawings and field verification of all dimensions. Do not use drawings prepared by the architect (owner) for shop or erection drawings.

2. Shop drawings show roof plans, elevations, methods of erection, and flashing details.

C. Performance Tests: 1. Submit certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory in accordance with specified test

methods for each panel system. D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures.

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical requirements.

2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Date: Operation and maintenance date for installed products in

accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals, Maintenance Data and Operation Data Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Project Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein. A: Manufactures warranty: Submit, for owners acceptance, manufactures standard warranty document excuted by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to and not limited of, other rights the owner may have under the contract documents.



Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Petersen Aluminum Corporation offers a 20-year non-prorated warranty covering a PAC-CLAD finish, including color, fade, chalking and film integrity. Consult with manufacturer for specific project warranty requirements

1. Warranty Period: (specify term) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

Specifier Note: Retain article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance characteristics, material standards and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as “or equal” or “or approved equal” may cause ambiguity in the specifications. Such phrases require verification - procedural, legal, regulatory and responsibility - for determining equivalence of products.

3. Record Documents: Project record documents for installed materials in accordance with Division

1 Closeout Submittals,, Project Record Documents Section. Specifier Note: Article below should include prerequisites, standards, limitations and criteria which establish an overall level of quality for products and workmanship for this section. Coordinate below article with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section. 1:05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project.

B. Sheet Metal Industry Standard: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association(SMACNA) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below for erected assemblies, either onsite or offsite, required for review of Construction, coordination of work of several sections, testing or observation of operation. Mock-ups establish Standards by which work will be judged. Coordinate below with Division 1 Quality Control, Mock-up Requirements Section.

C. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate

conditions, Manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Managements and Coordination, Project Meetings Section.



1:06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.

1. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Identify fabricated components with UL 90 Classified label where appropriate. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful conditions. Store material in dry, above ground location.

1. Stack prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, scratching and denting. Elevate one end of each skid to allow for moisture to run off.

2. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration or staining. 3. Do not expose to direct sunlight or extreme heat trim material with factory applied strippable film.

1:07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Conditions of the Contract and with Division 1 Closeout Submittals, Warranty Section.

1:08 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Petersen Aluminum Corporation offers a 20-year nonprorated warranty covering PAC-CLAD finish, including color, fade, chalking and Film integrity. Consult with manufacturer for specific project warranty requirements.

1. Warranty Period: ( Specify term ) years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.


Metal Roof & Wall Panels 07410 PART 2 PRODUCTS

Specifier Note: Retain article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance characteristics, material standards and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as “or equal” or “or approved equal” may cause ambiguity in the specifications. Such phrases require verification - procedural, legal, regulatory and responsibility - for determining equivalence of products.

2:01 SHEET METAL ROOFING A. Manufacturer: Petersen Aluminum Corporation

Specifier Note: Paragraph below is a supplement to CSI Masterformat and an addition to MANU-SPEC. Retain or delete paragraph below to suit project requirements and specifier’s practice. 1. Contact: 1005 Tonne Road, Elk Grove Village, IL 60007; Telephone (800) 323-1960, (847) 228-7150; Fax (800) 722-7150 Specifier Note: Paragraphs below list proprietary roof panels offered by Petersen Aluminum Corporation. Select roof panels appropriate to project. Manufacturer’s roll-forming equipment produces panels that have been Herr-Voss corrective leveled. Panels are factory formed in lengths up to 55’ (16.2 m). Matching flashing and trim may be factory formed or field formed from PAC-CLAD material. Consult with manufacturer regarding product options. Selection product characteristics required; delete characteristics not required. Refer to manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA product sheet.



B. PAC-CLAD SNAP-CLAD panels and trim: 1. Seam Height: 1 ¾”(44 mm) minimum seam height. 2. Material: 3. Panel Dimension:

Specifier Note: Below eave notching is an option with manufacturer. Retain or delete as applicable.

4. 5. Texture: 6. Rating: UL Classified 90 rated (wind uplift) panel assembly. 7. Flashing and Trim: 8. Fasteners: SNAP-CLAD galvanized steel, non-penetrating high performance clips for roofing

application and UL Classified 90 rated (wind uplift) assemblies and standard clips for mansard and fascia applications.

Specifier Note: Below sealant bead is an option with manufacturer. Retain or delete as applicable.

9.

C. Panel Finish: 1. Panel Topside: PAC-CLAD finish’ color selected from Petersen Aluminum Corp. standard colors:

2. Panel Underside: Polyester washcoat with dry film thickness of 0.3 mils. Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with project requirements for selected sheet metal roofing system. D. PAC-CLAD Flashing and Trim: Manufacturer’s standard flashing and trim profiles, factory formed, gauge as recommended by manufacturer, color and finish to match metal roofing panels.



Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below to suit project requirements, if substitutions are permitted, edit text below. Add text to refer to Division 1 Product Requirements, Product Substitution Procedures Section. E. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

2:02 RELATED MATERIALS A. General: Coordinate use of related materials:

1. Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type II No. 30 asphalt saturated organic roofing felt. Refer to Division 7 Roofing Sections. 2. Plywood Deck: 5/8” (16 mm) nominal thickness. Refer to Division 6 Rough Carpentry Section. 3. Nailable Insulation: 1” (25 mm) minimum to 3 ½” (89 mm) maximum nominal thickness classified polyisocyanurate foamed plastic, 2 pct density, with factory laminated 7/16” (11 mm) thick APA rated Oriented Strant Board (OSB). Refer to Division 7 Insulation Sections or Division 6 Rough Carpentry Section.

4. Sealants: Elastometic joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Joint Sealers Sections. 5. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphaltic mastic. Provide compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components and other harmful impurities. Refer to Division 7 Damp proofing Section.

2:03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Continuous Length: Fabricate panels 55’ (16.2 m) and less in one continuous length. 2. Trim and Flashings: Fabricate trim and flashings from same material as roof system material. 3. Portable Roll Former: Panels fabricated by portable roll former shall not be approved. Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with finishes specified in sheet metal roofing article above. 2:04 FINISHES A. PAC-CLAD Factory Applied Finish:

1. Topside: Full-strength fluoropolymer (70% Kynar 500 or Hylar resin) system of 1.0 mil (.025 mm) total dry film thickness.

2. Underside: Wash coat of 0.3 - 0.4 mil dry film thickness. 3. Texture: ( Smooth texture, dull matte specular gloss 25 - 35% at 60° ) ( Standard E-5 stucco embossed pattern ).

4. Protective film: Strippable vinyl film applied during panel fabrication and finishing.



PART 3 EXECUTION

Specifier Note: Article below is an addition to the CSI SectionFormat and a supplement to MANU-SPEC. Revise Article below to suit project requirements and specifier’s practice.

3:01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, recommendations and installations instructions for substrate verification, preparation requirements and installation.

1. Strippable Film: Remove manufacturer’s protective film, if any, from surfaces of roofing panels. 3:02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for project installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3:03 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate metal roofing with other Work (drainage, flashing and trim, deck substrates, parapets, copings, walls) and other adjoining work to provide a non-corrosive and leak-proof installation.

B. Dissimilar Metals: Prevent galvanic action of dissimilar metals. Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with manufacturer’s recommended installation details. 3:04 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal roofing panels to profiles, patterns and drainage indicated and required for leak-proof installation. Provide for structural and thermal movement at work. Seal joints for leak-proof installation.

1. Seams: Provide uniform, neat seams. 2. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners where possible in exposed work. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors for watertight and leak-proof installation. 3. Sealant-Type Joints: Provide sealant-type joint where indicated. Form joints to conceal sealant. Comply with Division 7 Joint Sealants Section for Sealant installation.



3:05 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Site Tests (Post Installation Testing): Owner reserves right to perform post installation testing of installed sheet metal roofing. Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below. Establish number and duration of periodic site visits with owner and Manufacturer and specify below. Consult with manufacturer for services required. Coordinate paragraph below with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section. Delete paragraph if manufacturer field services not required. B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

3:06 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

3:07 PROTECTION

A. Protection: Protect installed product from damage during construction.

TERRACOTTA DOUBLE-SKIN CLADDING PANELS 07417-1

SECTION 07 41 70 TERRACOTTA RAINSCREEN TILE CLADDING SYSTEM

PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This section is only a portion of the Contract Documents. All of the Contract Documents, including Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Exterior wall cladding system consisting of flat, double-skin, terracotta panels installed with aluminum panel clips attached to aluminum vertical framing sections anchored to structural wall substrate and utilizing the rainscreen principle.

B. Related sections: 1. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 05400 – Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Framing 3. Section 07210 – Building Insulation: Batt thermal insulation installed behind terracotta

cladding system. 4. Section 07270 – Air Barriers: Sheet air infiltration barrier installed in cavity behind terracotta

cladding panels. 5. Section 07600 – Flashing and Sheet Metal: Sheet metal air cavity flashings, wall transitions,

sills, trim, parapet cap and other sheet metal components. 6. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry 7. Section 09250 – Gypsum Board

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

1. ASTM C97-02 – Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. 2. ASTM C880-96-Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone. 3. ASTM E330 – Structural Performance of Exterior Window, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under

the Influence of Wind Loads. 4. ASTM C 67 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay

Tile 5. ASTM E 1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of

Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference

B. European Standards: 1. EN ISO 539.2 METHOD C -. 2. NFP 13.304 -.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Rainscreen Principle: Method for controlling rain penetration through wall cladding system. Open joints allow air pressure in cavity behind cladding to equal outside air pressure thus resisting wind driven rain. Rainscreen system includes:

1. Drained and vented wall cladding. 2. Air barrier on cladding substrate. 3. Compartmentalization of cavity behind cladding into sealed compartments. 4. Flashings and weep holes to drain water from cavity.


B. SYSTEM DESCRIPTON

1. General: The Argeton terracotta tile system is non combustible wall façade with a rainscreen, pressure equalized design consisting of double skinned terracotta tiles of varying sizes with an aluminum supporting sub framing. 2. Methods of Installation

Field Applied: The Argeton System is applied to the framing on site. Panelized: The Argeton System is shop applied to structural steel panels.

3. Acceptable Substrates: Exterior Grade Gypsum Sheathing – ASTM 1396 Exterior Sheathing with water resistant core with fiberglass facers – ASTM 1177 Structurally Sound Brick, Masonry, CMU

1.5 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design and install terracotta cladding and attachment system to: 1. Provide in conjunction with wall substrate and air barrier a weathertight wall assembly

utilizing rainscreen principle. 2. Withstand design loads as required by applicable codes for Project location. 3. Comply with applicable seismic requirements for Project location as defined by International

Building Code. 4. Adequately resist wind forces and uplift for Project location for wall surface, for parapet and

corner panels tested in accordance with ASTM E330. 5. Accommodate movement of cladding components without undue stress on fasteners or other

detrimental effects, when subjected to seasonal temperature range of: a. Ambient: [120 degrees F] [67 degrees C]. b. Cladding surface: [180 degrees F] [100 degrees C].

6. Accommodate tolerances of support structure. 7. Assure non combustibility of all components including tiles, sub support frame and all

components therein. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedure: 1. Product data describing materials and fabrication for terracotta panels and attachment

components. 2. Shop drawings showing:

a. Profiles and dimensions for tiles, special shapes, and trim pieces. b. Installation details: Attachment methods, fasteners, joints, corners, openings,

intersections with adjacent materials, flashings, closures, trim and other critical conditions.

c. Layout of terracotta panels on wall and locations of special pieces and trim. 3. Structural and pressure differential calculations. 4. Copies of certificates, reports, and other data showing compliance with design and

performance requirements specified in Paragraph [1.4]. 5. Samples:

a. [12 inches] [305 mm] minimum length of terracotta panel in selected color and surface finish.

b. [3 inches] [76 mm] minimum length of attachment rail. 6. Manufacturer’s installation and maintenance instructions. 7. Copy of warranty required by Paragraph [1.11] for review by Architect.



A. Installer qualifications: Company experienced in installing exterior wall cladding systems and acceptable to terracotta cladding supplier.

B. Attachment details shall be designed under direct supervision of licensed professional structural engineer. Calculations and shop drawings shall bear seal of supervising engineer.

C. In accordance with Section 01400 – Quality Requirements, supplier’s field representative shall inspect wall substrate and air barrier prior to installation, observe terracotta cladding installation, and submit report of observations and findings to Architect.

D. System Manufacturer: Shall be Argeton. All materials and components shall be manufactured and sold by Argeton or its authorized distributor.

1.8 MOCK - UP

A. In accordance with Section 01400 – Quality Control, prepare separate mock-up illustrating wall

substrate with attached terracotta cladding. Mock-up shall demonstrate wall performance and establish standard of quality and workmanship. Illustrate terracotta panels, attachment method, thermal insulation, furring, sheathing, air barrier, joints, flashings, corner conditions, parapet, sills, flashings and workmanship.

B. Mock-up shall be wall segment with corner & opening constructed with: i. Slab or foundation support.

ii. Wall substrate with thermal insulation, sheathing, and air barrier. iii. Terracotta panels installed with framing section, wall brackets, and panel clips.

C. Approximate size: [10 by 10 feet] [3 by 3 m]. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of work and will be used as basis for acceptance of remaining

cladding. Unacceptable samples shall be removed. E. Test mock-up with water hose and other means to verify performance.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Warrant that the terracotta tiles and aluminum substructure shall be free of

material defects for a period of five (5) years. Failure or defects are to be determined by representatives of the manufacture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Basis of Design: Argeton Terracotta Rainscreen, www.terracotta-rainscreen.com, VF Mueller 2. Accordance with Section 01630 – Product Substitution Procedures. Architect reserves right

to reject substitution request based on available sizes, color or surface finish even though fabrication, materials, and performance are equivalent.

2.2 TERRACOTTA PANEL CLADDING SYSTEM

A. Type: Exterior wall cladding system utilizing the rainscreen principle consisting of flat, double-skin,

terracotta panels hung on vertical aluminum framing sections B. Cladding support: Terracotta panels installed with aluminum clips attached to aluminum vertical

framing sections anchored with brackets to wall substrate.

2.3 TERRACOTTA PANELS

http://www.terracotta-rainscreen.com/


A. Type: Double-skin, unglazed, extruded terracotta panels with flat front and back faces and horizontal cellular cavities which are open at panel ends

B. Profile: Top edge of panel is formed with horizontal projecting flange which fits into continuous notch along bottom edge of adjacent panel.

C. Material: Unglazed, frost proof, fired clay complying with EN539.2 Method C –NFP 13.304. 1. Compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C880-96: [[_____] PSI.] 2. Absorption tested in accordance ASTM C97 for average of 5 panels: 3.5 percent after 24

hours cold water soak. D. Overall panel size (height by length by thickness): as selected from manufacture’s full range of sizes E. Surface finish: as selected from manufacturers full range of finishes F. Color: as selected from manufacturers full range of colors

2.4 SUPPORT COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Clips: Formed from extruded aluminum with pre-drilled holes along top for screw attachment to framing sections

a. Standard clip: i. Application: Designed to support and retain terracotta tiles above and hook and

retain in place cladding panel below. b. Top clip:

i. Application: Designed to hook and retain top of uppermost tiles where support of a tile above is not required.

c. Bottom clip: i. Application: Designed to hook and retain top of bottom most tile where support of a

tile below is not required B. Vertical hat channel sections: Extruded aluminum members anchored to structural substrate with

brackets and designed to support terracotta panels with aluminum clips screw attached to framing sections:

a. Standard type framing section: Hat channel shaped with two projecting flanges i. Application: Designed to be positioned were terracotta panels join. Panel clips are

riveted into pre-drilled holes engineered for exact tiles sizes in order to support two abutting cladding panels.

ii. Joint Profile: Aluminum, T-shaped joint profile screw attached to channel framing section and projecting between two abutting cladding panels. Joint Profiles conceal openings in ends of cladding panels.

C. Wall attachment brackets: Horizontal L-shaped aluminum profile attaches to vertical framing sections and is received by attachment brackets for framing sections to structural wall substrate. Provided with

clamping springs with slotted holes and other means to allow adjustment and vertical alignment. Attachment brackets shall be securely anchored to wall substrate with fasteners of type, size and spacing as required to meet performance requirements specified in Paragraph [1.4] and as indicated on approved shop drawings.

a. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners and anchors of type, size and spacing required for type of substrate and project conditions, to meet performance requirements specified in Paragraph [1.4] and as indicated in design calculations and shop drawings. b. Sheet metal: Provide sheet metal flashings and trim as required for cladding system in accordance with Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine walls to receive terracotta cladding. Ensure substrate is structurally sound, clean and free of contaminants which inhibit bond of air barrier.

1. Maximum substrate deflection: L/360 2. Maximum substrate surface variation: [1/8 inch in 10 feet] [3mm in 3m]


3. Stud construction with gypsum exterior sheathing: Verify stud framing is adequately braced without deflection and sheathing is properly secured with edges over firm bearing. Ensure proper framing and supports are provided and located for secure attachment of terracotta support rails.

B. Do not proceed with terracotta cladding installation until deficiencies have been addressed. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Air/Vapor barrier: (If specified) Install air/vapor barrier to wall sheathing as specified in Section 07260-Vapor Retarders are detailed on drawings and approved shop drawings. B. Framing sections: (If specified) Anchor vertical, aluminum framing sections with attachment

brackets using engineered fasteners and anchors to accomplish performance requirements specified in Paragraph [1.4].

C. Install rigid board thermal insulation as specified in Section 07212-Board and Batt Insulation between vertical framing members as detailed on drawings and approved shop drawings. D. Flashings: Install sheet metal flashings, pressure compartment dividers and trim as specified in Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and as positioned and detailed on drawings and approved shop drawings. Ensure flashings at bottom of wall and pressure compartments properly drain water from air cavity to exterior through weep holes. Turn up flashings [4 inches] [102mm] minimum and seal to substrate. Lap flashing end joints [6 inches] [152 mm] and seal watertight.

3.3 CLADDING INSTALLATION

C. Install terracotta cladding in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings.

D. Establish level lines for panel coursing. Accurately determine and mark locations of vertical framing members.

E. Framing sections: Attach vertical framing sections to wall substrate with engineered fasteners and anchors to accomplish performance requirements specified in Paragraph [1.4].

i. Attach framing sections with pairs of wall attachment brackets spaced manufacturer’s minimum spacing required

ii. Secure framing sections to wall attachment brackets with two self-tap con fasteners. Adjust connection to ensure framing sections are plumb.

F. Terracotta panels: Starting at bottom of wall, hang panels with aluminum clips screwed to framing sections using two self-taping fasteners. Clips shall engage and support upper cladding panel and hook and retain lower cladding panel. Ensure clips are accurately positioned such that cladding panels are level.

i. Layout work so as to avoid or minimize cuts. Site cut terracotta panels using power, wet masonry saw with diamond type blade. Prevent broken corners, edges and chips.

ii. Install panels with open vertical joints [3/8 inch] [9.525 mm] iii. Tolerances: Shim and align terracotta panels to provide these tolerances:

1. Deviations from level or plumb alignment: [1/4 inch in 20 feet] [6 mm in 6 m] maximum, non accumulative.

2. Offset of adjoining faces and alignment of matching profiles: [1/8 inch] [3 mm] maximum.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged panels. B. Immediately after installing, wash cladding with clean water and stiff bristle fiber brushes. Do

not use wire brushes, metallic tools or abrasives for cleaning. C. Protect cladding from roof run-off, splashed water, mud, sealants, bitumen and other

contaminants from remaining construction activities. D. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners,

which may be damaged by construction activities.


END OF SECTION

Forrest Resource/Corey Hobson/Date 07 50 00-1 Membrane Roofing

SECTION 07 50 00

MEMBRANE ROOFING THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN IN CSI 3-PART FORMAT

AND IN CSI PAGE FORMAT; THE PROJECT NAME/NUMBER/DATE AND SECTION TITLE IN THE FOOTER ARE OPTIONAL. NOTES TO THE SPECIFIER, SUCH AS THIS, MUST BE DELETED FROM THE FINAL SPECIFICATION.

IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE GENERAL CONDITIONS BEING USED ARE AIA A201-1997.

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY THIS SECTION IS NOT INTENDED FOR “STAND-

ALONE” USE. THIS TEXT SHOULD BE INSERTED IN APPROPRIATE ROOFING SECTIONS FOR SYSTEMS THAT INCLUDE ROOF BOARD.

A. Section Includes: Fiberglass-mat faced gypsum roof boards. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C472 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum,

Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete. 2. ASTM C473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum

Panel Products. 3. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

4. ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

5. ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.


7. ASTM E661 Standard Test Method for Performance of Wood and Wood-Based Floor and Roof Sheathing Under Concentrated Static


and Impact Loads. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions

for each product specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE RETAIN BELOW IF REQUIRED, REVISE LIMITS IF

REQUIRED. A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide products that comply with the

following limits for surface burning characteristics when tested per ASTM E84:

1. Flame spread: 25, maximum. 2. Smoke developed: 450, maximum. THIS GUIDE SPEC WAS WRITTEN TO PROVIDE

THREE EDITING OPTIONS: 1) PROPRIETARY, 2) GENERIC, OR 3) A COMBINATION OF THE TWO.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

IF PROPRIETARY PRODUCT NAMES ARE INCLUDED IN THE “MATERIALS” ARTICLE BELOW, DELETE THIS ARTICLE ALTOGETHER. IF A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION IS REQUIRED, RETAIN THIS ARTICLE AND DELETE THE “MATERIALS” ARTICLE.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

EDIT LISTS BELOW TO CONFORM TO PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. IF OTHER MANUFACTURERS ARE BEING ADDED TO THIS SECTION, ADD LISTINGS OF THEIR PROPRIETARY PRODUCT NAMES.

A. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: 1. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: [DensDeck] [DensDeck

Prime] [DensDeck DuraGuard]. B. C.


THIS ARTICLE INCLUDES GENERIC DESCRIPTIONS OF GYPSUM BOARD ROOF BOARDS; THE NAMES OF THE CORRESPONDING GEORGIA-PACIFIC GYPSUM PRODUCTS ARE INCLUDED AS ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. IF THIS SECTION IS BEING EDITED TO BE GENERIC, THESE PRODUCT NAMES SHOULD BE DELETED.

IF OTHER MANUFACTURERS ARE BEING ADDED TO THIS SECTION, 1) ADD THE PROPRIETARY PRODUCT NAMES OF THOSE MANUFACTURERS, OR 2) IF PROPRIETARY NAMES ARE LISTED IN THE “MANUFACTURERS” ARTICLE ABOVE, DELETE THEM FROM THIS ARTICLE ALTOGETHER.

2.02 MATERIALS SELECT PRODUCT(S) BELOW TO CONFORM TO

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. PARAGRAPH BELOW IS 1/4 INCH DENSDECK.

A. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 1.1 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 40 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 2-5/8 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 50 perms.

9. R-Value (ASTM C518): Not less than 0.28. 10. Water Absorption (ASTM C1177): Less than 10 percent of weight.

DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS ARE TESTED TO APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF ASTM C472 IN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH MACHINES AT A UNIFORM RATE TO AN ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE LOAD END POINT AND REPRESENT A NOMINAL RANGE REPRESENTATIVE OF THAT TESTING IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (PSI). UNLIKE SOFTER ROOF BOARDS LIKE WOOD FIBER, PLASTIC BASED, FOAMED, OR MINERAL BOARDS, DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS DO NOT NEED TO BE TESTED TO 10% DEFORMATION, WHICH IS LIKELY


TO BE INDICATIVE OF POORER FOOT TRAFFIC, IMPACT, AND HAIL RESISTANCE IF 10% INDENTATION IS ALLOWED IN THE ROOF BOARD.

11. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 500 -

900 pounds per square inch. 12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 2.5 grams. 13. Acceptable Products: a. DensDeck, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PARAGRAPH BELOW IS 1/2 INCH DENSDECK. B. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 1.95 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 5 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 35 perms.


DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS ARE TESTED TO APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF ASTM C472 IN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH MACHINES AT A UNIFORM RATE TO AN ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE LOAD END POINT AND REPRESENT A NOMINAL RANGE REPRESENTATIVE OF THAT TESTING IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (PSI). UNLIKE SOFTER ROOF BOARDS LIKE WOOD FIBER, PLASTIC BASED, FOAMED, OR MINERAL BOARDS, DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS DO NOT NEED TO BE TESTED TO 10% DEFORMATION, WHICH IS LIKELY TO BE INDICATIVE OF POORER FOOT TRAFFIC, IMPACT, AND HAIL RESISTANCE IF 10% INDENTATION IS ALLOWED IN THE ROOF BOARD.


900 pounds per square inch. 12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 2.5 grams. 13. Acceptable Products:


a. DensDeck, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PARAGRAPH BELOW IS 5/8 INCH DENSDECK. C. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 2.5 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 100 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 8 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 32 perms.




900 pounds per square inch. 12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 2.5 grams. 13. Acceptable Products: a. DensDeck, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PARAGRAPH BELOW IS 1/4 INCH DENSDECK

PRIME. D. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board:


1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 1.15 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with non-asphaltic coating. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 40 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 2-5/8 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 50 perms.



11. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 500 to

900 pounds per square inch. 12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 2 grams. 13. Acceptable Products: a. DensDeck Prime, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PARAGRAPH BELOW IS 1/2-INCH DENSDECK

PRIME. E. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 1.975 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with non-asphaltic coating. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 5 inches.


8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 35 perms. 9. R-Value (ASTM C518): Not less than 0.56.

10. Water Absorption (ASTM C1177): Less than 10 percent of weight.




PRIME. F. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 2.55 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with non-asphaltic coating. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 100 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 8 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 32 perms.


DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS ARE TESTED TO APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF ASTM C472 IN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH MACHINES AT A


UNIFORM RATE TO AN ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE LOAD END POINT AND REPRESENT A NOMINAL RANGE REPRESENTATIVE OF THAT TESTING IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (PSI). UNLIKE SOFTER ROOF BOARDS LIKE WOOD FIBER, PLASTIC BASED, FOAMED, OR MINERAL BOARDS, DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS DO NOT NEED TO BE TESTED TO 10% DEFORMATION, WHICH IS LIKELY TO BE INDICATIVE OF POORER FOOT TRAFFIC, IMPACT, AND HAIL RESISTANCE IF 10% INDENTATION IS ALLOWED IN THE ROOF BOARD.

11. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 500 to


DURAGUARD. G. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 1.5 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with low perm coating. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 40 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 2-5/8 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 2 perms.


DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS ARE TESTED TO APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF ASTM C472 IN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH MACHINES AT A UNIFORM RATE TO AN ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE LOAD END POINT AND REPRESENT A NOMINAL RANGE REPRESENTATIVE OF THAT TESTING IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (PSI). UNLIKE SOFTER ROOF BOARDS LIKE WOOD FIBER, PLASTIC BASED, FOAMED, OR MINERAL BOARDS, DENSDECK ROOF BOARDS DO NOT NEED TO BE


TESTED TO 10% DEFORMATION, WHICH IS LIKELY TO BE INDICATIVE OF POORER FOOT TRAFFIC, IMPACT, AND HAIL RESISTANCE IF 10% INDENTATION IS ALLOWED IN THE ROOF BOARD.

11. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 1500

pounds per square inch. 12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 1 gram. 13. Acceptable Products: a. DensDeck DuraGuard, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PARAGRAPH BELOW IS 1/2-INCH DENSDECK

DURAGUARD. H. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 2.0 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with low perm coating. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 5 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 2 perms.




900 pounds per square inch.


12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 1 gram. 13. Acceptable Products: a. DensDeck DuraGuard, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PARAGRAPH BELOW IS 5/8-INCH DENSDECK

DURAGUARD. I. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. 4. Weight: 2.5 psf. 5. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with low perm coating. 6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 100 lbf, minimum. 7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 8 inches. 8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 2 perms.




900 pounds per square inch. 12. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 1 gram. 13. Acceptable Products: a. DensDeck DuraGuard, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: In accordance with ASTM C840 and the manufacturer’s

recommendations. IF OTHER MANUFACTURERS WERE ADDED IN

PART 2, REFERENCE THEIR INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS BELOW BY TITLE.

1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: a. Current “Product Catalog”, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. 3.02 PROTECTION

REVISE BELOW IF OTHER THAN AIA GENERAL CONDITIONS ARE USED.

A. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and deterioration until

the date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 07 50 00

Spiritual Center – Eisenhower Chapel gcr5026

SECTION 07610 – Preformed Metal Roofing

MANUFACTURER

Berridge Manufacturing Company 1720 Maury Street Houston, Texas 77026 Phone: (800) 231-8127 Outside TX (713) 223-4971 In TX Fax: (713) 236-9422

BERRIDGE DEEP DECK


A. Preformed, prefinished metal roofing and flashings.

B. Miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, and accessories.

C. Sealant

D. Fastening devices.


A. Section 05120: Structural Steel Framing.

B. Section 05500: Miscellaneous metal fabrication.

C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.

D. Section 07631: Flashing and Sheet Metal Gutters.

E. Section 07900: Sealants.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Coldformed Steel Structural

Members.

B. ASTM A-525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

C. ASTM E-1680

D. ASTM E-1646

E. ASTM E-1592

E. Spec Data Sheet - Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated Steel (Galvalume) Sheet Metal by Bethlehem Corp.

F. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

G. Building Materials Directory - Underwriter’s Laboratories, Test Procedure 580.


1.04 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys, hips,

ridges, eaves, corners, rakes, miscellaneous flashing and attaching devices.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of panels, anchoring details, joint details, trim, flashing, and

accessories. Show details of weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work.

B. Submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with factory finish.

C. Submit results indicating compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests:

1. Air Infiltration ASTM E 1680

2. Water Infiltration ASTM E 1646

3. Wind Uplift - U.L.90

D. Submit calculations with registered engineer seal, verifying roof panel and attachment method resists

wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Architectural Sheet Metal Products with ten (10) years

minimum experience.

B. No product substitutions shall be permitted without meeting specifications.

C. Substitutions shall be submitted 10 Days prior to Bid Date and acceptance put forth in an addendum.

D. No substitutions shall be made after the Bid Date.


A. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and

completeness.

B. Panels should be stored in a clean, dry place. One end should be elevated to allow moisture to run off.

C. Panels with strippable film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun.

D. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation.

1.08 WARRANTY


A. Paint finish shall have a twenty year guarantee against cracking, peeling and fade (not to exceed 5

N.B.S. units).

B. Galvalume material shall have a twenty year guarantee against failure due to corrosion, rupture or

perforation.

C. Applicator shall furnish guarantee covering watertightness of the roofing system for the period of two

(2) years from the date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCT 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Houston, Texas.

B. Substitutions shall fully comply with specified requirements.

2.02 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Prefinished Metal shall be [Hot-Dipped Galvanized - ASTM A653-07 Grade C G90 Coating A924-08 24

Gauge core steel] or [prefinished Galvalume 24 Gauge core steel - ASTM 792-86 AZ-55].

B. Unfinished Metal shall be Grade C Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated Steel ASTM 792-86, AZ 55, "Satin

Finish".

C. Finish shall be [full strength Kynar 500 coating] [Copper-Cote][Antique Copper-Cote] [Lead-Cote][Zinc-

Cote][Preweathered Galvalume][Champagne] coating, applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil

coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.80 mil over 0.20 to 0.30 mil prime coat, to

provide a total topside dry film thickness of 1.0 plus or minus 0.10 mil. Reverse side shall be coated with

primer and wash coat of 0.30 mil plus or minus 0.05 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion,

flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 PVDF resin-based coating supplier.

D. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during fabrication,

shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed immediately before installation.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: [Galvanized Steel] [Stainless Steel] [Cadmium Plated Steel] with washers where required.

B. Sealant: Sealant must be a ultra low modulus, high performance, one-part, moisture curing silicone

joint sealant. (do not use a clear sealant or sealants which release a solvent or acid during curing).

Sealant must be resistant to environmental conditions such as wind loading, wind driven rain, snow, sleet,

acid rain, ozone, ultraviolet light and extreme temperature variations.


Features must include joint movement capabilities of +100% & -50% ASTM C-719, capable of taking

expansion, compression, transverse and longitudinal movement, service temperature range -65ºF to

300ºF (-54ºC to 149ºC), Flow, sag or slump: ASTM C-639; Nil, Hardness (Shore A): ASTM C-661; 15,

Tensile strength at maximum elongation: ASTM D-412; 200 psi, Tensile strength at 100% elongation:

ASTM D-412; 35 psi, Tear strength, (die “C”); ASTM D-624; 40 pli, Peel strength (Aluminum, Glass,

Concrete): ASTM C-794; 30 pli

C. Vinyl Weatherseal Insert.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof panels.

B. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, 1/2 inch.

2.05 PREFORMED METAL PANELS

BERRIDGE DEEP-DECK PANEL

1. Overall panel width shall be 38-1/4" wide with 36" wide net coverage.

2. Panels shall be factory-formed to 40’ max. & shall have exposed fasteners.

3. Upper ridges shall be 2" wide, lower ridges 1-1/2" wide and overall depth shall be 1-1/2".

4. Panel to panel and panel to purlin connections to be N. 12-14 self-tapping fasteners, 1" min. and for

panel to purlin connections, 3/4" min. for panel to panel connections.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Substrate:

1. Examine plywood or metal deck to ensure proper attachment to framing.

2. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves or projections, level to

¼" in 20', and properly sloped to [valleys] (or) [eaves].

3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and

reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

4. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. [Flutes in steel deck to be clean and dry] or [joints in wood

deck to be solidly supported and nailed].

B. Underlayment:

1. Verify [#30 unperforated asphalt saturated roofing felt underlayment has been installed over solid

plywood or OSB sheathing and fastened in place] or [ice & water shield membrane on metal deck].

2. One (1) layer of #30 asphalt roofing felt paper for roof slopes of 3:12 and up, two (2) layers for roof

slopes of 1:12 - 3:12 in moderate climates (check with Berridge).

3. Berridge Ice & Water Shield underlayment to be used on all curved applications and on low (less than

1:12) slope or complex roofs per Berridge recommendation.

4. Ensure felt installed horizontally, starting at eave to ridge with a 6" minimum overlap and 18" endlaps.

5. Ensure that all nail heads are totally flush with the substrate. Nails shall be galvanized roofing nails with

Berridge Coated Felt Caps.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation.

B. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb.

C. Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels.

D. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of roof panels.

E. Attach panels using manufacturer’s standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with approved

shop drawings.

F. Install sealants for preformed roofing panels as approved on shop drawings.


G. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials.

H. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards.

I. Protect installed roof panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until completion of

installation.

J. Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.

3.04 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Final inspection will be performed by a firm appointed and paid for by the owner in accordance with

section 01410.

END OF SECTION

Student Health Center 11-19-10 07 81 00 - 1 Applied Fireproofing

SECTION 07 81 00

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies mineral fiber and cementitious coverings to

provide fire resistance to interior structural steel members shown.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT

DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Manufacturer's complete and detailed application instructions and

specifications.

2. Manufacturer's repair and patching instructions.

C. Certificates:

1. Certificate from testing laboratory attesting fireproofing material

and application method meet the specified fire ratings.

a. List thickness and density of material required to meet fire

ratings.

b. Accompanied by complete test report and test record.

2. Manufacturer's certificate indicating sprayed-on fireproofing

material supplied under the Contract is same within manufacturing

tolerance as fireproofing material tested.

D. Miscellaneous:

1. Manufacturer's written approval of surfaces to receive sprayed-on

fireproofing.

2. Manufacturer's written approval of completed installation.

3. Manufacturer's written approval of the applicators of fireproofing

material.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver to job-site in sealed containers marked and labeled to show

manufacturer's name and brand and certification of compliance with the

specified requirements.

B. Remove damaged containers from the site.

C. Store the materials off the ground, under cover, away from damp

surfaces.


D. Keep dry until ready for use.

E. Remove materials that have been exposed to water before installation

from the site.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test for fire endurance in accordance with ASTM E119, for fire rating

specified, in a nationally recognized laboratory.

B. Manufacturer's inspection and approval of surfaces to receive

fireproofing as specified under paragraph Examination.

C. Manufacturer's approval of fireproofing applications.

D. Manufacturer's approval of completed installation.

E. Manufacturer's representative shall observe and advise at the

commencement of application, and shall visit the site as required

thereafter for the purpose of ascertaining proper application.

F. Pre-Application Test Area.

1. Apply a test area consisting of a typical overhead fireproofing

installation, including not less than 4.5 m (15 feet) of beam and

deck.

a. Apply to one column.

b. Apply for the hourly ratings used.

2. Install in location selected by the Resident Engineer, for approval

by the representative of the fireproofing material manufacturer and

by the Government.

3. Perform Bond test on painted steel in accordance with ASTM E736.

4. Do not proceed in other areas until installation of test area has

been completed and approved.

5. Keep approved installation area open for observation as criteria for

sprayed-on fireproofing.

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic

designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C841-03.................Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring

C847-06.................Metal Lath

E84-08..................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials

E119-08.................Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials


E605-93 (R2006).........Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive

Materials Applied to Structural Members

E736-00.................Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive

Materials Applied to Structural Members

E759-92 (R2005).........The Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-

Resistive Material Applied to Structural

Members

E760-92 (R2005).........Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive

Material Applied to Structural Members

E761-92 (R2005).........Compressive Strength of Fire-Resistive Material

Applied to Structural Members

E859-93 (R2006).........Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials

Applied to Structural Members

E937-93 (R2005).........Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive

Material Applied to Structural Members

E1042-02................Acoustically, Absorptive Materials Applied by

Trowel or Spray.

G21-96 (R2002)..........Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

Fire Resistance Directory...Latest Edition including Supplements

D. Warnock Hersey (WH):

Certification Listings..Latest Edition

E. Factory Mutual System (FM):

Approval Guide..........Latest Edition including Supplements

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING

A. ASTM E1042, Class (a), Category A.

1. Type I, factory mixed cementitious materials with approved

aggregate.

2. Type II, factory mixed mineral fiber with integral inorganic binders

minimum 240 kg/m3 (15 1b/ft3) density per ASTM E605 test unless

specified otherwise. Use in areas that are completely encased.

B. Materials containing asbestos are not permitted.

C. Fireproofing characteristics when applied in the thickness and density

required to achieve the fire-rating specified.


Characteristic Test Results

1. Deflection ASTM E759 No cracking, spalling, or delamination when backing to which it is applied has a deflection up to 1/120 in 3m (10 ft.)

2. Corrosion-Resistance ASTM E937 No promotion of corrosion of steel.

3. Bond Impact ASTM E760 No cracking, spalling, or delamination.

4. Cohesion/Adhesion

(Bond Strength)

ASTM E736 Minimum cohesive/adhesive strength of 9.57 kPa (200 lbf/ft2) for protected areas. 19.15 kPa (400 lbf/ft2) for exposed areas.

5. Air Erosion ASTM E859 Maximum gain weight of the collecting filter 0.27gm/m2 (0.025 gm/ft2).

6. Compressive Strength ASTM E761 Minimum compressive strength 36 kPa (5 lbf/in2).

7. Surface Burning Characteristics with adhesive and sealer to be used

ASTM E84 Flame spread 25 or less smoke developed 50 or less

8. Fungi Resistance ASTM G21 Resistance to mold growth when inoculated with aspergillus niger (28 days for general application)

2.2 ADHESIVE

A. Bonding adhesive for Type II (fibrous) materials as recommended and

supplied by the fireproofing material manufacturer.

B. Adhesive may be an integral part of the material or applied separately

to surface receiving fireproofing material.

2.3 SEALER

A. Sealer for Type II (fibrous) material as recommended and supplied by

the fireproofing material manufacturer.

B. Surface burning characteristics as specified for fireproofing material.

C. Fungus resistant.

D. Sealer may be an integral part of the material or applied separately to

the exposed surface. When applied separately use contrasting color

pigmented sealer, white preferred.

2.4 WATER

A. Clean, fresh, and free from organic and mineral impurities.


B. pH of 6.9 to 7.1.

2.5 MECHANICAL BOND MATERIAL

A. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847, minimum weight of 0.92 kg/m2 (1.7 pounds

per square yard).

B. Fasteners: ASTM C841.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify surfaces to receive fireproofing are clean and free of dust,

soot, oil, grease, water soluble materials or any foreign substance

which would prevent adhesion of the fireproofing material.

B. Verify hangers, inserts and clips are installed before the application

of fireproofing material.

C. Verify ductwork, piping, and other obstructing material and equipment

is not installed that will interfere with fireproofing installation.

D. Verify concrete work on steel decking and concrete encased steel is

completed.

E. Verify temperature and enclosure conditions are required by fire-

proofing material manufacturer.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Do not start application until written approval has been obtained from

manufacturer of fireproofing materials that surfaces have been

inspected by the manufacturer or his representative, and are suitable

to receive sprayed-on fireproofing.

B. Coordinate application of fireproofing material with other trades.

C. Application of Metal Lath:

1. Apply to beam and columns having painted surfaces which fail ASTM

E736 Bond Test requirements in pre-application test area.

2. Apply to beam flanges 300 mm (12-inches) or more in width.

3. Apply to column flanges 400 mm (16-inches) or more in width.

4. Apply to beam or column web 400 mm (16-inches) or more in depth.

5. Tack weld or mechanically fasten on maximum of 300 mm (12-inch)

center.

6. See design criteria section of the approved assemblies used.

7. Lap and tie lath member in accordance with ASTM C841.

D. Mix and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Mechanically control material and water ratios.


2. Apply adhesive and sealer, when not an integral part of the

materials, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3. Apply to density and thickness indicated in UL Fire Resistance

Directory, FM Approval Guide, or WH Certification Listings unless

specified otherwise. Test in accordance with ASTM E119.

4. Minimum applied dry density per cubic meter (cubic foot) for the

underside of the walk on deck (interstitial) hung purl in or beam

and steel deck, columns in interstitial spaces and mechanical

equipment rooms shall be as follows:

a. Type I - 240 kg/m3 (15 lb/ft3).

b. Type II - 350 kg/m3 (22 lb/ft3).

E. Application shall be completed in one area, inspected and approved by

Resident Engineer before removal of application equipment and

proceeding with further work.

3.3 FIELD TESTS

A. Tests of applied material will be performed by VA retained Testing

Laboratory. See Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

B. Resident Engineer will select area to be tested in specific bays on

each floor using a geometric grid pattern.

C. Test for thickness and density in accordance with ASTM E605. Areas

showing thickness less than that required as a result of fire endurance

test will be rejected.

D. Areas showing less than required fireproofing characteristics will be

rejected on the following field tests.

1. Test for cohesion/adhesion: ASTM E736.

2. Test for bond impact strength: ASTM E760.

3.3 PATCHING AND REPAIRING

A. Inspect after mechanical, electrical and other trades have completed

work in contact with fireproofing material, but before sprayed material

is covered by subsequent construction.

B. Perform corrective measures in accordance with fireproofing material

Manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Respray areas requiring additional fireproofing material to provide

the required thickness, and replace dislodged or removed material.

2. Spray material for patching by machine directly on point to be

patched, or into a container and then hand apply.

3. Hand mixing of material is not permitted.

C. Repair:


1. Respray all test and rejected areas.

2. Patch fireproofing material which is removed or disturbed after

approval.

D. Perform final inspection of sprayed areas after patching and repair.

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Spray-on fireproofing materials are restricted on the surfaces listed in Schedule A. This does not exempt these surfaces from the required fire protection. Designer must select other fire protection measures, like enclosing in plaster or concrete to provide necessary fire rating.

3.5 SCHEDULE

A. Apply fireproofing material in interior structural steel members // and

on underside of interior steel floor and roof decks //, except on

following surfaces:

1. Structural steel and underside of steel decks in elevator or

dumbwaiter machine rooms.

2. Steel members in elevator hoist ways.

3. Areas used as air handling plenums.

4. Steel to be encased in concrete or designated to receive other type

of fireproofing.

B. Type I:

1. One hour fire rating.

2. Two hour fire rating.

3. Three hour fire rating.

C. Type II:

1. One hour fire rating.

2. Two hour fire rating.

E N D

Stuckeman Family Building 11-19-10

Technical Glass Products has included notes in this specification to assist you in tailoring the content to your project. These comments will appear on your screen in blue. To hide them and view only the specification, do the following: Click on “Tools” on your Microsoft Word toolbar. Under Tools, select “Options.” On the “View” tab, under “Formatting Marks,” remove the check mark from the “Hidden Text” box. Then click “OK.” All blue text will then be hidden. For assistance, call Technical Glass Products at 1-800-426-0279.

SECTION 08 41 23 - FIRE RATED ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS-FIREFRAMES® ALUMINUM SERIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Fire rated glazing and framing systems for installation as [vision lights in fire rated

doors,] [sidelights,] [borrowed lights,] [windows,] and [Transoms] or [wall sections] in interior openings

Related Sections: 1. Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing:” Steel attachment members 2. Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications:” Steel attachment members inserts and anchors 3. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” Flashing between this work and other

work 4. Section 07 84 00 “Firestopping:” Firestops between work of this section and other fire

resistive assemblies. 5. Section 08 11 13 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” Hollow Metal doors prepped for the

work of this section. 6. Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware:” Door hardware other than that provided by the work

of this section 7. Section 08 71 13 “Automatic Door Operators” opener for door to comply with ADA and

Local Authority opening force requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. Fire safety related:

a. ASTM E119: Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. b. ASTM E2074-00: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,

Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.

c. ASTM E2010-01: Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.

2. Material related

a. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2007.

b. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2006b.


B. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2007

C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc 1. BHMA A156 - American National Standards for door hardware; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA

A156).

D. Canadian Standards 1. CAN4-S104-M, “Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. CAN4-S106-M, “Standard Method for Fire Tests of Window and Glass Block

Assemblies”

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of Building Construction & Materials 3. NFPA 252: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 4. NFPA 257: Fire Test of Window Assemblies

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10 B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 3. UL 10 C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window & Door Assemblies 4. UL 263: Fire tests of Building Construction and Materials 5. UL-752 Ratings of Bullet-Resistant Materials

G. Uniform Building Code 1. UBC 7-2 (1997) -- Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Parts I and II 2. UBC 7-4 (1997) -- Fire Tests of Window Assemblies

H. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings

I. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC 16 CFR 120: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

J. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2005


A. Fire Rating Requirements Duration – Doors: Capable of providing a fire rating for [20] [45] [60] minutes. 2. Duration – Windows Capable of providing a fire rating for [45], [60] minutes. 3. Duration – Walls: Capable of providing a fire rating for [60] minutes.

B. Delegated design: For the performance requirements listed below requiring structural design provide data, calculations and drawings signed and sealed by an engineer licensed in the state [province] where the project is located.

Structural Performance 1. Design and size the system to withstand structural forces placed upon it without damage

or permanent set when tested in accordance with ASTM E330 using load 1.5 times the design wind loads and of 10 seconds in duration.


2. Positive wind load:[______lbf/sq ft.][as indicated on the drawings] 3. Negative wind Load:[______lbf/sq ft.][as indicated on the drawings] 4. Member deflection: Limit deflection of the edge of the glass normal to the plane of the

glass to [flexure limit of glass][1/175 of the glass edge length or ¾ inch, which ever is less][of any framing member

5. Accommodate movement between storefront and adjoining systems 6. Accommodate anticipated story drift

D. Story Drift provide systems that accommodate the design displacement of adjacent stories of [_____] [as indicated on structural drawings] as measured per AAMA 501.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section <Insert Section #>.

B. Product Data: include laboratory test data.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations and details of product showing component dimensions; framed

opening requirements, dimensions, tolerances, and attachment to structure 2. Provide templates for the location of embeds and anchor locations required for any

adjoining work

D. Design Data (if engineered)

E. Powder coat finish systems offered and provided by Technical Glass Products are manufactured by Tiger Drylac only.

F. Hardware schedule: List of manufacture supplied hardware and verification of cylinder size complying with Section 08 71 00.

G. Samples for Initial Color Selection: For aluminum frames with factory-applied powder coat color finishes. 1. Triplicate copies of manufacturer's powder coating color charts showing the full range of

colors available.

H. Verification Sample of selected finish on aluminum sample piece.

I. Samples: For following products: Two 8-inch by 10-inch Samples for glass.

K.. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

K. Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product descriptions, technical data and installation instructions. Including blank warranty form.

L. Installer Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Manufacturer’s Certificate


N. Field Quality-control reports:

O. Maintenance Data

P. Warranties: Submit manufacturer’s warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in the Owner’s name and registered with the manufacturer.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications:

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated.

E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Door assembly must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.

F. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257, ASTM E119.

Certification: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. [Door assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of ASTM E2074-00, NFPA

252, UL 9, UL 10-C Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.] 2. [Window assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of ASTM E2010-01, NFPA

257, UL 10-B, UL 10-C Standard methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.] 3. [Wall assemblies shall be tested to the acceptance criteria of ASTM E119, NFPA 251,

UL 263 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.] 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) shall conduct fire test.

Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by an approved independent agency maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing.

I. Door assemblies shall be marked with the hourly rating followed by the letter "S". The letter "S" indicates air leakage resistance testing conformance to UBC 7-2 Parts I and II.

J. Window assemblies with ratings of less than 60 minutes may be tested in accordance with ASTM E2010-01, NFPA 257, UBC 7-4, UL 9, CAN4-S106 Standard Test Methods.

K. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:


Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with [Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG),"] [ANSI A117.1,] [FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards,"] as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy

to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having

jurisdiction. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:

a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.

PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to the work of this section.


A. Deliver, store and handle under provisions specified by manufacturer. 1. At delivery inspect all containers for damage. 2. Examine glass and frame units for damage. 3. List all damage to containers on the shipping company’s Bill of Lading 4. Report damage to manufacturer immediately. 5. Store glazing materials and frame units in original packing containers 6. Do not expose glazing material of frame units to sunlight and weather. 7. Do not store horizontally. 8. Place glass and frames upright, no less than 6 degrees from vertical. 9. Store all materials in dry conditions, off the ground. 10. Protect from construction activities. 11. Fully support Glass units along entire length 12. Non-abrasive pads such as cloth or cork must separate glass and frame units. 13. Do not stack containers


A. Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication of frame units. If field measurements will not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of other sections. 1. Note whether field or planned dimensions were used in the creation of the shop drawings.

B. Coordinate the work of this section with others effected including but not limited to: other exterior envelope components and door hardware beyond that provided by this section

1.9 WARRANTY


A. Provide the Pilkington Pyrostop® and Frame supplier’s limited five-year warranty dated from substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS - FIRE RATED [DOOR ASSEMBLY] [WINDOW] [WALL ASSEMBLY]

A. Manufacturer Glazing Material: “Pilkington Pyrostop®” fire-rated glazing as manufactured by the Pilkington Group and distributed by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 (800-426-0279) fax (800-451-9857) e-mail [email protected], web site http://www.fireglass.com

B. Frame System: “Fireframes® Aluminum Series” fire-rated frame system as manufactured and supplied by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 (800-426-0279) fax (800-451-9857) e-mail [email protected] web site http://www.fireglass.com

C. Substitutions: No substitutions allowed.

2.2 MATERIALS - GLASS

Fire Rated Glazing: Composed of multiple sheets of Pilkington “Optiwhite” low iron, high-visible-light transmission glass laminated with an intumescent interlayer.

B. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. I and II).

C. Properties Interior Glazing Property Fire Rating 60 minute Manufacturer’s designation 60-101 Glazing type Single Nominal Thickness 7/8” (23mm) Weight in lbs/ft2 10.85 Daylight Transmission 88% Sound Transmission Coefficient 41dB Bullet Resistance Rating per UL-752 Level I

D. Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product, manufacture, testing laboratory (UL), fire rating period, safety glazing standards, and date of manufacture.

E. Glazing Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard compression gaskets, spacers, setting blocks and other accessories necessary for a complete installation.

2.3 MATERIALS –ALUMINUM FRAMING

A. Aluminum Framing System [60 min.] 1. Steel Frame: The steel framing members are made of two halves, nom. 1.916 in. wide (48

mm) with a nom. minimum depth of 1.3 in. (33 mm) with lengths cut according to glazing size.


2. Aluminum Trim — Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom. 1-916 in. (40 mm) wide with a nom. depth of 1.3 in. (33 mm) with lengths cut according to glazing size.

3. Stainless Steel Spacers — Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter with a nom. minimum depth of 1-1/16 in. (23 mm) with depth adjusted to match Pilkington Pyrostop® Panel thickness.

4. Framing Member Fasteners — Supplied with the steel framing members. Screws have a nom. ¼ in. (6.35 mm) diameter with a minimum length of 2.363 in. (60 mm). Screws to be sized to accommodate the thickness of the fire resistant glazing material.

5. Glazing Tape — Supplied with the steel framing members. Nom. ½ in. (12.7 mm) by ¼ in. (6.5 mm) closed cell PVC glazing tape applied to the steel framing members to cushion and seal the glazing material when installed.

2.4 MATERIALS – DOORS

Manufacturer’s standard [single leaf] and [double leaf] door[s] with manufacture’s standard hardware

B. Coordinate door hardware with cylinder specified in Section 08 71 00 Hardware

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Field glaze door and frame assemblies.

B. Factory prepare steel door assemblies field mounting of hardware

C. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate fire rated assembly to field dimensions.

D. Obtain reviewed Shop Drawings prior to fabrication.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish frames after assembly.

C. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.

ALUMINUM FINISHES A (matches Curtain Wall Specs)

A. Color-Coated Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard powder coating finish system applied to factory-assembled frames before shipping, complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's

sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.


C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

D. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

E. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

F. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black]. 2. Color: [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry

colors and color densities].

G. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA [2604] [2605] and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

H. High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's

sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

2.8 DOOR HARDWARE FOR SINGLE AND PAIRED DOORS

A. Furnish hardware with [20], [45], [60] minute fire door by the manufacturer. Select hardware from door manufacturer’s standard recommended and approved hardware groups as specified in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”. 1. All hardware BHMA Certified

Provide high traffic areas or areas requiring a door motion force of greater than 20 pounds with power assisted hardware for use with manufacturer’s frame system.

Operating hardware for Fireframes® [Heat Barrier Series] [Designer Series] Single In swing Doors with Mortise Locking. Each to have the following.

Item Description Manufacturer Finish* 3 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass Products PTM


1 Lever Trim Narrow Escutcheon Lever Trim Set HBSR2NN#-x6-yyy-630

Technical Glass Products 630

1 Mortise Lock Mortise lock with panic function Technical Glass Products 630 1 Cylinder European Profile Schlage C

Keyway Technical Glass Products 626

1 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Closer Dorma 689 1 Auto door Bottom 420APKL Smoke Seal Pemko MA 1 Weather Seal Perimeter Gasket Technical Glass Products Balance of hardware by others

D. Operating hardware for Fireframes® [Heat Barrier Series] [Designer Series] Single Outswing Doors with Mortise Locking. Each to have the following.

Item Description Manufacturer Finish* 3 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass Products PTM 1 Lever Trim LX Series Control Trim Lever Set

HBSR1GN#-*#-yyy-630 Technical Glass Products 630

1 Mortise Lock Mortise lock with panic function Technical Glass Products 630 1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C Keyway Technical Glass Products 626 1 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Closer Dorma 689 1 Auto door Bottom 420APKL Smoke Seal Pemko MA 1 Weather Seal Perimeter Gasket Technical Glass Products * Provide one additional pivot for 90 minute rated doors. Balance of hardware by others

E. Operating hardware for Fireframes® [Heat Barrier Series] [Designer Series] Single Outswing Doors with Exit Device. Each to have the following.

Item Description Manufacturer Finish* 3 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass Products PTM 1 Exit Device F5300 Rim Dorma 630 1 Lever Trim Rectangular lever handle Technical Glass Products 630 1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C Keyway Technical Glass Products 626 1 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Closer Dorma 689 1 Auto door Bottom 420APKL Smoke Seal Pemko MA 1 Weather Seal Perimeter Gasket Technical Glass Products Balance of hardware by others

F. Operating hardware for Fireframes® [Heat Barrier Series] [Designer Series] Active-Fixed Inswing Pair of Doors with Mortise Locking. Each pair to have the following.

Item Description Manufacturer Finish* 6 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass Products PTM 1 Lever Trim Narrow Escutcheon Lever Trim

Set HBSR2NN#-x6-yyy-630 Technical Glass Products 630

1 Mortise Lock Mortise lock with panic function Technical Glass Products 630 1 Cylinder European Profile Schlage C

Keyway Technical Glass Products 626

2 Cylinder Cover Plates Profile cylinder cover plate Technical Glass Products 626 2 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Closer Dorma 689 1 Coordinator GSR Dorma 689 1 Flush Bolt Set Automatic or Semi-Automatic

Flush bolt with dust proof recessed strike

Trimco 626

2 Auto door Bottoms 420APKL Smoke Seal Pemko MA 1 Weather Seal Perimeter Gasket Technical Glass Products Balance of hardware by others


G. Operating hardware for Fireframes® [Heat Barrier Series] [Designer Series] Active-Fixed Outswing Pair of Doors with Mortise Locking. Each pair to have the following.

Item Description Manufacturer Finish* 6 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass Products PTM 1 Lever Trim LX Series Control Trim Lever Set

HBSR1GN#-*#-yyy-630 Technical Glass Products 630

1 Mortise Lock Mortise lock with panic function Technical Glass Products 630 1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C Keyway Technical Glass Products 630 2 Cylinder Cover Plates Profile cylinder cover plate Technical Glass Products 626 2 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Closer Dorma 689 1 Coordinator GSR Dorma 689 1 Flush Bolt Set Automatic or Semi-Automatic


Trimco 626


H. Operating hardware for Fireframes® [Heat Barrier Series] [Designer Series] Active-Fixed Pair of Doors with Exit Device Outswing. Each pair to have the following.

Item Description Manufacturer Finish* 6 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass Products PTM 1 Exit Device F5300 Rim Dorma 630 1 Lever Trim Rectangular lever handle Technical Glass Products 630 1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C Keyway Technical Glass Products 626 2 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Closer Dorma 689 1 Coordinator GSR Dorma 689 1 Flush Bolt Set Automatic or Semi-Automatic


Trimco 626


I. Operating hardware for Fireframes® [Heat Barrier Series] [Designer Series] Active-Active Pair of Doors with Exit Device Outswing. Each pair to have the following.

Item Description Manufacturer Finish* 6 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass Products PTM 2 Exit Device F5100 Concealed Dorma 630 2 Lever Trim Rectangular lever handles Technical Glass Products 630 1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C Keyway Technical Glass Products 626 2 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Closer Dorma 689 1 Coordinator GSR Dorma 689 1 Auxiliary Fire Latch Used with exit device with no

bottom rod Technical Glass Products 630


* FINISH LEGEND: PTM Painted to match frame MA Mill Finish Aluminum 689 Aluminum Paint 630 Satin Stainless Steel 626 Satin Chrome Plated


2.9 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for [30-mil] [0.762-mm] thickness per coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and members to which the work of this section attaches or adjoins prior to frame installation.

B. Provide openings plumb, square and within allowable tolerances. 1. The manufacturer recommends 3/8 inch shim space at all walls

C. Notify Architect of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed fire wall / door system.

D. Do not proceed until such conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions and reviewed shop drawings.

Install fully fire [window] [wall] [door] in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed to produce a watertight installation

D. Install fire safing / fire stopping at edges of system

E. Install glazing in strict accordance with fire resistant glazing material manufacturer’s specifications. Field cutting or tampering is not permissible.

F. Do not install damaged frames or chipped glassing units.

G. Install plumb and true. Limit out of plumb or true to 1/8 inch in 10’-0” in any dimension.

3.3 REPAIR AND TOUCH UP

A. Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer’s recommended products. 1. Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view. 2. Repairs and touch-up not visible from a distance of 5 feet Owner and Architect to

approve.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged.



A. Owner or [Contractor] will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field tests and inspections of entrance system.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust door function and hardware for smooth operation. Coordinate with other hardware suppliers for function and use of any other attached hardware.

3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface`. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small amount of

mild soap and water or mild detergent. 2. Bullet resistant glazing materials employing PVB layer on exterior surface 3. Protect surface applied film. Do not use any of the following:

a. Steam jets b. Abrasives c. Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents d. Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer e. Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones,

alcohols, aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Katz Law Building 11-19-10 08 44 13 Aluminum Curtain Wall

GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS - SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

Manko Window Systems Inc. 250 SERIES

SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. All exterior curtain walls systems furnished and installed as shown on drawings, specified in this section. 2. All labor, materials, tools, equipment and services needed to furnish and install Architectural Performance Class

curtain walls. 3. Components furnished with installed curtain walls. 4. Installation accessories furnished and installed. 5. Single Source Requirement

a. All products listed in Section 08400; 08500; 08800; and 08900 shall be by the same manufacturer. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Wind Loads 1. The design wind pressure for the project will be: (Specify)

a. ___ psf positive and negative; ___ psf negative at corner zones b. Per wind pressure diagram c. Per local building codes

2. All structural components, including meeting rails, mullions and anchors shall be designed accordingly, complying with deflection and stress requirements of Paragraph 1.02 B.

[Determination of design load(s) is the sole responsibility of the building's Engineer of Record, considering code interpretation issues and/or prescriptive requirements not included in contract documents. Manko Window Systems, Inc. strongly recommends that design loads (in psf or Pa) specific to all relevant areas of the building be provided by the specifier.]

B. Air, Water and Structural Performance Requirements 1. When tested in accordance with cited test procedures, curtain walls shall meet or exceed the following performance

criteria for Architectural Performance Curtain Walls. 2. Air Test Performance Requirements

a. Air infiltration maximum 0.06 cfm per square foot at 6.24 psf pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.

3. Water Test Performance Requirements a. No uncontrolled water leakage at 15.00 psf static pressure differential, with water application rate of 5

gallons/hr/sq ft when tested in accordance with ASTM E331. 4. Structural Test Performance Requirements

a. Uniform Load Deflection Test i. No deflection of any unsupported span L of test unit (framing rails, muntins, mullions, etc.) in excess of

L/175 at both a positive and negative load of 40 psf (design test pressure) when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.

ii. Structural reinforcing that is not standard on units being furnished is not allowed. b. Uniform Load Structural Test

i. Unit to be tested at 1.5 x design test pressure (60 psf), both positive and negative, acting normal to plane of wall in accordance with ASTM E330.

ii. No glass breakage; permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or anchors; damage to make windows inoperable; or permanent deformation of any main frame or ventilator member in excess of 0.2% of its clear span.

C. Condensation Resistance and Thermal Transmittance Performance Requirements

1. Perform thermal tests in accordance with the configuration specified in AAMA 1503.1. a. Thermal Transmittance ("U" Factor) shall not exceed 0.40 BTU/hr/sf/deg F at 15 mph exterior wind. b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) requirements: CRF minimum 72 (Frame) and CRF minimum 65

(specimen).

[DISCLAIMER: Condensation on interior surfaces of installed curtain wall framing is affected by many variables, including component thermal performance, thermal mass of surrounding materials, interior trim coverage and air flow conditions, weather, and mechanical system design. Since many of these variables are outside of Manko Window Systems, Inc., we can make no representations or warranties against the formation of condensation, except on pre-defined configurations under controlled and steady-state laboratory conditions, as specified above.]


1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements

1. Provide all submittals in a timely manner to meet the required construction completion schedule.

B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings must be prepared wholly by the window manufacturer, or a qualified engineering services firm

under the direction of the manufacturer. Shop drawings for pre-engineered configurations may be prepared by installers authorized per 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

2. Provide design details along with bid proposals to define system aesthetic and functional characteristics. 3. Provide three photocopied sets of shop drawings, including half size details of all necessary conditions.

C. Samples

1. Components: Submit samples of anchors, fasteners, hardware, assembled corner sections and other materials and components as requested by Architect.

2. Finish: Submit color samples for Architect's approval as requested.

D. Test Reports and Calculations 1. Submit certified independent laboratory test reports verifying compliance with all test requirements of 1.02

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS as requested by Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications 1. Upon request, the window manufacturer will provide written confirmation that the installer is authorized to install

window products to be used on this project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading 1. Materials will be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored and protected in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Aluminum Curtain Wall Warranty 1. Products: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, for a period of 2 years (10 years for

insulated glass seal failure) from the date of manufacture, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements and industry standards, which results in premature failure of the curtain walls, finish, glass, or parts, outside of normal wear.

a. In the event that curtain walls or components are found defective, manufacturer will repair or provide replacements without charge at manufacturer’s option.

b. Warranty for all components must be direct from the manufacturer (non-pass through) and non-prorated for the entire term. Warranty must be assignable to the non-residential owner, and transferable to subsequent owners through its length.

2. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window installer, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements, which result in premature failure.

a. In the event that installation of windows or components is found to be defective, installer will repair or provide replacements without charge at the installer’s option.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Drawings and specifications are based on:

a. Manko Window Systems, Inc. 250 Series Curtain Wall. i. Base bid will be Manko Window Systems, Inc.

B. Substitutions

1. Other manufacturers’ products that meet or exceed specified design requirements may be considered. Submit the following information with request for substitutions at least ten (10) working days prior to bid date.

a. Test reports specified in 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS b. Full proposal details and samples specified in 1.03 SUBMITTALS c. Copy of manufacturer's warranty specified in 1.06 WARRANTY d. Other information as requested for evaluation

2. Substitute products not pre-approved by the Architect via addenda will not be considered.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members

1. Extruded aluminum prime billet 6063-T5 or 6063-T6 alloy for primary components; 6063-T5, 6063-T6, or 6061-T6 for structural components; all meeting the requirements of ASTM B221.

2. Aluminum sheet alloy 5005 H 32 (for anodic finish), meeting the requirements of ASTM B209 or alloy 3003 H 14 (for painted or unfinished sheet).


2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Materials

1. Principal curtain wall frame members will be a minimum 0.094" in thickness at all structural areas, hardware mounting webs, and section flanges.

2. Extruded or formed trim components will be a minimum 0.062" in thickness.

B. Fabrication 1. Frame depth 5-5/8”, 6-5/8”, 7-5/8”, 8-7/8” or custom. (Specify) 2. Face depth 2-1/2”. 3. Frame sections must be tubular.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. All steel components including attachment fasteners to be 300 series stainless steel except as noted. B. Extruded aluminum components 6063-T5 or 6063-T6. C. Glazing gaskets shall comply with ASTM C864 and be extruded of a silicone compatible EPDM rubber, or other suitable

compound. D. Hardware:

1. Fixed -- No Hardware Required E. Sealants

1. All sealants shall comply with applicable provisions of AAMA 800 and/or Federal Specifications FS-TT-001 and 002 Series.

2. Frame joinery sealants shall be suitable for application specified and as tested and approved by window manufacturer.

F. Glass

1. Provide in accordance with Section 08800. 2. Sealed insulated glass shall meet ASTM E774 Class A.

G. Glazing

1. Provide in general accordance with Section 08800. 2. Glazing method shall be in general accordance with the FGMA Glazing Manual for specified glass type, or as

approved by the glass fabricator. H. Glazing Materials

1. Setting Blocks/Edge Blocking: Provide in sizes and locations recommended by FGMA Glazing Manual. 2. Back-bedding tapes, expanded cellular glazing tapes, toe beads, heel beads and cap beads shall meet the

requirements of applicable specifications cited in AAMA 800. 3. Structural silicone sealant where used shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1184. 4. Spacer tape in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be tested for compatibility and approved by the

sealant manufacturer for the intended application. Gaskets in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be extruded silicone or compatible material.

I. Steel Components

1. Provide steel reinforcements as necessary to meet the system performance requirements of 1.02. 2. Concealed steel anchors and reinforcing shall be factory painted after fabrication with rust-inhibitive primer

complying with Federal Specification TT-P-645.

J. Muntins: (Optional) 1. Provide muntin grids as shown on architectural drawings. 2. Finish to match window frames.

K. Access Panels: (Optional - Hinged or lift out)

1. Miter all corners and mechanically stake over a solid aluminum corner block, leaving hairline joinery, then sealed weather tight.

2. Access panel joinery shall not be exposed to the exterior. 3. Access panels (when hinged) will be side-hinged and in-swing type. 4. Hinged access panels will be hinged on the interior left jamb with the lock located on interior right jamb. 5. Two locks will be provided at the interior right jamb of hinged access panels that exceed 40” in height.

L. Integral Venetian Blinds: (Optional)

1. 5/8” wide aluminum slat blinds. Blind color shall be _________ (Select from manufacturer standard). 2. Blind to be integrally mounted between the dual glazing. 3. Tilt-control knob will be located on the interior face of access panel at the bottom of the right jamb. Raise and lower

pull cords will be located between glass for access only when access panel is opened. 4. Tilt-control knob will incorporate a “slip clutch” feature.


5. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subjected to a temperature differential from -30 degrees F to +180 degrees F.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Finish, fabricate and shop assemble frame and sash members into complete windows under the responsibility of

one manufacturer. 2. No bolts, screws or fastenings to bridge thermal barrier or impair independent frame movement. 3. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subjected to a temperature differential from -30 degrees

F to +180 degrees F. B. Frames:

1. Mechanically fasten each horizontal over a solid extruded aluminum shear block leaving only hairline joinery, then seal weather tight.

C. Sunshades: (Optional)

1. Sunshades shall consist of outriggers, louvers, and fascia which may be selected from standard configurations, modified configurations, or custom configurations.

2. Finish as specified in 2.05 FINISHES.

D. Glass Drainage: 1. Provision shall be made to insure that water will not accumulate and remain in contact with the perimeter area of

sealed insulated glass.

2.06 FINISHES A. Finish of Aluminum Components

1. Finish of all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components shall be done in accordance with the appropriate AAMA Voluntary Guide Specification shown (select from below).

Designation Description Standard Color

AAM12C21A31 Clear - Class II AAMA 611 Clear AAM12C21A41 Clear - Class I AAMA 611 Clear

AAM12C21A44 Electrolytically AAMA 611 Champagne, Light Bronze,

Deposited – Class I Medium Bronze, Dark Bronze, Black

Organic Paint AAMA 2603 As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s (Specify) standard or custom colors - Suitable for INTERIOR Finishes

Organic Paint AAMA 2605 As selected by Architect from

manufacturer’s standard colors - suitable for INTERIOR or

EXTERIOR finishes PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions 1. Verify that building substrates permit installation of windows according to the manufacturer's instructions, approved

shop drawings, calculations and contract documents. 2. Do not install windows until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erection of Aluminum Windows

1. Install windows with skilled tradesman in exact accordance with approved shop drawings, installation instructions, specifications, and AAMA 101/I.S.2.

2. Windows must be installed plumb, square and level for proper weathering and operation. Jambs must not be “sprung”, bowed or warped during installation.

3. Aluminum that is not organically coated shall be insulated from direct contact with steel, masonry, concrete or other dissimilar metals by bituminous paint, zinc chromate primer, nonconductive shims or other suitable insulating material.

[DISCLAIMER: Manko Window Systems, Inc. takes no responsibility for product selection or application, including, but not limited to, compliance with building codes, safety codes, laws, merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, and further disclaims all liability for the use, in whole or in part, of these guide specifications in preparation of project specifications and/or other documents. Guide specifications are subject to change at any time, without notice, and at Manko Window Systems, Inc. sole discretion.]

Eastview Terrace / 92-07 / 10-6-92 08 52 00 - 1 Hung Windows

SECTION 08520

1207 SERIES THERMAL HUNG WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL

A. Supply and install 1207 Series Thermal (Single or Double) Hung Windows, fixed windows, FULWAL curtainwall, and other components in accordance with this Section and as indicated on Architectural Drawings.

B. Division One shall be deemed to be a part of this Section. C. The Conditions of Contract shall be deemed to be a part of this Section. In the event of conflict, Conditions of Contract prevail.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 07900 Sealants, caulking and seals B. Section 08400 Entrances and storefronts C. Section 08800 Glass and glazing D. Section 08900 Curtainwall E. Section 10200 Louvers

1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. AAMA Installation of Aluminum Curtain Walls B. AAMA 502 Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors C. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum D. AAMA 902 Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances E. AAMA 1503 Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed

Wall Sections F. AAMA 2603 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on

Aluminum Extrusions and Panels G. AAMA 2604 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic

Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels H. AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings

on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels I. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass

Doors J. ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads For Buildings And Other Structures K. ASTM E 283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors

Note re USING THIS DOCUMENT: All text within boxes offers assistance with project-specific choices required to complete this Specification. Please delete these boxes prior to publication. All underlined spaces or text between brackets -- eg: (___) -- must be completed by the Specifier to suit project’s requirements.

Note re RELATED WORK: Check against project’s requirements and revise appropriately. Also, the Specifier should clearly indicate which of the following ( and which other materials/operations ) are to be supplied and/or installed by this Contractor or other Trades.

Note re 1207 SERIES: 1207 is available as single hung ( Style A ) or double hung (Style B). Indicate preference by filling in the blank in 1.01 below, and elsewhere in Specification as indicated.


L. ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

M. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

N. ASTM E 547 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference

O. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance TM-3000(97) Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units 1.04 STRUCTURAL PROPERTIES

A. DESIGN WIND PRESSURE: Design wind pressure for this project is (__) psf inward acting pressure, and (___) psf outward acting pressure, in accordance with ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads For Buildings And Other Structures.

B. UNIFORM LOAD DEFLECTION: The maximum allowable deflection of any principal member in a direction normal to the plane of the wall when subjected to the specified design wind pressure is (L/__) of its unsupported span, but not more than (__) inch. Where plastered, dry-walled, or other materials or components that will be impaired by the normally allowable deflection are attached, deflection shall not exceed (__) inch at those locations.

C. UNIFORM LOAD STRUCTURAL: When subjected to uniform loads equal to 1.5 times design wind pressure, the window system shall display no glass breakage or displacement related to the imposed load; no damage to fasteners or anchors; and no permanent deformation of any principal member impairing the function of the system.

D. DEAD LOAD: Deflection of any principal member in a direction parallel to the plane of the wall, when carrying its full dead load, shall not reduce glass bite below 75% of the design dimension; and the member shall have a 1/8” minimum clearance between itself and the top of the adjacent materials below. Clearance between a member and operable window or door shall be at least 1/16”.

E. LIVE LOAD: The window system and its anchorage shall accommodate a deflection at mid-point between columns of (___) inch caused by uniform and concentrated live loads on floors or load-bearing elements to which the system is anchored.


A. MANUFACTURER: System shall be completely fabricated by the approved Manufacturer. All glazing shall be factory installed. B. WINDOW CONTRACTOR: Window Contractor shall possess and shall demonstrate ongoing expertise with work of similar or

greater scope over a period of at least 5 years. Supply supporting references upon request.

C. OPTIONAL CLAUSE: Field Testing (OR Mock-Up Laboratory Testing OR Visual Mock-Ups): Window Contractor shall have tested (specify quantity) window in accordance with AAMA 502 Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors, using Test Method A, and as follows: (___________________________________________________). Window Contractor shall be responsible for cost of supply and installation of the specimen(s). The Owner shall be responsible for all other costs. The specimen(s) shall not be part of the completed project, except at the Owner’s sole discretion. The Manufacturer and the Window Contractor reserve the right to receive reasonable notification regarding, and to attend, all tests.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. STANDARD LABORATORY TESTING: Submit documentation certifying compliance with HC-55 Performance Grade, in accordance with ANSI-AAMA-NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 Standard, and based on Gateway Size 60”x 96”window. Window shall satisfy all requirements of the Standard, including those listed below. Where specified performance exceeds the minimum requirements of the Standard, the requirements specified herein prevail, and as follows:

1. AIR LEAKAGE: Air leakage shall not exceed 0.10 cfm/ft2 with static air pressure differential of 1.57 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.

2. WATER PENETRATION (STATIC): No uncontrolled water penetration shall occur with static air pressure differential of 12 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.

3. WATER PENETRATION (CYCLIC): No uncontrolled water penetration shall occur through four cycles with static air pressure differential of 12 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547.

Note re DESIGN WIND PRESSURE: Using the latest ASCE 7 document ( as referenced by model codes such as BOCA, IBC, etc ), Specifier should determine positive and negative design wind pressure, and insert in 1.04.A. Specifier also must list all other requirements. Bid Documents (especially elevation drawings) should highlight areas of the building envelope where more severe loads, or “hot-spots”, occur. Note that deflection limits ( eg: L/175 but less than 3/4” ) may vary between locations and jurisdictions.

Note re PROJECT-SPECIFIC TESTING: Mock-up testing and field testing offer good value, particularly in cases where configurations are complex, the project is large, conditions are severe, or if there is significant custom product development. In addition, “visual” mock-up(s) may be specified; these should include correct finishes and glazing. In all cases, Specification must elaborate quantity and particulars of specimen(s); state which window(s),which tests, test pressure, assumption of cost, etc. AAMA 502 is a widely recognized testing protocol; unless otherwise specified, its default parameters will be assumed.


4. UNIFORM LOAD DEFLECTION: No principal member shall deflect more than 1/175 of its unsupported span when subjected to 55 psf positive and negative pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.

5. UNIFORM LOAD STRUCTURAL: No principal member shall display permanent deformation exceeding 0.4% of its span after being subjected to 82.5 lbs positive and negative pressure in accordance with ASTM E 330.

6. THERMAL PERFORMANCE: Window shall have a Condensation Resistance Factor of not less than 62, and Thermal Transmittance (U-value) not greater than 0.55 BTU, when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Shop Drawings shall bear the stamp of a qualified locally-licensed Professional Engineer, and shall indicate configurations of windows, curtainwall, system dimensions, profiles, finishes, glass types, anchors, drainage, air and vapor barrier if/as specified and indicated, masonry opening requirements and acceptable tolerances, and details of related adjacent construction. Supply (normally one) set of vellums, and (normally six) sets of prints.

C. ENGINEERED CALCULATIONS: Submit calculations to demonstrate that the window or curtainwall system complies with all requirements of this Specification. Calculations shall bear the stamp of a qualified locally-licensed Professional Engineer.

D. SAMPLES: Submit standard samples of windows, curtainwall, glass, and finishes as requested. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All materials supplied by this Section must be handled and stored in such a manner as to eliminate damages and generally maintain original condition of materials. Protection of installed work is not the responsibility of this Section.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Window Contractor shall warrant for five years from the date of Substantial Completion that the work is not defective in workmanship or materials, and conforms to the final approved Shop Drawings, except for reasonable variances not impairing the usefulness thereof. The warranty shall be in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied. The warranty excludes unusual use and abuse, and acts and omissions of other parties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Drawings and Specifications are based on 1207 Series Thermal (Single or Double) Hung Windows. Other manufacturers will be considered provided that they are in complete compliance with this Specification; that they meet all specified requirements; that they can demonstrate ongoing expertise with work of similar or greater scope; and that they receive the written consent of the Architect 10 working days prior to tender closing.


A. Window shall be 1207 Series Thermal (Single or Double) Hung. B. Perimeter frame depth shall be 4”. C. Principal frame, mullion and sash members shall be of thermal-break design, achieving thermal separation between interior and

exterior surfaces. D. Perimeter frame shall include ½” caulking legs, to back up perimeter sealant and accept accessories. Exterior perimeter cavity of

head and jambs shall be filled with polystyrene insulation, to augment caulking leg and to insulate void. Insulation shall not be required when installing into receptors.

E. Except as otherwise required, banked and stacked windows shall be self-mulling, and joined by integral male-female couplers which shall be back-sealed for weather-tightness.

F. Sash operation shall be vertically-sliding with side-loaded sashes. Sashes shall operate by means of block-and-tackle balances, of correct quantity and capacity to hold operating sashes in stationary position. Tilt-in sash operation is not acceptable.

G. Sashes shall accept insulating glass units of 1” overall thickness unless otherwise specified in Section 08800. Sashes shall be marine-glazed. Include pile weather-stripping to maintain specified performance.

H. Sashes shall automatically lock in closed position via spring-loaded latches. I. All assembly screws shall be #400 stainless steel. J. OPTIONAL CLAUSE: Insect Screens: Provide insect screens to cover half of window normally operating. Screen bar shall be

tubular extruded aluminum, finished to match adjacent profiles. Mesh shall be 18 x 14 fiberglass.

Note re WARRANTY: Finishes, glazing, and occasionally other items are subject to pass-through warranties, furnished by the manufacturers and/or applicators of these items. Specifier should elaborate upon these warranties as required.

Note re SPECIFIED SYSTEM: “Default characteristics” of this window are described by this Specification. However, many options are available, such as CMR sweep lock, full screens, etc. Alternate Series 5100 Acoustic Hung has excellent sound attenuation characteristics, and can be split finished. All of these models are available as single or double hung.


K. If the system as indicated is inadequate to satisfy all requirements of this Specification, Window Contractor shall allow for substitution of larger members, reinforcement of members, or other appropriate modifications, and shall advise Architect of same prior to closing of tenders or prior to commencement of preparation of Shop Drawings.

2.03 FIXED WINDOWS

A. Adjacent fixed windows shall be 1200 Series Bull-Nose, and as indicated on Architectural Drawings. Fixed windows shall meet or exceed AW-65 Performance Grade, in accordance with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97.

B. Finish, glazing, frame depth and frame style of fixed windows shall match the hung windows, unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 FABRICATION A. WORKMANSHIP: All members shall be accurately and neatly cut, machined, and assembled to form hairline joints. Seal all

joints, plugs, and components as required to maintain performance characteristics of system as specified. Drainage holes and slots shall be neatly machined to Manufacturer’s specifications.

2.05 MATERIALS

A. ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS: All members shall be extruded from 6063-T5 or 6063-T6 alloy, and shall be free of die lines and other obvious defects impairing their function or appearance.

B. GASKETS & SPLINES: Interior and exterior glazing splines and air-seal gaskets shall be extruded EPDM. C. SETTING BLOCKS: Use compatible blocks of 85 +/- 5 “Shore A” durometer of 4” minimum length, of depth to fully support

glazing, and to conform with IGMA recommendations. D. ANCHORS: Design anchors to secure system to adjacent construction, and to meet all requirements of this Specification. E. SILLS, RECEPTORS, PANNINGS, TRIMS, T-MULLS, CORNERS, BREAK-SHAPES: Supply and install as indicated on

Architectural Drawings and per approved Shop Drawings. Finish shall be as on adjacent window profiles. Where applicable, components shall be thermally improved.

F. INFILL PANELS: Supply and install as indicated on Architectural Drawings. G. CONCEALED FLASHINGS: Supply and install galvanized steel or aluminum shapes of sufficient strength and thickness for

application, as indicated on Architectural Drawings. Apply isolation coatings as required. H. AIR-VAPOR BARRIERS: Supply and install if/as indicated on Architectural Drawings and per approved Shop Drawings to

correctly interface with adjacent air-vapor barriers, and to inhibit peripheral migration of moisture and air between interior and exterior of building envelope. Where practical, all Trades shall leave air-vapor barriers (membranes, flashings, etc) “long” to facilitate marrying with adjacent elements.

2.06 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. OPTIONAL CLAUSE: Travel Limiters: Travel of operable sashes shall be permanently limited to (___) inches. B. OPTIONAL CLAUSE: Emergency Egress Requirements: (___________________) C. OPTIONAL CLAUSE: Window Guards: (_________________________________) D. OPTIONAL CLAUSE: Window Washer Anchors: (__________________________)

2.07 FINISHES

A. INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FINISH: All exposed aluminum extrusions supplied by this Section shall be finished (specify color; if anodized, also specify film thickness) in accordance with AAMA (___) Standard.

2.08 GLASS AND GLAZING

A. Supply and install in accordance with Section 08800. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONDITIONS

A. Prior to commencement of installation, Window Contractor shall perform a thorough field-check to ensure that construction conditions are correct, that dimensions are correct, and that clearances between work of this Section and other Trades have been correctly maintained. Acceptable construction tolerances are specified in AAMA “ Installation of Aluminum Curtain Walls”.

Note re FINISHES: ALL colors and various grades of organic (painted) and anodic finishes are readily available. Standards for organic coatings include AAMA 2603 for acrylic paint finishes; AAMA 2604 for better paint finishes; and AAMA 2605 for superior paint finishes. Anodic finishes normally comply with AAMA 611.

Note re SPLIT FINISHES: Split finishes are chosen for aesthetic considerations and/or to economize by using premium finishes on exterior exposed surfaces only. This option is not available on the 1207 Hung, but is common to the majority of OGEP’s window products, including the 5100 Series Acoustic Hung.


B. If conditions or dimensions are found to be unacceptable, Window Contractor shall suspend work, and shall immediately send written notification and description of the unacceptable conditions/dimensions to General Contractor.

C. Window Contractor shall await written remedial instructions before resumption of work. D. Window Contractor shall not be responsible for any costs or damages relating to delays or remedial work resulting from any

incorrect or unacceptable conditions, dimensions, etc. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install system in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. Work shall be installed square and level. Members shall be adequately supported, free from twisting, sagging, waving, buckling and other obvious defects.

B. Anchors shall hold all components in correct position when subjected to normal specified movements and loads. C. All materials shall be isolated from any contact with dissimilar materials impairing the quality of the system or adjacent

construction, by bituminous paint, zinc chromate primer, non-conductive shims or other suitable material. D. All components shall be left free of excess dirt and debris relating to the installation, and shall be free of scratches, blemishes,

and other obvious defects. 3.03 CLEAN UP

A. All debris attributed to the installation shall be promptly removed to a convenient location on each floor designated, and provided free of charge, by the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall be responsible for removal of debris from the designated location.

B. Protection of the work from other Trades, additional cleaning, and final cleaning are not the responsibility of this Section.

END OF SECTION

FOOTNOTES: Please call FULTON WINDOWS for information about: - How to use and customize this document - 5100 Series Acoustic Hung Windows (5-1/8” & 6” depths) - Optional perimeter framing profiles - Corners, panels, reversed glazing - Screen options - Louvers, grilles, muntins - Developing custom window profiles or systems for your project - ASCE 7 wind-load analysis - Developing specifications for glass and sealants

Katz Building 11/19/2010 08 52 13 - 1 METAL-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS

SECTION 08 52 13.00.PREMIUM SITELINE EX METAL-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS

JELD-WEN® Premium Metal-Clad Wood Siteline Windows

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Awning Windows

B. Casement Windows

C. Double-Hung Windows

D. Horizontal Sliding Windows

E. Radius and Geometric Windows

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer Association (AAMA)

1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 /NAFS; Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors

2. AAMA 2603; Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings an Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

B. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)

1. NFRC 100; Procedure for Determining Fenestration Thermal Properties

2. NFRC 200; Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance

C. Window & Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA)

1. WDMA I.S.4; Water Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork



A. Provide windows capable of complying with requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer’s window that are representative of those specified and that are of test size required by ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101 I.S.2/NAFS.

(Specifier Note: Include window design pressure (DP) ratings as part of the performance requirements. Required DP will vary dependent on project site, the location in the building and window size. Coordinate DP with the Structural Engineer. DP ratings and related window size and style are available at www.jeld-wen.com or by contacting a JELD-WEN representative.)

B. Structural Requirements – Provide windows capable of complying with requirements indicated:

1. Design pressure: [Insert value] [as indicated on drawings] (Specifier Note: Include NFRC ratings as part of the performance requirements. NFRC ratings qualifying for the Energy Star program are based on the performance of the whole window assembly. Qualifying windows vary to fit the needs of different regions throughout the country. NFRC ratings and related JELD-WEN window size and styles are available at www.jeld-wen.com or by contacting a JELD-WEN representative.)

C. NFRC Requirements – Provide windows capable of complying with the following total window ratings:

1. U-Factor: [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC 100.

3. Visible Transmittance (VT): [Insert value] in accordance with NFRC 200.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit window manufacturer current product literature, including installation instruction.

C. Samples: Provide finish samples for all products.


(Specifier Note: DELETE Design Data, Test Reports submittal requirements when propriety specification is used and can be held. MAINTAIN Design Data, Test Reports submittal requirement when other products may be submitted as substitution.)







1. Refer to Section [01 78 00 Closeout Submittals] [Insert section number and title].


A. Qualifications

B. Certifications

1. WDMA Hallmark certification label indicating windows meet the design requirements.

C. Mock-ups

1. Window mock-up shall incorporate surrounding construction, including wall assembly fasteners, flashing, and other related accessories installed in accordance with window manufacturer’s approved installation methods.

a. Mock-up size: [Insert size] [As indicated on drawings.] b. Mock-up may [not] remain as part of the work.

D. Pre-installation Meeting

1. Refer to Section [01 31 19 Project Meetings] [Insert section number and title].



B. Deliver windows materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store windows as recommended by manufacturer.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section [01 78 36 Warranties] [Insert section number and title].


(Specifier Note: DELETE warranty information not specific to project.)

B. Manufacturer standard warranty indicating that the window unit will be free from material and workmanship defects from the date of substantial completion for the time periods indicated below:

1. Window Unit: 20 years

2. Clad Finish: 10 years against peeling, checking, cracking caulk or color change

(Specifier Note: SELECT warranty associated with the glazing types specified. Specialty glazing includes patterned and textured glass. Insulated glass that incorporates a specialty glass may be eligible for an extended warranty, but requires input from the manufacturer. Contact a JELD-WEN representative to discuss design options and their effect on the warranty.)

3. Glazing:

a. Insulated Glass: 20 years against seal breakage b. Specialty Glazing: 5 years against delamination

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Specifier Note: Product Information is proprietary to JELD-WEN. If additional products are required for competitive procurement, contact JELD-WEN for assistance in listing competitive products that may be available.)

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. JELD-WEN Windows and Doors; 3250 Lakeport Blvd. P.O. Box 1329; Klamath Falls, OR 97601-0268, USA; Phone 541.885.7412, fax 541.884.3331; Toll free 800.535. 3936; website www.jeld-wen.com

B. Basis of Design: Windows are based on JELD-WEN® Premium Metal-Clad Wood Siteline EX Windows.

2.2 MATERIALS

(Specifier Note: AuraLast® is a proprietary trademark preservative wood treatment by JELD-WEN and is distinguished from traditional envelope preservation methods due to the vacuum/pressure infused treatment through to the cellular level ensuring a minimum penetration of 92%.)

A. Exterior Wood: Western Pine, preservative treated with AuraLast® in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.



B. Interior Wood: Western Pine


A. Frame


2. Cladding: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) extruded aluminum

3. Jamb Width: 4 -9/16 inch (116mm)

B. Sash


2. Cladding: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) extruded aluminum

(Specifier Note: DELETE Sash Thickness when only radius and geometric window units are specified.)

3. Sash Thickness: 1-7/16 inch (36.5mm)

C. Exterior Trim

1. Nailing Fin and Drip Cap: Integral extruded aluminum on all four sides of frame.

(Specifier Note: SELECT casing options when construction conditions or aesthetics require inclusion. Utilize the following trims for indicated applications - Brickmould in conjunction with masonry veneers, Flat Casing for narrow, Adams Casing for wider aesthetic conditions. DELETE trim options if not project specific.)

2. Factory Applied Casing Options: [Extruded Aluminum Brickmould] [Adams Casing]

3. Casing Options: [3-1/2 inch (88.5mm) Flat Casing] [1-1/2 inch Retrofit Brickmould Casing]

(Specifier Note: DELETE Frame and Mull Expanders when not required for window layout.)

4. Frame Expanders: [1-7/8 inch (48mm)] [3-1/4 inch (83mm)]

5. Mull Expander: [2-1/8 inch (54mm)]

(Specifier Note: DELETE Mull Cap when window layout does not require units to be joined (mulled) together at the factory.)


6. Mull Cap: [standard: 5/16 inch (8mm) wide] [options: [1-3/32 inch (28mm)] [2 inch (51mm)] [4 inch (102mm)] wide]

(Specifier Note: DELETE In-Sash Interior Radius Trim Options when in-sash radius window are not specified.)

D. In-Sash Interior Radius Trim Options

1. Material: [Pine] [Oak]

2. Pattern: [As selected by architect]

3. Casing: [As selected by architect]

(Specifier Note: DELETE Extension Jambs for window styles not project specific.)

E. Factory Applied Extension Jambs: Provide on all four sides of frame interior.

1. [Awning Windows] [Casement Windows] [Radius and Geometric Windows]: from 3-3/16 inch up to 12 inches

2. [Double-Hung Windows] [Horizontal Sliding Windows]: from 4-9/16 inch up to 12 inches

F. Weatherstripping

(Specifier Note: DELETE Weatherstripping for window styles not project specific.)

1. [Awning Windows] [Casement Windows] [Radius and Geometric Windows]: Flexible hinged leaf applied to top of sash and thermoplastic rubber bulb at full perimeter of frame.

2. Double-Hung: Dual bulb at head and sill, thermoplastic rubber bulb at

check rail, rigid vinyl water stops at sill.

a. Jamb Liner Color: [standard: Ivory] [option: White]

3. Horizontal Sliding: Thermoplastic rubber bulb at checkrail and side rails, polyurethane hinged leaf at side jamb and sill track, rigid vinyl water stops at sill.

G. Hardware

(Specifier Note: DELETE hardware for window styles not project specific.)

(Specifier Note: In applications where both operable and non-operable awning or casement windows are desired, to maintain the aesthetic profile specify “stationary” awning or casement units in Part 3 Schedule Article.)


1. Awning Windows

a. Hinges: Sliding steel reinforced nylon shoe in stainless steel track. b. Operator: Roto type, with single pull scissor arm and hardened steel

worm gears. c. Lock: Cam Action d. Handle Profile: [standard:Folding Handle] [T-Handle] [Round Knob] e. Finish: [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [White]

2. Casement Windows

a. Hinges: Concealed b. Operator: Single arm roto type c. Lock: Cam style d. Handle Profile: [standard: Folding Handle] [options: [T-Handle]

[Round Knob] e. Finish: [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [White]

3. Double-Hung Windows

a. Balance: Dual block and tackle b. Lock: Recessed Cam Action c. [Options: Plain rail d. Finish: [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [White]

4. Horizontal Sliding Windows

a. Sliding System: High-raised polyvinyl chloride sill track and compressible resilient polyfoam backed head track

b. Sash Pull: Recessed c. Sash Lock: Recessed Cam Action d. Finish: [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [White]

H. Glazing (Specifier Note: Various types of glass are available. The most common types have been included here. Contact a JELD-WEN representative when other options are required. DELETE glass not project specific.) (Specifier Note: Reflective glare from glazing has been found to affect the beach nesting of turtles in coastal environments. Some governing authorities require the use of turtle glass which uses tinted glass to achieve an industry-approved, inside-to-outside visible light transmittance value of 45% or less (visible spectrum = 400 to 700 nanometers). Verify the requirements for turtle glass with local authorities in coastal environments.)

1. Strength: [standard: Annealed] [option: Tempered] 2. Insulated Glass (standard):


a. Two panes of glass utilizing a continuous roll formed stainless steel spacer and dual seal sealant.

b. Overall Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch (19mm) c. Type: [standard: Type 1- Clear] [options: [Type 2 – Tinted [Bronze]

[Gray] [Green]] [Specialty Glass – Obscure]]

(Specifier Note: Low E is standard on all window units but may be deleted at the design professional’s option. DELETE Coatings if not desired.)

d. Coatings: Low E on surface 2

(Specifier Note: Argon option is only available with Low E coating and cannot be used with capillary tubes.)

(Specifier Note: Installations at elevations above 4,000 feet Mean Sea Level require glazing known as High Altitude glazing with capillary tubes to equalize environmental stress.)

e. Air Space: [Air] [Argon] [Air with capillary tubes]

OR

3. Monolithic Glass (option):

a. Overall Nominal Thickness: [1/8 inch (3mm)] [(Specifier Note: for tempered glass) 3/16 inch (7mm)]

b. Type: [standard: Type 1- Clear] [options: [Type 2 – Tinted [Bronze] [Gray] [Green]] [Specialty Glass – Obscure]]

2.4 WINDOW ACCESSORIES

(Specifier Note: DELETE accessories for window styles not project specific.)

(Specifier Note: SELECT exterior insect screens or combination storm/screens for double-hung and horizontal sliding windows. SELECT interior insect screens for awning and casement windows.)

A. Exterior Insect Screen

1. Material: Charcoal fiberglass screen cloth (18 by16 mesh) set in painted roll formed aluminum frame.

a. Frame Color: Match exterior cladding OR

B. Combination Storm/Screen


1. Material: Extruded aluminum with twin storm panels and charcoal fiberglass screen cloth (18 by16 mesh) set in painted extruded aluminum frame.

a. Frame Color: Match exterior cladding

AND/OR

C. Interior Insect Screen

1. Material: [standard: Charcoal fiberglass] [option: Aluminum] screen cloth (18 by 16 mesh) set in painted roll formed aluminum frame.

a. Finish: [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [White]

D. Grilles

(Specifier Note: Grilles are not available for textured glass. SELECT grilles, profiles, and width based on the desired aesthetic appearance of the window.)

1. Simulated Divided Lites (SDL)

a. Exterior Muntins

1) Material: Extruded aluminum permanently applied to exterior of insulating glass unit.

2) Pattern: As selected by Architect 3) Width: [7/8 inch (22mm)] [1-1/8 inch (28.5mm)] [1-3/8 inch

(34.9mm)] [2-5/16 inch (59mm) (for simulated double-hung checkrail)]

4) Finish: Match exterior cladding

(Specifier Note: Internal shadow bar will give the appearance of a true divided lite and is standard on all SDL units. Internal shadow bar may be deleted at the design professional’s option. DELETE Internal Shadow Bar if not project specific.)

b. Internal Shadow Bar: [standard: Light Bronze] [option: Silver] c. Interior Muntins

1) Material: Clear pine permanently bonded to interior of insulating glass unit.

2) Width: Match exterior muntin (Specifier Note: Specify KD Grilles for Radius and Geometric window units only.)

2. Full Surround [KD] Wood Grilles

a. Material: Unfinished clear pine b. Profile: Modified OGEE


c. Pattern: As selected by Architect d. Size: 7/8 inch (22mm)

3. Grilles Between the Glass (GBG)

a. Material: Made of roll formed aluminum suspended within the air cavity.

(Specifier Note: SELECT profile based on desired aesthetics. Utilize flat for a narrow aesthetic and a contour profile for a wider aesthetic.)

b. Profile: [Flat] [Contour] c. Pattern: As selected by Architect d. Width:

1) (Specifier Note: for flat profile) [5/8 inch (22mm)] OR

2) (Specifier Note: for contour profile) [23/32 inch (18.25mm)] [1 inch (25.4mm)]

e. Finish: [Brilliant White] [Chestnut Brown] [Desert Sand] [French Vanilla] [Hartford Green] [Mesa Red]

2.5 CONSTRUCTION ACCESSORIES

(Specifier Note: Construction Accessories compatible with windows and required installation may be specified in this section or in related sections. COORDINATE with related sections to not duplicate information.)

A. Flashing

1. Refer to Section [04 20 00 Unit Masonry] [07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal] [Insert section number and title].

B. Sealants


(Specifier Note: For sealants specified within this section list recommended products.)

2. Provide manufacturer recommended sealants maintain watertight conditions.

3. Products:

a. [Insert products and manufacturer]


2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Aluminum cladding corners are cope jointed.

(Specifier Note: DELETE Fabrication for window styles not project specific.)

B. [Awning Windows] [Casement Windows] [Double-Hung Windows] [Horizontal Sliding Windows]

1. Frame: Head corner joints mechanically fastened over silicone injected nylon corner key. Sill corner joints sealed with foam gasket and screw boss construction.

2. Sash: Corner joints slot-and-tenoned, and mechanically fastened.

3. Glass: Mounted using silicone glazing compound and secured with interior applied profiled wood stops.

C. Radius and Geometric Windows

1. Frame: Head corner joints mechanically fastened over silicone sealed and mechanically fastened. Curved members are soft wood veneers laminated and bonded together. Rabbeted construction, butyl sealant and mechanical fasteners secure members together.

2. Glass: Direct glazed with butyl glazing tape and cap bead with silicone on exterior and secured with adhesive butyl applied removable wood interior stops.

2.7 FINISH

(Specifier Note: Window interior wood is left unfinished for field finishing unless indicated otherwise. DELETE options not project specific.)

A. Interior:

1. [standard: Unfinished] [option: Primed] OR

2. Pre-finished Options:

a. Paint: [Extra White] [Moderate White] [Natural Choice] [Pure White] OR

b. Stain: [Cherry] [Cordovan] [Fruitwood] [Wheat] OR

c. Clear Laquer

B. Exterior: 0.050 thick extruded aluminum cladding with thermo set polyester finish in accordance with AAMA #2603.


1. Color: [Brilliant White] [Chestnut Bronze] [Desert Sand] [French Vanilla] [Hartford Green] [Mesa Red]

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect window prior to installation.

B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with window manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Form sheet metal sill pan in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Prepare windows for installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 INSTALLATION (Specifier Note: DELETE installation paragraphs not project specific.)

A. Insert window into rough opening (for use on window units with nailing fins): 1. Shim side jambs straight. 2. Inspect window for square, level and plumb. 3. Fasten window through nailing fin holes around entire window. 4. Test and adjust for smooth operation of window.

B. Insert window into rough opening (for use on window units without nailing fins):

1. Shim side jambs straight. 2. Inspect window for square, level and plumb. 3. Fasten window through jamb, shim and into rough opening jamb. 4. Test and adjust for smooth operation of window. 5. Ensure seal between sill pan and inside face of windowsill. 6. Install backer rod and sealant at exterior jambs and head.


7. Apply backer rod and sealant on exterior below sill. Leave gaps for drainage.

8. Seal interior joints between rough opening and jambs with backer rod and sealant.


A. Manufacturers’ Field Services: Field inspections.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove Preserve® film from glass.

B. Clean the exterior surface and glass with mild soap and water.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed windows from damage.

3.8 SCHEDULES

(Specifier Note: Below are sample schedules that require editing for specific project. When a single type of window is utilized on a project, Specifier may elect to delete the schedule in its entirety. When Schedules are included on the drawings, schedule should be deleted from the specification.)

A. Window Type A

1. Style: Awning 2. Operation: Operable 3. Size: 36 x 24 4. Exterior Finish: Mesa Red 5. Interior Finish: Pre-finished, Cherry Stain 6. Exterior Trim: Adams Casing 7. Mull Cap: 2 inch 8. Hardware: Round Knob 9. Hardware Finish: Chestnut Bronze 10. Glazing: Tempered, Type 1, Low-E with Argon 11. Grilles: 1 inch Contour GBG, Mesa Red 12. Insect Screen: Aluminum 13. Screen Frame Finish: Chestnut Bronze

END OF SECTION

Katz / 11-19-2010 08 80 00 - 1 Glazing

SECTION 088000

GLAZING


A. Section Includes: Bentemp® Bent Tempered Glass.

B. Related Sections 1. Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 and the

following Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Section 08400 – Entrances and Storefronts 3. Section 08500 – Windows 4. Section 08600 – Skylights 5. Section 08900 – Glazed Curtain Walls

1.02 REFERENCES (Note: Delete all reference standards that are not actually required and add any additional standards required by the municipality and/or state where the project is located. The Contracting Requirements or Division 1, Section 01420 – References, may establish the edition date of standards not otherwise indicated. Division 1 may include full names and addresses of the organizations whose standards are referenced.) A. United States

1. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

2. ASTM C162 - Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products. 3. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 4. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass -- Kind HS, Kind FT

Coated and Uncoated Glass. 5. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on

Glass. 6. ASTM C1464 - Standard Specification for Bent Glass. 7. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness and Type of

Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load. 8. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

B. Canada 1. CAN/CGSB-12.1-M - Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass. 2. CAN/CGSB-12.2-M - Flat, Clear Sheet Glass. 3. CAN/CGSB-12.3-M - Flat, Clear Float Glass. 4. CAN/CGSB-12.4-M - Flat, Heat Absorbing Glass. 5. CAN/CGSB-12.10-M - Light and Heat Reflecting Glass.

C. United States & Canada 1. GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.

Katz / 11-19-2010 08 80 00 - 2 Glazing

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Bentemp® – Bent tempered glass. B. Outside Arc Length - Girth measured on outside face of glass.

C. Inside Arc Length – Girth measured on inside face of glass. D. Degree of Bend – Calculated angle of circumference.

E. Chord – Distance between opposite edges of bent glass.

F. Depth of Bend – Dimension from chord to surface of glass at highest point of bend.

G. Inside Radius – Dimension at which glass is bent along the concave surface.

H. Outside Radius – Dimension at which glass is bent along the convex surface.

I. Centerline Arc Length – Girth measured at the center of the glass.

J. Angle of Rise – Calculated measurement of the degree of slope.

K. Offset Dimension – Calculated dimension of the height of slope.

L. Performance Characteristics

1. Center-of-Glass – Performance values that take only the center portion of a glass makeup into account and not the framing members. Customarily found in Sweets catalogs and Oldcastle Glass GlasSelect™ and used in 08800 architectural specifications.

2. Glass thermal and optical performance properties shall be based on data and calculations from the current LBNL WINDOW 5.2 (or 4.1 – please specify which version) computer program.

3. Fenestration Performance – Performance values that take into account the total fenestration (center-of-glass and framing members). Normally identified with building energy codes such as ASHRAE-IESNA 90.1 and the IECC. These values can also be tested and certified by the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC).


A. Design Requirements 1. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, windloads

and impact loads, without failure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabrication and installation; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.

2. Provide glass products in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria based on project loads and in-service conditions per ASTM E1300. a. Minimum thickness of annealed or heat-treated glass products is selected, so the

worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following: 1) 8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically or not over 15 degrees from the

vertical plane and under wind action.

Katz / 11-19-2010 08 80 00 - 3 Glazing

2) 1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the vertical plane and under action of wind and/or snow.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit 12-inch (305mm) square samples of each type of glass indicated (except clear monolithic glass products), and 12-inch (305mm) long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view.

B. Submit manufacturer’s product data sheet and glazing instructions.

C. Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant

manufacturer, indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant, as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.

D. Glazing Contractor shall provide test reports showing that the glass meets the requirements

of any security test reports specified on drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications 2. AAMA Publications

B. Safety glass products in the US are to comply with CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.

C. Safety glass products in Canada are to comply with the testing requirements of CAN/CGSB-

12.1-M, Type 1 for Laminated Glass and Type 2 for Tempered Glass. 1. Provide safety glass permanently marked with the company name or logo and

CAN/CGSB-12.1-M if the product meets categories 1 and 2, or mark as CAN/CGSB 12.1-M-1 if the product meets the requirements of Category 1 only.

D. Single-source fabrication responsibility: All glass fabricated for each type shall be processed and supplied by a single fabricator.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction for receiving, handling, storing and protecting glass & glazing materials.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers

with identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

Katz / 11-19-2010 08 80 00 - 4 Glazing

D. Exercise exceptional care to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage/deterioration to coating on glass.

E. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with

insulating glass fabricator’s recommendations of venting and sealing.

1.08 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Installation of glass products at ambient air temperature below 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) is prohibited.

B. Field Measurements: When construction schedule permits, verify field measurements with

drawing dimensions prior to fabrication of glass products. 1.09 WARRANTY

A. Provide a written warranty from date of manufacture for tempered glass. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer is used in this section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced standards. 1. Oldcastle Glass 2. Guardian Industries 3. Pilkington 4. PPG Industries 5. Visteon Float Glass

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Bentemp® Glass 1. Glass Type: 2. Glass Tint: 3. Nominal Thickness: 4. Glass Strength: (Heat-Strengthened or Tempered) 5. Coating Orientation: (N/A, Surface #1 or 2) 6. Heat-Strengthened float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 1 (clear),

Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light reducing), Class 3 (tinted, light-reducing), Quality Q3, Kind HS.

7. Tempered float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light reducing), Class 3 (tinted, light-reducing), Quality Q3, Kind FT.

8. Bent glass shall comply with ASTM C1464 and with other requirements as specified.

Katz / 11-19-2010 08 80 00 - 5 Glazing

B. Glazing Products 1. Select appropriate glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and other glazing materials of proven

compatibility with other materials that they contact. These include glass products, insulating glass unit seals and glazing channel substrates under installation and service conditions, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.


A. Site Verification and Conditions 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the glass. 2. Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. 3. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being followed. 4. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection 1. Handle and store product according to manufacturers’ recommendations.

B. Surface Preparation 1. Clean and prepare glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass. 2. Remove coatings and other harmful materials that will prevent glass and glazing

installation required to comply with performance criteria specified. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in the “GANA Glazing Manual”.

B. Install glass in prepared glazing channels and other framing members.

C. Install setting blocks in rabbets as recommended by referenced glazing standards in GANA

Glazing Manual and IGMA Glazing Guidelines. D. Provide bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances and glazing material tolerances

recommended by GANA Glazing Manual.

E. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. F. Distribute the weight of the glass unit along the edge rather than at the corner. G. Comply with manufacturer’s and referenced industry recommendations on expansion joints

and anchors, accommodating thermal movement, glass openings, use of setting blocks, edge, face and bite clearances, use of glass spacers, edge blocks and installation of weep systems.

H. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation.

Katz / 11-19-2010 08 80 00 - 6 Glazing

I. Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction

operations, such as weld spatter, fireproofing or plaster. J. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked or damaged in any way.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application, using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.

B. Glass to be cleaned according to:

1. GANA Glass Informational Bulletin GANA 01-0300 - Proper Procedures for Cleaning Architectural Glass Products.

2. GANA Glass Information Bulletin GANA TD-02-0402 – Heat-Treated Glass Surfaces Are Different.

C. Do not use scrapers or other metal tools to clean glass.

END OF SECTION

IST Building 11/19/10 08 91 00 - 1 Louvers & Vents

SECTION 08 91 00

LOUVERS & VENTS


A. Section Includes: Metal wall louvers and screens exposed to view in finish work, including:

1. Exterior metal louvers. 2. Louvers at locations where HVAC ductwork terminates at exterior walls. 3. Other exposed exterior and interior louvers indicated on Drawings.

B. Extent: Extent of exterior louvers is shown on architectural drawings. Coordinate

requirements, quantities and sizes with mechanical drawings. Louvers not shown on architectural drawing, but indicated on mechanical drawings shall be provided as part of work of this section.

C. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:

1. Sealant and Caulking: Division 7 Joint Treatment Section. 2. Dampers and Ductwork: Division 15 Dampers and Ductwork Sections. 3. Grilles and Registers: Division 15 Grilles and Registers Sections.

1.02 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a

part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified buy issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title, or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM B221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.

C. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 1. AMCA Standard 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. 2. AMCA Publication 261 - Directory of Licenses Products, current edition.

D. Sheet Metal and Air Condition Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition

E. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA Standard 605 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic

Coating on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide louvers, which have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to withstand loads from (Specify code/standard reference.) and to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.


B. Louver Performance: where louvers are indicated to comply with specific performance requirements, provide units whose performance ratings have been determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures section.

B. Product Data: Submit product data sheet for specified products.

1.Performance Certificates: Submit performance certification, if not included in product data

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product

components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. 1.Include information necessary for fabrication and installation of louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thickness, fastenings and profiles.


1.Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

a. Submit certified test results from an approved testing laboratory showing that the louvers proposed meet the criteria specified herein.

2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements.


A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers

with identification labels intact. 1. Deliver, store and handle products to avoid any distortion or damage due to moisture,

physical abuse or other cause Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged materials with new.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Project warranty refers to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights owner may have under Contract Documents.


PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL LOUVERS A. Manufacturer: Industrial Louvers Inc. (ILI).

1. Contact: 511 South 7th Street, Delano, MN 55328; Telephone: (763) 972-2981; Fax: (763) 972-2911.

B. Other Available Manufacturers – subject to compliance with requirements stated within. 2.02 SPECIALIZED THINLINE LOUVERS A. ILI Model 258:

1. Extruded aluminum frame and blades shall be designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and of channels in jambs. Frames and blade thickness to be .063” (1.6 mm) extruded aluminum 6063 alloy. Sill and jamb frames shall be continuously welded and caulked to help prevent water penetration to interior wall construction. Blades shall be attached by means of all-welded construction.

2. Louvers shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and

water penetration. Louvers shall have a minimum of 9.04 sq. ft (0.841 m2) (56%) free area on a 48” x 48” (1219 x 1219 mm) louver. Rating shall show a maximum water penetration of .01 oz at airflow of 622 FPM. Static Pressure Loss shall be not more than 15” (3.8 mm) of water gauge at airflow of 970-FPM free air velocity.

2.03 LOUVER ACCESSORIES

A. Exterior Aluminum Sill: Provide sill flashing of same material and finish as louvers where

indicated on the drawings. B. Louver Screens: Provide framed removable screens for exterior louvers.

1. Screens shall be 1/2” (12.7 mm) mesh .063 (1.6 mm) flattened expanded aluminum mounted in a removeable extruded aluminum frame.

2. Locate screens on inside face of louvers. 3. Screen frames shall have welded corners and be secured to the louver frame with

machine screws, at each corner and at 12” (304.8 mm) c.o. between.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to provide required finish.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063. C. Fastenings: Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers and zinc-

coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers. Provide other accessories as required for complete and proper installation.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Performance: Fabricate as required for optimum performance with respect to water

penetration, strength, durability and uniform appearance. 2. Size:


a. Fabricate louvers in masonry walls to outside dimensions indicated, with allowance of _” (6.4 mm) on each side for sealant joints.

b. Verify sizes with final HVAC shop drawings, including detail dimensions of ductwork, dampers or other fittings abutting louvers.

3. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication.

4. Shop Assembly: a. Fabricate to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field

assembly of units. b. Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary

for shipping and handling. c. Clearly mark units for reassemble and coordinated installation.

5. Accessories: Include supports, anchorages and accessories required for complete assembly.

6. Vertical Mullions: Provide vertical mullions of type and spacing indicated but not further apart than recommended by the manufacturer.

7. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at horizontal joints between louver units except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.

8. Connections: Join frame and blade members to one another by welding, except where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers.

9. Spacing: Maintain equal blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

2.06 FINISHES (FACTORY)

A. Shop Finishing: Factory finish louvers and accessories with an organic coating. 1. Organic Coating: Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces and apply a

Kynar 500/Hylar 500 2-coat finish conforming to AAMA 605 in a standard color. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 1.2 mil.

B. Finish Protection: Provide finish protection as recommended by louver manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION Louver Installation: 1. Louvers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers approved shop drawings and as

shown. Provide all necessary fastenings and anchors required to a complete installation. Units to be installed plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work.

2. Form tight joints within work of this Section. Fit exposed connections accurately. 3. Louvers shall be protected from damage from subsequent building operations.


4. Protect metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces, which shall be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals.

Copyright 2008 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/08 PRODUCT MASTERSPEC LICENSED BY ARCOM TO PHILLIPS MANUFACTURING CO.

IST Building [Type text] 09 22 16 - 1 Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing

Copyright 2008 by The American Institute of Architects (AIA)

Exclusively published and distributed by Architectural Computer Services, Inc. (ARCOM) for the AIA

This Product MasterSpec Section is licensed by ARCOM for limited distribution by Phillips Manufacturing Company ("Licensee"). The license is subject to revocation by ARCOM subject to the Product MasterSpec License Agreement between ARCOM and Licensee.

A clean version (revisions accepted) and an underline-and-strikeout version of this Section, both of which modify the original MasterSpec text, are distributed by Licensee to assist in specifying Licensee's products. Revisions made to the original MasterSpec text are made solely by the Licensee and are not endorsed by, or representative of the opinions of, ARCOM or The American Institute of Architects (AIA). Neither AIA nor ARCOM are liable in any way for such revisions or for the use of this Product MasterSpec Section by Licensee or any end user to which Licensee distributes this Product MasterSpec Section. A qualified design professional should review and edit the document to suit project requirements. For more information, contact Phillips Manufacturing Company, 4949 S. 30th Street, Omaha, NE; phone: Phone 402-339-3800; Fax: 402-339-0772; Website: www.Phillipsmfg.com; E-mail: [email protected]. For information about MasterSpec contact ARCOM at (800) 424-5080 or visit www.arcomnet.com.

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

Revise this Section by deleting and inserting text to meet Project-specific requirements.

Verify that Section titles referenced in this Section are correct for this Project's Specifications; Section titles may have changed.

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Retain or delete this article in all Sections of Project Manual.

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.

B. Related Requirements:

Retain subparagraph below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in another Section.



1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Evaluation Reports: For [steel studs and runners] [firestop tracks], from ICC-ES[ as follows:][.]

Retain ICC-ES report numbers below if I-stud shaft-wall or H-stud area separation wall systems are required in this Section.

1. I-stud Shaft-Wall System: ICC-ES 89-35.01. 2. I-stud Shaft-Wall system: ICC-ES 9525B. 3. I-stud Shaft-Wall system: ER-3579. 4. I-stud Shaft-Wall system: ER-4924. 5. H-stud area separation wall system: ICC-ES 90-26.01. 6. <Insert evaluation report number>.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about named manufacturers and products. For an explanation of options and Contractor's product selection procedures, see Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."


Retain "Fire-Test-Response Characteristics" Paragraph below if framing is part of fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Indicate design designations of specific assemblies on Drawings.

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency[ as follows:][.]

Retain fire-resistance rated assembly numbers below if I-stud shaft-wall systems are required in this Section.



1. Shaft-Wall, one hour: WHI PMC/WA60-01. 2. Shaft-Wall, two hour: WHI PMC/WA120-01. 3. Shaft-Wall, two hour: WHI PMC/WA120-02. 4. Shaft-Wall, three hour: WHI PMC/WA180-01. 5. Shaft-Wall: UL V433. 6. <Insert rated assembly number>.

Retain "STC-Rated Assemblies" Paragraph below if framing is part of STC-rated assemblies. Indicate design designations of specific assemblies on Drawings.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

Retain "Recycled Content of Steel Products" Paragraph below to specify recycled content if applying for LEED Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2. An alternative method of dealing with these credit requirements is to retain requirement in Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" that gives Contractor the option and responsibility to determine how these credit requirements will be met.

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than [25] <Insert number> percent.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

See "Corrosion Protection of Steel Framing" Article in the Evaluations for a discussion of corrosion-resistant coatings on components.

2. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120)] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)] [Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120)], hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Phillips Manufacturing; Metal Studs and Runners, or a comparable product by one of the following:

1) <Insert manufacturer name>.

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.68 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)].



c. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [3-5/8 inches (92 mm)] [6 inches (152 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)].

For slip joint at stud and top-track interface (head joint) that avoids axial loading of partition by overhead structure, retain "Slip-Type Head Joints" Paragraph below and one or all of the following types of head joints. See "Crack Control" Article in the Evaluations.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[ one of] the following:

If retaining "Single Long-Leg Runner System" Subparagraph below, indicate type of bridging required on Drawings or by inserts. Strap and 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) cold-rolled channel are commonly used.

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Phillips Manufacturing; Long-Leg Track, or a comparable product by one of the following:


If retaining "Double-Runner System" Subparagraph below and if deflection might be great, evaluate the lateral stability of outer-runner flanges and consider using steel channels for tracks instead of non-structural runners.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Phillips Manufacturing; Slip Track, or a comparable product by one of the following:

1) <Insert manufacturer name.>

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

Retain "Products" Subparagraph and list of manufacturers and products below to require specific products or a comparable product from other manufacturers.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Phillips Manufacturing; Deflection Track, or a comparable product by one of the following:

1) <Insert manufacturer name.>



b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; [FlatSteel Deflection Track] [Slotted Deflecto

Track]. 3) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 4) Steel Network Inc. (The); [VertiClip SLD] [VertiTrack VTD] Series. 5) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 6) Telling Industries; [Vertical Slip Track] [Vertical Slip Track II]. 7) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

If shaft wall framing is required in this section, retain paragraph below and edit to suit Project requirements. Alternatively, delete paragraph below and coordinate shaft wall framing requirements in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Shaft Wall Assemblies."

E. Shaft Wall Studs and Runners: ASTM 645, roll-formed steel tabbed I-studs and compatible tabbed J-tracks.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Phillips Manufacturing; [Tabbed I-Stud] [and] [Tabbed J-Track], or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. <Insert manufacturer name.>

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.020 inch (0.51 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)].

3. Minimum Yield Strength, I-stud: 40 ksi. 4. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [6 inches (152 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)] [2-1/2

inches (64 mm)].

If area separation wall framing is required in this section, retain paragraph below and edit to suit project requirements. Alternatively, delete paragraph below and coordinate area separation wall framing requirements in Division 9 Section "Area Separation Wall Assemblies."

F. Area Separation Wall Studs and Runners: ASTM 645, roll-formed steel hemmed studs and compatible runner tracks.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Phillips Manufacturing; [Hemmed H-Stud] [and] [U-Track], or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. <Insert manufacturer name.>

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)].

Hemmed H-Studs and U-Track are 2 inches deep. ASW I-Studs are 2-1/2 inches deep.

3. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)].



"Firestop Tracks" Paragraph below specifies firestop tracks for isolating partition framing from structure above in specific fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Products listed may need additional materials to achieve a fire-resistance rating; verify with manufacturer. If retaining, revise to coordinate with rated assemblies and indicate design designations of assemblies on Drawings.

G. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System[ attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip]. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. d. Steel Network Inc. (The); [VertiClip SLD] [VertiTrack VTD] Series. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

Retain "Flat Strap and Backing Plate" Paragraph below for flat-strap blocking and bracing for fixture attachment. Indicate locations, lengths, and widths on Drawings.

H. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Knurled steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.68 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)] <Insert thickness>.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Knurled Flat Stock, or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. <Insert manufacturer name>.

Retain "Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging" Paragraph below for channel bridging for fixture attachment or lateral bracing. Indicate locations and details of installation on Drawings.

I. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Cold Rolled Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] <Insert depth>. 3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.



J. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; DWC Hat Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)] <Insert thickness>.

3. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)].

K. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

Retain one of three subparagraphs below to suit Project requirements.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; RC-1 Tru 25, asymmetrical with minimum base-metal thickness of 0.020 inch (0.51 mm), or a comparable product by one of the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; RC-1 Standard Duty, asymmetrical with minimum base-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), or a comparable product by one of the following:

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; RC-2, hat-shaped with expanded metal web, minimum base metal thickness 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), or a comparable product by one of the following:

Retain subparagraph below with any of three subparagraphs selected above.


L. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Cold Rolled Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] <Insert depth>. 3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

Z-shaped furring is available in 1-, 1-1/2-, 2-, 2-1/2-, and 3-inch (25-, 38-, 51-, 64-, and 76-mm) depths. Coordinate Z-shaped furring requirements with insulation specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

M. Z-Shaped Furring: With punched or solid web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm),, minimum base metal thickness [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.68 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)], and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.



1. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Z-Furring Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

Retain this article for suspended or furred ceilings or soffits.

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

Retain "Anchors" or "Powder-Actuated Fasteners" Subparagraph below for hanger attachment to concrete decks. Coordinate with hangers specified and verify safety factors with Project's structural engineer.

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [5] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

a. Type: [Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms] [Postinstalled, chemical anchor] [Postinstalled, expansion anchor].

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [10] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

Retain "Wire Hangers" or "Flat Hangers" Paragraph below, or insert requirements to suit Project. Verify requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. If more than one type of hanger is required, indicate locations of each on Drawings.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, [in size indicated on Drawings] [1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated] <Insert size>.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Carrying Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)].



F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

Retain "Cold-Rolled Channels," "Steel Studs and Runners," "Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels," or "Resilient Furring Channels" Subparagraph below or, if more than one is required, indicate locations of each on Drawings.

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Cold Rolled Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Steel Stud, or a comparable product by one of the following:


b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.68 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)].

c. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [3-5/8 inches (92 mm)].

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Hat Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.018 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)] <Insert thickness>.

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; Resilient Furring Channel, or a comparable product by one of the following:


b. Configuration: [Asymmetrical] [or] [hat shaped].

Grid suspension systems are suitable for use with gypsum board. They might be unacceptable for gypsum veneer plaster; consult gypsum veneer plaster and grid suspension system manufacturers.

G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.




1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

Retain subparagraph below if area separation wall framing components and accessories are required in this section.

2. Area Separation Wall Clips: Aluminum, 2 inches by 2 inches by 2-1/2 inches (51 mm by 51 mm by 63.5 mm), designed for break-away attachment of area separation wall vertical steel framing to structure's wood or steel framing.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Phillips Manufacturing; ASW Clips, or a comparable product by one of the following:


B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide[ one of] the following:

Retain both "Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt" and "Foam Gasket" subparagraphs below and option in "Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls" Paragraph above to allow Contractor to choose type of isolation strip.

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

Delete "Suspended Assemblies" Paragraph below if only postinstalled anchors are used for installing suspended assemblies.

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

Detail requirements on Drawings for attaching metal framing to construction protected by sprayed fire-resistive materials.

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

Standards listed in "Gypsum Plaster Assemblies," "Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies," "Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies," and "Gypsum Board Assemblies" subparagraphs below include framing installation requirements not in ASTM C 754. Retain applicable subparagraphs to suit Project.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.



C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

Detail control and expansion joints on Drawings.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

Generally, indicate stud spacings on Drawings and delete "Single-Layer Application," "Multilayer Application," and "Tile Backing Panels" subparagraphs below. ASTM C 754 includes tabulations of maximum framing spacing based on thickness and orientation of gypsum board panels and deflection and lateral loading.

1. Single-Layer Application: [16 inches (406 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: [16 inches (406 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tile Backing Panels: [16 inches (406 mm)] o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

Retain first paragraph below if studs abut dissimilar metals at exterior walls or exterior masonry walls that may become damp.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

Indicate locations and details of slip-type and fire-rated head joints on Drawings. See "Crack Control" Article in the Evaluations.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

Usually retain first subparagraph below. Design framing for doors more than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide, double doors, and extra-heavy doors to meet loading conditions.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

Retain first subparagraph below if one-piece control joints are required at heads of doors.



b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

Retain first subparagraph below if suspended ceilings cannot withstand forces generated by opening and closing doors.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

Retain "Other Framed Openings" Subparagraph below for framed openings other than doors, or revise to suit Project. Fully detail framing for large openings on Drawings.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

Indicate locations and details of firestop track on Drawings.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced [24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.



"Installation Tolerance" Paragraph below is based on recommendation in GA-216 for wood framing and in ASTM C 840 for metal framing.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

Generally, indicate suspension system component spacing on Drawings and delete "Hangers," "Carrying Channels (Main Runners)," and "Furring Channels (Furring Members)" subparagraphs below. ASTM C 754 includes tabulations of suspension system component size and spacing based on supported ceiling area at a uniform load of 4 psf (0.19 kPa).

1. Hangers: [48 inches (1219 mm)] <Insert spacing> o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): [48 inches (1219 mm)] <Insert spacing> o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): [16 inches (406 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)]

<Insert spacing> o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within [performance limits established by referenced installation standards] <Insert deflection limit>.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

Retain applicable construction types below.



Retain first subparagraph below if steel roof deck cannot carry ceiling loads; verify with structural engineer.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

Furring channels must be wire tied to supports in most fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Verify requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies and revise "Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies" Paragraph below to suit Project.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

Retain "Seismic Bracing" Paragraph below for seismic bracing and revise to include specific provisions to suit Project.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems [with hangers used for support] <Insert requirements>.

Grid suspension systems are suitable for use with gypsum board. They might be unacceptable for gypsum veneer plaster; consult gypsum veneer plaster and grid suspension system manufacturers.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

Example tolerance in "Installation Tolerances" Paragraph below is based on ASTM C 636 for acoustical ceilings.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within [1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m)] <Insert dimensions> measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

Retain article below and edit to suit Project requirements if shaft wall systems are required in this Section.

3.6 INSTALLING SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following:

1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 9 Section "[Gypsum Veneer Plastering][Gypsum Board]" for applying and

finishing panels.

B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.



C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing.

Retain article below and edit to suit Project requirements if area separation wall systems are required in this Section

3.7 INSTALLING AREA SEPARATION WALL SYSTEMS

A. General: Install gypsum board area separation wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following:

1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 9 Section "[Gypsum Veneer Plastering][Gypsum Board]" for applying and

finishing panels.

B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with area separation wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board area separation wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by area separation wall assembly framing.

END OF SECTION 09111

Jarret Clark ParexLahabra © Copyright 10/08 Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly Specification - Page 09 24 00 - 1

CSI SECTION 09 24 00 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (Parex® Fiber Reinforced Stucco with Enhanced Water Resistive Barrier and Optional Krak-Shield) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Installation of Parex® Armourwall 100 WaterMaster™ Stucco Assemblies. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry. C. Section 06 16 00 - Sheathing. D. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers. E. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. F. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. G. Section 08 50 00 - Windows. H. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C578 - Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation B. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath. C. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plaster. D. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster. E. ASTM C1032 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base F. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Based

Plaster. G. ASTM C1177 - Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing H. ASTM C1278 - Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel I. ASTM C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board J. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials K. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials L. ASTM E330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by

Uniform Static air Pressure Difference M. ASTM G153 - Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of

Nonmetallic Materials 1.4 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster™ Stucco Assembly: Parex 495 KeyGuard, building paper, wire fabric or metal lath, Armourwall Stucco Base (210 Armourwall 100 Stucco Base Concentrate or 202 Armourwall 100 Stucco Base Pre-Sanded) and either a Parex acrylic or elastomeric based finish coat.

-OR- A. Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Krak-Shield™ Stucco Assembly: Parex 495 KeyGuard, building

paper, wire fabric or metal lath, Armourwall Stucco Base (210 Armourwall 100 Stucco Base Concentrate or 202 Armourwall 100 Stucco Base Pre-Sanded), Parex reinforcing mesh embedded in Parex Stucco Level Coat, and either a Parex acrylic or elastomeric based finish coat

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit Samples, Evaluation Reports and Certificates in accordance with Division 1 General

Requirements Submittal Section. B. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of suitable size as

required to accurately represent each color and texture used on project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project application. Maintain and make available, at job site, approved samples.


C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit sample copies of Manufacturer's Warranty indicating Single Source Responsibility.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco assemblies in United States for at least five years; At least 1,000 projects shall have been completed utilizing this type of stucco assembly; Shall have completed projects of same building size and type as this project.

2. Applicator: Shall be experienced and competent in installation of stucco-like materials, and shall provide evidence of a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this section.

B. Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Functional Criteria: 1. General: Stucco application shall be to vertical substrates or to substrates sloped for positive

drainage. Substrates sloped for drainage shall have additional protection from weather exposure that might be harmful to coating performance.

2. Testing to meet International Code Council Acceptance Criteria AC11. 3. Performance Requirements of Water Resistive Barrier Coating

495 KEYGUARD Method Results Accelerated Weathering AATCC 127 Pass – No water penetration. Air Leakage ASTM E283 < 0.004 cfm/ft2 Elongation ASTM D412 360% @ 19 mils Freeze-Thaw ASTM E 2485 Pass Nail Seal ability, Head of Water ASTM D1970 Pass 5 in of water Restrained Environmental ICC ES AC 212 Pass Surface Burning Characteristics ASTM E84 Pass Tensile Bond Strength ASTM E 2134 Pass Water Resilience F.S. TT-C-555B Pass Water Resistance ASTM D 2247 Pass Water Penetration ASTM E331 25 psf for 165 Min. Water vapor transmission ASTM E96 12 U.S. perms Weathering ICC ES AC 212 Pass

4. Performance Requirements of Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly

Test Method Results Accelerated Weathering ASTM G153 No deleterious effect Freeze-Thaw Resistance ICC AC 11 Pass Compressive Strength ASTM C109 2500 psi Transverse Wind Load Resistance

ASTM E330 Negative Wind Load: +222/-286 psf No failure of system. Refer to ICC-ES ER-4842 for tested assemblies.

Surface Burning Characteristics ASTM E84 Flame Spread: 0 to 15 Smoke Developed: 0 to 15

Fire Resistance ASTM E119

Pass, refer to ICC-ES ER-4842 for listed assemblies

Drainage ICC AC 11 Pass. Refer to ICC-ES ER-4842 for listed assemblies

C. Substrate Conditions:

1. Substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence and other harmful contaminants.

2. Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with 1/4 in (6.4 mm) within any 4 ft (1219 mm) radius. 3. Maximum deflection of substrate system under positive or negative design loads shall not exceed

L/360 of span. D. Expansion and Control Joints: Continuous expansion and control joints shall be installed at locations in

accordance with ASTM C1063 and ASTM C926


1. Substrate movement, and expansion and contraction of Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly and adjacent materials shall be taken into account in design of expansion joints, with proper consideration given to sealant properties, installation conditions, temperature range, coefficients of expansion of materials, joint width to depth ratios, and other material factors. Minimum width of expansion joints shall be as specified by the designer or shown on the project drawings.

2. In accordance with ASTM C1063, expansion and contraction joints shall be installed in walls not more than 144 sq ft (13.4 sq m) in area, and not more than 100 sq ft (9.3 sq m) in area for all non-vertical applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft (5.5 m) in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly products in original packaging

with manufacturer's identification. B. Storage: Store Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly products in dry location, off the

ground, protected from moisture conditions harmful to product performance. 1.8 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS

A. Substrate Temperature: Do not apply Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly products to substrates whose temperature are below 40° F (4° C) or contain frost or ice.

B. Inclement Weather: Do not apply Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base during inclement weather, unless appropriate protection is employed.

C. Sunlight Exposure: Avoid, when possible, installation of the Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base in direct sunlight. Application of Parex Finishes in direct sunlight in hot weather may adversely affect aesthetics.

D. Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly materials shall not be applied if ambient temperature exceeds 120º F (49º C) or falls below 40º F (4 º C) within 24 hours of application. Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather.

E. Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other defects that may adversely affect the performance of the Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly, and shall be free of residual moisture.

1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordination: Coordinate Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly installation with other

construction operations. 1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Upon request, at completion of installation, provide Parex Standard Limited Stucco Warranty. See Parex’s warranty schedule for available Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Assembly Warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: ParexLahabra, Inc., 4125 E. LaPalma Ave., Suite 250, Anaheim, CA 92807 B. Components: Obtain components of Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly from

authorized distributors. No substitutions or additions of other materials are permitted without prior written permission from PareXLahabra for this project.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Secondary Water-Resistive Barrier:

1. Parex 495 KeyGuard™ roll-on water resistive barrier coating 2. Parex 396 Sheathing Tape: Non-woven synthetic fiber tape to reinforce 495 KeyGuard roll on

water-resistive barrier at sheathing board joints, into rough openings and other terminations into dissimilar materials available in 4 in, 6 in and 9 in.

3. Parex 495 Keyguard is covered by an intervening material such as building paper, See Section 2.3 C.

B. Stucco Materials: 1. Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Assembly (⅜ in – ½ in)


a. 210 Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base™ Concentrate: Proprietary mixture of Portland cement, and proprietary ingredients mixed with clean, potable water and ASTM C897 or C144 sand in the field.

-OR- a. 202 Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base™ Pre-Sanded: Proprietary mixture of

Portland cement, and proprietary ingredients mixed with clean, and potable water in the field. EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE OPTIONAL PAREX 290 ADACRYL FOR ENHANCED PERFORMANCE

C. Parex 290 Adacryl™: 100 percent acrylic emulsion additive for Portland cement based products, to

enhance curing, adhesion, freeze-thaw resistance and workability and as an acrylic polymer bonding agent.

EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE PAREX ARMOURWALL 100 KRAK-SHEILD STUCCO ASSEMBLY (D.) FOR ENHANCED CRACK RESISTANCE PERFORMANCE.

D. Parex Leveling and Reinforcing Coat (Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Krak-Shield Stucco Assembly): 1. Parex Stucco Level Coat™: 100% acrylic polymer base, requiring the addition of Portland cement. 2. Parex Reinforcing Meshes:

a. Parex 355 Standard Mesh: Weight 4.5 oz. per sq. yd (153g/m2) reinforcing mesh. b. Parex 358.10 Intermediate Mesh: Weight 12 oz per sq. yd. (407 g/ m2) reinforcing mesh.

EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE PAREX PRIMER FOR ENHANCED PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY.

E. ParFlex: Waterproof base coat, 100% acrylic polymer base, requiring the addition of Portland cement. F. Parex Primers:

1. 310 Primer: 100% acrylic based coating to prepare surfaces for Parex finishes. 2. 313 Sanded Primer: 100% acrylic based coating to prepare surface for Parex finishes.

EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE ONE FINISH TYPE CHOOSE PAREX OPTIMUM OR E-LASTIC FINISH FOR DIFFERENT LEVELS OF ENHANCED WARRANTY.

G. Parex Finish: 1. Parex E-Lastic® Finish: Factory blended, 100 % acrylic polymer based elastomeric textured finish,

integrally colored. a. Finish type, texture and color as selected by Project Designer

-OR- 1. Parex DPR Optimum Finish™: Factory blended, 100% acrylic polymer based finish, integrally

colored. a. Finish type, texture and color as selected by Project Designer -OR-

1. Parex DPR Standard Finish™: Factory blended, 100% acrylic polymer based finish, integrally colored.

a. Finish type, texture and color as selected by Project Designer. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster and its related materials shall conform to the requirements of ICC-ES Evaluation Report No. 4842 and shall conform to this specification.

B. Substrate Materials: 1. Gypsum Sheathing: Minimum 1/2 in (13 mm) thick, core-treated, weather-resistant, exterior

gypsum sheathing complying with ASTM C79 or ASTM C1177. 2. Cement Board Sheathing conforming to ASTM C1186. 3. Fiberboard: Minimum 1/2 in (13 mm) thick fiberboard complying with ANSI/AHA A194.1 as a


regular density sheathing. 4. Plywood: Minimum 5/16 in (8 mm) thick exterior grade or exposure I plywood for studs spaced 16

in (406 mm) o.c. and 3/8 in (9 mm) thick exterior type plywood minimum for studs spaced 24 in (610 mm) o.c. Plywood shall comply be exterior grade or Exposure 1 and comply with DOC PS-1

5. Concrete Masonry Construction: Painted (coated) and non-painted (uncoated). Shall be in conformance with the building code.

6. Other Approved by PareXLahabra in writing prior to the project. C. Water-Resistive Barriers:

1. Concrete Masonry Construction a. ParFlex Waterproof base coat installed over the Armourwall 100 Stucco Base.

2. For non-wood based sheathing or plywood: a. Parex 495 Keyguard covered by an intervening material such as building paper

3. For solid sheathing with foam plastic insulation installed over the water-resistive barrier: a. Flat Insulation board: Parex 495 Keyguard covered by Dupont Tyvek Stuccowrap, DrainWrap

or CommericalWrap D, Other sheet good Water resistive barrer, incorporating in itself a means of drainage, and maintaining a current ICC Evaluation Report

b. WaterMaster Insulation Board: Parex 495 Keyguard covered by an intervening material such as building paper.

4. Polystyrene Insulation (Over sheathing only): a. Expanded (EPS), or Extruded (XPS), having a nominal density of 1 lb/ft³ (14 kg/m³). b. WaterMaster Insulation Board (EPS): having a nominal density of 1 lb/ft³ (14 kg/m³) with

Back of insulation board configured with channels per Parex WaterMaster design. EDITOR NOTE: THE SELECTION OF AN APPROPRIATE TYPE OF MATERIAL FOR ACCESSORIES SHALL BE DETERMINED BY APPLICABLE SURROUNDING CLIMATIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SPECIFIC TO THE PROJECT LOCATION, SUCH AS SALT AIR, INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION, HIGH MOISTURE, OR HUMIDITY.

D. Lath and Accessories: Conform to ASTM C847, ASTM C933, ASTM C1032 and ASTM C1063 and Appendix 1. Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard steel products with G60 galvanizing unless otherwise

indicated as rigid polyvinyl chloride (pvc plastic) or zinc alloy 2. Metal Plaster Bases: Minimum 20 gauge self-furred stucco netting, expanded metal diamond lath,

or welded wire lath in accordance with applicable codes and standards. 3. Weep Screeds: Foundation weep screed, and minimum 3-½ inch vertical attachment flange.

EDITOR NOTE: THE SELECTION AND USE OF AN APPROPRIATE TYPE OF SEALANT SHALL BE DETERMINED BY APPLICABLE SURROUNDING CLIMATIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SPECIFIC TO THE PROJECT LOCATION.

E. Seals, Sealants and Bond Breakers: Sealants shall conform to ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Backer rod shall be closed-cell polyethylene foamSeals, Sealants and Bond Breakers: Sealants shall conform to ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Backer rod shall be closed-cell polyethylene foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01 00 00. B. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of Parex Armourwall 100

WaterMaster Stucco. REMINDER: PAREX ARMOURWALL 100 WATERMASTER STUCCO IS INSTALLED OVER A CODE APPROVED WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER. ARMOURWALL 100 WATERMASTER STUCCO PERFORMANCE IS DEPENDENT UPON, AMONG OTHER FACTORS, PROPER FLASHING AND JOINT SEALING, AND ATTENTION TO PROPER FLASHING AND JOINT SEALANT DETAILS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS.


C. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base installation

as follows: 1. Substrate shall be of a type approved by ParexLahabra. Plywood substrates shall be gapped 1/8 in

(3.2 mm) at all edges. 2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and other harmful conditions. 3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants. 4. Substrate construction in accordance with substrate material manufacturer's specifications and

D. Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly. Do not proceed with the Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Water Resistive Barrier:

1. Treat all glass mat gypsum sheathing, cement board sheathing and plywood joints with 495 KeyGuard roll on water-resistive barrier and embed Parex 396 Sheathing Tape.

2. Apply 495 KeyGuard roll on Water-resistive barrier to the surface of the appropriate substrate (2 coats on plywood) and flash all rough openings with 365 Flashing Membrane. Do not apply 495 KeyGuard to concrete or masonry,

3. Install an intervening material over the 495 Keygaurd. a. The material must be a code approved, permeable water resistive barrier. b. When installing Insulation board behind the Armourwall Stucco the interviening material must

be Dupont Tyvek Stuccowrap, DrainWrap, CommericalWrap D, Other sheet good Water resistive barrer, incorporating in itself a means of drainage, and maintaining a current ICC Evaluation Report

-OR- b. When installing Parex WaterMaster Insulation board behind the Armourwall Stucco the

intervening material shall be a code approved water resisitve barrier, such as building paper. B. Expanded Polystyrene (optional):

1. Flat Insulation board: Expanded (EPS), or Extruded (XPS), having a nominal density of 1 lb/ft³ (14 kg/m³).

2. WaterMaster Insulation Board: Expanded (EPS), having a nominal density of 1 lb/ft³ (14 kg/m³) with channels configured per Parex WaterMaster design.

IMPORTANT: COORDINATE TERMINATIONS OF STUCCO ACCESSORIES WITH SEALANT SECTION OF THE SPECIFICATION IN ORDER TO LEAVE REQUIRED SPACINGS FOR SPECIFIED JOINT DIMENSIONS.

C. Wire Fabric Lath and Metal Lath: Install according to ICC Evaluation Report ER 4842, ASTM C1063 and Appendix and the Building Code.

D. Concrete (Cast-in-Place): Provide a surface that is slightly scarified, water absorbent, straight and true to line and plane. Remove form ties and trim projecting concrete so it is even with the plane of the wall. Remove form release agents. Pre-moisten the surface with water just prior to placement of stucco, or apply one uniform coat of Parex Parex 290 Adacryl according to application instructions.

E. Concrete Masonry Units: Remove projecting joint mortar so it is even with the plane of the wall. Remove surface contaminants such as efflorescence, existing paint or any other bond inhibiting material by sandblasting, waterblasting, wire brushing, chipping or other appropriate means. Pre-moisten the surface with water just prior to placement of stucco, or apply one uniform coat of Parex Parex 290 Adacryl according to application instructions.

F. Ensure that metal flashing has been installed per Specification Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

3.3 MIXING A. Mix Parex proprietary products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including the applicable

Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly Product Data Sheets. 3.4 APPLICATION

A. General: Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster and its related materials shall conform to the requirements


of ICC-ES Evaluation Report No. 4842 and shall conform to this specification. B. Parex 290 Adacryl Bonding Agent for application of concrete masonry construction:

1. Apply at the rate of 250 sq. ft. per gallon using a low-pressure sprayer brush- or roller. (application in direct sunlight may cause the product to dry too quickly).

2. Stucco finishes or other cement products can still be applied after Parex 290 Adacryl becomes tacky.

C. Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster: 1. Either Parex 210 or 202 Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco mixtures shall be applied in one or

two coats to a minimum thickness of 3/8 in (9.5 mm) by hand troweling or machine spraying the mixture to the wire lath in accordance with Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base Product Data Sheets. The maximum thickness applied in one pass is 1/2 in (17 mm).

2. Rod surface to true plane. 3. Trowel to smooth and uniform surface to receive acrylic polymer finish coat.

EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE PAREX ARMOURWALL 100 KRAK-SHEILD STUCCO ASSEMBLY (C.) FOR ENHANCED CRACK RESISTANCE PERFORMANCE.

D. Leveling and Reinforcing Coat (Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Krak-Shield Stucco Assembly): 1. Allow Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base to dry before applying the leveling and reinforcing

coat. 2. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the Parex Stucco Level Coat over the Armourwall 100

WaterMaster Stucco Base at a thickness of 1/16 – 3/32 in. (1.6 – 2.4 mm). 3. Fully embed the Parex reinforcing mesh, either 355 Standard Mesh or 358.10 Intermediate Mesh,

into the wet Stucco Level Coat including diagonal strips at corners of openings and trowel smooth. If 355 Standard Mesh is used, seams are overlapped 2-1/2” (63 mm), and if the 358.10 Intermediate Mesh is used, seams are butted.

4. The Parex acrylic primers and finishes can be applied as soon as the Parex Stucco Level Coat has cured, typically within 24 hours.

E. ParFlex Waterproof Base Coat: 1. When Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly is installed over concrete masonry

construction, apply a layer of ParFlex Waterproof base coat over the stucco base. 2. Allow the stucco base to air dry for one day after moist curing before installing.

F. Parex Primer and Finish: 1. Remove surface contaminants such as dust or dirt without damaging the substrate. 2. Ambient and surface temperature must be 40°F (4°C) or higher during application and drying time.

Supplemental heat and protection from precipitation must be provided as needed. 3. Use only on surfaces that are sound, clean, dry, unpainted, and free from any residue that might

affect the ability of the finish to bond to the surface. EDITOR NOTE: MODIFY BELOW TO SUIT REQUIREMENTS. CHOOSE ONE #4

4. Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Krak-Shield Stucco Assembly a. Before the application of the finish, the base coat must have cured a minimum of 24 hours or

longer as required by conditions. Examine the cured base coat for any irregularities. b. Correct these irregularities to produce a flat surface.

-OR- 4. Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly

a. After Moist curing, allow the Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Base to air dry. (1) Minimum of 3 days if applying a Parex Primer

-OR- (1) Minimum of 7 days before application of a Parex Acrylic based Finish Coat

5. Apply exterior wall finish in number of coats thickness recommended by manufacturer to achieve texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond finish to base coat.


6. Protect Parex Finish Coats from inclemate weather until completely dry. G. CURING

1. Parex Armourwall 100 WaterMaster : Keep stucco moist for at least 48 hours (longer in dry weather) by lightly fogging walls. Start light fogging after initial set of 1–2 hours.

2. Air cure acrylic based and elastomeric finish coats only, do not wet cure. 3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. Removal: Remove and legally dispose of Armourwall 100 WaterMaster Stucco Assembly component debris material from job site.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing during installation. C. Provide protection of installed finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity

until fully cured and dry. D. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the

material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Designer/Owner.

END OF SECTION Disclaimer This guide specification is intended for use by a qualified designer. The guide specification is not intended to be used verbatim as an actual specification without appropriate modifications for the specific use intended. The guide specification must be integrated into and coordinated with the procedures of each design firm, and the requirements of a specific project.

Food Science / 11/11/10 09 29 00- 1 Gypsum Board

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD THIS SECTION IS WRITTEN IN CSI 3-PART FORMAT AND

IN CSI PAGE FORMAT; THE PROJECT NAME/NUMBER/DATE AND SECTION TITLE IN THE FOOTER ARE OPTIONAL. NOTES TO THE SPECIFIER, SUCH AS THIS, MUST BE DELETED FROM THE FINAL SPECIFICATION.

IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE GENERAL CONDITIONS BEING USED ARE AIA A201-1997.

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Glass-mat faced, moisture resistant gypsum board.

EDIT LIST BELOW TO CONFORM TO PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY SECTION NUMBERS AND TITLES.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies. 3. Section 09 22 00 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board.

IF THE PROJECT INCLUDES ALLOWANCES OR ALTERNATES OR UNIT PRICES, RETAIN PARAGRAPHS BELOW AND COORDINATE WITH DIVISION 01.

C. Allowances: D. Unit Prices: E. Alternates: 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel

Products. 2. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.


3. ASTM C630 Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.

4. ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

5. ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 6. ASTM C1658 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. 7. ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on

the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 8. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. B. Gypsum Association (GA): GA-214 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board

Finish. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for

each product specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE RETAIN BELOW IF REQUIRED, REVISE LIMITS IF

REQUIRED. A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following limits

for surface burning characteristics when tested per ASTM E84: 1. Flame spread: 25, maximum. 2. Smoke developed: 450, maximum. B. Provide products that have been GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified by

the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute under the GREENGUARD Standard for Low Emitting Products and GREENGUARD for Children & Schools product certification program.

COORDINATE ARTICLE BELOW WITH PROJECT

REQUIREMENTS. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide products that offer six months of coverage against in-place exposure

damage (delamination, deterioration and decay). B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Three years against manufacturing defects. THIS GUIDE SPEC WAS WRITTEN TO PROVIDE THREE

EDITING OPTIONS: 1) PROPRIETARY, 2) GENERIC, OR 3) A


COMBINATION OF THE TWO. PART 2 PRODUCTS

IF PROPRIETARY PRODUCT NAMES ARE INCLUDED IN THE “MATERIALS” ARTICLE BELOW, DELETE THIS ARTICLE ALTOGETHER. IF A PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION IS REQUIRED, RETAIN THIS ARTICLE AND DELETE THE “MATERIALS” ARTICLE.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

EDIT LISTS BELOW TO CONFORM TO PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. IF OTHER MANUFACTURERS ARE BEING ADDED TO THIS SECTION, ADD LISTINGS OF THEIR PROPRIETARY PRODUCT NAMES.

A. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: 1. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board: DensArmor Plus. 2. Fire-Rated Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board: DensArmor Plus

Fireguard. B. C.

THIS ARTICLE INCLUDES GENERIC DESCRIPTIONS OF GYPSUM BOARD PANELS; THE NAMES OF THE CORRESPONDING GEORGIA-PACIFIC GYPSUM PRODUCTS ARE INCLUDED AS ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. IF THIS SECTION IS BEING EDITED TO BE GENERIC, THESE PRODUCT NAMES SHOULD BE DELETED.

IF OTHER MANUFACTURERS ARE BEING ADDED TO THIS SECTION, 1) ADD THE PROPRIETARY PRODUCT NAMES OF THOSE MANUFACTURERS, OR 2) IF PROPRIETARY NAMES ARE LISTED IN THE “MANUFACTURERS” ARTICLE ABOVE, DELETE THEM FROM THIS ARTICLE ALTOGETHER.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: 8 feet.


4. Weight: 2020 pounds per M square feet. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Surfacing: Coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 7. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less than 80

lbf. 8. Flexural Strength, Perpendicular (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less

than 100 lbf. 9. R-Value (ASTM C518): Not less than 0.56. 10. Nail Pull Resistance (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less than 80 lbf. 11. Humidified Deflection (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not more than 1/4 inch. 12. Hardness, Core, Edges, and Ends (ASTM C473, ASTM C1396): Not less

than 15. 13. Water Absorption (ASTM C630, ASTM C1396, ASTM C1658): Less than 5

percent of weight. 14. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as manufactured. 15. Acceptable Products: a. 1/2 inch DensArmor Plus Interior Guard, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. 1/2 inch DensArmor Plus Fireguard Interior Guard Type C, Georgia-

Pacific Gypsum. c. B. 5/8 Inch Fire-Rated Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: 8 feet. 4. Weight: 2570 pounds per M square feet. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Surfacing: Coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 7. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less than 100

lbf. 8. Flexural Strength, Perpendicular (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less

than 140 lbf. 9. R-Value (ASTM C518): Not less than 0.67. 10. Nail Pull Resistance (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less than 90 lbf. 11. Humidified Deflection (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not more than 1/8 inch. 12. Hardness, Core, Edges, and Ends (ASTM C473, ASTM C1396): Not less


percent of weight. 14. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as manufactured. 15. Acceptable Products: a. 5/8 Inch DensArmor Plus Fireguard Interior Guard Type X, Georgia-

Pacific Gypsum. b. 5/8 Inch DensArmor Plus Abuse Guard, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. c.


C. 1/2 Inch Fire-Rated Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: 8 feet. 4. Weight: 2020 pounds per M square feet. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Surfacing: Coated fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 7. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less than 80

lbf. 8. Flexural Strength, Perpendicular (ASTM C473, UL File No. R2717): Not

less than 120 lbf. 9. R-Value (ASTM C518): Not less than 0.56. 10. Nail Pull Resistance (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not less than 80 lbf. 11. Humidified Deflection (ASTM C473, ASTM C1658): Not more than 1/4 inch. 12. Hardness, Core, Edges, and Ends (ASTM C473, ASTM C1396): Not less


percent of weight. 14. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as manufactured. 15. Acceptable Products: a. 1/2 Inch DensArmor Plus Fireguard Interior Guard Type C, Georgia-

Pacific Gypsum. b. c. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: In accordance with ASTM C840 and the manufacturer’s

recommendations. IF OTHER MANUFACTURERS WERE ADDED IN PART 2,

REFERENCE THEIR INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS BELOW BY TITLE.

1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: a. Current “Product Catalog”, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. b. c. 3.02 APPLICATION

RETAIN PARAGRAPH BELOW WHEN “LEVEL 4” FINISH IS REQUIRED PER GA-214. WHEN USING GLOSS, SEMI-


GLOSS OR ENAMEL PAINT, OR WHEN WORKING IN A CRITICAL (SEVERE) LIGHTING AREA, ALWAYS FINISH TO A “LEVEL 5” FINISH PER GA-214. REFER TO GA-214 FOR DEFINITION AND EXAMPLES OF CRITICAL LIGHT AREAS. CONSULT GYPSUM BOARD MANUFACTURER FOR MORE INFORMATION.

A. Primer and Paint Application: 1. Use a high quality, high build drywall primer/surfacer. Comply with

application instructions of the primer manufacturer as stated on the container.

2. Apply high build primer at a sufficient wet film thickness to ensure a dry film thickness that will produce acceptable results.

THE NUMBER OF COATS OF FINISH PAINT AND THE

TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS OF THE FINISH COATS NEEDED FOR ACCEPTABLE RESULTS WILL DEPEND ON THE PAINT USED. CONSULT PAINT MANUFACTURER FOR MORE INFORMATION.

3. Apply finish coats of paint per the paint manufacturer’s label instructions. 3.03 PROTECTION

REVISE BELOW IF OTHER THAN AIA GENERAL CONDITIONS ARE USED.

A. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and deterioration until the date

of Substantial Completion.


LATICRETE® International, Inc. Master Specification 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile

Forrest Resource 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope of work - Provide ceramic tile, tile installation materials and accessories as indicated on drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for complete and proper installation.

B. Related Documents - provisions within General and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 -General Requirements, and the Drawings apply to this Section.


A. Ceramic wall tile and trim units (glazed) B. Ceramic floor tile/mosaics and trim units (glazed or unglazed) C. Ceramic tile pavers and trim units (glazed or unglazed) D. Quarry tile pavers and trim units (glazed or unglazed) E. Porcelain tile F. Glass mosaics G. Special purpose tile H. Decorative thin wall tile I. Installation Products; adhesives, mortars, grouts and sealants J. Waterproof membranes for ceramic tilework K. Anti-fracture membranes for ceramic tilework L. Sound control underlayments M. Thresholds, trim, cementitious backer units and other accessories specified herein. NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit for applicable procedures & materials

1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit for applicable products 1.4 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit for applicable products 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Environmental Performance Criteria: The following criteria are required for products included in this section. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements: 1. Products manufactured regionally within a 500 mile radius of the Project site;

2. Adhesive products must meet or exceed the VOC limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168 and Bay Area Resources Board Reg. 8, Rule 51.


A. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete (monolithic slab finishing for ceramic tile) B. Section 03305 Concrete Curing C. Section 03410 Structural Pre-cast Concrete D. Section 03532 Concrete Floor Topping E. Section 04200 Unit Masonry (CMU wall substrates) F. Section 04300 Stone G. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry (plywood sub-floors) H. Section 07110 Membrane Waterproofing I. Section 07920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants J. Section 09250 Gypsum Board Assemblies K. Section 09385 Stone Tile L. Section 10800 Washroom Accessories M. Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Above are examples of typical broad scope and narrow scope sections related to ceramic tile installation. Edit for applicable related sections 1.7 ALLOWANCES



NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit for detail of applicable ALLOWANCES; coordinate with Section 01020 Allowances. Allowances in the form of unit pricing are sometimes used when the scope of the tile work at time of bid is undetermined. 1.8 ALTERNATES NOTE TO SPECIFIER: edit for applicable ALTERNATES. Alternates may be used to evaluate varying levels of performance of setting systems or to assist in the selection of the tile by economy. 1.9 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A137.1 American National Standard Specifications For Ceramic Tile

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A108.01 - A108.17 American National Standard Specifications For The Installation Of Ceramic Tile

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A118.1 - A118.12 American National Standard Specifications For The Installation Of Ceramic Tile

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A136.1 American National Standard Specifications For The Installation Of Ceramic Tile

F. American Plywood Association (APA) Y510T Plywood Design Specifications G. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) A82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for

Concrete Reinforcement H. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement I. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate J. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C36 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard K. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength

of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens) L. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for

Masonry Mortar M. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement N. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for

Curing Concrete O. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C241 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance

of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic P. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C267 Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance

of Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings Q. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C482 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of

Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement R. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C503 Standard Specification for Marble Dimension

Stone (Exterior) S. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes

T. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C627 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson-Type Floor Tester

U. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C794 Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants

V. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath W. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C905 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of

Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings X. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint

Sealants



Y. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) C955 Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases

Z. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing And Waterproofing

AA. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D227 Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

BB. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D751 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics CC. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D751 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -

Durometer Hardness DD. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D1248 Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous

Substances by Joint Sealants EE. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D2240 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics FF. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by The Plastic Sheet Method GG. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D4397 Standard Specification for Polyethylene

Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications HH. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) D4716 Standard Test Method for Determining the (In

Plane) Flow Rate Per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geo-synthetic Using a Constant Head II. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials JJ. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions KK. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor

Transmission of Materials LL. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) E413 Standard Classification for Rating Sound

Insulation MM. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) E492 Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Measurement of Impact Sound Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine NN. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) E989 Standard Classification for Determination of

Impact Insulation Class (IIC) OO. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM) E2179 Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Measurement of the Effectiveness of Floor Coverings in Reducing Impact Sound Transmission Through Concrete Floors

PP. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM) F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes

QQ. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) - ASME A112.6.3 Floor and Trench Drains RR. Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI) Lightweight Steel Framing Binder {Publication 52M} SS. Federal Housing Administration (FHA) Bulletin No. 750 Impact Noise Control in Multifamily Dwellings TT. Housing and Urban Development (HUD) TS 28 A Guide to Airborne, Impact and Structure-borne Noise-

Control in Multifamily Dwellings UU. Materials And Methods Standards Association (MMSA) Bulletins 1-16 VV. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (ML/SFA) 540 Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual WW. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) Product Technical Information and ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. Report ER-4943P XX. Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association Of Canada (TTMAC) Specification Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual YY. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook For Ceramic Tile Installation

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: edit for applicable reference standards 1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Ceramic mosaic floor tile installed over concrete floor slabs using latex-modified Portland cement mortar and latex Portland cement grout joints.



B. Quarry tile and base installed using latex modified Portland cement mortar over a plastic Portland cement mortar bed or over a cured (pre-floated) Portland cement mortar bed with epoxy grouted joints.

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: The above systems are example descriptions; edit for additional applicable systems 1.11 SUBMITTALS NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit for applicable requirements

A. Submittal Requirements: Submit the following “Required LEED Criteria” certification items as listed below. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements: 1. A completed LEED Environmental Building Materials Certification Form. Information to be supplied generally includes:

a. Manufacturing plant locations for tile installation products. b. LEED Credits as listed in Part 1.4B “LEED Credit Submittals”

2. GREENGUARD Environmental Institute certificates provided by the tile installation materials manufacturer on GREENGUARD letterhead stating “This product has been GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified® by the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute under the GREENGUARD Standard for Low Emitting Products” for each tile installation product used to verify Low VOC product information.

3. Contractor’s certification of LEED Compliance: Submit Contractor’s certification verifying the installation of specified LEED Compliant products. 4. Product Cut Sheets for all materials that meet the LEED performance criteria. Submit Product Cut

Sheets with Contractor or Subcontractor’s stamp, as confirmation that submitted products were installed on Project.

5. Material Safety Data Sheets for all applicable products. B. LEED Credit Submittals for the following;

1. LEED NC v2.2 Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturer’s product data for tile installation materials, including GREENGUARD Certificate, on GREENGUARD letterhead, stating VOC content.

2. LEED NC v2.2 Credit MR 2.1: (Divert 50% from Disposal) Manufacturer’s packaging showing recycle symbol for appropriate disposition in construction waste management.

3. LEED NC v2.2 Credit MR 2.1: (Divert 75% from Disposal) Manufacturer’s packaging showing recycle symbol for appropriate disposition in construction waste management.

4. LEED NC v2.2 Credit MR 5.1 (10% Extracted, Processed & Manufactured Regionally): Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. a. Include statement indicating cost and distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured product.

5. LEED NC v2.2 Credit MR 5.2 (20% Extracted, Processed & Manufactured Regionally): Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials.

a. Include statement indicating cost and distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured product.

C. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data under provisions of Section (01300.) (01340.) D. Submit samples of each type/style/finish/size/color of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, trim unit or threshold

under provisions of Section (01300.) (01340.) E. Submit manufacturers' installation instructions under provisions of Section (01300.) (01340.) F. Submit manufacturer's certification under provisions of Section (01405) that the materials supplied conform

to ANSI A137.1. G. Submit proof of warranty. H. Submit sample of installation system demonstrating compatibility/functional relationships between

adhesives, mortars, grouts and other components under provision of Section (01300.) (01340.) I. Submit list from manufacturer of installation system/adhesive/mortar/grout identifying a minimum of three (3)

similar projects, each with a minimum of ten (10) years service. J. For alternate materials, at least thirty (30) days before bid date submit independent laboratory test results

confirming compliance with specifications listed in Part 2 - Products. 1.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Tile Manufacturer (single source responsibility): Company specializing in ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim units and/or thresholds with three (3) years minimum experience. Obtain tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Installation System Manufacturer (single source responsibility): Company specializing in adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials with ten (10) years minimum experience and ISO 9001 certification. Obtain installation materials from single source manufacturer to insure consistent quality and full compatibility.

C. Submit laboratory confirmation of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials: 1. Identify proper usage of specified materials using positive analytical method. 2. Identify compatibility of specified materials using positive analytical method. 3. Identify proper color matching of specified materials using a positive analytical method.

D. Installer qualifications: company specializing in installation of ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim units and thresholds with five (5) years documented experience with installations of similar scope, materials and design.

1.12.1 MOCK-UPS

A. Provide mock-up of each type/style/finish/size/color of ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim unit and threshold, along with respective installation adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials, under provisions of Section (01400) (01405).

1.12.2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE Pre-installation conference: At least three weeks prior to commencing the work attend a meeting at the

jobsite to discuss conformance with requirements of specification and job site conditions. Representatives of owner, architect, general contractor, tile subcontractor, Tile Manufacturer, Installation System Manufacturer and any other parties who are involved in the scope of this installation must attend the meeting.

1.12.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Acceptance at Site: deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels, including grade seal, intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store ceramic tile and installation system materials in a dry location; handle in a manner to prevent chipping, breakage, and contamination.

C. Protect latex additives, organic adhesives, epoxy adhesives and sealants from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; store at room temperature when possible.

D. Store portland cement mortars and grouts in a dry location. 1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Provide ventilation and protection of environment as recommended by manufacturer. B. Prevent carbon dioxide damage to ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim, thresholds, as well as adhesives,

mortars, grouts and other installation materials, by venting temporary heaters to the exterior. C. Maintain ambient temperatures not less than 50ºF (10ºC) or more than 100ºF (38ºC) during installation and

for a minimum of seven (7) days after completion. Setting of portland cement is retarded by low temperatures. Protect work for extended period of time and from damage by other trades. Installation with latex portland cement mortars requires substrate, ambient and material temperatures at least 37ºF (3ºC). There should be no ice in slab. Freezing after installation will not damage latex portland cement mortars. Protect portland cement based mortars and grouts from direct sunlight, radiant heat, forced ventilation (heat & cold) and drafts until cured to prevent premature evaporation of moisture. Epoxy mortars and grouts require surface temperatures between 60ºF (16ºC) and 90ºF (32ºC) at time of installation. It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to maintain temperature control.

1.14 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of tile work with related work. B. Proceed with tile work only after curbs, vents, drains, piping, and other projections through substrate have

been installed and when substrate construction and framing of openings have been completed.



1.15 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents and free

from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years. The manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials shall provide a written ten (10) year warranty, which covers materials and labor - reference LATICRETE Warranty Data Sheet 230.12 for complete details and requirements.

1.16 MAINTENANCE Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01730. Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions

recommended, stain removal methods, as well as polishes and waxes recommended. 1.17 EXTRA MATERIALS STOCK Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner 2% minimum additional tile and trim shape

of each type, color, pattern and size used in the Work, as well as extra stock of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials for the Owner's use in replacement and maintenance. Extra stock is to be from same production run or batch as original tile and installation materials.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOTE: Tile is extremely durable and requires little maintenance. Performance is comparable for green methods and standard methods. 2.1 TILE MANUFACTURERS

Subject to compliance with paragraphs 1.12 and performance requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Provide list of acceptable tile manufacturers. 2.2 WALL TILE MATERIALS NOTE TO SPECIFIER: edit for each tile type

A. Ceramic Tile: B. Grade: C. Size: D. Edge: E. Finish: F. Color: G. Special shapes H. Location:

2.3 FLOOR TILE MATERIALS NOTE TO SPECIFIER: edit for each tile type

A. Ceramic Tile B. Grade: C. Size: D. Edge E. Finish: F. Color G. Special shapes H. Location:

2.4 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION MATERIALS MANUFACTURER

A LATICRETE International, Inc., 1 Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA Phone 800-243-4788, (203) 393-0010 [email protected], www.laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com/green

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Use either the following performance specification or the proprietary specification.


http://www.laticrete.com/

http://www.laticrete.com/green



2.5 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION - TILE INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Waterproofing Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single component liquid and load bearing. Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven rot-proof specifically intended for waterproofing membrane. Waterproofing Membrane to be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured. It shall be certified by IAPMO and ICC approved as a shower pan liner and shall also meet the following physical requirements: 1. Water Permeability @ 30ft.hydro/0.9 atmos. /91.2kPa (Fed. Spec.TT-C-00555 Modified): Nil 2. Elongation @ break (ASTM D751): 20-30% 3. Service Temperatures (LIL 1016): -20° to 280°F(-28° to 137°C) 4. Breaking Strength (ASTM D751): 2950 psi (20.4 MPa) 5. Thickness (LIL 1013): 20 mils (0.5 mm) 6. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.4): 250 PSI (1.7 MPa) 7. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy/cycles 1-14 8. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3

B. Crack Suppression Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single component liquid and load bearing.

Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven, rot-proof specifically intended for crack suppression membrane. Materials to be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured. Crack Suppression Membrane shall also meet the following physical requirements: 1. Elongation at break (ASTM D751): 20-30% 2. Service Temperatures (LIL 1016): -20° to 280°F(-28° to 137°C) 3. Breaking Strength (ASTM D751): 1700 psi (11.7 MPa) 4. Thickness (LIL 1013): 20 mils (0.5 mm) 5. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy/cycles 1-14 6. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3

C. Wire Reinforcing: 2 inch x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) x 16 ASW gauge or 0.0625 inch (1.6mm) diameter

galvanized steel welded wire mesh complying with ASTM A185 and ASTM A82.

D. Cleavage membrane: 15 pound asphalt saturated, non-perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM D226, 15 pound coal tar saturated, non-perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM D227 or 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene plastic film complying with ASTM D4397.

E. Cementitious backer board units: size and thickness as specified, complying with ANSI A118.9. F. Thresholds: Provide marble saddles complying with ASTM C241 for abrasion resistance and ASTM C503

for exterior use, in color, size, shape and thickness as indicated on drawings. NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit Applicable tile installation accessories 2.6 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION – TILE INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Sound Control Underlayment shall be load bearing, shock and vibration resistant. It shall be certified by independent laboratory testing to meet the specified acoustical performance when installed in a Floor Assembly with a 6" (150mm) concrete slab, as well as meet the following physical requirements: 1. Service Rating (ASTM C627): Light 2. Point Load (ANSI A118.12-5.2): >1250 psi (8.6 MPa) 3. Installed Weight (ASTM C905 Modified): 2.6 lbs./ft2 (12.8 kg/m2) 4. Delta Impact Insulation Class (ΔIIC; ASTM E2179): 20

B. Sound Abatement & Crack Suppression Adhesive shall comply with ANSI A118.12, provide an Extra Heavy

rating and provide a minimum ΔIIC of 15: 1. Service Rating (ASTM C627): Extra Heavy 2. Delta Impact Insulation Class (ΔIIC; ASTM E2179): 15

3. Point Load (ANSI A118.12 5.2): >1000 psi (6.9 MPa)



4. Minimum Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.12): 100psi (0.7 MPa)

C. Moisture Vapor Reduction to be epoxy based and GreenGuard compliant as well as meet the following physical requirements: 1. Shear Bond to Concrete (ANSI A118.12-5.1.5): ≥285 psi (2.0 MPa) 2. Alkalinity Resistance (ASTM C267): Pass 3. Permeability (ASTM F1869): 9.7 lbs/1,000ft2/24 hours down to 0.2 lbs/1,000 ft2/24hours

D. Latex Portland Cement Mortar for thick beds, screeds, leveling beds and scratch/plaster coats to be

weather, frost, shock resistant and meet the following physical requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.4 Modified): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) 2. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.6): ≤ 5% 3. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy/cycles 1-14 4. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0 5. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3

E. Epoxy Adhesive to be chemical resistant 100% solids epoxy with high temperature resistance and meet the following minimum physical requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ANSI A118.3): 7500 psi (51.7 MPa) 2. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1250 psi (8.6 MPa) 3. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): 1200 psi (8.3 MPa) 4. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1800 psi (12.4 MPa) 5. Shrinkage (ANSI A118.3): 0.03 % 6. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3 7. Cured Epoxy Adhesive to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda,

beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, detergents, brine, sugar, cosmetics and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute food acids, dilute alkalis, gasoline, turpentine and mineral spirits.

F. Latex Portland Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry bond coats to be weather, frost, shock

resistant, non-flammable and meet the following physical requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ANSI A118.4): 2400 psi (16.5 MPa) Min. 2. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4): 500 psi (3.5MPa) Min. 3. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0 4. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3

G. Organic Adhesive shall be non-flammable, water resistant, latex adhesive and shall meet the following physical requirements: 1. Open Time (ANSI A136.1): 70 minutes @ 75°F (24°C) 2. Color: White 3. Density (ANSI A136.1): 13.2 lbs/gal (1.6 kg/l)

H. Epoxy Grout (Industrial) to be non-flammable, chemical resistant 100% solids epoxy with high temperature

resistance and meeting the following physical requirements: 1. Initial Set Time (ANSI A118.5): Pass (4 hours) 2. Service Set Time (ANSI A118.5): Pass (< 7 days) 3. Shrinkage (ANSI A118.3): Pass (0.07%) 4. Sag (ANSI A118.3): Pass (no sag) 5. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3; quarry tile): 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) 6. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.5): 14700 psi (101 MPa) 7. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.5): 2577 psi (17.8 MPa) 8. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): 500 psi (3.4 MPa)



9. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (3% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, detergents, brine, sugar, cosmetics and blood, as well as being chemically resistant to dilute food/mineral acids, gasoline and mineral spirits.

I. Epoxy Grout (Commercial/Residential) shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, non-hazardous during storage,

mixing, application and when cured and shall meet the following physical requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): 3500 psi (24 MPa) 2. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) 3. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): < 0.5 % 4. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3 5. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda,

beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, brine, sugar, cosmetics, and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute acids and dilute alkalis.

J. Latex Portland Cement Grout to be weather, frost and shock resistant, as well as meet the following physical

requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.7): 3500 psi (24 MPa) 2. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.7): < 5% 3. Linear Shrinkage (ANSI A118.7): < 0.1 % 4. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0 5. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3

K. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant to be a one component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone sealant

and meet the following requirements: 1. Tensile Strength (ASTM C794): 225 psi (1.5 MPa) 2. Hardness (ASTM D751; Shore A): 25 (colored sealant)/15 (clear sealant) 3. Weather Resistance (QUV Weather-ometer): 10000 hours (no change)

L. Roof Decks (and other exterior paving applications over occupied/storage spaces) shall consist of a Primary

Roofing/Waterproofing Membrane, as specified in Section 0700 (q.v.), and a lightweight, frost/weather resistant installation system for tile, pavers, brick and stone that provides integral subsurface drainage and meets the following physical requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C109 Modified): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) 2. Hydraulic Transmissivity (ASTM D4716): 1.6 gal./minute (6.1 l/minute)

M.. Spot Bonding Epoxy Adhesive for installing tile, brick and stone over vertical and overhead surfaces shall be high strength, high temperature resistant, non-sag and shall meet the following physical requirements: 1. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) 2. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): 0.1 % 3. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): 8379 psi (57.8 MPa) 4. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3 Modified): 2000 psi (13.8 MPa)

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit applicable tile installation materials.

2.7 PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION - TILE INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Installation accessories as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc., 1 LATICRETE Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA. Phone 800-243-4788, www.laticrete.com

A. Waterproofing Membrane: LATICRETE® 9235 Waterproofing Membrane** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.

B. Waterproofing Membrane: LATICRETE Hydro Ban™** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc. C. Crack Suppression Membrane: LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane** as manufactured by

LATICRETE International, Inc. NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Edit applicable tile installation accessories.

http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/datasheets/lds2360.pdf





2.8 PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION - TILE INSTALLATION MATERIALS

Installation materials as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc., 1 LATICRETE Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA. Phone 800-243-4788, www.laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com/green

A. Sound Abatement & Crack Isolation Mat: LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat (Standard or PLUS Configurations) as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar for thick beds, screeds, leveling beds and scratch/plaster coats: LATICRETE 226 Thick Bed Mortar** gauged with LATICRETE 3701 Mortar Admix** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.

C. Moisture Vapor Reduction: LATAPOXY® 312 Vapor Reduction Membrane** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.

D. Epoxy Adhesive: LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc. E. Latex Portland Cement Thin Bed Mortar: LATICRETE 254 Platinum** as manufactured by LATICRETE

International, Inc. F. Sound Abatement & Crack Suppression Adhesive: LATICRETE 125 Sound & Crack Adhesive** as

manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc. G. Organic Adhesive: LATICRETE 15 Premium Mastic as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc. H. Epoxy Grout (Industrial): LATAPOXY 2000 Industrial Grout as manufactured by LATICRETE International,

Inc. I. Epoxy Grout (Commercial/Residential): LATICRETE SpectraLOCK® PRO Grout** as manufactured by

LATICRETE International, Inc. J. Latex Portland Cement Grout: LATICRETE PermaColor Grout**; or, LATICRETE 1500 Sanded Grout** or

LATICRETE 1600 Unsanded Grout** gauged with LATICRETE 1776 Grout Enhancer** as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.

K. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant: LATICRETE Latasil™ as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.

L. Roof Deck: LATICRETE Plaza & Deck System as manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc. M. Spot Bonding Epoxy Adhesive: LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive (Standard or Rapid Grade) as

manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc.

** GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified® Product PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces to be covered with ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick, stone, trim or waterproofing are: 1. Sound, rigid and conform to good design/engineering practices; 2. Systems, including the framing system and panels, over which tile or stone will be installed shall be in

conformance with the International Residential Code (IRC) for residential applications, the International Building Code (IBC) for commercial applications, or applicable building codes. The project design should include the intended use and necessary allowances for the expected live load, concentrated load, impact load, and dead load including the weight of the finish and installation materials;

3. Clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil, loose plaster, paint, and scale;

4. Thin-set tile installations have a specified subsurface tolerance, for instance ¼” in 10’ (6mm in 3m) and 1/16” in 1’ (1.5mm in 300mm), to conform with the ANSI specifications. Because thin-set is not intended to be used in truing or leveling the work of others, the subsurface typically should not vary by more than 1/16” over 1’ (1.5mm over 300mm), nor more than 1/32” (0.8mm) between adjoining edges where applicable (e.g. between sheets of exterior glue plywood or between adjacent concrete masonry units). Should the architect/designer require a more stringent tolerance (e.g. 1/8” in 10’ [3mm in 300mm]), the subsurface specification must reflect that tolerance, or the tile specification must include a specific and separate requirement to bring the ¼” (6mm) subsurface tolerance into compliance with the 1/8” (6mm) tolerance desired;

5. Not leveled with gypsum or asphalt based compounds;


http://www.laticrete.com/green

















http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/datasheets/LDS2900.pdf






6. Dry as per American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D4263 “Standard Test for Determining Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.”

B. Concrete surfaces shall also be: 1. Cured a minimum of 28 days at 70°F (21°C), including an initial seven (7) day period of wet curing; NOTE TO SPECIFIER: LATICRETE® Latex Portland Cement Mortars do not require a minimum cure time for concrete substrates or mortar beds; 2. Wood float finished, or better, if the installation is to be done by the thin bed method;

C. Advise General Contractor and Architect of any surface or substrate conditions requiring correction before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of substrate or surface conditions.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. CONCRETE SUBSTRATES

(Insert any Special Means of Preparation in addition to the surface preparation requirements listed in § 3.1;…)

B. (List other Substrates as required and means of preparation as required) (Insert any Special Means of Preparation in addition to the surface preparation requirements listed in § 3.1;…)

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: edit substrate and preparation section based on project specific surfaces and conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Waterproofing: NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Adhesives/mastics, mortars and grouts for ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers,

brick and stone are not replacements for waterproofing membranes and will not prevent water penetration into occupied or storage spaces below. Install the waterproofing membrane in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.01 (2.7 Waterproofing) and ANSI A108.13. Review the installation and plan the application sequence. Pre-cut LATICRETE® 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Reinforcing Fabric, allowing 2” (50mm) for overlap at ends and sides. Roll up the pieces for easy handling and placement. Shake or stir LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Liquid before using. Pre-treat all substrate cracks, cold joints, control joints, coves, corners and penetrations according to manufacturer’s specific recommendations. Allow pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat of LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Liquid with brush or roller over substrate including pre-treated areas. Before the coat dries, unroll LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Reinforcing Fabric, smooth out any wrinkles and press with brush or roller until LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Liquid “bleeds” through to surface. Apply another liberal coat of LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Liquid and allow it to dry to the touch, ~1-3 hours @ 70°F (21°C) & 50% RH. Apply a third liberal coat of LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Liquid to seal membrane. When last coat has dried to the touch, inspect final surface for pinholes, voids or thin spots. Use additional LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Liquid to seal such defects. For installation of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, brick or stone, follow Thin Bed Method (§ 3.4H), which may begin as soon as last coat of LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Liquid has dried to the touch. Allow LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane to cure for at least 7 days @ 70° F (21° C) & 50% RH be fore running wa te r penetration tests. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane

References: LATICRETE Detail Drawings: WP300, WP301, WP302, WP303

LATICRETE Data Sheets: 236.0, WPAF.5 LATICRETE MSDS: 9235, Fabric GREENGUARD Certificate: 9235 LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 188, 189, 203

B. Waterproofing:

http://apps.laticrete.com/ag2.0/reference/ES-WP300.pdf





http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/WPAF.5/universalmembrane.pdf

http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/msds/9235.pdf

http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/msds/9235fabric.pdf

http://www.greenguard.org/DesktopModules/GGCertificationPrint.aspx?productId=2538

http://www.laticrete.com/portals/0/tds/tds188.pdf





NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Adhesives/mastics, mortars and grouts for ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick and stone are not replacements for waterproofing membranes and will not prevent water penetration into occupied or storage spaces below. Pre-Treat Cracks and Joints - Fill all substrate cracks, cold joints and control joints to a smooth finish using a LATICRETE® latex-fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban™ applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in non-structural joints and cracks. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE® Hydro Ban™ approximately 8” (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller. Pre-Treat Coves and Floor/Wall Intersections - Fill all substrate coves and floor/wall transitions to a smooth finish and changes in plane using a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban applied with a paint brush or trowel may be used to fill in cove joints and floor/wall transitions <1/8” (3mm) in width. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban™ approximately 8” (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller. Pre-Treat Drains - Drains must be of the clamping ring type, with weepers as per ASME A112.6.3. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban around and over the bottom half of drain clamping ring. Cover with a second liberal coat of LATICRETE Hydro Ban. When the LATICRETE Hydro Ban dries, apply a bead of LATICRETE Latasil™ where the LATICRETE Hydro Ban meets the drain throat. Install the top half of drain clamping ring. Pre-Treat Penetrations - Allow for a minimum 1/8” (3mm) space between drains, pipes, lights, or other penetrations and surrounding ceramic tile, stone or brick. Pack any gaps around pipes, lights or other penetrations with a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-set. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban around penetration opening. Cover the first coat with a second liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban. Bring LATICRETE Hydro Ban up to level of tile or stone. When LATICRETE Hydro Ban has dried to the touch seal with LATICRETE Latasil. Main Application - Allow any pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban with a paint brush or heavy napped roller over substrate including pre-treated areas and allow to dry to the touch. Install another liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban over the first coat. Let the top coat of LATICRETE Hydro Ban dry to the touch approximately 1 – 3 hours at 70°F 21°C and 50% RH. When the top coat has dried to the touch inspect the surface for pinholes, voids, thin spots or other defects. LATICRETE Hydro Ban will dry to an olive green color when fully cured. Use additional LATICRETE Hydro Ban to seal any defects. Movement Joints - Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE Hydro Ban, approximately 8” (200mm) wide over the areas. Then embed and loop the 6” (150mm) wide LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Reinforcing Fabric and allow the LATICRETE Hydro Ban liquid to bleed through. Immediately top coat with a second coat of LATICRETE Hydro Ban. * Dry coat thickness is 20 – 30 mil (.02 - .03” or .5 - .8mm); consumption per coat is approximately .01 gal/ft2 (approx. .4 l/m2); coverage is approximately 100 ft2 /gal (approx. 2.5 m2/ l). LATICRETE 9235 Waterproofing Membrane Fabric can be used to pre-treat cracks, joints, curves, corners, drains, and penetrations with LATICRETE Hydro Ban Protection - Provide protection for newly installed membrane, even if covered with a thin-bed ceramic tile, stone or brick installation against exposure to rain or other water for a minimum of 24 hours at 70°F (21°C) and 50% RH. For temperatures between 45°F and 69°F (7°C to 21°C) allow a 3 day cure period. Flood Testing - Allow membrane to cure fully before flood testing, typically 24 hours at 70°F (21°C) and 50% RH. Cold conditions will require a longer curing time. For temperatures between 45°F and 69°F (7°C to 21°C) allow a 3 day cure period prior to flood testing Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE Hydro Ban™ References: LATICRETE Detail Drawings: WP300, WP301, WP302, WP303

http://apps.laticrete.com/AG/stand-alones/Detail%20WP-300.doc






LATICRETE Data Sheets: 663.0, 663.5 LATICRETE MSDS: Hydro Ban, Fabric LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 188, 189, 203

C. Crack Suppression Membrane: NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick and stone installed by the thin bed method can be damaged by shrinkage related substrate cracking. Specify an Anti-Fracture Membrane or Crack Suppression Membrane to reduce crack propagation into veneers or hard finishes. Do not use Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membranes if substrate cracking: 1) is due to structural movement; 2) involves vertical and/or differential movement; 3) involves horizontal movement >1/8” (3mm). Install the anti-fracture membrane in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.17 (1.0 – 3.0). Review the installation and plan the application sequence. Pre-cut LATICRETE® Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane Reinforcing Fabric, allowing 2” (50mm) for overlap at ends and sides. Roll up the pieces for easy handling and placement. Shake or stir LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane Liquid before using. Pre-treat all substrate cracks, cold joints, control joints, coves, corners and penetrations according to manufacturer’s specific recommendations. Allow pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat of LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane Liquid with brush or roller over substrate including pre-treated areas. Before the coat dries, unroll LATICRETE® Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane Reinforcing Fabric, smooth out any wrinkles and press with brush or roller until LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane Liquid “bleeds” through to surface. Apply another liberal coat of LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane Liquid and allow it to dry to the touch, ~1-3 hours @ 70ºF (21ºC) & 50% RH. For installation of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, brick or stone, follow Thin Bed Method (§ 3.4H), which may begin as soon as last coat of LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane Liquid has dried to the touch. Allow LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane to cure for at least 3 days @ 70ºF (21ºC) & 50% RH before exposing installation to rain or other water, even if covered by ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick or stone. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane

References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 647.0, WPAF.5 LATICRETE MSDS: Blue 92, Fabric GREENGUARD Certificate: Blue 92

LATICRETE Technical Data Sheet: 203 3.4 INSTALLATION – TILE, BRICK, & STONE

A. General: Install in accordance with current versions of American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) “A108 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile” and TCNA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.” Cut and fit ceramic tile, brick or stone neatly around corners, fittings, and obstructions. Perimeter pieces to be minimum half tile, brick or stone. Chipped, cracked, split pieces and edges are not acceptable. Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width to tolerance +/- 1/16" over 8’ (1.5mm in 2.4m). Install divider strips at junction of flooring and dissimilar materials.

B. Moisture Vapor Reduction Membrane:

NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Conduct 3 Calcium Chloride Tests (per ASTM F1869) for the first 1,000ft2 (92.9m2) and 1 Calcium Chloride Test for every 1,000 ft2 (92.9 m2) thereafter of surface to receive moisture vapor reduction membrane. LATAPOXY® 312 Vapor Reduction Membrane performance contingent upon proper completion of ASTM F1869 by certified personnel and per test manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Surface Preparation – Mechanical scarification, shot or bead blasting of the surface is required to obtain an ICRI profile of CSP 3 (light shot blast). Acid etching, solvents, sweeping compounds, and sanding equipment are not acceptable means of cleaning the substrate. Apply LATAPOXY 312 Vapor Reduction Membrane to the substrate using a 3/8” (9mm) nap roller. Apply an even coat making sure to cover all areas thoroughly. Allow to cure for 24 hours at 70°F (21°C) prior to conducting Calcium Chloride Testing (per ASTM F1869) to determine if a second coat is necessary.

http://apps.laticrete.com/AG/reference/LDS2360.doc


http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/9235fabric.doc

http://apps.laticrete.com/AG/reference/TDS188.pdf


http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/TDS203.pdf




http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/msds/9235fabric.pdf


http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/tds/tds203.pdf



For areas that have a moisture vapor emission rate (MVER) between 3 lbs./1,000 ft2/24 hours (170 mg/s m2) and 12 lbs./1,000ft2/24 hours (678 mg/s m2) apply one coat of LATAPOXY 312 Vapor Reduction Membrane. For areas that have an MVER between 12 lbs./1,000ft2/24 hours (678 mg/s m2) and 20 lbs./1,000ft2/24 hours (1,130 mg/s m2) re-measure MVER (as stated above) after first coat and, if necessary, apply a second coat of LATAPOXY 312 Vapor Reduction Membrane until 3 lbs./1,000 ft2/24 hours (170 mg/s m2) is reached. Do not proceed with the installation of the finish flooring if the MVER exceeds the requirement of the finishing floor manufacturer. Allow LATAPOXY 312Vapor Reduction Membrane to cure for 24 hours at 70°F (21°C) before conducting the last round of moisture testing (per ASTM F1869) or the installation of the finish flooring. If an anti-fracture and/or waterproofing membrane is required, use LATICRETE Hydro Ban™ over the cured LATAPOXY 312 Vapor Reduction Membrane. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 312 Vapor Reduction Membrane

References: LATICRETE Data Sheet: 312.0 LATICRETE MSDS: 312A, 312B, 312C

C. Bonded Thick Bed Method (Floor): Verify 1“(25mm) nominal bed thickness has been allowed. Apply

LATICRETE 254 Platinum with flat trowel as a slurry bond coat approximately 1/16” (1. 5mm) thick over clean concrete slab in compliance with current revision of ANSI A108.1A (2.2 and 5.2). Place LATICRETE 226 Thick Bed Mortar gauged with LATICRETE 3701 Mortar Admix over slurry bond coat while LATICRETE 254 Platinum slurry bond coat is wet and tacky. Omit reinforcing wire fabric and fully compact bed by tamping. Spread LATICRETE 254 Platinum with flat trowel over surface of "green"/fresh mortar bed as a slurry bond coat approximately 1/16” (1.5mm) thick. Apply LATICRETE 254 Platinum slurry bond coat to back of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, brick, stone, trim unit or threshold and place each piece/sheet while slurry bond coats are wet and tacky. Beat with a hardwood block or rubber mallet to level/imbed pieces before mortar bed takes initial set. Clean excess mortar/adhesive from finished surfaces. For installation of tile, brick or stone over cured (pre-floated) latex-portland cement thick bed mortar, follow Thin Bed Method (§ 3.4H). Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 3701 Mortar Admix LATICRETE 226 Thick Bed Mortar LATICRETE 254 Platinum (slurry bond coat) References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 231.0, 239.1, 677.0 LATICRETE MSDS: 3701, 226, 254 GREENGUARD Certificates: 3701, 226, 254 LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 106, 114, 118, 128, 143, 154, 209

D. Thick Bed (Wire Reinforced) Method: Minimum bed thickness of 2” (50mm) must be maintained. Place latex-portland cement thick bed mortar to a depth approximately one-half finished bed thickness in compliance with current revision of ANSI A108.01 (3.2.1.1 & 3.2.4) and A108.1B. Lay 2” x 2” (50mm x 50mm), 16 gauge (1.5mm), galvanized, welded reinforcing wire fabric, complying with ANSI A108.02 (3.7) and ASTM A185, over mortar. Place additional thick bed mortar over wire fabric and compact mortar by tamping with flat trowel. Screed mortar bed level and provide correct slopes to drains. Spread latex-portland cement thin bed mortar with flat trowel over surface of "green"/fresh mortar bed as a slurry bond coat approximately 1/16” (1.5 mm) thick . As per ANSI A108.1A (6.0) apply latex-portland cement mortar slurry bond coat to back of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, brick, stone, trim unit or threshold and place each piece/sheet while slurry bond coats are wet and tacky. Beat with a hardwood block or rubber mallet to level/imbed pieces before mortar bed takes initial set. Clean excess mortar/adhesive from finished surfaces.


http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/312a.pdf

http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/312b.pdf

http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/312c.pdf



















For installation of tile, brick or stone over cured (pre-floated) latex-portland cement mortar bed, follow Thin Bed Method (§ 3.4H).

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE® 3701 Mortar Admix LATICRETE 226 Thick Bed Mortar LATICRETE 254 Platinum

References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 231.0, 239.1 LATICRETE MSDS: 3701, 226 GREENGUARD Certificates: 3701, 226

LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 106, 114, 204

E. Sound Abatement and Crack Isolation Mat: NOTES TO SPECIFIER: The sound reduction performance of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, brick and stone installations will depend significantly on: 1) the type and thickness of floor construction; 2) whether a suspended ceiling is part of the design; 3) flanking acoustical transmission control (e.g. perimeter isolation joints); 4) the type and source of sound energy/noise (i.e. impact versus airborne). Review test results conducted in conformance with current revision of ASTM E2179 “Standard Test method for Laboratory Measurement of the Effectiveness of Floor Coverings in Reducing Impact Sound Transmission Through Concrete Floors,” ASTM E492 “Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Impact Sound Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine,” ASTM E989 “Standard Classification for Determination of Impact Insulation Class (IIC),” ASTM E413 “Standard Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class (STC),” FHA Bulletin No. 750 “Impact Noise Control in Multifamily Dwellings,” HUD TS 28 “A Guide to Airborne, Impact and Structure-borne Noise-Control in Multifamily Dwellings” and manufacturer’s performance data and recommendations, in the context of expected sound reduction requirements. It is essential that all walls and building elements are isolated from the floor. The use of acoustical ceiling panels in the space below would provide additional sound control. Perimeter Isolation – It is recommended to install a perimeter isolation strip before placing and trimming LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat. Attach the perimeter isolation strip to the perimeter wall around the entire subfloor, as well as around the perimeter of any protrusions, in order to isolate or break the vibration transmission path between the floor and the wall. Temporarily fasten perimeter isolation strip in place with masking, duct or carpet tape. Main Application – Use LATICRETE 254 Platinum or LATICRETE Sure Set™ to adhere the LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat to the substrate. Use a ¼” x ¼” (6 mm x 6 mm) notched trowel and comb mortar over substrate, apply only enough mortar as can be covered within 25 minutes. Unroll the LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat into place, in the thin-set adhesive mortar. Once installed, use a 25 – 45 lb. (11.3 – 20 kg) roller to embed the LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat firmly into the adhesive mortar. Allow to cure for 24 hours at 70°F (21°C). Install LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat over the entire area to be treated. Do not overlap edges but be sure the edges of each piece butt firmly together. Trim length of mat to desired length and width. Once fully cured, install ceramic tile, porcelain or stone finish as directed in § 3.4C. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat

References: LATICRETE Data Sheet: 170.0 LATICRETE MSDS: 170











http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/170.doc



F. Pre-float Method: Over clean, dimensionally stable and sound concrete or masonry substrates,

apply thick-bed mortar as scratch/leveling coat in compliance with current revision of A108.1A (1.0, 1.4 & 5.1). Float surface of scratch/leveling coat plumb, true and allow mortar to set until firm. For installation of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, brick or stone, follow Thin Bed Method (§ 3.4H).

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials:

LATICRETE® 3701 Mortar Admix LATICRETE 226 Thick Bed Mortar LATICRETE 254 Platinum

References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 231.0, 239.1, 677.0 LATICRETE MSDS: 3701, 226, 254

GREENGUARD Certificates: 3701, 226, 254 LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 105, 106, 114, 118, 122, 128, 130, 143, 199, 204

G. Lath & Plaster Method: Install cleavage membrane complying with current revision of ANSI A108.02 (3.8 Membrane or cleavage membrane). Install metal lath complying with the current revision of ANSI A108.01 (3.3 Requirements for lathing and portland cement plastering), ANSI A108.02 (3.6 Metal lath) and A108.1A (1.0 – 1.2, 1.4, & 5.1). Apply latex-portland cement mortar as scratch/leveling coat over wire lath, concrete or masonry in compliance with current revision of ANSI A108.01 (3.3.5.1) and A108.1A (1.4). Float surface of scratch/leveling coat plumb, true and allow mortar to set until firm. For installation of tile, brick or stone, follow Thin Bed Method (§ 3.4 H).

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE® 3701 Mortar Admix LATICRETE 226 Thick Bed Mortar LATICRETE 254 Platinum

References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 231.0, 239.1, 677.0 LATICRETE MSDS: 3701, 226, 254 GREENGUARD Certificates: 3701, 226, 254 LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 105, 106, 114, 118, 122, 130, 199, 204

H. Thin Bed Method: Install latex portland cement mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much latex portland cement mortar as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (>8” x 8”/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex portland cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. ‘back-butter’) each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latex portland cement mortar over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the latex portland cement mortar with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex portland cement mortar from tile or stone face and joints between pieces.

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 254 Platinum

References: LATICRETE Data Sheet: 677.0

LATICRETE MSDS: 254 GREENGUARD Certificate: 254



http://apps.laticrete.com/ag2.0/reference/LDS6770.doc







































LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 105, 118, 129, 209

I. Sound Abatement and Crack Suppression Adhesive (Thin Bed Method): NOTE TO SPECIFIER: Ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick, and stone installed with traditional thin-

bed mortars can be damaged by shrinkage relatec substrate cracking. Specify a sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive which complies with ANSI A118.12 to reduce crack propagation into veneers or hard finishes. Do not use a sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive if substrate cracking:

1) is due to structural movement; 2) involves vertical and/or differential movement; 3) or, involves horizontal movement > 1/8” (3mm) Install sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive in compliance with current revisions of ANSI

A108.02 (3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (>8” x 8”/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex portland cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. ‘back-butter’) each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latex portland cement mortar over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive from tile or stone face and joints between pieces. Installations requiring sound control must be done with either a ¼” x 3/8” (6mm x 9mm) square notch trowel or a ½” x ½” (12mm x 12mm) square notch trowel. Installations requiring only anti-fracture can be done using a ¼” x ¼” (6mm x 6mm) square notch trowel for maximum coverage.

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE® 125 Sound & Crack Adhesive

References: LATICRETE Data Sheet: 204.0

LATICRETE MSDS: 125 Latex, 125 Powder GREENGUARD Certificate: 125 LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 105, 147, 163, 199

J. Grouting or Pointing: NOTE TO SPECIFIER: select one of following and specify color for each type/color of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, trim unit:

1. Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Grouting Epoxy (ANSI A118.3): Follow manufacturer‘s recommendations for minimum cure time prior to grouting. Store liquid components of LATICRETE SpectraLOCK®* PRO Grout for 24 hours @ 70-80°F (21-27°C) prior to use to facilitate mixing and application. Substrate temperature must be 40-95°F (4-35°C). Verify joints are free of dirt, debris or grout spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off tile faces and remove water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured ceramic tile, pavers, bricks, stone or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning. Cut open pouch and pour LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout Part A Liquid into a clean mixing pail. Then open pouch and pour LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout Part B Liquid into the mixing pail. Mix by hand or with a slow speed (<300 rpm) mixer until the two liquids are well blended. Then, while mixing, add LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout Part C Powder and blend until uniform. Install LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.13) and ANSI A108.6 (3.0 - 4.0). Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints. Using strokes diagonal (at 45° angle) to the grout lines, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Then hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to avoid pulling grout out of filled joints. Once excess grout is removed, a thin film/haze will be left. Initial cleaning of the remaining film/haze can begin approximately 20-30 minutes after grouting (wait longer at colder temperatures). Begin by mixing cleaning additive packet with 2 gallons (7.6 L) of clean water in a clean bucket to make cleaning solution. Dip a clean sponge into the bucket and





http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/LDS6770.doc

http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/125L.doc

http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/125P.doc








then wring out cleaning solution until sponge is damp. Using a circular motion, lightly scrub grouted surfaces with the damp sponge to dissolve grout film/haze. Then drag sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Rinse sponge frequently and change cleaning solution at least every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Discard sponges as they become "gummy" with residue. Within one (1) hour of finishing first cleaning, clean the same area again following the same procedure but utilizing a clean white scrub pad and fresh cleaning solution. Rinse scrub pad frequently. Drag a clean sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Use each side of sponge only once before rinsing and change cleaning solution at least every 50 ft2 (4.7m2). Allow cleaned areas to dry and inspect tile/stone surface. For persistent grout film/haze (within 24 hours), repeat scrubbing procedure with undiluted white vinegar and clean pad. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. Inspect grout joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed LATICRETE® SpectraLOCK®* PRO Grout. Cautions: Do not use undiluted white vinegar on polished marble or limestone unless a test spot in an inconspicuous area indicates no change in finish appearance; Do not use acid cleaners on epoxy grout less than 7 days old.

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout

References:

LATICRETE Data Sheets: 685.0, 685.5 LATICRETE MSDS: Pro Part A, Pro Part B, Part C Powder, Cleaning Additive GREENGUARD Certificate: PRO

LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 111, 198, 212, 400

2. Polymer Fortified Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7): Allow ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick or stone installation to cure a minimum of 24 hours @ 70° F (21°C). Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris or tile spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured ceramic tile, pavers, bricks, or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning. Surface temperature must be between 40-90° F (4-32°C). Pour approximately 64 oz. (1.9 L) of clean, potable water into a clean mixing container. Add a 25 lb. (11.3 kg) bag of LATICRETE PermaColor™ Grout to the container while mixing. Mix by hand or with a slow speed mixer to a smooth, stiff consistency. Install latex fortified cement grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1A (7.0 Grouting of tile), ANSI A108.02 (4.5 Cleaning tile) and ANSI A108.10. Dampen dry surfaces with clean water. Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints. Using diagonal (at 45° angle to direction of grout line) strokes, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to reduce pulling grout out of filled joints. Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 15-20 minutes after grouting @ 70° F (21°C). Higher temperatures may require faster time to initial cleaning; wider joints or lower temperatures may require a longer time to initial cleaning. Begin initial cleaning by lightly dampening the entire grouted area with a damp sponge. Then wash clean the entire area with a damp (not wet) sponge. Drag a clean towel, dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer face to remove any grout haze left after “squeegeeing.” Rinse towel/sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft2 (19m2). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within 24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze/film. Do not use acid cleaners on latex portland cement grout less than 10 days old. NOTE TO SPECIFIER: select one of following and specify color for each type/color of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, trim unit: 1. latex-portland cement sanded floor grout for joint widths ≥1/16”(1.5mm ) and ≤1/2” (12mm); 2. latex-portland cement unsanded grout for soft glazed tiles and soft/polished stone with joints

widths ≤1/8” (3mm). Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE® PermaColor™ Grout

References:

LATICRETE Data Sheets: 250.0


http://apps.laticrete.com/AG2.0/reference/SpectraLOCK%20PRO%20How%20To%20Install.pdf

http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/msds/spectralock_pro_part_a2.pdf

http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/msds/spectralock_pro_part_b2.pdf

http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/msds/1200c.pdf










LATICRETE MSDS: 2500 GREENGUARD Certificates: 2500 LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 201, 400 3. Latex Fortified Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7): Allow ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick or stone installation to cure a minimum of 24 hours @ 70°F (21° C). Ve rify grout joints a re fre e of dirt, de bris or tile spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured ceramic tile, pavers, bricks, or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning. Surface temperature must be between 40-90°F (4-32°C). Thoroughly shake or stir LATICRETE 1776 Grout Enhancer and pour into a clean mixing container. Add LATICRETE 1500 Sanded Grout or LATICRETE 1600 Unsanded Grout powder, in approximately the proportions indicated in the chart below, to the container while mixing. Mix by hand or with a slow speed mixer to a smooth, stiff consistency.

LATICRETE 1776 Grout Enhancer

LATICRETE 1500 Sanded Grout

LATICRETE 1600 Unsanded Grout

26 fl oz (0.8 l) Bottle 10 lbs (4.5kg) Bag 47 fl oz (1.4 l) Bottle 8 lbs (3.6kg) Bag 64 fl oz (1.9 l) Bottle 25 lbs (11.3kg) Bag

Install latex fortified cement grout in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1A (7.0 Grouting of tile), ANSI A108.02 (4.5 Cleaning tile) and ANSI A108.10. Dampen dry surfaces with clean water. Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints. Using diagonal (at 45° angle to direction of grout line) strokes, pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to "squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to reduce pulling grout out of filled joints. Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 20-30 minutes after grouting depending on temperature. Drag a clean towel, dampened with water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer face to remove any grout haze left after “squeegeeing.” Rinse towel/sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 200 ft2 (19m2). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present. Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within 24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze/film. Do not use acid cleaners on latex portland cement grout less than 10 days old. NOTE TO SPECIFIER: select one of following and specify color for each type/color of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, trim unit: 1. latex-portland cement sanded floor grout for joint widths ≥1/16”( 1.5mm ) and ≤1/2” (12mm); 2. latex-portland cement unsanded grout for soft glazed tiles and soft/polished stone with joints

widths ≤1/8” (3mm). Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE® 1500 Sanded Grout LATICRETE® 1600 Unsanded Grout LATICRETE 1776 Grout Enhancer References: LATICRETE Data Sheets: 256.0, 258.0, 265.0 LATICRETE MSDS: 1500, 1600, 1776 GREENGUARD Certificates: 1500, 1600, 1776 LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 201, 400

K. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract drawings and in

full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details. 1. Substrate joints must carry through, full width, to surface of tile, brick or stone. 2. Install expansion joints in tile, brick or stone work over construction/cold joints or control joints in

substrates.


















3. Install expansion joints where tile, brick or stone abut restraining surfaces (such as perimeter walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and corners.

4. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCNA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters.

5. Joint width: ≥ ⅛” (3mm) and ≤ 1” (25mm). 6. Joint width: depth ~2:1 but joint depth must be ≥ ⅛” (3mm) and ≤ ½” (12mm). 7. Layout (field defined by joints): 1:1 length: width is optimum but must be ≤ 2:1. Remove all

contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt, dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Use LATICRETE Latasil™ 9118 Primer for underwater and permanent wet area applications, or for porous stone (e.g. limestone, sandstone etc…) installations. Install appropriate backing material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as specified in § 07920. Apply masking tape to face of tile, brick or stone veneer. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling joint, ‘tool’ sealant surface to a smooth finish. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe smears or excess sealant off the face of non-glazed tile, brick, stone or other absorptive surfaces immediately.

Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE® Latasil™ LATICRETE Latasil 9118 Primer

References: LATICRETE Detail Drawings: WP300, WP301, WP302, WP303, EJ-01, EJ-06, EJ-08,

EJ-09, EJ-10, EJ-12, EJ-13, EJ-14 (Sealant treatments only) LATICRETE Data Sheets: 6200.1, 6526.1 LATICRETE MSDS: Latasil, Primer

LATICRETE Technical Data Sheets: 211, 252

L. Adjusting: Correction of defective work for a period of one (1) year following substantial completion, return to job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken in normal abuse due to deficiencies in setting bed, loose tiles or grout, and all other defects which may develop as a result of poor workmanship.

3.5 CLEANING

Clean excess mortar/epoxy from veneer surfaces with water before they harden and as work progresses. Do not contaminate open grout/caulk joints while cleaning. Sponge and wash veneers diagonally across joints. Do not use acids for cleaning. Polish with clean dry cloth. Remove surplus materials and leave premises broom clean.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished installation under provisions of §01500 and §01535. Close areas to other trades and traffic until tile being installed has set firmly. Keep traffic off horizontal portland cement thick bed mortar installations for at least 72 hours at 70°F (21°C).

B. Keep floors installed with epoxy adhesive closed to traffic for 24 hrs. at 70°F (21°C), and to heavy traffic for 48 hours @ 70°F (21°C) unless instructed differently by manufacturer. Use kneeling boards, or equivalent, to walk/work on newly tiled floors. Cure tile work in swimming pools, fountains and other continuous immersion applications for 10 days for epoxy based grout and 14 days for latex portland cement based grout @ 70°F (21°C) before flood testing or filling installation with water. Extend period of protection of tile work at lower temperatures, below 60°F (15°C), and at high relative humidity (>70% R.H.) due to retarded set times of mortar/adhesives. Replace or restore work of other trades damaged or soiled by work under this section.

PART 4 – HEALTH AND SAFETY The use of personal protection such as rubber gloves, suitable dust masks, safety glasses and industrial clothing is highly recommended. Discarded packaging, product wash and waste water should be disposed of as per local, state or federal regulations.





http://apps.laticrete.com/ag2.0/reference/ES-EJ01.pdf










http://www.laticrete.com/Portals/0/msds/TileandStoneSealant.pdf






"As a professional courtesy, LATICRETE offers technical services free of charge. The user maintains all responsibility for verifying the applicability and suitability of the technical service or information provided." The right to copy, distribute and utilize for commercial purposes is granted exclusively to architects, engineers, and specification writers. Execution Statements are subject to change without notice. For latest revision, check our website @ www.laticrete.com R 19 November 2008




All references are the intellectual property of their respective owners: TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation 45th Edition. Tile Council of North America, Inc. Anderson, SC, 2008. American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile. Tile Council of North America, Inc. Anderson, SC, 2006. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. American Society for Testing and Materials. West Conshohocken, PA, 2001. Floor and Trench Drains - ASME A112.6.3-2001. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. New York, NY, 2001 International Building Code, International Code Council. Country Club Hills, IL, 2006. International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings, International Code Council. Country Club Hills, IL, 2006. LEED NC for New Construction Reference Guide v 2.2. U.S Green Building Council. Washington, D.C., 2005. Lightweight Steel Framing Binder. Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. Cambridge, ON, Canada, 1991. North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. American Iron and Steel Institute. Washington D.C., 2001. ICBO ER-4943P Product Technical Information. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. Chicago, IL, 2001. Steel Framing Systems Manual. Metal Lath Steel Framing Association. Chicago, IL.

Food Science 11-19-10 09 51 00 -1 Acoustical Ceiling Tile

SECTION 09510

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS (POROUS EXPANDED POLYPROPYLENE. P.E.P.P)

PART 1 - GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY PROVISIONS

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section Includes: SOUND SILENCER, Porous Expanded Polypropylene acoustical ceiling tile [Select and specify supporting Suspension Grid, if grid is to be a part of this section].


1. Division 9 Sections: Acoustical Suspension. [Cross reference suspension grid system, if grid is specified under a separate section]

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C635: Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

2. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E1264: Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 4. ASTM C423-99a: Sound Absorption by Reverberation Room Method.


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide acoustical ceiling assembly designed and tested to provide surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) as follows:

a. Flame spread: [1” F/S, 3] [ 2” F/S, 5] b. Smoke Developed: [1” S/D, 84] [2” S/D,113]

2. Provide acoustical ceiling system, which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to provide Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating as follows:

a. [Specify required NRC rating.] E-400 Mounting. [1” NRC .50] [2” NRC .70]

b. For direct adhesive or mechanical fastener mounting Type A Mounting [1” NRC .45] [2” NRC .70]

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Submittal Procedures Section.


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

C. Samples: Submit [State number of samples required] samples: 6" x 6" (152 x 152 mm) for each PEPP ceiling unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work.

D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test reports: Upon request submit certified test reports from recognized test laboratories

2.Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity

B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: [Non required .


A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver material in the manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact.

C. Provide labels indicating brand name, source of procurement, style, size and thickness

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A Environmental Requirements:

1.Do not install ceiling panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A Extra Materials: Provide [A recommended percentage of] [Specify percentage.] additional material for use by owner in building maintenance and repair.

C. Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS [ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE]

A. Acoustical ceiling Tile shall be as provided by Acoustical Surfaces Inc, 123 Columbia Court N. Chaska, Minn. 55318. Ph: 1 (800) 448 –0121

1. SOUND SILENCER, Porous Expanded Polypropylene (PEPP) Lay-In Grid Ceiling Panels:

a Material description: Sound Silencer panels shall be manufactured from expanded polypropylene beads, which shall be capable of being recycled.


b. Thickness [1" (25.4 mm) thick] [2" (51 mm) thick.

c. Color, [White, Charcoal]

d. Acoustical panels shall be impervious to moisture, excessive humidity or water.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS. A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted without express prior approval from Architect

prior to bidding.

PART-3-EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the ceiling tile manufacturer. A. Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance rating

requirements, and industry standards applicable to work.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A.. Site Verification of Conditions:

1.Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

2.Do not proceed with installation of ceiling system until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Do not begin installation until materials sufficient to complete an entire room are received and are ready for installation.

B. Ceiling areas shall be measured to establish layout of acoustical units to balance border

widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders

C. Grid layout shall be symmetrically laid out in each space. Coordinate work with other

trades so that lighting fixtures, grilles and other ceiling fixtures work with grid layout. D. Do not use universal splices or other splices, which would obstruct passage of recessed

lighting fixtures through grid openings or limit fixture relocation upon flanges of ceiling grids.

E. Support for suspension system shall be from structure above, not from ductwork, metal deck, equipment or piping.


F. Hangers shall be spaced not more than 6" (152 mm) from ends and not more than 4' (1219 mm) on centers on runners.

G. Wall moldings shall be installed at the perimeter of each acoustical ceiling area and at locations where edge of units would otherwise be exposed.

1. Secure moldings to supporting construction by fastening with screw anchors into the substrate, through holes drilled in vertical leg. Space holes not more than 3" (76 mm) from each end and not more than 16" (406 mm) on center along each molding.

1. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to a level tolerance of 1/8" (3.2 mm) in 12' (3658 mm).

2. Miter corners of moldings accurately to provide hairline joints, securely connected to prevent dislocation. Cope exposed flanges of intersecting suspension system members, so that flange faces will be flush.

3. Furnish additional tees for supporting grilles, diffusers and light fixtures. Refer to reflected ceiling, HVAC and electrical plans for location.

4. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units, if any, in

manner shown on reflected ceiling plans.

I. Field cut acoustical panels as required, in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures

and equipment.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, trim, edge moldings and suspension members to comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

B. Remove and replace tiles, which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to

permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Visitors Center 11/16/10 09 62 29 Cork Flooring

Section 09 62 29 VERTE CORK FLOATING FLOOR

GERBERT LIMITED Architectural Specification Part 1 – General 1.1 Summary:

A. This section includes a tongue and groove cork plank floating floor 1.2 Submittals:

A. Submittals for Verification and approval upon request from Gerbert Ltd. Samples shall be submitted in compliance with the Requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.3 Quality Assurance:

A. Installer Qualification: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. Select a professional flooring mechanic, preferably one that has attended a Master Mechanic flooring-installation training clinic.

1.4 Project Conditions:

A. Delivery: Deliver material in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Storage and Protection: Store materials at temperature and humidity conditions

recommended by manufacturer and protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

C. Temperature-Humidity Requirements: Maintain air temperature and humidity in areas where product will be installed for time period before, during and after installation, as recommended by manufacturer.

Part 2 – Products 2.1 Cork Floating Floor

A. Gerbert Verte Cork Floating floor B. Manufacturer:

Manufactured in Portugal Distributed by:

Gerbert Limited 715 Fountain Avenue P.O. Box 4944


Lancaster, Pennsylvania 17604-4944 Tel: (717) 299-5035 or (888) 359-5466 Fax: (717) 394-1937 e-mail:[email protected] Web: www.gerbertltd.com

C. The cork planks shall consist of three layers, a surface layer of cork, an interlocking layer

of high density fiberboard (HDF) with precut tongue and groove and a bottom layer of composition cork. Color and finish shall be as specified: 1. Plank dimension: Glue-in system

11.81”w x 35.43”l x 7/16” thick (300mm x 900mm x 11mm) Click-in system 11.81”w x 35.31”l x 7/17” thick (300mm x 897mm x 11mm) 2. Finishes:

UV-curable lacquer – standard (contains no VOC volatile organic compounds) Unfinished – special UV-cured oil – special

D. Product Testing

a. Fire Resistance: DIN 4102 – B2 Cork is a natural fire retardant-does not spread flames-no release of toxic gases during combustion,

b. Residual Indentation:

Fed. Spec. L-F001641 – less than .01 inch

c. Dimensional Stability: ISO 9366 Deviation from square – less than .01 inch EN 427 (metric) <0.2mm

ISO 7322 Deviation from thickness – 0.002 inch EN 428 (metric) , <0.05mm

d. Wear Resistance: EN 660-1 – pre-finished (Taber CS 17 @ 1000 g @ 100 cycles) Loss of weight 3.6mg

e. Density of cork wear layer:

450 KG /m3

f. Impact Sound Reduction: Verte floating floor 11mm thickness = 14 db Acoustical rating : Pre-finished over 8” concrete slab STC (sound transmission class) 58 db IIC (impact sound class) 68 db Pre-finished over 8” concrete slab w/drop ceiling STC – 60db: IIC – 73db


Part 3 – Execution 3.1 Instructions:

Comply with manufacturers written installation instruction. 3.2 Examination:

Verify site substrate condition, which has been previously installed under other sections , is acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

3.3 Preparation:

For floor surface preparation follow manufacturer’s recommendation and instruction. 3.4 Site condition/Installation/Application/Construction

See technical manual 3.5 Maintenance:

See technical manual

End of Verte Cork Floating Floor Specification

SECTION 09 65 13

Resilient Wall Base

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Resilient Wall Base

1.02 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A. ASTM International:

1. F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall base

2. E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. F 386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces

4. E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Flooring systems using a Radiant Energy Source.

5. E 662 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

6. F 925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring.

7. F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus

8. F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Vinyl Flooring by Color Change

B. Other Referenced Documents

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 255, Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source.

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 258 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

3. California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65).

4. The Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification summary sheet for specified products

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, finish colors, patterns and textures.

C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures.



2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions.

E. Submit the following:

1. Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 sections. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.



A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installing work similar to that required for this project.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1.Fire Performance characteristics: Provide resilient sheet vinyl floor covering with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products in accordance with ASTM method (and) NFPA method) indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. ASTM E 648 (NFPA 253), Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems: Class 1, > 1.0 W/cm2

b. ASTM E 662 (NFPA 258), Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials: Passes, <450

c. ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255), Surface Building Characteristics of Building Materials: Class C

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain resilient wall base and manufacturer’s recommended adhesive from a single supplier.

D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate Conditions & manufacturer’s recommended substrates and required preparation manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with requirements in Division 1.


A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 1.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and acclimated to site conditions at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.


A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, areas

to receive resilient wall base shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the permanent HVAC set at a uniform temperature of 65-85 degrees F for 48 hours prior too during, and thereafter installation of resilient wall base. Resilient wall base and adhesive shall be conditioned in the same manner. Resilient wall base must be unboxed & acclimated in area of use at least 48 hours prior to installation. Minimum temperature shall be a 65 degrees F after installation.

B. Existing Conditions: [Specify existing conditions affecting product use and installation]

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Finishing Operations: Install resilient wall base after finishing operations, including floor covering painting and ceiling operations etc., have been completed.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Materials Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. Notice of any defect must be made in writing to manufacturer within thirty (30) days after buyer learns of the defect.

2. Limited Wear Warranty: 3 year limited wear warranty.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division One Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section.

1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of Resilient Wall Base equal to 5% of amount installed.

2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra materials.

B. Maintenance of finished floor covering to be conducted per Manufacturer’s Maintenance Guide.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Specifier Note: Retain article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes performance characteristics, material standards, and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as "Or Equal" or "Or Approved Equal," or similar phrases may cause ambiguity in specifications. Such phrases require verification (procedural, legal, and regulatory) and assignment of responsibility for determining "Or Equal" products. 2.01 RESILIENT WALL BASE

A. Manufacturer: Roppe Corporation 1. Contact: P.O. Box 1158 Fostoria, Ohio USA 44830-1158 Phone: (419) 435-8546 Fax: (419) 435-1056

B. Test results: 1. Thickness tolerance: Complies with ASTM F-386 2. Flexibility: Complies with ASTM F-137 3. Resistance to Heat Aging: Complies with ASTM F-1515 4. Resistance to Detergents: Complies with ASTM F-925 5. Resistance to Alkalis: No fading or softening 6. Dimensional Stability: Complies with ASTM F 1861 7. Squareness: 90 degrees +/- 0.5 degrees 8. Does do not contain any of the hazardous chemicals listed in California Proposition 65 9. Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS) 01350 Low-Emitting Material Criteria: Pass

C. Proprietary Product(s): (Select one) 1. Roppe Pinnacle Rubber Base, color # [insert color #]

a. Complies with ASTM F-1861 Type TS (Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber), Group 1 (Solid) b. Contains 10% natural rubber c. Thickness: 1/8” ( 3.175 mm) nominal d. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. e. Profile (select one)

1.) Standard Toe (Cove base)

a.) Nominal Height (select one) 2-1/2" (63.5mm), 3" (76.2mm), 3-1/2" (88.9mm), 4" (101.6mm), 4 ½” (114.3mm), 5" (127.0mm), 5 ½” (139.7mm) 6” (152.4mm) b.) Lengths: (select one) 4’ pieces or 120’ coils c.) Corners (select one)

i. Formed by installer on site ii. Factory pre-formed corners (specify inside or outside, 2 ½”, 4” or 6”) iii. Factory Inside/Outside Rubber Corner Blocks(see section 7) [suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base]

2.) No Toe (Straight) a.) Nominal Height (select one) 2-1/2" (63.5mm), 4" (101.6mm), 6" (152.4mm) b.) Lengths: (select one) 4’ pieces or 120’ coils c.) Formed by installer on site d.) Corners (specify inside or outside, 2 ½”, 4” or 6”) e.) Factory Inside/Outside Rubber Corner Blocks – (see section 7).[suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base]

3.) Specialty Profile (select one) Butt Toe, Long Toe, Sanitary Toe a.) Nominal Height: 4" b.) Lengths: 4’ pieces c.) Corners: (select one) factory Underlap, Long Toe or Sanitary Toe

2. Roppe Pinnacle Plus Rubber Base a. Complies with ASTM F-1861 Type TS (Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber), Group 1 (Solid) b. Thickness: 1/8” ( 3.175 mm) nominal c. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. d. Nominal Height: 4” (101.6mm) e. Profile (select one)

1.) Standard Toe, profile # [insert profile number from manufacturer’s available profiles], 120’ coils, (Available profiles: #20, #30, #40) 2.) Base Shoe, profile # [insert profile number from manufacturer’s available profiles], 60’ coils. (Available profiles: #00, #10, #50, #60, #70, #80, #90)

f. Corners: (select one) 1.) Field cut mitered inside/outside corners 2.) Formed by installer on site 3.) Factory Inside Rubber Corner Blocks, color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.] 4.) Factory Outside Rubber Corner Blocks, color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.]

*ASTM F-1861 Note: Factory-made corners and wall base may have visual color differences due to process and material variations. Consult the manufacturer to ensure color acceptability between factory-made corners and wall base prior to ordering.

3. Roppe BaseMates stackable trim molding system.

a. For New installations, Specify Roppe Pinnacle rubber wall base, no toe profile or cove base per section C, 1 , c.), 2.) above, plus top trim, base shoe, Factory Inside/Outside Rubber Corner Blocks as follows:

1.) Top Trim, color # [insert color #, Height, profile style number] a.) Color from manufacturers color range b.) Height (select one)

1.) 3/4” (19.05mm), profile style (select one) B00, B01, B02, B03. 2.) 1-3/4” (44.45mm) profile style (select one) C00, C01, C02, C20, C21, C22, C23 3.) Base Shoe, color # [insert color #] (select one)

a.) A00 (straight foundation) for new installations over resilient flooring, b.) A01 (concaved foundation) for new installations over carpet. 3.) Factory Inside Rubber Corner Blocks, color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.] 4.) Factory Outside Rubber Corner Blocks color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.]

b. For Retrofit installations over existing wall base, specify top trim, base shoe, outside Factory Rubber Corner blocks and inside Factory Rubber Corner blocks as follows:

1.) Top Trim, color # [insert color #, Height, profile style number] a.) Color from manufacturers color range b.) Height

1.) 3/4” (19.05mm), profile style (select one) B00, B01, B02, B03. 2.) 1-3/4” (44.45mm) profile style (select one)C00, C01, C02, C20, C21, C22, C23 3.) Base Shoe, color # [insert color #] (select one)

a.) A00, (straight foundation) for use on existing wall base installations over resilient flooring. b.) A01 (concaved foundation) for use on existing wall base installations over carpet. c.) A02 (concaved foundation) for use on existing wall base installations over carpet. d.) A03, (straight foundation) for use on existing wall base installations over resilient flooring.

Note: When installing Factory Rubber Corner Blocks in conjunction with Visuelle’, 700 Series Base, and Vinyl Wall Base, there may be a slight color/appearance difference due to manufacturing process and material variations.

4. Roppe Visuelle’ Base, color # [insert color #] a. Complies with ASTM F-1861 Type TP (Thermoplastic Rubber), Group 1 (Solid) b. Thickness: 1/8” (3.178 mm) to 3/8” (9.53 mm) nominal c. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. d. Nominal Height (select one) 4-1/2" (114.3 mm), 7-3/4" (196.9 mm) e. Lengths: 40’ coils f. Corners: (select one)

1.) Field cut mitered corners 2.) 4-1/2” and 7-3/4” Factory Inside/Outside Mitered Corners (with 6” returns) 3.) Inside Rubber Corner Blocks, color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.] 4.) Outside Rubber Corner Blocks, color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.]

5. Roppe 700 Series Base, color # [insert color #] a. Complies with ASTM F-1861 Type TP (Thermoplastic Rubber) b. Thickness: 1/8” ( 3.175 mm) nominal c. Contains 10% post industrial recycled content d. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. e. Profile (select one) Standard Toe (Cove base) 5/8”, No Toe (Straight) f. Nominal Height (select one) 2-1/2" (63.5mm), 4" (101.6mm), 6" (152.4mm) g. Lengths: (select one) 4’ pieces or 120’ coils h. Corners (specify Standard Toe, No Toe (straight) and inside or outside, 2 ½”, 4” or 6”) i. Formed by installer on site j. Factory Inside/Outside Rubber Corner Blocks – (see section 7) [suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base]

6. Roppe Vinyl Base, color # [insert color #] a. Complies with ASTM F-1861 Type TV (Thermoplastic Vinyl ) b. Thickness: (select one) 0.80” ( 2.03 mm), 1/8” ( 3.175 mm) nominal c. Contains 10% post industrial recycled content d. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. e. Profile (select one) Standard Toe (Cove base) 5/8”, No Toe (Straight) f. Nominal Height (select one) 2-1/2" (63.5mm), 4" (101.6mm), 6" (152.4mm) g. Lengths: (select one) 4’ pieces or 120’ coils h. Corners (specify Standard Toe, No Toe (straight) and inside or outside, 2 ½”, 4” or 6”) i. Factory Inside/Outside Rubber Corner Blocks – (see section 7) [suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base] j. Formed by installer on site

7. Factory Inside & Outside Rubber Corner Blocks a. Complies with ASTM F-1861 Type TS (Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber), Group 1 (Solid) b. Factory Inside Rubber Corner Blocks, color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.]

c. Factory Outside Rubber Corner Blocks color # [insert color #], height [insert height, suggested ¼” taller than finished height of wall base.]

2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation. B. Adhesive: (select one) Roppe 205 Wall Base Adhesive or 210 White Acrylic Wall Base Adhesive C. Caulking: Roppe Colored Caulk

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for installing product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installing requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installing. Material with visual defects shall not be installed.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. B. Surface Preparation, General: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Substrate: Prepare manufacturer’s recommended substrates to be smooth, rigid, flat, level, Permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as paint, dust, grease, oils, solvent, old adhesive residue, vinyl wall coverings, non-porous surfaces and all other contaminants that may interfere with adhesive bond.

3.04 INSTALLING A. Manufacturer’s instructions for specifications on installing resilient wall base. B. Resilient wall base colors, heights and profiles: As selected by Architect. C. Roppe Adhesive D. Roppe Colored Caulk

3.05 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with minimum 72 hours notice, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits to confirm installing of product is in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Site Visits: [Specify number and duration of periodic site visits.]

3.06 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

IST Building 11/19/2010 09 8 20 - 1 Acoustic Insulation

MODEL SPECIFICATION

SPRAY APPLIED THERMAL & ACOUSTIC INSULATION

Model 3-Part Specification

PART 1 GENERAL

1. Related Works and Sections

1.1.1 Section 07210 - Building Insulation

Section 09820 - Acoustic insulation

1.2 Work Included

1.2.1 Provide all materials, labour, equipment and services necessary for, and incidental to, the complete and correct installation of all spray applied insulation and related work as shown on the drawings or where specified herein, and in accordance with all applicable requirements of the Contract documents.

1.2.2 The spray applied insulation and installation shall conform to the applicable building and/or other code requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 Quality Assurance

1.3.1 If requested, provide samples of minimum size 300 x 300mm (12" x 12") of spray applied insulation on a rigid backing appropriate to the installation.

1.3.2 Work shall be performed by a firm with expertise in the sprayed insulation and/or fireproofing business. The firm shall be licensed or otherwise approved by the insulation material manufacturer.

1.3.3 Before proceeding with the application of the spray applied insulation, approval of the proposed material thickness shall be obtained from the architect and other applicable authorities.

1.4 Manufacturer's Literature

1.4.1 Copies of the manufacturer's literature, clearly indicating conditions of acceptance and method of application, shall be available on site before and during period of performance of related work and product installation.

1.5 Material Delivery and Storage


1.5.1 All material to be delivered to the site in original, undamaged and unopened packages clearly labelled by the manufacturer.

1.5.2 All materials to be stored on site in a warm, dry location on either a concrete floor or raised platform. Material must not get damp or wet.

1.5.3 Adhesive concentrate must not freeze.

1.6 Project Conditions

1.6.1 Spray applied insulation shall only be installed under the conditions as stated in the manufacturer's published application instructions.

1.6.2 When the prevailing outdoor temperature at the site is less than 4 °C (40 °F), a minimum substrate and ambient temperature of 4 °C (40 °F) shall be maintained for 24h before, during and until the applied product is completely cured (dry) through to the substrate. If necessary for job progress, the General Contractor shall provide enclosures with dry heat to maintain temperature.

1.6.3 General Contractor shall provide ventilation to allow proper drying of the installed spray applied insulation during and after its application.

1.6.4 At all times during installation and drying of spray applied insulation ventilation in enclosed areas shall not be less that 3 complete air changes per hour.

1.6.5 All patching and repairing of installed spray applied insulation required because of damage or cutting by other trades shall be performed under this Section and paid for by the trade(s) responsible.

1.6.6 The General Contractor shall allow the Manufacturer's representative full access to the site during normal working hours.

1.6.7 The Contractor shall co-operate in the co-ordination and scheduling of the insulation work to avoid delays in job progress.

PART 2 Products

2.1.1 Materials: Spray applied insulation shall be TC-417 GP white glass fibre together with its specified synthetic emulsion adhesive and shall conform to test protocols and results as detailed in 2.1.2 below.

2.1.2 Spray applied insulation shall not contain free crystalline silica, asbestos or combustible fibre, and shall be applied to conform to the drawings, specifications and following test criteria:

ASTM C-518: R = 4.17/in; RSI = 29.32/m

K = 0.24; ( = 0.0346

ASTM E-136 / CAN/ULC S114: Non-combustible


ASTM E-84 / CAN/ULC S102: Flame spread = 5;

Smoke development = 10

ASTM C-423 90a: NRC = 1.00 (50mm/2 in.)

ISO 354: NRC = 0.95 (50mm/2 in.)

2.1.3 Adhesive shall be mixed with fresh, clean, potable water in the exact proportion as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.1.4 Adhesive must be kept from freezing at all times.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1 All surfaces to receive spray Insulation shall be free of all petroleum-based greases and oils, loose mill scale, rust, poorly adhered paint and other foreign materials that could impair bonding to the surface. Any required cleaning of the substrate to receive the material shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

3.1.2 Remove dust, dirt or foreign material on surfaces to which the product is to be applied, that could otherwise create a false bond or surface staining of the product.

3.1.3 Verify compatibility and bond requirements of all surfaces to receive spray applied insulation.

3.1.4 Ensure that all equipment, piping, ducts or other units that would interfere with the application of spray applied insulation are not positioned until application is complete.

3.1.5 Ensure that proper temperature and ventilation are maintained as specified in 1.6.2 through 1.6.4.

3.1.6 Provide and install masking, drop cloths or other suitable coverings to prevent overspray from coming into contact with unintended fixtures and surfaces.

3.2 Application

3.2.1 Mix and apply spray applied insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations.

3.2.2 Apply product in sufficient thickness to achieve the required thermal and/or acoustic value.

3.2.3 Use a 'one-pass' application procedure. Do not layer application.

3.3 Clean-up


3.3.1 Remove overspray from equipment and surfaces not intended to be covered. Perform all removal work while installed product is still wet.

3.3.2 Ensure clean up is up to industry standards.

3.4 Options

3.4.1 The surface of the spray applied insulation can be left untamped for basic finish, or can be board tamped and oversprayed for a flatter, more uniform finish.

3.4.2 For a more durable and attractive finish in exposed areas, it is recommended that the surface be board tamped and oversprayed with adhesive.

NOTE: Any installation tamped by any means must retain adequate thickness to meet the specified thermal and/or acoustic value.

3.4.3 If a finish colour other than white is desired we suggest:

1. For dark grey, light grey or beige use manufacturer's colour additives for adhesive (if available);

2. Topcoat with a spray applied insulation surface protection coating (if available from the manufacturer). This coating can be coloured as desired and has the added benefit of improving surface cohesion of the installed material;

3. Paint the installed spray applied insulation with any good quality paint of the desired colour.

Section 09 91 00 Painting Forest Resource Building Hongzhe Sun Nov. 11

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in

addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. Revise paragraph below to suit the Project.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel” for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section “Steel Doors and Frames” for shop priming steel doors and

frames. 4. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for surface preparation for

gypsum board. 5. Division 9 Section “Special Coatings” for industrial paints and maintenance and

special coatings. 6. Division 9 Section “Multicolored Interior Coatings” for spray-applied multicolored

coatings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms. 1. Flat refers to a sheen finish with a gloss range lower than 5 when measured with

a 60-degree meter. 1. Eggshell refers to a low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 10 when

measured with a 60-degree meter. 2. Satin refers to a low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 10 and 20 when

measured with a 60-degree meter. 3. Semi-Gloss refers to a medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and

70 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to a high-sheen finish with a gloss range higher than 70 when

measured with a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.

Section 09 91 00 Painting Hongzhe Sun

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer’s catalog number and coating material proposed for use.

2. Manufacturer’s Information: Provide manufacturer’s technical information,

including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing and applying each coating material proposed for use.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local

regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC’s). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be

coated.

C. Product Data Sheets and MSDS for each product to be used as required by the U.S.G.B.C. as proof that each product meets the requirements of either Green Seal’s GS-11 or GC-03 documents. This is a requirement in order to receive the possible one point for Credit 4.2 for Low-Emitting Materials in the Indoor Environmental Quality section of the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design initiative of the U.S. Green Building Council.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator that has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers and undercoat materials for each coating

system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.


1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application.


A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 32 degrees C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F (7.2 and 35 degrees C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules.

B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturer is referred to in the paint schedule by use if shortened versions of the name, which is shown below.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints, PPG Industries, Inc.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoaters, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer’s best-quality “professional” paint material of the

various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer’s product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product names to

designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer’s material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: Provide color matches indicated by reference to manufacturer’s color designations.


2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT BLOCK FILLERS

A. Concrete Masonry Unit Block Fillers: Factory formulated high-performance latex block fillers

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-7 SPEEDHIDE® Interior/ Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler

(14.00 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 5.1 to 14.7 mils. 2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-15 SPEEDHIDE® Int./Ext. Acrylic Masonry Block Filler (47.50

g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.2 mils.

2.4 EXTERIOR PRIMERS (DOES NOT AFFECT LEED STATUS BUT THE PRODUCTS LISTED HERE ARE COMPLIANT WITH GREENSEAL DOCUMENT GS-11)

A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 4-603 PERMA-CRETE® Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils

B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory-formulated alkyd- or alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-609 SPEEDHIDE® Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 Percent Acrylic Latex (89 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils

C. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 17-921 SEAL GRIP® Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Stain Blocking Primer (89 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

D. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel (123 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

E. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application.


F. Exterior Aluminum Primer under Acrylic Finishes: Factory-formulated acrylic-based metal primer for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel (123 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils


2.5 INTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 4-603 PERMA-CRETE® Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-900 Pure Performance® Interior Latex Primer Sealer (0 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.

B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2 SPEEDHIDE® Interior Latex Sealer Quick-Drying (98.00 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mils.

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-900 Pure Performance® Interior Latex Primer (0.00 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.

C. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.

1. Pittsburgh Paints; 4-603 PERMA-CRETE® Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.


D. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 17-955 SEAL GRIP® Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater (96 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.


E. Interior Wood Primer for Full-Gloss Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 17-955 SEAL GRIP® Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater (96 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.


F. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer.



G. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer.


H. Interior Aluminum Primer under Acrylic Finishes: Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior primer.


2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS (DOES NOT AFFECT LEED STATUS BUT THE PRODUCTS LISTED HERE ARE COMPLIANT WITH GREENSEAL DOCUMENT GS-11)

A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House Paint Flat Latex (96g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mils.

B. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated low-sheen (eggshell) acrylic-latex paint for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2045 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House & Trim Satin--Acrylic Latex (128 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.8 mil.

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-474 Series Pitt-Tech® One Pack High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial Enamels (227 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint (131 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.9 mil.

D. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-374 Series Pitt-Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (192 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

E. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-374 Series Pitt-Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (192 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.


2.7 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide® Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint (17.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils.

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size: Factory-formulated flat latex-based interior paint.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide® Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint (17.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils.

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

C. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-411 Series SpeedHide® Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel (73.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-300 Series Pure Performance® Interior Eggshell Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

D. Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated satin acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-3511 Series SpeedHide® Satin Acrylic Latex Enamel (46 g/L

VOC); Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.9 mil.

E. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi-Gloss Latex (90.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-500 Series Pure Performance® Interior Semigloss Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

F. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide® Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

2. Pittsburgh® Paints; 52-110 Series Manor Hall Int/Ext Gloss Acrylic Latex (137 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.

G. Interior Semi-Gloss Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy:

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; Pitt-Glaze WB Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551 Series (16-551/16-599, 148 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.


H. Interior Gloss Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy:

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; Pitt-Glaze WB Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551 Series (16-551/16-598, 148 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

2.8 INTERIOR CLEAR WOOD FINISHES A. Interior Satin Acrylic Polyurethane: Factory-formulated satin acrylic polyurethane for

interior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 77-49 REZ Interior Acrylic Polyurethane Satin Clear Finish (236 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.9 mil.

B. Interior Gloss Acrylic Polyurethane: Factory-formulated gloss acrylic polyurethane for interior application.

1. Pittsburgh® Paints; 77-45 REZ Interior Acrylic Polyurethane Gloss Clear Finish (235 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 0.9 mil.

2.9 INTERIOR FLOOR COATINGS

A. Interior Concrete Floor Coatings: Factory-formulated high-performance epoxy primers and finishes for interior application.

1. PPG; 98-6635 Series MegaSeal WBPC- Water Based Primer (0.48 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

2. PPG; 98-6637 MegaSeal WBPG- Water Based Primer (0 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 mils.

3. PPG; 99-6639 MegaSealTM-HSPC- High Solids Primer (1.44 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 mils.

4. PPG; 98-7631 Series MegaSeal WB - Water-Based Epoxy Floor Coating (colors – 3.36 g/L VOC; clear – 1.44 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 mils

5. PPG; 99-6680 Series MegaSeal SL - Self-Leveling Epoxy (3.6 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0 mils.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that site environmental conditions are appropriate for application of coatings specified

B. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive coatings are dry. C. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture content

within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer.


D. Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale, oil grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions.

E. Correct the above conditions and any other conditions which could impair performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance.

B. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; seal with shellac or other coating acceptable to paint manufacturer stains and marks that might bleed through paint finishes which cannot be completely removed.

C. Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings which are adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings.

D. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry.

E. For specific substrate preparation, see individual specifications. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paint products in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Do not apply coatings to surfaces that are not dry.

B. Apply each coat to uniform thickness and finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with each coat slightly darker than preceding coat. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before applying next coat.

C. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying each coat.

3.4 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry substrates:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 4-603 Perma-Crete® Int/ Ext Alkali

Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat

Acrylic Latex (96 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.2 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat

Acrylic Latex (96 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.2 Dry Mils. 2. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:

a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 4-603 Perma-Crete® Int/ Ext Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry Mils.

b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2045 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex (104 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.2 Dry Mils.


c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2045 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex (104 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.2 Dry Mils.

3. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House and Trim Semi-gloss Acrylic Latex (131 VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House and Trim Semi-gloss Acrylic Latex (131 VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils.

4. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-374 Series Pitt-Tech® Int/Ext High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (192 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-374 Series Pitt-Tech® Int/Ext High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (192 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete unit masonry:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide® Int/Ext Masonry Block

Filler Latex (14.00 g/L VOC): 5.1 to 14.7 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat


Acrylic Latex (96 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.2 Dry Mils.

2. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:

a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide® Int/Ext Masonry Block Filler Latex (14.00 g/L VOC): 5.1 to 14.7 Dry Mils.



3. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House and Trim Semi-gloss Acrylic Latex (131 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils.


c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House and Trim Semi-gloss Acrylic Latex (131 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils.




c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-374 Series Pitt-Tech® Int/Ext High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (192 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils

C. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels: Provide the following finish systems over exterior, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 4-603 Perma-Crete® Int/ Ext Alkali

Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat
















D. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Provide the following finish systems over exterior gypsum soffit board:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide® Exterior House and

Trim Wood Primer Flat (89 g/L VOC); 1.3 to 1.6 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat




a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide® Exterior House and Trim Wood Primer Flat (89 g/L VOC); 1.3 to 1.6 Dry Mils.











E. Smooth Wood: Provide the following finish systems over smooth wood siding, wood trim, and other smooth exterior wood surfaces:





c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex (96 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.2 Dry Mils.













F. Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood trim:


















G. Plywood: Provide the following finish systems over exterior plywood:


















H. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel (123 g/L VOC compliant as anti corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat




a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel (123 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-474 Series Pitt-Tech® Int/Ext Satin DTM Industrial Enamels (227 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-474 Series Pitt-Tech® Int/Ext Satin DTM Industrial Enamels (227 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.






a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial

DTM Primer/Finish Enamel (123 g/L VOC compliant as anti-corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.




I. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex (96 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.2 Dry Mils.














J. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial



b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex (96 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.2 Dry Mils.















3.5 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry substrates:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish:

STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 4-603 Perma-Crete® Int/ Ext Alkali

Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall

Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall

Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils. ZERO VOC OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-900 Pure Performance® Interior Latex

Primer (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.4 to 1.7 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat

Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat

Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils.


STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-411 Series SpeedHide® Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex (73 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-411 Series SpeedHide® Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex (73 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils.

ZERO VOC OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-900 Pure Performance® Interior Latex

Primer (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.4 to 1.7 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-300 Series Pure Performance®

Eggshell Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.8 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-300 Series Pure Performance®

Eggshell Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.8 Dry Mils.

3. Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish:



b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-3511 Series SpeedHide® Interior Satin Acrylic Latex (46 g/L VOC); 1.3 to 1.5 Dry Mils.


c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-3511 Series SpeedHide® Interior Satin Acrylic Latex (46 g/L VOC); 1.3 to 1.5 Dry Mils.




b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Latex (90 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Latex (90 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils.

ZERO VOC OPTION

a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-900 Pure Performance® Interior Latex Primer (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.4 to 1.7 Dry Mils.

b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-500 Series Pure Performance® Semi-gloss Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-500 Series Pure Performance® Semi-gloss Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils.




b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-8534 Series SpeedHide® Interior 100% Acrylic Latex Gloss (90 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.4 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-8534 Series SpeedHide® Interior 100% Acrylic Latex Gloss (90 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.4 Dry Mils.

6. Semi-Gloss Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Finish: STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; Pitt-Glaze WB Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551/16-599 Series (148 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; Pitt-Glaze WB Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-551/16-599 Series (148 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

7. Gloss Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Finish:






B. Concrete Masonry Unit: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry:


STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide® Int/Ext Masonry Block

Filler Latex (14.00 g/L VOC): 5.1 to 14.7 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall


Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils. ZERO VOC TOPCOAT OPTION (Primer not zero VOC) a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide® Int/Ext Masonry Block

Filler Latex (14.00 g/L VOC): 5.1 to 14.7 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat


Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils. 2. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:





ZERO VOC TOPCOAT OPTION (Primer not zero VOC) a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide® Int/Ext Masonry Block

Filler Latex (14.00 g/L VOC): 5.1 to 14.7 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-300 Series Pure Performance®


Eggshell Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.8 Dry Mil 3. Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish:











ZERO VOC TOPCOAT OPTION (Primer not zero VOC)













7. Gloss Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Finish: STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION





C. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels: Provide the following finish systems over interior mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels:









D. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:


STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2 SPEEDHIDE® Interior Latex Sealer

Quick-Drying (98.00 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.3 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall








a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2 SPEEDHIDE® Interior Latex Sealer Quick-Drying (98.00 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.3 Dry Mils.







Eggshell Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.8 Dry Mils. 3. Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish:










ZERO VOC OPTION










6. Semi-Gloss Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2 SPEEDHIDE® Interior Latex Sealer

Quick-Drying (98.00 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.3 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 16-551/16-599 Series Pitt-Glaze WB

Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy (148 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 16-551/16-599 Series Pitt-Glaze WB Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy (148 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

7. Gloss Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-2 SPEEDHIDE® Interior Latex Sealer

Quick-Drying (98.00 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.3 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 16-551/16-598 Series Pitt-Glaze WB



E. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new interior plaster surfaces:




























ZERO VOC OPTION

a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-900 Pure Performance® Interior Latex

Primer (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.4 to 1.7 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-500 Series Pure Performance® Semi-

gloss Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-500 Series Pure Performance® Semi-

gloss Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.7 Dry Mils.









b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 16-551/16-599 Series Pitt-Glaze WB Water Borne Acrylic Epoxy (148 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.


7. Gloss Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 4-603 Perma-Crete® Int/ Ext Alkali

Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 16-551/16-598 Series Pitt-Glaze WB



F. Acoustical Plaster: Provide the following finish system over interior acoustical plaster surfaces


STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION a. First Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall

Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils. b. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall

Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils. ZERO VOC OPTION a. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat


b. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils.

G. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces:


STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 17-955 SEAL GRIP® Interior Latex

Enamel Undercoater (96 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 2.0 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall


Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils.








a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 17-955 SEAL GRIP® Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater (96 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 2.0 Dry Mils.

















ZERO VOC OPTION









6. Clear Wood Finish – Satin Acrylic Polyurethane: a. First Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 77-49 REZ Interior Acrylic Polyurethane

Satin Clear Finish (236 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils. b. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 77-49 REZ Interior Acrylic Polyurethane

Satin Clear Finish (236 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils. 7. Gloss Acrylic Polyurethane: a. First Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 77-45 REZ Interior Acrylic Polyurethane

Gloss Clear Finish (235 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils. b. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 77-45 REZ Interior Acrylic Polyurethane

Gloss Clear Finish (235 g/L VOC); 0.9 to 1.1 Dry Mils.

H. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:


STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils.

ZERO VOC TOPCOAT OPTION (Primer not zero VOC) a. Primer: Pittsburgh® Paints; 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial


b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils.


c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils.








b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-300 Series Pure Performance® Eggshell Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.8 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-300 Series Pure Performance® Eggshell Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.5 to 1.8 Dry Mils.





























I. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces:
















































J. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces:

















































K. All-Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas insulation covering:


STANDARD LEED COMPLIANT OPTION a. First Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall

Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils. b. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 6-70 Series SpeedHide® Interior Wall

Flat Latex (24 g/L VOC); 1.1 to 1.3 Dry Mils. ZERO VOC OPTION a. Intermediate: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat


b. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh® Paints; 9-100 Series Pure Performance® Flat Interior Latex (0.0 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils.

3.6 INTERIOR FLOOR COATINGS PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Floors: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete floors:

1. Full Gloss Water-Based Epoxy Finish:

a. Primer: PPG; 98-6635 Series MegaSeal WBPC- Water Based Clear Primer (0.48 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.

b. Intermediate: PPG; 98-7631 Series MegaSeal WB - Water-Based EpoxyFloor Coating (colors – 3.36 g/L VOC; clear – 1.44 g/L VOC); 7.0 to 9.0 Dry Mils.

c. Finish Coat: PPG; 98-7631 Series MegaSeal WB - Water-Based EpoxyFloor Coating (colors – 3.36 g/L VOC; clear – 1.44 g/L VOC); 7.0 to 9.0 Dry Mils.

2. Self-Leveling Epoxy Finish:

a. Primer: PPG; 99-6639 MegaSealTM-HSPC- High Solids Clear Primer (1.44 g/L VOC); 7.0 to 9.0 Dry Mils.

b. Finish: PPG; 99-6680 Series MegaSeal SL - Self-Leveling Epoxy (3.6 g/L VOC); 10.0 Dry Mils.

END OF SECTION 09900

13 00 00 duct.rtf 1

Bob Stano

SECTION 15081 Sheet Metal Ducts - Acoustical Lining Insulation PART 1.00 - GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and

accessories, and performing all operations required, for correct fabrication and installation of air duct systems of sheet metal lined with fibrous glass duct liner, in accordance with applicable project drawings and specifications, subject to terms and conditions of the contract:

B. All air duct systems operating at internal air velocities not exceeding rated duct liner limitations as listed below and internal air temperature not exceeding 250°F (121°C).

C. Duct liner products shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1071. D. The manufacturer’s product identification shall appear on the air stream surface. E. Duct liner adhesive shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 916. F. The finished duct system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. G. Duct dimensions shown on the plans are finished inside dimensions. H. Fabrication and installation shall conform to manufacturer’s recommendations and to the

requirements of the latest edition of the North American Insulation Manufacturers Association's Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard (hereinafter referred to as NAIMA FGDLS), or of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (hereinafter referred to as SMACNA HVAC DCS) or the manufactures recommendations.

1.02 References A. American Society of Testing and Materials( ASTM)

1. ASTM C1071 2. ASTM C916 3. ASTM G21 4. ASTM G22 5. ASTM C423 6. ASTM C 518

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 90A 2. NFPA 90B 3. NFPA 259

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA) 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible (HVAC DCS)

D. North American Insulation Manufactures Association (NAIMA) 1. Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard (FGDLS)

1.03 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver all materials and/or fabricated, insulated duct sections and fittings to the job site and store in a

safe, dry place. B. Protect materials from dust, dirt, moisture, and physical abuse before and during installation. Wet or

contaminated duct liner shall be replaced. PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Insulated Duct System

13 00 00 duct.rtf 2

A. All supply ducts, return ducts, and fittings indicated on drawings, shall be insulated with duct liner meeting the requirements of ASTM C1071 and the additional following requirements. 1. Have a potential heat value not exceeding 3500 btu/lb when tested in accordance with NFPA 259

and meeting the classification of “Limited Combustible” as defined by NFPA 90A. 2. Maximum rated velocity not less than 5000 FPM when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1071. 3. Resistant to microbial growth using a “no growth criteria” when tested in accordance with ASTM

C 1138, G 21 and G22. 4. Type I - Blanket material, in roll form:

a. Have a maximum thermal conductivity (k-value), at 75°F (24°C) mean temperature, of [.24 Btu.•in/hr.•sq.ft.•°F (0.035 W/m.•°C)

b. Sound absorption coefficients and NRC shall meet or exceed the following when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 using an “A” mounting.

Absorption Coeficients @ Octave Band Frequencies (Hz) Thickness Type 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC

1/2" 200 .05 .15 .35 .61 .75 .88 .45 1" 150 .06 .27 .66 .87 .98 .99 .70

1-1/2" 150 .18 .53 .97 1.06 1.06 .90 .90 2" 150 .24 .74 1.12 1.11 1.07 1.08 1.00

i. CertainTeed ToughGard R Duct Liner.

2. Type II - Board in sheet form:

a. Have a maximum thermal conductivity at 75°F (24°C) mean temperature, of [.27 Btu.•in/hr.•sq.ft.•°F (0.039 W/m.•°C), .23 Btu.•in/hr.•sq.ft.•°F (0.033 W/m.•°C].

b. Sound absorption coefficients and NRC shall meet or exceed the following when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 using an “A” mounting:

Absorption Coeficients @ Octave Band Frequencies (Hz) Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC

1” .07 .28 .72 .90 .93 .93 .70 1-1/2" .13 .49 .89 .95 .92 .93 .80

2" .17 .76 1.05 1.02 .95 .96 .95

i. CertainTeed ToughGard Rigid Liner Board. ii. CertainTeed ToughGard UltraRound Spiral Duct Liner Insulation.

PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify that the duct liner products is installed in accordance with project drawings, duct liner operating

performance parameters and limitations, and provisions of NAIMA FGDLS or SMACNA HVAC DCS or manufactures recommendations.

3.02 Insulation A. All portions of duct designated to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with duct liner. All

joints shall be neatly butted and there shall be no interruptions or gaps. Duct liner shall be installed with the black surface treatment exposed to the air stream.

B. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with 90% (minimum) coverage of adhesive complying with the requirements of ASTM C 916.

C. All transverse edges that are not to receive sheet metal nosing shall be coated. Longitudinal joints shall occur at the corners of ducts. If duct size and standard duct liner product dimensions make

13 00 00 duct.rtf 3

exposed longitudinal joints necessary, such joints shall be coated with adhesive designated for duct liner application and which meets the requirements of ASTM C 916. Such joints shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners in accordance with NAIMA FGDLS, or SMACNA HVAC DCS as if they were transverse joints.

D. Duct liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners complying with the requirements NAIMA FGDLS or SMACNA HVAC DCS and of the correct type for the duct liner being installed. Fasteners may be either weld-secured or impact-driven, and shall be installed perpendicular to the duct surface.. Mechanical fasteners shall not compress the insulation more than 1/8" (3 mm) based on nominal insulation thickness. Fastener spacing with respect to interior duct dimensions shall be in accordance with NAIMA FGDLS or SMACNA HVAC DCS. Fastener heads or washers shall have a minimum area of 0.75 in2 (484 mm2), with beveled or cupped edges to prevent their cutting into the duct liner.

E. Where air velocities exceed 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec), metal nosing (either channel or "zee" profile) shall be installed on upstream edges of liner duct sections.

F. Metal nosing shall be securely installed over transverse liner edges facing the airstream at fan discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct.

G. Duct liner in roll form shall be folded and compressed in the corners of rectangular duct sections, or shall be cut and fit to assure a lapped, compressed corner joint

H. Duct liner in sheet form shall be cut and fit to assure tight, over-lapped corner joints. Top pieces of liner shall be supported at the edges by the side pieces

I. Any damage to the air stream surface must be repaired by coating the damaged area with adhesive or coating designed for duct liner application. Adhesive or coating shall meet requirements of ASTMC916

3.03 Field Quality Control A. Upon completion of installation of lined duct and before HVAC system start-up, visually inspect the

ductwork and verify that duct liner has been correctly installed. Confirm that the duct system is free from construction debris.

B. After the lined duct system is completely installed and ready for service, conduct a final inspection of

the entire system. This inspection should include, at minimum, the following steps:

1. Check all registers, grilles, and diffusers to ensure that they are clean and free from construction debris.

2. Check all filters in accordance with their manufacturer's instructions. Use specified grade of filters at all times that system is operating.

3. Cover supply openings with filter media prior to system start-up to catch any loose material that may remain inside the ductwork.

4. Turn the HVAC system on and allow it to run until steady state operation is reached. 5. Remove the temporary filter media from supply openings and, along with it, any loose material

blown downstream and caught by the filter media. 6. Check to ensure that air delivery performance meets all requirements and complies with

SMACNA leakage specifications. 3.04 Protection A. Contractor’ employees shall be properly protected during installation of all insulation. Protection shall include proper attire when handling and applying insulation materials, and shall include (but not be limited to) disposable dust respirators, gloves, hard hats and eye protection. B. The contractor shall conduct all job site operations in compliance with applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as well as with all state and/or local safety and health codes and regulations that may apply to the work.

Penn Stater 11-19-10 13 08 00 Sound and Vibration Control Membrane for Tiling

SPECIFICATIONS

KINETICS MODEL SR FLOORBOARD SOUND CONTROL UNDERLAYMENT

13080 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – NOISE & VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the installation of the sound control floor underlayment where shown on the contract drawings.

1.02 System Description

A. The sound control underlayment is applied continuously as part of the floor system to control both impact/structureborne and airborne noise transmission through the floor into the space below.

B. The perimeter of the floor areas where the underlayment is used shall have a

continuous resilient joint to isolate structureborne noise from all adjacent non-isolated floors, walls, columns or other structure.

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. The sound control underlayment shall be produced by a manufacturer having a minimum of five years’ experience in furnishing similar noise control underlayment for floor systems.

B. Submittals shall include test reports from independent laboratories meeting the

following minimum criteria. Products not meeting these minimum test standards will not be accepted.

1. Impact Insulation Class (IIC) - per ASTM E-492. The underlayment must

achieve a minimum IIC rating of 59 when tested on a concrete structural floor (maximum 75 lbs./square foot) with a ceramic tile finish floor applied over cementitious backer units (1/2” thick) and the sound control underlayment. The system tested must meet the minimum IIC 59 rating without the benefit of a suspended ceiling of any kind. The Sound Transmission Class (STC), per ASTM E-90, must achieve a minimum STC rating of 59 tested under the same conditions without a ceiling.

2. Ceramic Tile Installation Testing – per ASTM C627. The sound control

underlayment must achieve a minimum Residential rating for a construction similar to that specified and shown on drawings where ceramic tile is to be installed.

Penn Stater 11-19-10 13 08 00 Sound and Vibration Control Membrane for Tiling

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3.01 Materials

A. The sound rated floor underlayment shall be Model SR Floorboard as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, Ohio, (800) 959-1229. The material consists of a 5/8” thick composite consisting of a rigid phenolic-treated honeycomb core molded between two layers of high-density glass fiber. The isolation board shall be capable of withstanding up to 1,000 lbs./sq. ft. loading with a maximum of 0.060” of additional deflection.

B. The perimeter isolation material shall be 3/8” thick Model SRP perimeter board

as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 Installation

A. The correct installation of the sound control underlayment and the resilient perimeter isolation material is critical in order to achieve the desired noise reduction. Any rigid connections such as screws, staples or pipe penetrations, which physically connect the sound rated floor assembly to the structural floor below or to adjacent walls, will reduce the noise control performance of the system. All sound rated floor systems must be installed per the manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

Student Health Center Hydraulic Elevator 14 24 40

SECTION 14240

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hydraulic [passenger] [and] [freight] elevators.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation to accommodate plunger-cylinder assembly.

2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete.

3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry.

4. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for the following:

a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets.

b. Divider beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills [and entrance frames] that are part of steel

frame. d. Hoist beams.

5. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for the following:

a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Divider beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for [subsills] [and] [entrance frames]. d. Pit ladders. e. Hoist beams.

6. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metal" for combination units that contain hall push-button stations.

7. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting of hoistway entrances. 8. Division 9 Section "<Insert Section title>" for finish flooring in elevator cars. 9. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate

emergency recall operation [and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation] and for connection to elevator controllers.


10. Division 13 Section "<Insert Section title>" for security card access equipment used to restrict elevator use.

11. Division 16 Section "Premises Telephone Wiring" for telephone service to elevators. 12. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including [fused]

disconnect switches at machine room door [and standby power source, transfer switch, and connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller].

C. Allowances: Provide finished elevator cars under the Elevator Car Allowance specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances." Allowance includes furnishing and installing wall[, floor,] and ceiling finishes; [car door finishes;] light fixtures; handrails; and trim. Allowance also includes cutouts and other provisions for installing elevator signal equipment in cars.

D. Unit Prices: Rock excavation for jack holes will be paid for under the unit price indicated in the Contract and as specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Defective Elevator Work: Repeated Ooperation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information.

B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 3-inch- (75-mm-) square samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of running trim members. When requested, submit color charts of exposed finishes for color selection.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, [including emergency generator,] as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

E. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1.


F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

G. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Regularly engages in manufacturing, installing and servicing elevators of the type specified.

2. Manufactures major elevator components in North America.

A.B. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.C. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable provisions in ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators."

1. Seismic Risk Zone: Project is located in Zone [0 or 1] [2] [3 or greater].

C.D. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with [Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)."] [Section 407 in ICC A117.1.]


A. Store materials, components and equipment in manufacturer’s original protective packaging in a dry protected area.

B. Handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent damage, soiling, or deterioration.

1.61.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Furnish well casing and coordinate delivery with related excavation work.

C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms.


1.71.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

1.81.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide [three] [six] [nine] [12] months' full maintenance service by skilled employees of the elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.

2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.

a. Response Time: Two One hours or less.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard [1 year] [3 year] [5 year]yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in the same form as, "Draft of Elevator Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hydraulic elevators that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydraulic elevators by one of the following:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for hydraulic elevators is based on ThyssenKrupp Elevator model <Insert model number or description>. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Dover Elevator Systems. 2. Fujitec America, Inc.


3.1. Montgomery KONE Inc. 4.2. Otis Elevator Co. 5.3. Schindler Elevator Corp. 6. Schumacher Elevator Co. 7. Thyssen Elevator Group North America.

2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system.

B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide [either of] the following:

1. Pump, with fan-cooled squirrel-cage induction motor, mounted underon top of oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump and motor in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation board.

2. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside tank from vibration isolation mounts.

3. Provide motor with [wye-delta] [or] [solid-state] starting. 4. Provide variable-voltage variable-frequency motor control.

C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit.

D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit.

E. Hydraulic Oil: Provide hydraulic oil of proper grade in the quantity recommended by manufacturer.

1. Provide dielectric couplings at plunger/between power unit and cylinder units. 2. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785 joined with

PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564.

E.F. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Specification Section.

G. Protective Cylinder Casings: HDPE pipe casings complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance from cylinder, and extending above pit floor.

F. Protective Cylinder Casings: PVC pipe casings complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance from cylinder, and extending above pit floor.

G. Protective Cylinder Coating: Three layers of glass-fiber cloth each weighing not less than 5.6 oz./sq. yd. (190 g/sq. m), applied by saturating with catalyzed polyester resin.


H. Protective Cylinder Coating: Two or more layers of PVC tape with a total thickness not less than 0.040 inches (1.0 mm) [or other coating complying with ASME A17.1].

I. Corrosion Protective Filler: A solventless, petroleum-based gel formulated for filling the space between hydraulic cylinders and protective casings. Filler is heavier than water, electrically nonconductive, and liquefies at approximately 150 deg F (66 deg C).

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Diversified Enterprises; No-Ox-Id R-R #6110A. b. Pacific Standard Chemical Co.; Union-Gard 160.

J.H. Car Frame and Platform: Formed or structural steel members, bolted or welded together.Welded steel units.

1. For freight elevators, provide special heavy-duty units where indicated for power truck loading, designed to withstand impacts and wheel loadings indicated.

K.I. Finish Materials: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated:

1. Polished Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 8 mirror polished finish. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. [4, directional] [6,

nondirectional] satin finish. 3. Textured Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; [titanium nitride colored] [oxide

colored]; with [coined] [embossed] texture rolled into exposed surface.

a. Surface is [satin polished] [satin relieved] [color coated and satin relieved] [color coated and bright relieved] after rolling.

b. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "<Insert product name>" by <Insert manufacturer's name>.

c. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "<Insert product name>" by <Insert manufacturer's name>.

4. Polished Bronze Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal), polished finish, lacquered.

5. Satin Bronze Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal), directional satin finish, lacquered.

6. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural bronze). 7. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151 (ASTM B 151M), alloy UNS No. C74500. 8. Enameled-Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M,

matte finish, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M may be used for door frames. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect.

9. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366/A 366M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 569/A 569M, with factory-applied rust-inhibitive primer.

10. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, [Type HGP for postformed applications] [and] [Type HGS for flat applications]; color, texture, and


pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range of products.

11. Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M. 12. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Pattern 1, alloy 6061-T6. 13. Rolled Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. Passenger Elevators: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator or group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated.

1. Single Elevator, Two Stops: Provide "automatic operation" as defined in ASME A17.1. 2. Single Elevator: Provide "selective collective automatic operation" as defined in

ASME A17.1. 3. Multiple-Car Group: Provide "group automatic operation" as defined in ASME A17.1.

B. Freight Elevators: Provide manufacturer's standard operation system for "[single automatic operation] [car-switch automatic floor-stop operation]," as defined in ASME A17.1.

C. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated.

1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are returned to a field programmable designated floor, the doors cycled, and the car parked with doors openclosed. The door open button is to remain active to allow passengers to exit the car. Only one car may be moved upward at a time, with priority given to loaded cars. If a car cannot be returned after two attempts, each of a preselected length of time, it is removed from the system. When all cars have been returned or removed from the system, one car is automatically placed in service. If car selected for service cannot operate within 60 seconds, the system removes that car from service and places another car in service. Cars can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at [main lobby] [fire command station] <Insert location>. Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease.

2. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are returned to lowest a field programmable floor, doors cycled, and parked with doors openclosed. The door open button is to remain active to allow passengers to exit the car. If a car cannot be returned, it is removed from the system. One car is selected for service on standby power by a switch located at [main lobby] [fire command station] <Insert location>.

3. Standby Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open cycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed. Cars that are between floors are lowered to a preselected field programmable floor, opencycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed. Cars that are below the preselected floor are lowered to the next lower floor, open cycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed.

4. Standby Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, cars are lowered to the lowest floor, opencycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed.

5. Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open cycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed. Cars that are between floors are lowered to a preselected field programmable floor, open cycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed. Cars that are below the preselected field programmable


floor are lowered to the next lower floor, open cycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.

6. Battery-Powered Lowering: When power fails, cars are lowered to the lowest floor, open cycle their doors, and shut down with the doors closed. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.

7. [Emergency Hospital Service] [Priority Service]: Service is initiated by a [keyswitch] [card reader] [remote switch] at designated floors. One elevator is removed from group operation and directed to the floor where service was initiated. On arriving at the floor, elevator opens its doors and parks [and a lighted sign directs passengers to exit elevator]. Car is placed in operation by selecting a floor and pressing door close button or by operating keyswitch to put car in independent service. After responding to floor selected or being removed from independent service, car is returned to group operation. If car is not placed in operation within a preset time after being called, it is returned to group operation.

8. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car control station removes car from group operation and allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from keyswitch when car is in independent service. When in independent service, doors close only in response to constant pressure on the door close button.

9. Loaded-Car Bypass: When car load exceeds a predetermined weight, car will respond only to car calls, not to hall calls. Predetermined weight can be adjusted.

10. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds a predetermined weight, doors will begin closing.

11. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls [and predetermined weight] can be adjusted.

12. Load-Weighing Device (Freight Elevators): When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, a signal light is lit in the car control station; when car load exceeds rated capacity, car will not respond to car or hall calls.

D. Security Features: In addition to above operational features, provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. The main landing will not be locked out from the car to allow access out of the building to the "security level".

1. Keyswitch Feature: Car and hall push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches. Key is removable only in deactivated position.

2. Secured Landing Feature: Allows each landing to be secured or cleared. If landing is secured, car buttons for that landing do not register a call unless landing access code is entered within a predetermined time period after landing button is pressed. When a secured landing button is pressed, a "Restricted Floor" lamp lights and remains lit until landing access code has been entered or predetermined time period has elapsed.

a. User identification and aAccess codes are programmed at each car operating panel using a security keyswitch through a security PC system. Secured landing feature is activated and deactivated by a security keyswitch at the main landing.

3. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by a keyswitch at main lobby, that causes all cars in a group to return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by keyswitch, cars complete calls registered before keyswitch activation and resume normal operation.


4. Card-Reader Operation: For access to restricted landings. Provide required conductors in traveling cable and panel in machine room for interconnecting card readers, other security access system equipment, and elevator controllers. Allow space in car as indicated for card reader.

a. When system is activated, car calls to restricted landings do not register until card is accepted by security access system. Security access system determines which landings are restricted and which of those are accessible to cardholder.

b. Card readers and other security access system equipment are specified in Division 13 Section "<Insert Section title>."

c. Card readers and other security access system equipment are by others.

2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators with hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic.

B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard semirecessed car control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, if not otherwise indicated.

C. Car Control Stations: Provide fully recessed car control stations with applied metal faceplates. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, if not otherwise indicated.

D. Swing-Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations fully recessed in hinged return panel adjacent to car door.

1. Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required for specified car operation.

2. Mark buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A17.1.

3. Mount controls at heights complying with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)."] [ICC A117.1.]

4. Provide two car control stations in each passenger elevator; equip only one with required keyswitches, if any.

5. Where indicated, equip each freight elevator with auxiliary car control station mounted on side of car at height to facilitate operation by forklift truck operator without leaving truck.

E. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.


F. Fire Department Communication System: Provide [flush-mounted cabinet] [telephone jack] in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for fire department communication system specified in Division 16 Sections.

G. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide illuminated-signal type, digital-display type, or segmented type, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served.

1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.

H. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing for each elevator or group of elevators, but not less than one station for each four elevators in a group. For each group of passenger elevators, locate between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.

I. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing for each elevator or group of elevators as indicated.

1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Provide units with direction-indicating buttons; two buttons at intermediate landings; one

button at terminal landings.

J. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings.

1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing.

2. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise indicated. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.

3. Place lanterns in both jambs of entrance frame for each elevator. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.

a. At manufacturer's option, for single elevators or for only two cars in a group, lanterns may be located in car doorjambs instead of entrance jambs.

4. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

a. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on each car.

K. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated-signal type or digital-display type, located above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall.

1. Integrate ground-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators.

L. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations with text and graphics according to ASME A17.1, Appendix H.


2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with a uniform array of 3640 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Door Edge Device: Provide retractable edge shoes on elevator entrance doors that cause doors to stop and reopen upon contacting an obstruction. Include photoelectric device with timed cutout that projects dual-light beams across car entrance at 5- and 29-inch (127- and 737-mm) heights; the beams, when interrupted, cause doors to stop and reopen.

1. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for a predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound. When the doors are released, the and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.

2.6 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard [enameled-steel car enclosures with removable wall panels] [steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels], suspended ceiling, trim, accessories, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), lighting, and ventilation.

1. Floor finish is specified in another Section. 2. Metal Wall Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction, fabricated from metal indicated. 3. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch (13-mm)

fire-retardant-treated particleboard with [plastic-laminate panel backing complying with NEMA LD 3, Type BKV and] manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread rating of [25] [75] or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84.

4. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 5. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 6. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 7. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated from stainless steel. 8. Textured Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal, prime-painted-steel doors, faced

with textured stainless-steel sheets. Laminate textured stainless steel to exposed faces and edges using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.

9. Bronze Doors: Flush, hollow-metal, prime-painted-steel doors, faced with bronze sheets. Laminate bronze to exposed faces and edges using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.

10. Plastic-Laminate Doors: Flush, hollow-metal, prime-painted-steel doors, faced with plastic laminate; with manufacturer's standard protective edge trim.

11. Sills: a. Extruded metal, of grooveless type with door(s) guided from below; 1/4 inch (6.4

mm) thick. Provide satin finish on [aluminum], [bronze] [and] [nickel silver]. b. Sill-less construction, with flooring material extending up to the edge of the car

platform without a visible sill component. Door(s) will be guided from below.

c. Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. Provide satin finish on [aluminum], [bronze] [and] [nickel silver].


12. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements.

13. Polished Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, of metal indicated, with low-voltage downlights in the center of each panel.

14. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of metal indicated.

2.7 FREIGHT ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide car enclosures of freight loading classes, sizes, door types, and opening sizes indicated. Include ventilation, lighting, finishes, access doors, thresholds, trim, and accessories. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.

1. Provide power car door operators with linkages for in conjunction with power hoistway door operation.

B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standard flush panel welded construction made from [prime-painted steel sheet with a minimum thickness of 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm)] [prime-painted, metallic-coated steel sheet with a nominal thickness of 0.079 inch (2.0 mm)] [stainless-steel sheet with a nominal thickness of 0.0781 inch (2.0 mm)] reinforced at 16-inch (406-mm) maximum spacing.

1. Provide perforated panels for ceiling and walls 72 inches (1829 mm) or more above car floor, unless required to be solid by ASME A17.1.

2.8 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections.

B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards but not less than the following:

1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed stainless-steel sheet. 3. Bronze Frames: Prime-painted, formed-steel frames faced with formed-bronze sheet.

Laminate bronze to steel frames using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.

4. Enameled-Steel Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 5. Stainless-Steel Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated

from stainless steel. 6. Textured Stainless-Steel Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, prime-painted-steel, hollow-

metal construction, faced with textured stainless-steel sheets. Laminate textured stainless steel to exposed faces and edges using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.


7. Bronze Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, prime-painted-steel, hollow-metal construction, faced with bronze sheets. Laminate bronze to exposed faces and edges using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.

8. Plastic-Laminate Doors [and Transoms]: Flush, prime-painted-steel, hollow-metal construction, faced with plastic laminate; with manufacturer's standard protective edge trim.

9. Sills: a. Extruded metal, of grooveless type with door(s) guided from below; 1/4 inch (6.4

mm) thick. Provide satin finish on [aluminum], [bronze] [and] [nickel silver].

b. Sill-less construction, with flooring material extending up to the edge of the running clearance without a visible sill component. Door(s) will be guided from below.

c. Extruded metal , with groove(s)d in top surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. Provide polished satin finish on [aluminum], [bronze] [and] [nickel silver].

10. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

2.9 FREIGHT HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. General: Structural-steel frames and sills for hoistway entrances are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." Unless otherwise indicated, provide hoistway entrance doors of type indicated below, with truckable sill bars and resilient safety meeting-rail gaskets.

1. Equip for power operation by means of coordinated linkage in conjunction with power-operated car door.

2. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated, hollow-metal, door-and-frame hoistway entrances. Provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections.

B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated; provide manufacturer's standards but not less than the following:

1. Metal Door Panels: Constructed of metal sheets, flush on room side, welded and reinforced in steel framing with vertical reinforcing spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Fabricate panel faces from [prime-painted steel sheets with a minimum thickness of 0.0966 inch (2.5 mm)] [stainless-steel sheet with a nominal thickness of 0.1094 inch (2.8 mm)].

2.10 PASSENGER ELEVATORS

A. Elevator Nos.: <Insert elevator numbers as shown on Drawings.>

1. Type: Under-the-car single cylinder. 2. Type: Holeless, single-acting, beside-the-car, single cylinder. 3. Type: Holeless, single-acting, beside-the-car, dual cylinder. 4. Type: Holeless, telescoping, beside-the-car, single cylinder. 5. Type: Holeless, telescoping, beside-the-car, dual cylinder. 6. Type: Holeless, roped hydraulic, single cylinder.


7. Type: Holeless, roped hydraulic, dual cylinder. 8.6. Rated Load: [2000 lb (908 kg)] [2100 lb (953 kg)] [2500 lb (1135 kg)] [3000 lb (1362

kg)] [3500 lb (1589 kg)] [4000 lb (1816 kg)] [4500 lb (2043 kg)] [5000 lb (2270 kg)] <Insert other rated load>.

9.7. Rated Speed: [75 fpm (0.38 m/s)] [100 fpm (0.51 m/s)] [125 fpm (0.64 m/s)] [150 fpm (0.76 m/s)] [175 fpm (0.89 m/s)] [200 fpm (1.0 m/s)].

10.8. Operation System: [Selective collective automatic operation] [Group automatic operation, tTwo car group operation] [Multi-Car Group automatic operation].

11.9. Auxiliary Operations:

a. Standby power operation. b. Standby powered lowering. c. Battery-powered lowering. d. [Emergency hospital service] [Priority service] at [all] floors <Insert floor

designations>. e. Independent service. f. Loaded-car bypass. g. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. h. Nuisance call cancel.

12.10. Security Features: [Keyswitch feature] [Secured landing feature] [Car-to-lobby feature] [Card-reader operation].

13.11. Car Enclosures: As follows:

a. Inside Width: [64 inches (1626 mm)] [68 inches (1727 mm)] [80 inches (2032 mm)] [92 inches (2337 mm)].

b. Inside Depth: [51 inches (1295 mm)] [57 inches (1448 mm)] [65 inches (1651 mm)] [87-1/2 inches (2222 mm)] [90 inches (2286 mm)] [93 inches (2362 mm)] [93-1/2 inches (2375 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)] [101 inches (2565 mm)] [102 inches (2591 mm)].

c. Inside Height: [88 inches (2235 mm)] [94 inches (2388 mm)] [108 inches (2743 mm)].

d. Front Walls: [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Polished bronze] [Satin bronze] with integral car door frames.

e. Car Fixtures: [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Polished bronze] [Satin bronze].

f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: [Enameled steel] [Plastic laminate] [Satin stainless steel] [Textured stainless steel].

g. Reveals: [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Polished bronze] [Satin bronze].

h. Door Faces (Interior): [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Textured stainless steel] [Polished bronze] [Satin bronze] [Plastic laminate].

i. Door Sills: [Aluminum] [Bronze] [Nickel silver]. j. Ceiling: [Luminous ceiling] [Polished stainless steel] [Polished bronze]. k. Handrails: [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Polished bronze]

[Satin bronze], at side and rear walls. l. Floor prepared to receive carpet (specified in Division 9 Section "Carpet"). m. Floor prepared to receive resilient tile (specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient

Tile Flooring").


n. Floor prepared to receive sheet vinyl (specified in Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings").

o. Floor recessed and prepared to receive dimension stone tile (specified in Division 9 Section "Dimension Stone Tile"). Provide [cementitious backer units] [applied over] [5/8-inch (16-mm) underlayment grade, exterior plywood], screwed to car platform.

14.12. Hoistway Entrances: As follows:

a. Width: [36 inches (914 mm)] [42 inches (1067 mm)] [48 inches (1219 mm)] [54 inches (1372 mm)].

b. Height: [84 inches (2134 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)]. c. Type: [Single-speed side sliding] [Two-speed side sliding] [Single-speed center

opening] [Two-speed center opening]. d. Frames [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors] [at Other Floors]: [Enameled

steel] [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Polished bronze] [Satin bronze].

e. Doors [and Transoms] [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors] [at Other Floors]: [Enameled steel] [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Textured stainless steel] [Polished bronze] [Satin bronze] [Plastic laminate].

f. Sills [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors] [at Other Floors]: [Aluminum] [Bronze] [Nickel silver].

15.13. Hall Fixtures [at First Floor] [at Basement Floors] [at Other Floors]: [Polished stainless steel] [Satin stainless steel] [Polished bronze] [Satin bronze] [Recessed type with no exposed-metal surfaces].

16.14. Additional Requirements: As follows:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with [polished stainless-steel] [satin stainless-steel] [polished bronze] [satin bronze] frame.

b. Provide protective blanket hooks in all four cars and two complete sets of full-height blankets.

2.11 FREIGHT ELEVATORS

A. Elevator Nos.: <Insert elevator numbers as shown on Drawings.>

1. Type: Under-the-car single cylinder. 2. Type: Under-the-car dual cylinder. 3. Type: Holeless, single-acting, beside-the-car, single cylinder. 4. Type: Holeless, single-acting, beside-the-car, dual cylinder. 5. Type: Holeless, telescoping, beside-the-car, single cylinder. 6. Type: Holeless, telescoping, beside-the-car, dual cylinder. 7. Type: Holeless, roped hydraulic, single cylinder. 8. Type: Holeless, roped hydraulic, dual cylinder. 9.7. Rated Load: [2000 lb (908 kg)] [2500 lb (1135 kg)] [3000 lb (1362 kg)] [4000 lb (1816

kg)] [5000 lb (2270 kg)] [6000 lb (2720 kg)] [8000 lb (3632 kg)] [10000 lb (4540 kg)] <Insert other rated load>.

10.8. Freight Loading Class: Class [A] [B] [C1] [C2] [C3].


11.9. Rated Speed (Up): [50 fpm (0.25 m/s)] [75 fpm (0.38 m/s)] [100 fpm (0.51 m/s)] [125 fpm (0.64 m/s)] [150 fpm (0.76 m/s)] [175 fpm (0.9 m/s)] [200 fpm (1.0 m/s)].

12.10. Operational Speed (Down): [Approximately 30 percent more than] [Same as] rated speed (up).

13.11. Auxiliary Operations: [Battery-powered lowering] [Standby powered lowering] [Keyswitch feature] [Card-reader operation] [Load-weighing device].

14.12. Signal Equipment: Satin stainless-steel, single-button hall stations with [position] ["In-Use"] indicator.

15.13. Car Enclosures: As follows:

a. Platform Width: [60 inches (1524 mm)] [64 inches (1626 mm)] [66 inches (1676 mm)] [76 inches (1930 mm)] [78 inches (1981 mm)] [88 inches (2235 mm)] [100 inches (2540 mm)] [102 inches (2591 mm)] [124 inches (3150 mm)] [126 inches (3200 mm)] <Insert other dimension>.

b. Platform Depth: [72 inches (1829 mm)] [84 inches (2134 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)] [120 inches (3048 mm)] [144 inches (3658 mm)] [168 inches (4267 mm)] <Insert other dimension>.

c. Ceiling Height: 96 inches (2438 mm) <Insert other dimension>. d. Walls and Ceiling: [Enameled] [Satin stainless] steel. e. Floor: [Rolled steel floor plate] [Aluminum-alloy rolled tread plate] [Rolled

stainless-steel floor plate]. f. Door Type: [Vertical biparting] [Single-speed vertical lift] [Two-speed vertical

lift]. g. Car Gate Operation: [Manual] [Power operated]. h. Car Gate Material: [Painted] [Satin stainless] steel. i. Car Sill: Steel angle. j. Lighting: [Two] [Three] 48-inch (1219-mm) suspended 2-tube fluorescent light

fixtures with white reflectors and guards.

16.14. Hoistway Entrances: As follows:

a. Width: [56 inches (1422 mm)] [60 inches (1524 mm)] [62 inches (1575 mm)] [72 inches (1829 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)] [98 inches (2489 mm)] [120 inches (3048 mm)] [122 inches (3099 mm)].

b. Height: [84 inches (2134 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)]. c. Door Type: [Vertical biparting] [Single-speed vertical lift] [Two-speed vertical

lift]. d. Door Operation: [Manual] [Power operated]. e. Door Material: [Painted] [Stainless] steel. f. Sills specified in Division 5 Section "[Structural Steel] [Metal Fabrications]."

17.15. Additional Requirements: As follows:

a. Door reopening device.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions, and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in each elevator pit to accommodate installation of cylinders; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

1. Provide [waterproof] well casings [as necessary] to retain walls of well hole.

B. Install cylinders in protective casings within well [hole or] casing. Before installing protective casing, remove water and debris from well [hole or] casing [and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of well casing]. [Fill void space between protective casing and cylinder with corrosion-protective filler.]

1. Align cylinders and fill space between well casing and protective casing with fine sand.

C.B. Install cylinders in well [hole or] casings. Before installing cylinders, remove water and debris from well [hole or] casing [and provide permanent waterproof seal at bottom of casing]. [Align cylinder and fill void space with fine sand.]

D.C. Install cylinders plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between [well casing] [protective casing] [cylinder] and pit floor with 4 inches (100 mm) of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

E.D. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

F.E. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system.

G.F. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cement fittings.

H.G. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Where not possible, cover underground piping with permanent protective wrapping before backfilling.

I.H. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers.


J.I. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.

K.J. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.

L.K. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates safely, accurately, and smoothly.

3.43.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program.

B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.

3.53.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage.

1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator Installer for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use same parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.


2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and other procedures to protect elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.


Eastview Terrace / 92-07 / 10-6-92 22 41 13 – 1 Water Closets

SECTION 22 41 13

WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Low consumption flush tank operating system for low consumption water closets.


A. Section 15010: Basic Mechanical Requirements.

B. Section 15050: Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.


A. Codes and Standards:

1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

**INSERT NAME OF APPLICABLE CODE**

2. [ ] Plumbing Code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for flush tank operating system. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's rough-in drawings indicating rough-in requirements, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages. C. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's maintenance data in Maintenance Manual as specified in Division 1.



A. Store flush tank operating system in manufacturer's original packaging. Do not store packages in such a manner that may cause damage to flush tank operating system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Flush Tank Operating System:

1. Sloan Flushmate Ultra-Low Consumption Flushometer-Tank System.

B. Compatible Low Consumption Water Closets Manufacturers:

1. American Standard

2. Crane Plumbing

3. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures Corp.

4. Kohler Company.

5. Mansfield Plumbing Products

6. St. Thomas Creations

7. Universal-Rundle Corp.

2.02 FIXTURES

A. Flush Tank Operating System: Low consumption flush tank operating system with accumulator vessel, flush cartridge, trip lever assembly (left or right handed) and supply assembly equipped with an integral pressure reducing valve, pressure relief valve, and positive type vacuum breaker with air inducer assembly.

1. Water closets shall be low consumption type using the Flushmate Flushometer-

Tank Operating System conforming to ASSE 1037.


2. Flush volume shall not exceed 1.6 gallons when operated with static pressures in excess of 20 psi per ANSI requirements.

3. All units shall have an integral pressure reducing valve to limit working

pressure to 35 psi; a secondary pressure relief valve to discharge excess pressure into the bowl; a pressure-type vacuum breaker augmented by the air inducer assembly to prevent back siphonage.

4. The unit shall meet or exceed all local, regional and national performance and

safety codes.

5. The unit shall meet the requirements for hydraulic performance in accordance with ANSI.19.6.

6. Vitreous china shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A112.19.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All plumbing work shall be installed in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.

B. Flush all water supply lines prior to making connections.

C. Install flush tank operating system in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable codes and regulations. D. Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.


A. Test flush tank operating system to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation, after water supply has been turned on. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest. B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged units.


3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust flush tank operating system if required to manufacturer's recommendations.

Metric Conversions:

3/4" = 1.90cm, 1" = 2.54cm, 1-1/4" = 5.71cm, 1-1/2" = 3.81cm, 1-3/4" = 4.44cm, 1-7/8" =

4.76cm,

2" = 5.08cm, 2-1/16" = 5.23cm, 2-1/8" = 5.39cm, 2-1/4" = 5.71cm, 2-1/2" = 6.35cm, 2-3/4" =

6.98cm,

3" = 7.62cm, 4" = 10.16cm, 4-3/4" = 12.06cm, 5-1/4" = 13.33cm, 5-5/16" = 13.49cm,

6" = 15.24cm, 6-1/2" = 16.51cm, 7-1/2" = 19.05cm, 8" = 20.32cm, 9-1/2" = 25.02cm, 9-3/4" =

25.66cm,

10" = 25.4cm, 10-1/4" = 26.03cm, 10-7/8" = 27.62cm, 11-1/2" = 29.25cm, 12" = 30.48cm,

13" = 33.02cm, 13-3/8" = 33.97cm, 13-1/2" = 34.29cm, 13-3/4" = 34.92cm,

14" = 35.56cm, 14-1/2" = 36.82cm, 15-1/2" = 39.37, 16" = 40.64cm, 16-3/4" = 42.54cm,

17" = 43.17cm, 17-1/4" = 43.81cm, 17-1/2" = 44.44cm, 19" = 48.26, 19-1/4" = 48.89cm,

20" = 50.79cm, 21-1/2" = 54.60cm, 22-1/2" = 57.15cm, 23" = 64.03cm, 24" = 60.86cm, 24-1/2"

= 62.13cm,

27" = 74.19cm, 30" = 76.2cm, 34-3/8" = 92.92cm, 60" = 152.4cm, 72" = 182.88cm.

EAST VIEW TERRACE 11/19/10 22 41 23 RESIDENTIAL SHOWERS

SECTION 22 41 23 RESIDENTIAL SHOWERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Bathtub wall enclosures.

B. Shower wall enclosures.

C. Assisted living enclosure.

D. Bathroom window kits.

E. Shower pans.

F. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants: Caulking and sealing.

B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

C. Section 09300 - Tile.

D. Section 15410 – Plumbing Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures, valves and fittings not furnished with units.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM F 446 – Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Unit.

B. ATBCB ADAAG – American with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color

chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience manufacturing bath and shower components.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer who has demonstrated experience installing bath

and shower components and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard 5-year limited warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Final height and width dimensions of the delivered products shall be within

reasonable tolerances of the specified height and width dimensions. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: American Bath Enterprises, Inc.; 26247 Research Road, Hayward, CA 94545. ASD. Tel: (888) 228-4925. Fax: (510) 785-6300. Email: [email protected]. Web: www.americanbathind.com.


C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01600. 2.3 ENCLOSURE MATERIALS

A. Enclosures: Formed of two sheets of permanently bonded, thermally formed acrylic and styrene sheets in reflective high gloss white color, with a 4 inch (102 mm) tile appearance, with simulated grout lines. 1. Reinforcement for Grab Bars and Wall Mounted Accessories: Factory-

installed minimum 3 inches by 3 inches (75 by 75 mm) steel mounting plates anchored to 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick plywood installed behind sheetrock or code approved wallboard in a manner required to meet load resistance requirements of ASTM F 446.

2. Self-caulking compression fit integral drain with boot. 2.4 BATHTUB WALL ENCLOSURES

http://www.americanbathind.com/


A. TA Series: Three wall bath kit consisting of two sheets of permanently bonded thermally formed acrylic and styrene sheets with interlocking and overlapping channels and trimmable back wall. 1. Model No. 6030TA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 28.25 inches (718 mm) side,

a. 57.25 inches (1454 mm) high. 2. Model No. 6030TA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 30 inches (762 mm) side,

a. 61.5 inches (1562 mm) high. b. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high. c. 83 inches (2108 mm) high.

3. Model No. 6032TA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 32 inches (813 mm) side, a. 61.5 inches (1562 mm) high with side panel leg kit. b. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high with side panel leg kit. c. 83 inches (2108 mm) high with side panel leg kit.

4. Model No. 6034TA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 33.75 inches (857 mm) side. a. 61.5 inches (1562 mm) high with side panel leg kit. b. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high with side panel leg kit. c. 83 inches (2108 mm) high with side panel leg kit.

5. Model No. 6042TA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 41.25 inches (1048 mm) side, a. 57.5 inches (1461 mm) high with side panel leg kit.

6. Model No. 604215TA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 41.5 inches (1054 mm) side, a. 15 inches (381 mm) high with side panel leg kit.

7. Model No. 7230TA 72 inches (1829 mm) back, 29.25 inches (743 mm) side, a. 57.25 inches (1454 mm) high.

B. TG Series: Three wall bath kit consisting of two sheets of permanently bonded

thermally formed acrylic and styrene sheets with interlocking and overlapping channels and trimmable sides. 1. Model No. 6034TG 58.25 inches (1480 mm) back, 33.75 inches (857 mm)

side, a. 61.5 inches (1562 mm) high with side panel leg kit. b. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high with side panel leg kit. c. 83 inches (2108 mm) high with side panel leg kit.

2.5 SHOWER WALL ENCLOSURES

A. SA Series: Three wall shower kit consisting of two sheets of permanently bonded thermally formed acrylic and styrene sheets with interlocking and overlapping channels and trimmable back wall. 1. Model No. 5034SA 50.5 inches (1283 mm) back, 33.75 inches (857 mm) side,

a. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high. 2. Model No. 5034SA 50.5 inches (1283 mm) back, 34 inches (864 mm) side,

a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 3. Model No. 5036SA 50.5 inches (1283 mm) back, 35.25 inches (895 mm) side,


a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 5. Model No. 5040SA 50.5 inches (1283 mm) back, 40 inches (1016 mm) side,


a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 7. Model No. 6030SA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 30 inches (762 mm) side,

a. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high. 8. Model No. 6030SA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 30 inches (762 mm) side,

a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high.


9. Model No. 6032SA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 32 inches (813 mm) side, a. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high.

10. Model No. 6032SA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 32 inches (813 mm) side, a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high.

11. Model No. 6034SA 60.5 inches (1537 mm) back, 33.75 inches (857 mm) side, a. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high.

12. Model No. 6034SA 60.5 inches (1537 mm) back, 34 inches (864 mm) side, a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high.

13. 14. Model No. 6036SA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 35.25 inches (895 mm) side,


a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 16. Model No. 6040SA 60 inches (1524 mm) back, 40 inches (1016 mm) side,


a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high.

B. SA Series: Two wall shower kit consisting of two sheets of permanently bonded thermally formed acrylic and styrene sheets with interlocking and overlapping channels designed to fit standard corner shower pans. 1. Model No. 3600SA 35.25 inches (895 mm) side,

a. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high. 2. Model No. 3600SA 36 inches (914 mm) side,

a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 3. Model No. 3700SA 37 inches (940 mm) side,


a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 5. Model No. 3800SA 38 inches (965 mm) side,


a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 7. Model No. 4000SA 40inches (1016 mm) side,

a. 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high. 8. Model No. 4000SA 40inches (1016 mm) side,

a. 83 inches (2108 mm) high. 2.6 ASSISTED LIVING ENCLOSURE

A. Bathing shower system components. 1. No. AB603072SA, includes 60 (1524 mm) inches by 30 inches (762 mm) end

drain wheel chair access shower pan, with a 12 inches (305 mm) deep by 60 inches (1524 mm) wide ramp. A three wall enclosure 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 30 inches (762 mm) deep by 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high and all accessories listed.

2. Accessories: a. No. 6030 shower pan, 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 30 inches (762

mm) deep end drain pan. b. Ramp: A molded removable incline ramp that clips into shower pan, 12

inches (305 mm) deep by 60 inches (1524 mm) wide. c. Threshold: A removable rubber threshold that folds down when the

wheel chair goes in and folds up to stop water from escaping. d. Valve: A single-handle, pressure balanced, anti scald valve for water

control.


e. Shower Head: A removable handheld shower head, hose, and chrome plated slide bar.

f. Grab Bars: Two vertical and one horizontal. g. Safety Seat: A white Naugahyde stainless steel wall mounted folding

bath safety seat. 3. No. AB603072SA, includes 60 (1524 mm) inches by 30 inches (762 mm) end

drain retro-fit non wheel chair access shower pan. A three wall enclosure 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 30 inches (762 mm) deep by 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high and all accessories listed. (No ramp or threshold required).

4. No. AB603272SA, includes 60 (1524 mm) inches by 32 inches (813 mm) center or end drain retro-fit non wheel chair access shower pan. A three wall enclosure 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep by 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high and all accessories listed. (No ramp or threshold required).

5. No. AB603072SA three wall shower enclosure for wheel chair access or non wheel chair access system, 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 30 inches (762 mm) deep by 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high.

6. No. AB603272SA three wall shower enclosure for non wheel chair access system, 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep by 71.25 inches (1810 mm) high.

2.7 BATHROOM WINDOW KITS

A. Window kits have a sill piece and two side pieces and are designed to be installed over a window frame that is flush to the sheetrock. Sills should correspond with the inside width of the window frame. Side pieces are manufactured in one 48 inch (1219 mm) piece, which is then cut to match the height required for the side of the window. Sill and side pieces are designed to be glued to a window frame that has been stripped, is relatively smooth and has a minimum inset depth of 2 inches (51 mm). Sill and side pieces have a rounded bull nose that extends over the surface of the edge of the window sill, window sides and the enclosure wall.

B. Sill model:

1. Model 1600 WK for 16 inches (406 mm) inside width of window frame. 2. Model 2400 WK for 24 inches (600 mm) inside width of window frame. 3. Model 3200 WK for 32 inches (813 mm) inside width of window frame. 4. Model 3600 WK for 36 inches (914 mm) inside width of window frame. 5. Model 4200 WK for 42 inches (1067 mm) inside width of window frame. 6. Model 4800 WK for 48 inches (1219 mm) inside width of window frame.

C. Side panels: Side panels are manufactured in one 48 inch (1219 mm) piece, which

is then cut to match the height required for the window.

D. Finish: Window kits to have the same simulated tile pattern as the enclosure. 2.8 SHOWER PANS

A. Features: 1. One piece molded solid construction. 2. Single threshold, with flange on enclosure wall sides. 3. Slip resistant floor design. 4. Integral molded 2 inch (51 mm) drain. 5. Stain and fungus resistant. 6. Shoulder width 1.25 inches (32 mm). 7. Threshold width 3 inches (76 mm).


8. Threshold height 4.75 inches to 5.375 inches (121 to 137 mm). 9. Flange height 1 inch (25.4 mm). 10. White composite material to closely match color of enclosure panels. 11. 36 inch by 34 inch (914 mm by 864 mm) shower pan provided with a separate

ABS, no caulk, fiberglass shower base drain.

B. Center drain shower pans for three wall shower enclosures. 1. Size: 32 inches (813 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep. 2. Size: 34 inches (863 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 3. Size: 35-1/8 inches (892 mm) wide by 33-1/2 inches (851 mm) deep. 4. Size: 36 inches (914 mm) wide by 36 inches (914 mm) deep. 5. Size: 36 inches (914 mm) wide by 42 inches (1067 mm) deep. 6. Size: 42 inches (1067 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 7. Size: 42 inches (1067 mm) wide by 42 inches (1067 mm) deep. 8. Size: 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep. 9. Size: 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 10. Size: 54 inches (1372 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 11. Size: 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep. 12. Size: 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 13. Size: 37.5 inches (963 mm) Neo. 14. Size: 36 inches (914 mm) by 36 inches (914 mm) Neo. 15. Size: 38 inches (965 mm) by 38 inches (965 mm) Neo.

C. Center drain shower pans for two wall shower enclosures. 1. Size: 32 inches (813 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep. 2. Size: 34 inches (863 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 3. Size: 36 inches (914 mm) wide by 36 inches (914 mm) deep. 4. Size: 36 inches (914 mm) wide by 42 inches (1067 mm) deep. 5. Size: 42 inches (1067 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 6. Size: 42 inches (1067 mm) wide by 42 inches (1067 mm) deep. 7. Size: 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep. 8. Size: 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 9. Size: 54 inches (1372 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep. 10. Size: 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 32 inches (813 mm) deep. 11. Size: 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 34 inches (863 mm) deep.

D. End drain, non wheel chair access shower pans for three wall shower enclosures. 1. Size: 60-3/8 inches (1534 mm) by 30-1/4 inches (768 mm) with 4 inch (101

mm) high threshold with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) flange on three sides. 2. Size: 60-3/8 inches (1534 mm) by 32-3/16 inches (818 mm) with 2-7/8 inch

(73 mm) high threshold with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) flange on three sides.

E. End drain wheel chair access shower pans and required accessories. 1. Comply with ATBCB ADAAG. 2. Size: 60 inches (1524 mm) by 30 inches (813 mm) wheel chair access with

No. BF-1260 12 inches (305 mm) by 60 inches (1524 mm) ramp, and No. BF-FT flexible threshold.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Grab Bars: Type 304 stainless steel; configuration complying with ANSI A117.1, ADAAG, and ASTM F 446. 1. Size: 1.5 inches (37 mm) diameter tube, 18 gauge wall thickness.


2. Mounting: Concealed stainless steel bolts and nuts, with escutcheon of same finish as bar.

3. Mounting Height: Horizontal bars 36 inches (915 mm) above floor; vertical bars centered at 42 inches (1065 mm) above floor.

B. Folding Shower Seat: Stainless steel frame spring-hinged to allow seat to fold up

against wall. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

Stuckeman Family Building Novemeber 19th, 2010 Suspended maintenance and fall restraint equipment 28 76 13-1

SECTION 11014

SUSPENDED ACCESS SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AND FALL RESTRAINT EQUIPMENTPART 1: GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY SECTION INCLUDES

A. Suspended access support equipment including 1. System design 2. Tieback anchors 3. Suspension line anchors 4. Fall arrest anchors 5. Rigging sleeves 6. Davits

B. Horizontal fall restraint cable system including 1. System design 2. Cable 3. Intermediate anchors 4. Terminating anchors 5. Energy absorber


A. Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

B. Section 05120 Structural Steel

C. Section 05500 Metal Fabrications

D. Section 07500 Membrane Roofing

E. Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

F. Section 07920 Joint Sealants

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced. 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

a. AISC Publication Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings

b. AISC Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel b. ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Hardware


c. ASTM A500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

d. ASTM A780 Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

e. ASTM B209-04 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

f. ASTM B221-02 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes

g. ASTM B308/B308M-02 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles

3. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code

4. Occupational Safety and Health Standards a. ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety b. 1910 Subpart D (Walking and Working Surfaces) c. 1910.66 Appendix C (Personal Fall Arrest) d. 1910.66 Subpart F (Powered Platforms) e. OSHA procedures and precautions for employees using descent

control equipment.


A. Anchorage Design Requirements 1. Safety anchor system design shall comply with current OSHA, ANSI, and

local regulations pertaining to window cleaning and fall protection in accordance with sections 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3.

2. Anchor system shall provide independent fall arrest anchorages in addition to suspension line anchorages for each descent location as required by OSHA and ANSI requirements.

3. System shall be designed to be compatible with current window cleaning industry standard equipment (examples: rope descent systems, boatswain chairs, swing stages, transportable suspension devises).

4. Structural design requirements of anchorages and tie-back a. Anchorage shall be capable of sustaining a minimum ultimate load

of 5,000 lbs., in any direction the load may be applied, without fracture or failure.

b. Anchorage shall be capable of sustaining a minimum proof load of 2,500 lbs., in any direction the load may be applied, without permanent deformation or damage to anchorage.

c. Anchorages shall be designed with a minimum 1,250 lb. working load, in any direction the load may be applied.

e. Parapet or guardrails subject to direct loading by workers’ ropes, possibly cables, shall be designed to withstand such loading (typically 1,800 lbs) without damage to either the structure of the rigging component in contact with it.

5. Locate primary support and fall arrest anchors in conjunction with areas on façade of building needing to be serviced. Consideration shall be given to the type of suspension equipment that will be used at the building and


conditions such as workers’ reach, rigging methods, and roof edge conditions. Anchorages shall be unobstructed and located behind and in line with equipment or portion of building they are intended to service (See illustrations on page 12: “Anchor Spacing Diagram” and “Outside Corner Layout Reference Diagram”).

Note: This specification does not address powered platform design or roof mounted powered equipment; however, The ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety Standard states: “Rope descents shall not exceed 300 feet (91m) above grade unless the windows cannot be safely and practicably accessed by other means” (Section 5.7.12). Additionally, The ASME A120 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Building Maintenance Standard should be consulted when designing such equipment.

B. Rigging Sleeve and Davit Design Requirements 1. Locate rigging sleeves and davits to accommodate suspended maintenance

during swing stage operations. Typically, spacing of davits is on column lines or every 20 feet, on center. Typical spacing of rigging sleeves is 6 foot 8 inches, on center. Placement of supports should allow cables suspending powered equipment to hang either parallel and in plane or slightly angulated with the building façade as required by users. (See illustrations on page 11: “Suggested Rigging Sleeve Layout” and “Suggested Davit Layout”). Consideration should be given to operating other equipment that may be required for access.

2. Locate independent anchorages for personal fall protection when using rigging sleeves or davits in accordance with section 1.4(A) Anchorage Design Requirements (See illustrations on page 11: “Suggested Rigging Sleeve Layout” and “Suggested Davit Layout”).

3. Davits shall be capable of supporting an ultimate load of not less than 4 times the rated load. The rated load of the davit shall be based on the swing stage hoist and powered platform load capacity, which is frequently 1,000 lbs or more.

4. Manufacture shall provide engineer’s calculations and test report to verify that davit will support load requirements.

5. Outreach of portable davit boom shall not exceed 8 foot 6 six inches. 6. Rigging sleeves shall meet the loading requirements in Section 1.4(A)

Anchorage Design Requirements.

C. Horizontal fall restraint cable system 1. The Horizontal fall restraint cable system (HFRCS) shall allow up to two

users to traverse the length of the cable span, each using a single lanyard for traveling along the cable spans. Turns in the HFRCS will require a double lanyard. The HFRCS shall be designed for two users using an energy absorbing lanyard, which limits the force applied to the HFRCS to 900 lb. or less.

2. HFRCS shall spans shall not exceed 100 foot long. 3. The horizontal line shall be constructed of 3/8” x 7 x 19 stainless steel or

galvanized aircraft cable, commercial grade per specification SD 118 and


Fed. Spec. RR-W-410, construction grade, with an average breaking strength of not less than 14,400 lbs.

4. Horizontal lines shall be permanently attached to anchors with 2 non-corrosive permanently swaged fittings swaged to manufacturer's specifications at each termination. Swages shall be verified not to loosen under load. Load capacity of one swage shall exceed strength of wire rope.

5. Horizontal lines must be attached to anchorages designed to be capable of supporting a minimum 5,000 lb. However, the HFRCS cable and anchorages shall be independent of anchorages used for suspension in accordance with Section 1.4(A) Anchorage Design Requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product proposed 1. Test report certified by a professional engineer 2. General product data 3. Detailed drawings of equipment proposed 4. Installation instructions

B. Shop Drawings

1. Submit scaled shop drawings showing location plan of all support equipment and sections detailing all parts and accessories.

2. Clearly specify equipment dimensions, materials, fabrication details, hardware, and installation instructions.

3. Include notes with guidelines of proper use of system. 4. Equipment location plan to include identification number next to each

piece of equipment, i.e. (anchors, davits, and rigging sleeves.) that are permanently affixed to a structure.

5. Field welds shall be indicated on equipment details using AWS symbols and showing length and size. Auxiliary views shall be shown to clarify welding as required.

6. Shop drawings shall be prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer and shall bear engineer’s seal and signature. Professional engineer shall be licensed in jurisdiction where project is located. Include P.E. certified report of tested equipment.

C. Quality Assurance Submittal Certificates

1. Provide documentation verifying company’s amount of experience and successful performance in design, fabrication, and installation of permanent window washing equipment.

2. Submit listing of company’s installations representing similar scope and complexity to project requirements for previous 10 years. List shall include information as follows: a. Project name and address b. Name of owner c. Name of contractor d. Name of architect (if applicable)


e. Date of completion 3. Provide documentation verifying that installers have been trained by the

manufacturer and are competent.

D. Contract Close-out Submittals 1. Operation and Maintenance

a. Provide a safety inspection logbook for yearly inspections. Log book shall include a certification of compliance letter. The certification of compliance shall state that access system is in compliance with current OSHA regulations and ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety Standard.

2. Project Record Document Data a. Record anchor locations and details. b. Submit 2 copies of a reduced, plastic laminated Project Record

Drawing showing as-installed anchor locations, details, and instructional text in English (and Spanish upon request). Post one copy on interior of each roof door or adjacent to exit on roof; owner shall establish exact location.

c. Submit a letter of certification by a registered professional engineer licensed in jurisdiction where project is located verifying that installed anchors and system are in compliance with OSHA and ANSI requirements as specified. Each piece of access equipment dedicated to the building shall be tested on site under the supervision of a P.E. in accordance with ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety and Summit Anchor Co. test procedures.


A. Qualifications 1. Provide products from a company specializing in design, fabrication, and

installation of permanent window washing equipment with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. Companies like miscellaneous metal fabricators not normally engaged in design and fabrications of suspended access equipment are not acceptable.

2. Manufacturer and installer shall have specific liability insurance (products and completed operations) in an amount not less than $5,000,000.

3. Installer(s) shall be trained or qualified by manufacturer in installation techniques and procedures of permanent window washing equipment and shall demonstrate a minimum of 5 years successful experience in such installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Comply with Occupational Health and Safety Standards: a. ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety Standard b. 1910 Subpart D (Walking and Working Surfaces) c. 1910.66 Appendix C (Personal Fall Arrest) d. 1910.66 Subpart F (Powered Platforms)


e. OSHA Procedures and precautions for employees using descent control equipment.

2. Welding shall comply with AWS D1.1 and shall be performed by welders qualified to work in jurisdiction where project is located.

3. Comply with AISC publications: a. Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings b. Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members


A. Deliver materials in original unopened packaging.

B. Storage and Protection 1. Store materials in a protected area away from construction activities. 2. Clean bolts that have become dirty before installing. 3. Special care must be taken with stainless steel since not compatible with

many chemicals and materials. 4. Do not install damaged materials. Remove damaged materials from site.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION

A. General contractor is responsible for coordinating the schedule for producing shop drawings, fabricating suspended access equipment, and installation. General contractor shall allow three weeks for delivery of shop drawings and three weeks to deliver equipment upon approval of shop drawing by general contractor.

B. Manufacturer to provide detailed installation instructions and directions for installation of embeded items, welded items, and through-bolted items, etc.

C. Manufacturer to provide installation assistance during installation of the equipment. However, the responsibility of the installation rest with the general contractor unless equipment is installed and certified by the manufacturer.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS & INSTALLERS

A. Suspended Access and Fall Restraint System 1. Summit Anchor Company

Tel: 800-372-1098 Fax: 301-620-9819 Web Site: www.summitanchor.com

B. Equivalent or superior materials and/or system substitutions shall be submitted to

architect of record for review in compliance with substitution procedures in Section 01630 of this Project Manual.


2.2 STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS’ MATERIALS

A. Exposed Structural Components Finish: Galvanized Mild Steel or Stainless Steel 1. Steel: ASTM A572 GR 50 2. Steel: ASTM A A36 3. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 4. Stainless Steel; 304 ASTM A 193 Grade B8, Class 2 5. Aluminum; 6061-T6 Alloy B. Yield Strength

1. Base Plates and Bottom Plates, High Strength Steel: 50 ksi minimum 2. Other Sections: 36 ksi minimum

C. Non-Structural Components

1. Aluminum; 6061-T6 Alloy 2. Alloys shall conform to requirements published in AA Aluminum Standards. 3. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 4. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221

D. Cold-Rolled Sections

1. ASTM A500 2. Yield Strength: 55 ksi minimum 3. Tensile Strength: 62 ksi minimum

E. Nuts, Bolts, Davit Pins, and Washers 1. Stainless Steel; 304 ASTM A 193 Grade B8 or F593C 2. Galvanized Flat Washers ASTM F-436 or 18 -8 Stainless Steel F. Anchor Bolts (for securing base plate)

1. Metal: Stainless Steel, 304 Stainless Steel; ASTM A 193 Grade 8, B8 2. Size: 5/8 in. diameter minimum

G. Hilti HDA Undercut Anchoring System 1. HAD-T Undercut Anchor (Through-Set Type) 2. Anchor size and embedment depth: As needed to suit loads imposed by

Summit Anchor equipment. Consult project engineer to determine proper anchoring system based on concrete condition, psi, and thickness before ordering Summit equipment.

3. Installed per Hilti installation instructions.

H. Hilti HVA Capsule Adhesive Anchoring System 1. Anchor size and embedment depth: As needed to suit loads imposed by

Summit Anchor equipment. Consult project engineer to determine proper anchoring system based on concrete condition, psi, and thickness before ordering Summit equipment.

2. Installed per Hilti installation instructions. 3. Installed by Hilti accredited installers only.


4. Each installed anchor assembly shall be load tested to 50 percent of its rated capacity. Test results shall be certified a P.E. with experience in suspended access equipment.


A. Anchor 1. Capable of withstanding 5000 lbs. (2268kg) in any direction without

permanent deflection. 2. Anchor eye size: Not less than ¾ inch (20 mm) diameter material with 2

¼ in (60 mm) eye opening. 3. Anchor eye metals:

1. Forged, 1030 quenched and tempered per ASTM 576-90-b, 72ksi minimum

2. Stainless steel, type 304, solution annealed, 35 ksi minimum

4. Anchor tube height: not less than 4 in. above the finished roof.

B. Davit Base 1. Stanchion type complete with davit adapter and lock pin with stainless

steel safety snap pin. 2. Davit socket; with two stainless steel hinge pins and stainless steel safety

snap pins. 3. Pier Height: not less than 10 in. above finished roof surface to allow

proper fit up with adaptor.

C. Rigging Sleeves 1. Assembled complete with cap tethered to cross bar. 2. Length as required to clear under side of façade by two inches. 3. Not less than 6”above the finished roof.

D. Cable system 1. Install complete with inline shock absorber to limit load to 2,250 lbs. or

less at terminating anchors. 2 Pass through cable anchors to allow up to two workers to traverse straight

cable runs with single lanyard without detachment off lanyard. E. Flashing with one E.P.D.M. gasket seal top and base

1. Seamless Spun Aluminum Flashing: ASTM B221; Type 6061-T6 alloy 2. Stainless Steel: 304

F. Cast in place equipment

1. A minimum of two cast-in-place steel studs are required for concrete embedded anchors.

2.4 FABRICATION


A. Fabricate work true to dimension, square, plumb, level, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

B. Grind off surplus welding material to ensure exposed surfaces are smooth so as

not to abrade workers’ ropes.

C. Welding shall be in accordance with the AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1/D1.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions 1. Examine areas and conditions under which permanent window washing

equipment shall be installed. 2. Report to general contractor any conditions that deviate from shop

drawings or any defects in workmanship that would cause an unsafe installation. This report shall be verified in writing to the general contractor and any other responsible party.

3. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of work. 4. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 5. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and

responsibility for satisfactory performance by installer. 6. Faults occurring in work of this section due to acceptance of

unsatisfactory conditions shall be corrected at no additional cost to owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements 1. Install window washing system in compliance with manufacturer’s

instructions. Install equipment level, tightly fitted, and flush to adjacent surfaces as needed for proper installation.

2. Coordinate anchor installation with roofing installation to ensure a watertight and warrantable condition of the roofing. Anchors shall be directly flashed into roofing in a manner compatible with roofing system and anchors.

3. When components come into contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be kept from direct contact to prevent corrosion.

4. No wall anchors shall be installed through membrane roofing system without specification detailing such from the architect or water proofing company warranting the roof.

5. Deform a minimum of two threads of tail end of anchor studs after nuts have been tightened to prevent accidental removal or vandalism. Deform threads with 2/32" stainless steel punch

B. Instructions for welding access equipment to structure

1. All welders must be certified to American Welding Society (AWS) in accordance with AWS standards.


2. Welding rods used to weld the anchor system to be E70 xx electrodes. 3. Prior to welding anchors to structure, abrasively remove within one inch

of all welded surfaces galvanizing, mill, scale, and rust. 4. Immediately after welding, chip away slag to prepare for welding

inspector to inspect welds. 5. An AWS certified welding inspector must inspect and confirm size of all

field welds. Following the inspection a written report must be supplied to the building owner and/or general contractor. Welded joints shall not be painted until after welding has been completed and the weld accepted.

6. Immediately after an acceptable inspection, paint welded areas with cold-galvanizing compound to protect from corrosion.

7. Structural steel to receive roof or wall anchors shall have a surface wide enough so that base plate can be welded all the way around. For example, anchors equipped with 4½ in. (112.5 mm) base plates would require a minimum 5 in. (137.5 mm) surface to weld to.

C. Adhesive and Undercut Anchor Fasteners

1. Installation of Summit Anchor Co. equipment mounted with adhesive type anchor fasteners shall be performed by Hilti accredited installers only.

2. Installation of Summit Anchor Co. equipment mounted with undercut type anchor fasteners shall be performed by Hilti trained installers only.

D. Aluminum Flashing 1. Deck flange shall be flashed in compliance with National Roofing

Contractor Association recommendations.

3.3 REPAIR/RESTORATION

A. Galvanizing Touch-Up 1. Immediately after erection clean field welds and abraded areas. Repair

damaged areas in compliance with ASTM A780.


A. Inspection and site visits 1. Inspections and site visits shall be performed while installation of

equipment is in progress under the supervision qualified professional engineer registered in the jurisdiction where the project is located.

2. On site inspection of equipment welded to structure shall be performed by an AWS Certified Welding Inspector verifying, in writing, size and quality of welds. Such an inspection shall be performed on each piece of equipment before roofing material is installed.

3. On site inspection shall be performed on all cast in place items while being tied in with the rebar with sufficient time before concrete is poured to allow to adjustments to embedded items as recommended by inspector.

4. G.C. shall be responsible to schedule above site visits and inspections with sufficient advanced notice given to the inspection company.


B. Site Tests 1. All equipment shall be tested on site in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations, under the supervision of a professional engineer, and ANSI/IWCA I-14.1-2001 Window Cleaning Safety Standards, before being placed in service.

2. Equipment shall be tested under the supervision of a professional engineer with experience with suspended maintenance equipment and manufacturers guidelines.

C. Manufacturer shall assist and/or supervise installation of window washing

equipment installed by others when such is included in contracted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Verify that completed work has been installed correctly and products function properly. Make adjustments where needed to ensure satisfactory operation.

B. Complete inspection logbook to certify system for use noting any deviations,

changes, or corrections from original shop drawings. Provide as-built anchor layout plan on 11 in. x 17 in. paper or larger together with annual inspection log book.



NOTE: LAYOUT OF DAVITS AND RIGGING SLEEVES WILL VARY DEPENDING ON BUILDNG CONFIGURATION AND GEOMMETRY.

END OF SECTION

Terrazzo Specifications & Design Guide

1 Stuckeman Family Building/11-19-10 36 43 90 - 2 Terrazzo Floors

GUIDE SPECIFICATION FOR RUSTIC TERRAZZO Structural system over granular fill

(Revised 6/94 - supersedes all previous Specifications) SECTION 09 RUSTIC TERRAZZO Rustic Terrazzo can utilize any cementitious terrazzo system. Most Rustic Terrazzo is installed on exterior, on-grade locations. NTMA considers the Structural System, Bonded or Unbonded System with underbed and Monolithic System suitable for this type of installation. Structural System: in the Structural System, both concrete substrate slab and terrazzo topping are provided by terrazzo installer. Minimum thickness of combination of substrate slab and terrazzo topping should be 5 inches. PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS 1.02

NOTE: DELETE NONAPPLICABLE ITEMS. A. Excavation and site work

including compacted granular fill to receive substrate slab. Section____________________

NOTE: GRANULAR FILL SPECIFICATIONS ARE DETERMINED BY PROJECT DESIGNER. HOWEVER, PERFORMANCE OF THE FILL IS RELATED TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE TERRAZZO FINISH.

FOLLOWING ARE RECOMMENDED MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS FOR FILL: GRANULAR AND/OR SAND FILL COMPACTED TO 95% OF MAXIMUM DENSITY PER MODIFIED PROCTOR TEST ASTM D 1557-70. B. Concrete work other than specified herein.

Section____________________ C. Furnishing temporary power.

Section____________________ D. Furnishing clean water.

Section____________________ E. Provision of floor drains.

Section_________________________________________________________



F. If required, provide enclosure with temporary heat maintained at a minimum of 45 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable supplier:

1. Materials furnished shall meet NTMA Specifications. B. Installer qualifications:

1. Installer shall be a contractor member of NTMA and shall perform all work in accordance with NTMA standards.

2. If installer is not a contractor member of NTMA, installer shall submit a list of completed projects of a similar magnitude and complexity.

1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Samples:

1. Submit a maximum of three samples, minimum 6" x 6" for each color and type of rustic terrazzo.

2. Submit two, 6" minimum lengths of each type and kind of divider strips. B. Maintenance Literature:

1. Submit two copies of maintenance recommendations of NTMA or maintenance product members of NTMA.

C. Certification: 1. Suppliers shall furnish certification attesting that materials meet specification

requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of materials:

1. Deliver materials in a manner to prevent damage to containers and/or bags. B. Storage of materials:

1. Store materials in a clean, dry and heated (if necessary) location. 1.05 GUARANTEE One year from date of substantial completion of Terrazzo installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Color _______________________________ NOTE: SELECT AND SPECIFY WHITE OR GRAY FOR TERRAZZO TOPPING.

WHITE CEMENT IS UNIFORM IN COLOR. GRAY CEMENT MAY NOT BE UNIFORM IN COLOR AND MAY PRODUCE A VARIATION OF SHADE IN THE MATRIX. WHERE CLIMACTIC CONDITIONS SO DEMAND, SPECIFY AN AIR ENTRAINING AGENT (6% AIR PLUS OR MINUS 1%) FOR STRUCTURAL SLAB



TO MINIMIZE FREEZE-THAW CYCLE DAMAGE. PACKAGE AIR ENTRAINING CEMENT MUST NOT BE USED.

B. Sand: Coarse, clean, washed, locally available sand. C. Aggregate: 3/8" - 1/2" crushed stone. D. Marble, Quartz, Granite and/or Gravel. NOTE: SELECT HARD, DURABLE AGGREGATES, PARTICULARLY IN AREAS

WHERE FREEZING OCCURS. CONSULT LOCAL TERRAZZO INSTALLER. IN AREAS SUCH AS SWIMMING POOLS DECKS, WHERE SMOOTHER FINISH MAY BE DESIRED, OVAL AGGREGATE SHOULD BE CONSIDERED. 1. Size: Conform to NTMA standards. 2. 24-hour absorption rate: Not to exceed 0.25%. 3. Chips: Contain no deleterious or foreign matter.

E. Strips: 1. Expansion joints: Plastic with a cap strip top with a depth of 1-1/4"; Thickness:

__________ Color: ___________________ NOTE: SPECIFY MATERIAL AND SIZE. USE ETHAFOAM, BUTYL RUBBER OR CORK. 1/2" IS RECOMMENDED WIDTH, FULL DEPTH OF STRUCTURAL SLAB AND TOPPING. SEE STRIP GUIDE.

2. Divider strips: ___________________ Materials: _______________ Gauge: _________________________ Depth: __________________

NOTE: SPECIFY MATERIAL TYPE AND GAUGE. STANDARDS ARE 1/8", 1/4", AND 3/8", WITH HEAVY TOP AND NON-CORROSIVE SOLID ZINC OR STAINLESS STEEL BOTTOM IN COLD WEATHER CLIMATES.

F. Curing materials: 4-mil polyethylene sheeting or water. G. Sealant: Polyurethane with appropriate backer rod. H. Sealer:

1. Shall not discolor or amber. 2. Penetrating type specifically prepared for use with rustic terrazzo.

NOTE: SOLVENT ACRYLIC TYPE PREFERRED. I. Reinforcing mesh 6" x 6" x 10 gauge minimum. NOTE: OR AS DESIGNED FOR SPECIFIC SLAB LOAD REQUIREMENTS. 2.02 MIXES A. NTMA Plate: ____________________________________________________ NOTE: SPECIFY COLOR AND DESIGN FROM NTMA COLOR PLATES. ANY

DEVIATION FROM NTMA PLATE MUST BE CLEARLY STIPULATED. B. Proportions:

1. Concrete substrate: 3" maximum slump designed to exceed 4,000 psi 28 days after placement, but using no less than 6 1/2 bags of portland cement per cubic yard of concrete. Observe cold and warm weather pouring recommendation of American Concrete Institute. NOTE: RECOMMENDED MIX: 3/8" TO 1/2" CRUSHED STONE, COURSE SAND, PORTLAND CEMENT, CLEAN WATER, AIR-ENTRAINING AGENT (6% AIR PLUS OR MINUS 1%), OR AS DESIGNED FOR SPECIFIC SLAB LOAD REQUIREMENTS TO ACHIEVE 4,000 PSI AT A 3" SLUMP.

2. Terrazzo topping:



NOTE: RECOMMENDED MIX: ONE BAG (94 LBS) OF PORTLAND CEMENT PER 200 LBS OF AGGREGATE AND 4 1/2 TO 5 GALLONS OF CLEAN WATER. DEPTH OF TOPPING 1/2" TO 3/4", DEPENDING ON THE SIZE OF AGGREGATE. CLEAN WHITE FINE SAND MAY BE ADDED TO MIX.

C. Mixing: Add aggregate, water, and portland cement in proper proportions, and mix thoroughly to uniform consistency. Maintain consistency by using same amount of water for all batches.

PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive structural slab for defects in existing work that affect proper

execution of the rustic terrazzo work. B. Granular fill and/or sand fill must be within 1/2" plus or minus of required elevation

and properly pitched to floor drains. C. Start work only when all defects have been corrected by others. 3.02 INSTALLATIONS A. Concrete structural slab:

1. Set expansion material around building perimeter, around all column bases, and control joints lines indicated on the drawings, full depth of concrete structural slab. NOTE: 1/2" WIDE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, INSTALLED APPROXIMATELY 10' 0" x 10' 0" BUT NOT TO EXCEED 125 SQ. FT. OF INCLUDED AREAS.

2. Place reinforcement wire at mid-depth of concrete slab. 3. Place concrete and screed to an elevation of 1/2" to 3/4" below finished floor

elevation, depending on size of aggregate used in topping. 4. Install expansion joints before concrete hardens. 5. Roughen surface of concrete to broom finish to ensure bond of rustic terrazzo

topping. B. Rustic terrazzo topping:

NOTE: 1/2" TO 3/4" THICKNESS DEPENDING ON SIZE OF AGGREGATE. 1. Soak substrate surface thoroughly with clean water. 2. Place rustic terrazzo. 3. Roll and compact surface until all excess cement and water has been extracted.

C. Finishing 1. Expose aggregate by hosing, absorbent rolling, or use of a retarder.

D. Curing: 1. Flood with clean water, or cover with 4 mil. polyethylene sheeting.

E. Cleaning: 1. When topping is sufficiently cured, in the opinion of the terrazzo installer, apply a

1 to 10 solution of muriatic acid in water, scrub with a stiff broom to remove all laitance, and rinse immediately with clean water to remove all traces of the acid. NOTE: ACID WASH NO SOONER THAN 7 DAYS AFTER INSTALLATION.



F. Sealing: 1. Rinse floor with clean water and allow to dry. 2. When floor is dry, apply the sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s directions

for use on rustic terrazzo. G. Caulking:

1. Place sealant in joints with backer rod as required. H. Protection:

1. Upon completion, the work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the owner or his agent.

2. The General Contractor shall protect the finished floor from the time that the rustic terrazzo installer completes the work. NOTE: COORDINATE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR PROTECTION IN SECTION 01600, “MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.”

IMPORTANT NOTE TO SPECIFIER FOR TRANSMITTAL TO OWNER OR OWNER’S AGENT: DE-ICING CHEMICAL AND SALT ARE INJURIOUS TO PORTLAND CEMENT SURFACES AND SHOULD NOT BE USED ON RUSTIC TERRAZZO. *NOTE: SCHEMATIC DESIGN ILLUSTRATED IN THIS SECTION IS NOT INTENDED TO INDICATE SCALE OR VERTICAL POSITION OF THE WIRE REINFORCEMENT MESH. THE LOCATION OF THE MESH NORMALLY VARIES UP AND DOWN IN THE CONCRETE UNDERBED.